Planet Technology Network Card IDL 2400 User Manual
IP DSLAM  
IDL-2400 / IDL-2401  
IDL-4800 / IDL-4801  
User’s Manual  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Table of Contents  
1. Introduction................................................................................................................ 24  
1.1 Package Contents................................................................................................. 24  
1.2 Features................................................................................................................ 25  
1.3 Application............................................................................................................. 25  
1.4 Outlook.................................................................................................................. 26  
1.4.1 Front Panel............................................................................................... 27  
1.4.2 Rear Panel................................................................................................ 28  
1.5 Technical Specifications ........................................................................................ 29  
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications........................................................................... 29  
1.5.2 Software Specifications............................................................................. 30  
2. Installation.................................................................................................................. 32  
2.1 Safety Instruction .................................................................................................. 32  
2.2 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................ 33  
2.2.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 33  
2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection ............................................................................ 33  
2.2.3 Front Panel Connection............................................................................ 34  
2.3 IDL Manager Installation ....................................................................................... 35  
2.3.1 System Requirements .............................................................................. 35  
2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager.............................................................................. 35  
2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager................................................................................ 37  
2.4 IDL Manager Functions......................................................................................... 38  
2.4.1 Session..................................................................................................... 38  
2.4.1.1 Logout...........................................................................................................38  
2.4.1.2 Exit................................................................................................................38  
2.4.2 Tools ......................................................................................................... 39  
2.4.2.1 Environment Options.....................................................................................39  
2.4.2.2 Territory Manager..........................................................................................42  
2.4.2.3 Agent Manager..............................................................................................44  
2.4.2.4 Telnet.............................................................................................................46  
2.4.2.5 PING .............................................................................................................47  
2.4.2.6 User Manager ...............................................................................................48  
2.4.3 Windows................................................................................................... 51  
2.4.3.1 Cascade........................................................................................................51  
2.4.3.2 Next Window.................................................................................................51  
2.4.3.3 Previous Window ..........................................................................................51  
2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons................................................................................................52  
2.4.4 Help.......................................................................................................... 52  
2.4.4.1 About.............................................................................................................52  
3. IDL Manager Management ........................................................................................ 53  
3.1 Agent Desktop....................................................................................................... 53  
3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window ............................................................................ 53  
IP DSLAM  
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop ........................................................................... 54  
3.2 Active Function Management Windows ................................................................ 55  
3.2.1 Function List Window ............................................................................... 55  
3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window ...................................................................... 56  
3.3 Default Setting ...................................................................................................... 56  
3.4 System Information ............................................................................................... 57  
3.5 Current Event........................................................................................................ 58  
3.5.1 Outstanding Event .................................................................................... 58  
3.5.2 Closed Event ............................................................................................ 59  
3.5.3 Archived.................................................................................................... 60  
3.6 System.................................................................................................................. 61  
3.6.1 Commit and Reboot.................................................................................. 61  
3.7 Configuration......................................................................................................... 62  
3.7.1 VLAN........................................................................................................ 62  
3.7.2 Ethernet.................................................................................................... 63  
3.8 DSL....................................................................................................................... 65  
3.8.1 Profile ....................................................................................................... 65  
3.8.1.1 Line Profile....................................................................................................65  
3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile..................................................................................................66  
3.8.1.3 All Line Profile ...............................................................................................67  
3.8.2 Port Config................................................................................................ 67  
3.9 DSL PM................................................................................................................. 70  
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info ................................................................................... 70  
3.9.2 Channel Layer Info ................................................................................... 71  
4. Application Note ........................................................................................................ 72  
4.1 Basic Configuration............................................................................................... 72  
4.1.1 Create a new user .................................................................................... 72  
4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration................................................................................. 72  
4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg ........................................................................................73  
4.1.2.2 Download procedure.....................................................................................74  
4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg ...................................................................... 78  
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration ...........................................................................78  
4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration............................................................................79  
4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg..................................................................................80  
4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration............................................................................ 81  
4.1.4.1 Configuration.................................................................................................82  
4.1.5 Set System Time ...................................................................................... 87  
4.1.5.1 Configuration.................................................................................................87  
4.1.6 VLAN Configuration.................................................................................. 91  
4.1.6.1 Configuration.................................................................................................91  
4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate................................................... 98  
IDL series User Guide  
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.7.1 Configuration.................................................................................................98  
4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function .......................................................................... 105  
4.1.8.1 Configuration...............................................................................................105  
5. System Administration with CLI............................................................................. 106  
5.1 About CLI Administration..................................................................................... 106  
5.1.1 Notation Conventions ............................................................................. 106  
5.1.2 Command Structure................................................................................ 106  
5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms........................................................... 107  
5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description ............................................................. 108  
5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands ........................................................... 109  
5.2 802.1p commands................................................................................................114  
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands..........................................................114  
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio.......................................................................... 114  
5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands...............................................................115  
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo ............................................................................... 115  
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo........................................................................... 115  
5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands ........................................................117  
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap......................................................................... 117  
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap.................................................................... 117  
5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands..............................................................119  
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap .............................................................................. 119  
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap ......................................................................... 119  
5.3 ABOND Commands ............................................................................................ 121  
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands................................................................ 121  
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf ...................................................................................121  
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf ..............................................................................121  
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf...............................................................................121  
5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf...............................................................................122  
5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands ............................................................. 126  
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats.................................................................................126  
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats.............................................................................126  
5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands ................................................................ 128  
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry....................................................................................128  
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry...............................................................................128  
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry ...............................................................................128  
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry...............................................................................128  
5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands................................................................. 131  
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats ....................................................................................131  
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats.................................................................................131  
5.4 Aggregation commands ...................................................................................... 132  
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands...................................................... 132  
IP DSLAM  
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info.................................................................................132  
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info ............................................................................132  
5.4.2 Aggr info Commands.............................................................................. 134  
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf ................................................................................................134  
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf ...........................................................................................134  
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf............................................................................................134  
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf............................................................................................134  
5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands........................................................................... 138  
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr ..............................................................................................138  
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr .........................................................................................138  
5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139  
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr..........................................................................................139  
5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands.......................................................... 142  
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info.........................................................................................142  
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info.............................................................................142  
5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands .......................................................... 146  
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list...................................................................................146  
5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands ........................................................ 147  
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats................................................................................147  
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats ............................................................................147  
5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands ......................................................... 148  
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info .....................................................................................148  
5.4.7.2 Create rdncy aggr info ................................................................................149  
5.4.7.3 Delete rdncy aggr info.................................................................................149  
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info.................................................................................149  
5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands .................................................... 151  
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list ..........................................................................................151  
5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands........................................................ 152  
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats....................................................................................152  
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats ................................................................................152  
5.5 ATM commands .................................................................................................. 154  
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands............................................................... 154  
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats.......................................................................................154  
5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands...................................................................... 155  
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc .............................................................................................155  
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc ........................................................................................155  
5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands ........................................................... 157  
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc ..........................................................................................157  
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc .....................................................................................157  
5.5.4 ATM Port Commands.............................................................................. 158  
5.5.4.1 Get atm port................................................................................................158  
IDL series User Guide  
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.5.4.2 Create atm port...........................................................................................158  
5.5.4.3 Delete atm port ...........................................................................................159  
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port ...........................................................................................159  
5.5.5 ATM VC Commands ............................................................................... 163  
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf........................................................................................163  
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf ........................................................................................163  
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf.............................................................................................163  
5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf ........................................................................................164  
5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands................................................................ 171  
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats ..........................................................................................171  
5.6 Bridging Commands............................................................................................ 173  
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands ................................................................ 173  
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding .................................................................................173  
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding.............................................................................173  
5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands........................................................................ 175  
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode .........................................................................................175  
5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands................................................................... 176  
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap .....................................................................................176  
5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands......................................................... 177  
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding ..........................................................................177  
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding......................................................................177  
5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands .................................................................. 179  
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map ....................................................................................179  
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map ...............................................................................179  
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map ...............................................................................179  
5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands....................................................... 181  
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats....................................................................................181  
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats................................................................................181  
5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands................................................................. 182  
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf .................................................................................182  
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf..................................................................................182  
5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf ......................................................................................183  
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf..................................................................................183  
5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands.............................................................. 189  
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................189  
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................189  
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................189  
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................189  
5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands............................................................... 192  
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast ................................................................................192  
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast ...........................................................................192  
IP DSLAM  
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast............................................................................192  
5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast............................................................................193  
5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands................................................................. 195  
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps ..................................................................................195  
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps..............................................................................195  
5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands.................................................................. 197  
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info ......................................................................................197  
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info..................................................................................197  
5.6.12 STP Group Commands ........................................................................ 198  
5.6.12.1 Get stp info................................................................................................198  
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info...........................................................................................198  
5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats ..........................................................................................199  
5.6.13 STP Port Commands............................................................................ 202  
5.6.13.1 Get stp port ...............................................................................................202  
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port ..........................................................................................202  
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats ...................................................................................202  
5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands................................................ 205  
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info................................................................................205  
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info....................................................................................205  
5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands ............................................................................... 210  
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 210  
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding.......................................................................210  
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall..........................................................................210  
5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands...................................................... 212  
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding.......................................................................212  
5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands........................................................ 214  
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg.........................................................................214  
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg ....................................................................214  
5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands......................................................... 216  
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast ..........................................................................216  
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast...........................................................................216  
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast ...............................................................................216  
5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast...........................................................................217  
5.8 DHCP Commands............................................................................................... 220  
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands........................................................................ 220  
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info .....................................................................................220  
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats....................................................................................221  
5.9 DSL Commands.................................................................................................. 223  
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands.............................................................. 223  
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile..................................................................................223  
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile .............................................................................223  
IDL series User Guide  
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands ........................................................... 229  
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext...............................................................................229  
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext ..........................................................................229  
5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands........................................................... 236  
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel .................................................................................236  
5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands ......................................................... 238  
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf................................................................................238  
5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands......................................................... 241  
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl................................................................................241  
5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands ............................................................ 242  
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval ..................................................................................242  
5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands ................................................................. 244  
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf........................................................................................244  
5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands........................................................... 247  
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical.................................................................................247  
5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands................................................................. 254  
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps......................................................................................254  
5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 255  
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext ...............................................................................255  
5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands ...................................................... 256  
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl.............................................................................256  
5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands......................................................... 257  
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel................................................................................257  
5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands ....................................................... 260  
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf ..............................................................................260  
5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands .......................................................... 263  
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval.................................................................................263  
5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands........................................................... 264  
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext ............................................................................264  
5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands ............................................................... 265  
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf ......................................................................................265  
5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands ................................................................ 266  
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext .................................................................................266  
5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands......................................................... 268  
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical................................................................................268  
5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands............................................................. 272  
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps.....................................................................................272  
5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands ........................................................ 273  
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext................................................................................273  
5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands.......................................................................... 275  
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap..............................................................................................275  
IP DSLAM  
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands.................................................................... 276  
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf ........................................................................................276  
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf....................................................................................276  
5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands .............................................................. 280  
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile ...................................................................................280  
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile...............................................................................280  
5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands ............................................................................. 303  
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip.............................................................................................303  
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip..........................................................................................303  
5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip ..........................................................................................304  
5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands....................................................................... 306  
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip ........................................................................................306  
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip.....................................................................................306  
5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands ....................................................................... 307  
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port.........................................................................................307  
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port.....................................................................................307  
5.9.27 Dsl system Commands......................................................................... 308  
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system ..........................................................................................308  
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system .....................................................................................308  
5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system......................................................................................309  
5.10 EHDLC Commands............................................................................................311  
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands.............................................................................311  
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf............................................................................................. 311  
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf........................................................................................ 311  
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311  
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf ........................................................................................ 311  
5.11 Ethemet Commands.......................................................................................... 313  
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands .......................................................................... 313  
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats............................................................................................313  
5.11.2 Ethernet Commands............................................................................. 318  
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf....................................................................................318  
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf....................................................................................318  
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf.........................................................................................318  
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf....................................................................................318  
5.12 EOA Commands ............................................................................................... 328  
5.12.1 EOA Commands................................................................................... 328  
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf...........................................................................................328  
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf...........................................................................................328  
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf................................................................................................328  
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf...........................................................................................328  
5.13 Filtering Commands.......................................................................................... 332  
IDL series User Guide  
10  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands......................................................... 332  
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry ............................................................................332  
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry .......................................................................332  
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry........................................................................332  
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry........................................................................332  
5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands ................................................................. 334  
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry ..................................................................................334  
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry .............................................................................334  
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry............................................................................334  
5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands ............................................................ 336  
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry................................................................................336  
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry...........................................................................336  
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry ...........................................................................336  
5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands ..................................................... 337  
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry.............................................................................337  
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................337  
5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry ..................................................................338  
5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands.............................................................. 339  
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info ...............................................................................339  
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info ..........................................................................339  
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339  
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info...........................................................................339  
5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands ............................................................ 341  
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map ..............................................................................341  
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map.........................................................................341  
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map .........................................................................341  
5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands.............................................................. 342  
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch................................................................................342  
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch...........................................................................342  
5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch...........................................................................343  
5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands ................................................................... 344  
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info.....................................................................................344  
5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info................................................................................345  
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info ................................................................................345  
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info................................................................................345  
5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands................................................................. 347  
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node...................................................................................347  
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node..............................................................................347  
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node..............................................................................347  
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node..............................................................................347  
5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands................................................................ 355  
IP DSLAM  
11  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch .................................................................................355  
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch ............................................................................355  
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch.............................................................................355  
5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands..................................................................... 358  
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info.......................................................................................358  
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info..................................................................................358  
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info ..................................................................................358  
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info..................................................................................358  
5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands.................................................................... 360  
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map .....................................................................................360  
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map ................................................................................360  
5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map.................................................................................360  
5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands................................................................... 361  
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node ....................................................................................361  
5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node................................................................................362  
5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands................................................................. 367  
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile...................................................................................367  
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile..............................................................................367  
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile..............................................................................367  
5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile..............................................................................368  
5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands ............................................................... 369  
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry .................................................................................369  
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry ............................................................................369  
5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry.............................................................................370  
5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands............................................................ 371  
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry ..............................................................................371  
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry .........................................................................371  
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry..........................................................................371  
5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands................................................. 373  
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry ...................................................................373  
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry ..............................................................373  
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry...............................................................373  
5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands ......................................................... 375  
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info ...........................................................................375  
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info ......................................................................375  
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info.......................................................................375  
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info.......................................................................375  
5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands........................................................ 377  
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map..........................................................................377  
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map .....................................................................377  
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map......................................................................377  
IDL series User Guide  
12  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands........................................................ 379  
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap.........................................................................379  
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap.....................................................................379  
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap .....................................................................379  
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap .....................................................................379  
5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands ................................................................ 383  
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry .................................................................................383  
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry..............................................................................383  
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry..............................................................................383  
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry..............................................................................383  
5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands ................................................................. 389  
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map ..................................................................................389  
5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map ..............................................................................390  
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map...............................................................................390  
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map...............................................................................390  
5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands................................................................. 392  
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats..................................................................................392  
5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands................................................................. 393  
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry .................................................................................393  
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry..............................................................................393  
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry ..............................................................................393  
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry..............................................................................393  
5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands................................................................... 395  
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info....................................................................................395  
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info................................................................................395  
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info ................................................................................395  
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info................................................................................395  
5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands ............................................................. 397  
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp ..............................................................................397  
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp ..........................................................................397  
5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp...........................................................................398  
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp...........................................................................398  
5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands........................................................ 404  
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree.........................................................................404  
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree.....................................................................404  
5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree .....................................................................405  
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree.....................................................................405  
5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands .......................................................... 407  
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether ...........................................................................407  
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether........................................................................407  
5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether........................................................................408  
IP DSLAM  
13  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether........................................................................408  
5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands....................................................... 418  
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic........................................................................418  
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic....................................................................418  
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic ....................................................................418  
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic ....................................................................418  
5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands.......................................................... 422  
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp............................................................................422  
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp........................................................................422  
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp.........................................................................422  
5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp ........................................................................423  
5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands.......................................................... 425  
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp............................................................................425  
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp........................................................................425  
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp ........................................................................426  
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp ........................................................................426  
5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands ............................................................... 429  
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip.................................................................................429  
5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip.............................................................................430  
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip .............................................................................430  
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip.............................................................................430  
5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands ........................................................... 436  
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp..............................................................................436  
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp..........................................................................436  
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp..........................................................................436  
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp..........................................................................437  
5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands............................................................ 439  
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp...............................................................................439  
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp...........................................................................439  
5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp ...........................................................................440  
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp...........................................................................440  
5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands........................................................... 443  
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp..............................................................................443  
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp..........................................................................443  
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp ..........................................................................443  
5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp..........................................................................444  
5.14 IGMP Commands.............................................................................................. 447  
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands............................................................ 447  
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info .............................................................................447  
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info ........................................................................447  
5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands.................................................... 451  
IDL series User Guide  
14  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config.....................................................................451  
5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452  
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452  
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config................................................................452  
5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands........................................................... 455  
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info............................................................................455  
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info.......................................................................455  
5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands......................................................... 459  
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats..........................................................................459  
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats ......................................................................459  
5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands...................................................... 461  
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info.......................................................................461  
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info..................................................................461  
5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info ..................................................................462  
5.15 Interface Commands......................................................................................... 464  
5.15.1 Interface Commands ............................................................................ 464  
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats.....................................................................................464  
5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats .................................................................................467  
5.15.1.3 Get interface config...................................................................................467  
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config..............................................................................467  
5.16 IP Commands ................................................................................................... 469  
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands ........................................................ 469  
5.16.1.1 Get arp......................................................................................................469  
5.16.1.2 Create arp.................................................................................................469  
5.16.1.3 Delete arp .................................................................................................469  
5.16.2 IP Route Commands ............................................................................ 471  
5.16.2.1 Get ip route ...............................................................................................471  
5.16.2.2 Create up route.........................................................................................472  
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route...........................................................................................472  
5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands.............................................................................. 475  
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf...............................................................................................475  
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf..........................................................................................475  
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf ..........................................................................................476  
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf..........................................................................................476  
5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands.............................................................................. 478  
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf...............................................................................................478  
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf..........................................................................................478  
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf ..........................................................................................478  
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf..........................................................................................478  
5.16.5 Rid static Commands............................................................................ 481  
5.16.5.1 Create rid static.........................................................................................481  
IP DSLAM  
15  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.16.5.2 Delete rid static .........................................................................................481  
5.17 MacProfile Commands...................................................................................... 484  
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands ............................................................... 484  
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global................................................................................484  
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global...........................................................................484  
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global ...........................................................................484  
5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands........................................................ 485  
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info..........................................................................485  
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info.....................................................................485  
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info......................................................................485  
5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands.................................................... 486  
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param......................................................................486  
5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param.................................................................487  
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param .................................................................487  
5.18 Management Traffic Commands ....................................................................... 489  
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands ................................................................ 489  
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info..................................................................................489  
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info.............................................................................489  
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info .............................................................................489  
5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands............................................................ 490  
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info..............................................................................490  
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info.........................................................................490  
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info .........................................................................491  
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info.........................................................................491  
5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands................................................................ 492  
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info .................................................................................492  
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info ............................................................................492  
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info.............................................................................493  
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info.............................................................................493  
5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands........................................................................... 495  
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands.................................................... 495  
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile........................................................................495  
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile...................................................................495  
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile ...................................................................495  
5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands........................................................ 496  
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config............................................................................496  
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config.......................................................................496  
5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands............................................. 499  
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile.................................................................499  
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile............................................................499  
5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile............................................................499  
IDL series User Guide  
16  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands .......................................................... 500  
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats ..............................................................................500  
5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands .......................................................................... 501  
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf............................................................................................501  
5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf.......................................................................................502  
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf.......................................................................................502  
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf.......................................................................................502  
5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands........................................................ 506  
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats............................................................................506  
5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands ............................................................... 508  
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf ..............................................................................................508  
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf .........................................................................................508  
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf..........................................................................................508  
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf..........................................................................................508  
5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands ..................................................................... 512  
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands ................................................................. 512  
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats...................................................................................512  
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats ...............................................................................512  
5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands ............................................................. 513  
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry...............................................................................513  
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry..........................................................................513  
5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry ..........................................................................514  
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry..........................................................................514  
5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands................................................................... 519  
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry.....................................................................................519  
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry.................................................................................519  
5.20.4 Dra global config Commands ............................................................... 520  
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config.................................................................................520  
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config............................................................................520  
5.20.5 la profile entry Commands.................................................................... 521  
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry.....................................................................................521  
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry................................................................................521  
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry................................................................................522  
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry................................................................................522  
5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands.............................................................. 525  
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry ...............................................................................525  
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry ..........................................................................525  
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry...........................................................................526  
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry ..........................................................................526  
5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands.................................................................... 531  
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry.....................................................................................531  
IP DSLAM  
17  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry .................................................................................531  
5.20.8 Pia global config Commands................................................................ 532  
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config .................................................................................532  
5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config.............................................................................533  
5.21 QoS Commands................................................................................................ 534  
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands............................................................................. 534  
5.21.1.1 Get irl map ................................................................................................534  
5.21.1.2 Create irl map ...........................................................................................534  
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map............................................................................................534  
5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands.......................................................................... 535  
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile..............................................................................................535  
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile.........................................................................................535  
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile.........................................................................................536  
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile.........................................................................................536  
5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands............................................................................ 539  
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats................................................................................................539  
5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands....................................................... 540  
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map.........................................................................540  
5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map....................................................................540  
5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map ....................................................................540  
5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map ....................................................................540  
5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands............................................................ 542  
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info..............................................................................542  
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info.........................................................................542  
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info .........................................................................542  
5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info .........................................................................543  
5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands.................................................................. 546  
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info ....................................................................................546  
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info ...............................................................................546  
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info................................................................................546  
5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands ..................................................................... 548  
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info........................................................................................548  
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info...................................................................................548  
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info...................................................................................548  
5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info...................................................................................549  
5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands..................................................... 552  
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class..............................................................................552  
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class.........................................................................552  
5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands....................................................... 555  
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info................................................................................555  
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info...........................................................................555  
IDL series User Guide  
18  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info ...........................................................................556  
5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands........................................................ 557  
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class..........................................................................557  
5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class .....................................................................558  
5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands........................................................... 559  
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info.............................................................................559  
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info........................................................................559  
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info........................................................................559  
5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands ................................................................... 560  
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats .....................................................................................560  
5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats..................................................................................561  
5.22 RMON Commands............................................................................................ 562  
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands ..................................................... 562  
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe..................................................................................562  
5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe ..................................................................................562  
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe.......................................................................................562  
5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands................................................................ 564  
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task............................................................................................564  
5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands .................................................. 566  
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool ........................................................................................566  
5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold.........................................................................570  
5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool.....................................................................................572  
5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands............................................................. 572  
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue........................................................................................572  
5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold ........................................................................575  
5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue ....................................................................................576  
5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands...................................................... 576  
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf........................................................................................576  
5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold ........................................................................578  
5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf ....................................................................................579  
5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands..................................................... 579  
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore................................................................................579  
5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands ................................................... 580  
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp....................................................................................580  
5.23 SNMP Commands ............................................................................................ 582  
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands .................................................................... 582  
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm........................................................................................582  
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm...................................................................................582  
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm ...................................................................................582  
5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands........................................................................ 583  
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host...........................................................................................583  
IP DSLAM  
19  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.23.2.2 Create snmp host......................................................................................583  
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host......................................................................................584  
5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands....................................................................... 585  
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats ................................................................................................585  
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats .....................................................................................585  
5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands................................................................. 588  
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost ....................................................................................588  
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost................................................................................588  
5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost................................................................................589  
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost................................................................................589  
5.24 SNTP Commands ............................................................................................. 591  
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands .......................................................................... 591  
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg...............................................................................................591  
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg..........................................................................................591  
5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands.................................................................. 592  
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr .....................................................................................592  
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr ................................................................................592  
5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands........................................................................ 593  
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats............................................................................................593  
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats ........................................................................................593  
5.25 System Commands........................................................................................... 594  
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands..................................................................... 594  
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg.......................................................................................594  
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg ...................................................................................594  
5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands .......................... 595  
5.25.2.1 Commit......................................................................................................595  
5.25.2.2 Reboot ......................................................................................................595  
5.25.3 System Control Table Commands ........................................................ 597  
5.25.3.1 Create user ...............................................................................................597  
5.25.3.2 Delete user................................................................................................597  
5.25.3.3 Get user ....................................................................................................597  
5.25.3.4 Passwd .....................................................................................................599  
5.25.4 System crash info Commands.............................................................. 600  
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info ...............................................................................600  
5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo......................................................................608  
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo.................................................................608  
5.25.5 System info Commands........................................................................ 609  
5.25.5.1 Get system info.........................................................................................609  
5.25.5.2 Modify system info ....................................................................................609  
5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime......................................................................................613  
5.25.6 System manuf info Commands............................................................. 614  
IDL series User Guide  
20  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info..............................................................................614  
5.25.7 System reboot info Commands ............................................................ 616  
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info..............................................................................616  
5.25.8 Nbize Commands................................................................................. 618  
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize.................................................................................................618  
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize............................................................................................618  
5.25.9 System Stats Commands ..................................................................... 627  
5.25.9.1 Get system stats .......................................................................................627  
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats....................................................................................627  
5.25.10 System Traps Commands .................................................................. 629  
5.25.10.1 Reset traps..............................................................................................629  
5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands .................................................. 629  
5.25.11.1 Get traps..................................................................................................629  
5.25.12 System Version Commands ............................................................... 637  
5.25.12.1 Get system version .................................................................................637  
5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands.................................................. 638  
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg ...........................................................................................638  
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg.......................................................................................638  
5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands ......................................................... 640  
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats.........................................................................................640  
5.26 VC Aggregation Commands.............................................................................. 642  
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands................................................................... 642  
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf....................................................................................642  
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf...............................................................................642  
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf ...............................................................................642  
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf...............................................................................642  
5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands ................................................................ 644  
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map .................................................................................644  
5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map ............................................................................645  
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map.............................................................................645  
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map.............................................................................645  
5.27 VLAN Commands ............................................................................................. 648  
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands ......................................................................... 648  
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info .............................................................................................648  
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info.........................................................................................648  
5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands.................................................................. 649  
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info ......................................................................................649  
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info..................................................................................649  
5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands................................................................ 654  
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats.....................................................................................654  
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats.................................................................................654  
IP DSLAM  
21  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands ..................................................................... 655  
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info.......................................................................................655  
5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands ........................................................ 657  
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info............................................................................657  
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info.......................................................................658  
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info .......................................................................658  
5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands ...................................................... 659  
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param........................................................................659  
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param...................................................................659  
5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param ...................................................................659  
5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands ....................................................................... 661  
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static ...........................................................................................661  
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static ......................................................................................661  
5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static.......................................................................................662  
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static.......................................................................................662  
5.28 Miscelleneous Commands................................................................................ 672  
5.28.1 File Commands .................................................................................... 672  
5.28.1.1 Apply .........................................................................................................672  
5.28.1.2 Download..................................................................................................674  
5.28.1.3 List ............................................................................................................676  
5.28.1.4 Permission ................................................................................................681  
5.28.1.5 Ping...........................................................................................................682  
5.28.1.6 Remove.....................................................................................................683  
5.28.1.7 Upgrade ....................................................................................................684  
5.28.1.8 Upload.......................................................................................................685  
5.28.2 Other Commands ................................................................................. 687  
5.28.2.1 Unalias......................................................................................................688  
5.28.2.2 Help...........................................................................................................689  
5.28.2.3 Logout.......................................................................................................690  
5.28.2.4 Prompt ......................................................................................................690  
5.28.2.5 Traceroute.................................................................................................691  
5.28.2.6 Verbose.....................................................................................................692  
Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail.................................................................................... 693  
Appendix B --- Supported mibs.................................................................................. 698  
PropMib (Conexant).................................................................................................. 698  
StdMib (Standard) ..................................................................................................... 699  
Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM ............................................... 700  
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works.................................................... 700  
Device Roles ................................................................................................... 701  
Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange .......................................... 702  
802.1X CLI commands.............................................................................................. 703  
Specifying RADIUS Servers ............................................................................ 703  
IDL series User Guide  
22  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Specifying the RADIUS Key ............................................................................ 703  
Configuring 802.1X Authentication .................................................................. 703  
Enabling 802.1X globally ........................................................................................704  
Disabling 802.1X globally........................................................................................704  
Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports.............................704  
Enabling Multiple Hosts...........................................................................................705  
Disabling Multiple Hosts..........................................................................................705  
802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM ..................................................................... 705  
Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM................................................................................ 706  
IP DSLAM  
23  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
1. Introduction  
With built-in POTS splitter 24 / 48 ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ Subscriber ports, the PLANET  
IDL series are advanced IP based DSLAM which is designed for Network Service Provider  
to offer excellent services to multiple subscribers. The replaceable 1000Base-T or  
1000Base-LX uplink interfaces, and stackable support other units that provide the flexibility  
of the network implementation.  
The PLANET IDL series support local and remote management capabilities of CLI, SNMP  
and Telnet via RS-232 CID and Ethernet MGNT ports, Microsoft Windows based GUI  
Management system provides Network Service Provider a centrally management  
capability.  
The PLANET IP DSLAM provides many features such as QoS, VLAN, Bandwidth  
Management, Traffic Prioritization, and Data Flow Security Control. The IDL series offer  
Network Service Provider the most suitable solution and makes subscribers an efficient  
way to meet triple play (data, voice, and video).  
1.1 Package Contents  
Please inspect your package. The following items should be included in the package:  
IDL-2400/2401  
z IDL-2400/2401 unit x 1  
z AC Power Cord x 1  
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1  
z Quick Installation Guide x 1  
z RJ-45 Cable x 1  
z RS-232 Cable x 1  
z Telco-50 Cable x 1  
IDL-4800/4801  
z IDL-4800/4801 unit x 1  
z AC Power Cord x 1  
z CD (Containing User’s Manual, QIG, IDL Manager) x 1  
z Quick Installation Guide x 1  
z RJ-45 Cable x 1  
z RS-232 Cable x 1  
z Telco-50 Cable x 2  
IDL series User Guide  
24  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.2 Features  
z 24-Port or 48-Port ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ subscriber interface with build-in POTS splitter  
z DMT data rate: Downstream 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps / Upstream 32 kbps up to 1Mbps  
z 1000Base-T (IDL-2400/IDL-4800) or 1000Base-LX (IDL-2401/IDL-4801) uplink interface  
z Stackable support  
z Microsoft Windows based GUI management  
z Local RS-232 CLI and Ethernet SNMP/Telnet management  
z Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP  
z 6K MAC address & 256 Multicast MAC address support  
z Static VLAN and Port based VLAN  
z VLAN / MAC / IP filtering  
z Access Control List by MAC and IP address  
z Traffic prioritization (802.1p)  
z Traffic bandwidth management by MAC and IP address  
1.3 Application  
The PLANET IDL series offer the benefit of high performance to central office co-location  
and MTU (Multi-Tenant Unit) / MDU (Multi-Dwelling Unit) markets. It provides broadband  
data service over existing copper wires without affecting the conventional voice service by  
24/48 subscriber ports with built-in POTS splitter. A PLANET IP DSLAM is the perfect  
solution for NSP a cost-effective but high-value centrally management capability.  
IP DSLAM  
25  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.4 Outlook  
IDL-2400  
IDL-4800  
IDL-2401 / IDL-4801 with 1000Base-LX UPLINK  
1 x 1000Base-LX UPLINK1  
1 x 1000Base-T UPLINK2  
1 x 1000Base-T MGNT  
IDL series User Guide  
26  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.4.1 Front Panel  
The front panels of IDL series are shown below.  
IDL-2400  
IDL-2401  
IDL-4800  
IDL-4801  
LED Definition  
LED  
Color  
LED Description  
POWER  
MAINT  
ALARM  
Green  
Yellow  
Red  
Lit when power on  
Lit when maintenance commands were issued  
Lit when MJ/MN events happen  
Lit when system was acted as management master for  
MASTER  
Green  
stacking application  
( * Future feature )  
Green  
Orange  
Lit when ADSL link is in a active state  
When the specified ADSL link is in connection training stat  
ADSL 1~24  
or  
ADSL 1~48  
No Light When ADSL link is not in service  
Red  
Lit when loss of signal occurs  
1000/ACT  
100/ACT  
Green  
Green  
Blinking when information action is transmitted  
Blinking when information is transmitted  
Blinking when information is transmitted  
( * IDL-2401/4801 )  
GIGA  
ACT  
Green  
Green  
When uplink is activated  
( * IDL-2401/4801 )  
IP DSLAM  
27  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.4.2 Rear Panel  
The rear panels of IDL series are shown below.  
IDL-2400/2401  
IDL-4800/4801  
Port Definition  
Port  
Port Description  
AC Power cord in  
Power switch  
AC IN  
POWER  
PHONE 1  
LINE 1  
24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS  
24 port ADSL module with built-in POTS  
( * IDL-4800/4801 )  
PHONE 2  
LINE 2  
IDL series User Guide  
28  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.5 Technical Specifications  
1.5.1 Hardware Specifications  
Model  
IDL-2400  
IDL-2401  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T) 1 x SC (1000Base-LX)  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)  
1 x RS-232  
Uplink 1  
Uplink 2  
MGNT  
Console  
Line  
Ports  
1 x Telco-50  
Phone  
1 x Telco-50  
1 x POWER LED  
1 x MAINT LED  
1 x POWER LED  
1 x MAINT LED  
1 x ALARM LED  
1 x MASTER LED  
24 x ADSL LEDs  
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs  
2 x 100/ACT LEDs  
1 x GIGA LED  
1 x ALARM LED  
1 x MASTER LED  
24 x ADSL LEDs  
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs  
3 x 100/ACT LEDs  
LED Indicators  
1 x ACT LED  
Model  
IDL-4800  
IDL-4801  
Uplink 1  
Uplink 2  
MGNT  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T) 1 x SC (1000Base-LX)  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)  
1 x RJ-45 (10/100/1000Base-T)  
1 x RS-232  
Ports  
Console  
Line  
2 x Telco-50  
Phone  
2 x Telco-50  
1 x POWER LED  
1 x MAINT LED  
1 x POWER LED  
1 x MAINT LED  
1 x ALARM LED  
1 x MASTER LED  
48 x ADSL LEDs  
1 x 1000/ACT LEDs  
2 x 100/ACT LEDs  
1 x GIGA LED  
1 x ALARM LED  
1 x MASTER LED  
48 x ADSL LEDs  
2 x 1000/ACT LEDs  
3 x 100/ACT LEDs  
LED Indicators  
1 x ACT LED  
IP DSLAM  
29  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1.5.2 Software Specifications  
Compliant with ADSL standard  
- ANSI T1.413 issue 2  
- G.dmt (ITU G.992.1)  
- G.lite (ITU G.992.2)  
Standard  
- G.hs (ITU G.994.1)  
Capable of ADSL2 standard  
- G.dmt.bis (ITU G.992.3)  
Capable of ADSL2+ standard  
- G.dmt.bisplus (ITU G.992.5)  
STP  
IGMP snooping  
GMRP  
Protocol  
Multicast  
GVRP  
LACP  
SNMP / UDP / IP / MAC / Ethernet  
Up to 256 multicast addresses  
IGMP v1, v2, v3  
Multicast VLAN mapping: Independent VLAN multicast (IVM)  
Multicast VLAN mapping: Shared VLAN Multicast (SVM)  
Handle PPPoE Encapsulated IGMP packets  
Subscriber interface with built-in POTS splitter  
Downstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 25 Mbps  
Upstream DMT data rate 32 kbps up to 1Mbps  
Extended power management capabilities to optimize power  
consumption for each application  
Distance up to 18 kft  
1000Base-T / 1000Base-LX uplink interface via model  
Stackable support  
Centronic 50 pin connector for Telco line in and out  
8 VCs per xDSL port  
System  
128 MAC address per x DSL port  
6K MAC address  
Ethernet Bridging: Broadcast, Flooding / Dropping  
VLAN Bridging: 512 VLAN, Static VLAN, VLAN Stacking / Trunking  
Packet size 64 byte to 1522byte  
PPPoE Intermediate Agent  
DHCP Relay Agent  
IPOA to IPOE Tunneling  
PPPoA to PPPoE inter-working  
IDL series User Guide  
30  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Input Rate Limiting (IRL) on a per-AAL5 interface  
Output Rate Limiting (ORL) on a per ATM-port and Ethernet basis  
Rate Limiting  
Multiple mechanisms of prioritizing traffic  
VLAN filtering  
MAC filtering  
IP filtering  
Security  
Access Control List by MAC address  
Access Control List by IP address  
Throttling Control  
Sticky Bridge Ports  
Microsoft Windows based GUI management  
Local RS-232 CLI, and Ethernet SNMP / Telnet management  
Remote in-band SNMP / Telnet management  
Firmware upgradeable via FTP or TFTP  
SNMP v1, v2c  
Management  
IP DSLAM  
31  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2. Installation  
The followings are instructions for setting up the IDL series IP DSLAM. Refer to the  
illustration and follow the simple steps below to quickly install your IP DSLAM.  
2.1 Safety Instruction  
The following is the safety instructions for IP DSLAM before installing.  
>> The maximum recommended operating temperature is 50ºC. Care must be taken to  
allow sufficient air circulation or space between units when the IP DSLAM is installed  
inside a closed rack assembly and racks should safely support the combined weight of all  
IP DSLAM.  
>> The connections and equipment that supply power to the IP DSLAM should be capable  
of operating safely with the maximum power requirements of the IP DSLAM. In the event  
of a power overload, the supply circuits and supply wiring should not become hazardous.  
>> The AC power cord must plug into the right supply voltage. Make sure that the supplied  
AC voltage is correct and stable. If the input AC voltage is over 10% lower than the  
standard may cause the IP DSLAM to malfunction.  
>> Generally, when installed after the final configuration, the product must comply with the  
applicable safety standards and regulatory requirements of the country in which it is  
installed. If necessary, consult for technical support.  
>> A rare condition can create a voltage potential between the earth grounds of two or  
more buildings. If products installed in separate building are interconnected, the voltage  
potential can cause a hazardous condition. Consult a qualified electrical consultant to  
determine whether or not this phenomenon exists and, if necessary, implement corrective  
action before interconnecting the products. If the equipment is to be used with  
telecommunications circuit, take the following precautions:  
- Never install telephone wiring during a lightning storm.  
- Never install telephone jacks in wet location unless the jack is specially - designed for  
wet location.  
- Never touch uninsulated telephone wires or terminals unless the telephone line has  
been disconnected at the network interface.  
- Use caution when installing or modifying telephone lines (other than a cordless  
telephone) during an electrical storm. There is a remote risk of electric shock from  
lightning.  
- Do not use a telephone or other equipment connected to telephone lines to report a  
gas leak in the vicinity of the leak.  
IDL series User Guide  
32  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.2 Hardware Installation  
The PLANET IDL series can be installed in a standard 19-inch rack by using the mounting  
brackets provided. Mount the shelf on the rack using the large screws provided. The  
procedure to connect and wire the system is as follows.  
2.2.1 System Requirements  
z Workstation with Windows NT/2000/XP  
z RJ-45 cables  
z RJ-11 cables  
z Telco-50 cables  
z RS-232 cables  
z <Optional> MDF Patch Panel (Model No.: IDL-PAN-48).  
2.2.2 Rear Panel Connection  
The following figure shows the rear panel connection of IDL series:  
Step 1: Ground the IP DSLAM by connecting a grounded wire (Optional).  
Step 2: Connect the ADSL line connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to  
CPE by using telco cable. Each line connector supports 24 ports of  
ADSL/ADSL2/ADSL2+ for Data path from MDF (Main Distribution Frame).  
IP DSLAM  
33  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 3: Connect the Phone connector, a 50-pin centronic connector, of IP DSLAM to  
Exchange/PBX by using telco cable. Phone connector is an optional module  
supporting Voic path to Exchange/PBX; it must be along with Line Connector.  
Note:  
1. The MDF Patch panel is optional to standard package.  
Step 4: Hook power cord and apply the power.  
2.2.3 Front Panel Connection  
The following figure shows the front panel connection of IDL series:  
UPLINK: Connect to Internet or downlink to the other IDL-series for stacking by RJ-45  
cable.  
MGNT: Connect to PC by RJ-45 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through IDL  
Manager.  
CID: Connect to PC by RS-232 cable in order to administer your IP DSLAM through CLI.  
IDL series User Guide  
34  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.3 IDL Manager Installation  
This following shows how to prepare the system to perform basic communication functions  
through IDL Manager.  
2.3.1 System Requirements  
z Windows NT/2000/XP  
z CD-ROM  
z Ethernet card  
z 2GB Hard disk with a minimum of 650MB of free space  
z Super VGA (800x600 resolution) or higher with 256 colors  
z Manual CD  
2.3.2 Installing IDL Manager  
Perform initial configuration procedures as follows:  
1. Insert CD into CD-ROM.  
2. From the autorun screen, click the “IDL Manager” hyperlink to download the file. And  
then click “setup.exe” to start the installation process.  
3. The welcome window appears. Click on “Next” to continue.  
IP DSLAM  
35  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. When the Start Copying Files window appears, you can confirm the current settings.  
Click on “Next” to start copying files.  
5. When Setup Process Status window appears, the installation process is now in  
progress. This window display a bar indicating the percentage of completion for the  
current installation. In addition, the names of the files being installed appear above the  
bar until the installation is complete.  
6. At the end of the installation process, the following Setup Complete window presents.  
Simply click on “Finish” to complete setup. Now the installation of IDL Manager is  
completed.  
IDL series User Guide  
36  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.3.3 Starting IDL Manager  
Perform basic communication functions through IDL Manager, procedures as follows:  
1. Users can activate the IDL Manager either from Program manager or clicking the  
shortcut icon on the desktop as below.  
2. Before starting to IDL Manager, it is necessary that your PC’s IP and IP DSLAM’s IP  
are in the same subnet.  
Note:  
Default IP address of Management port is 192.168.200.111.  
3. To enable SNMP for accessing, one needs to issue commands below to IDL series by  
Telnet to management port or connecting to console port (9600, N, 8,1) and then log in  
with default username and password that both are “admin”.  
a. “$create snmp comm community public rw”.  
b. “$create snmp host ip 192.168.200. xxx community public”, where 192.168.200.xxx  
is the IP of your PC.  
c. “$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.200.xxx community public version v1”, where  
192.168.200.xxx is the IP of your PC.  
4. Launch the IDL Manager and then log in with the user name and password.  
Click on “OK” to enter the IDL Manager system.  
Note:  
Default Username is “Supervisor” and password is blank.  
5. After launching IDL Manager and logging in, the main window appears as below.  
IP DSLAM  
37  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4 IDL Manager Functions  
IDL Manager is divided into the task-oriented functional groups as follows.  
2.4.1 Session  
Allow you to start and to terminate a session as well as to shutdown the system.  
2.4.1.1 Logout  
To terminate the current session, choose Logout command from Session Menu. The  
user account, then, is logged out and Login window prompts for a new login. Normally,  
this is used when a user wants to re-login in order to gain a higher level of authority for  
certain operations.  
2.4.1.2 Exit  
To terminate the system at any time, simply choose the Exit command from Session  
Menu. The system then terminates.  
IDL series User Guide  
38  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4.2 Tools  
This chapter describes how to use tools in the IDL Manager, including Environmental  
options, Territory manager, Agent manager, User Manager and Telnet, which are detailed  
in the following sections.  
2.4.2.1 Environment Options  
Choose Environmental Options from Tools Menu, user can define SNMP, Desktop  
and Surveillance respectively.  
1. SNMP Configuration  
The SNMP Time-out Period and Retransmission times can be configured as shown in  
the following steps:  
a. Click on the TabControl of “SNMP” that will bring SNMP dialogue box to front.  
b. Click on  
times.  
/
to change the Time-out Period seconds and Retransmission  
c. Click on  
to submit your changes.  
2. Desktop Configuration  
IP DSLAM  
39  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
The Desktop is user for setting the map of a required territory.  
a. Click on the tab of “Desktop” that will bring Desktop dialogue box to front.  
b. Click on  
to quick start territory manager in which users can  
define a desired territory. Please refer to “Territory Manager Configuration” for  
more details.  
c. Click on  
to load the map of a territory or click on  
to clear a  
loaded map.  
Note:  
The format of map is limited to *.bmp, *.emf and *.wmf.  
d. Click on  
to submit your setting, and then the map will apply to the  
Mounted Agent.  
3. Surveillance Configuration  
IDL series User Guide  
40  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
a. Click on the tab of “Surveillance” that will bring the Surveillance dialogue box to  
front.  
b. Click on  
or  
to change the monitor period.  
c. Select the checkbox of Save expired records to save surveillance archive,  
which can be browsed by clicking on the tab of Achieved in the Event Log  
window as shown in the following figure.  
d. Clicking on  
press  
to choose the directory to record surveillance data and  
to define expired period.  
or  
e. Click on  
to submit your settings.  
IP DSLAM  
41  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.2.2 Territory Manager  
Territory manager help users to build up monitoring territories and agents could be  
categorized into different territories by users. Territory manager can be activated  
either from menu bar or from environmental options.  
Territory Manager Window  
Choose Territory Manager via Tools Menu, or Environmental option, and then the Territory  
Management window appears.  
If to add a territory to the system,  
a. Click on  
the data.  
, the Territory Name fields then cleared to blank for entering  
b. Enter Territory Name and  
then become enable.  
c. Click on  
to apply the territory to the system. After that, you can proceed to  
group management by Territory Management dialog box.  
As the following figure shown, the agent, 192.168.100.176 is available in the territory named  
ALL on the left. Users can shift the monitoring territory from ALL to Taipei simply by selecting  
Taipei in the Drop-down list on the right.  
IDL series User Guide  
42  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
d. Choose the agent, 192.168.100.176 on the left and then click on  
will appear on the right and will be mornitored under the territory, Taipei.  
. The agent IP  
e. If users want to move the agent IP from Taipei to other territory, select a desired agent  
IP and click on  
to shift it to the left.  
f. Click on  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations in the  
same window.  
Correspondently, the Agent Desktop displays that Agent IP 192.168.100.176 has been  
monitored under the territory, Taipei.  
IP DSLAM  
43  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.2.3 Agent Manager  
All of the IP DSLAM agents that are to be managed by the IDL Manager must be  
“registered” to the system. The “registration” process is to make the system aware of  
agent’s IP address and alias name. Once an agent is registered, it is put into the  
“demount” agent pool, which is still “inactive” for the network monitor. You then have  
to activate it if you want it to be monitored. An active agent can also be deactivated  
from the monitor for certain operational purpose when necessary. Agent Manager is  
designed for you to perform these operations.  
Agent Manager Window  
Choose Agent Manager from Tools Menu, this window then appears.  
Field  
Definition  
IP Address  
Alias name  
Description  
***.***.***.***  
Name of IP DSLAM  
Note  
If to add an agent to the system,  
a. Select a territory that a new agent belongs to. Click on  
activate territory manager.  
to  
b. Click on  
, the data fields then cleared to blank for entering the data.  
Enter values in fields, IP Address, Alias Name and Description. The Apply  
buttons to the left of these fields then become enable.  
c. Click on  
to apply the agent to the system.  
d. If to activate (so-called “Mount”) the system’s monitoring of an agent, click on  
the required agent entry in the Demount agent list, then click on  
agent will appear on the Mount agent list on the right.  
. The  
e. Click on  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.  
IDL series User Guide  
44  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If to remove an agent to the system,  
a. Click the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on  
The agent will disappear.  
.
b. Click on  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations  
in the same window.  
If to change the information of an agent,  
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list. The information of the  
selected agent will then presented on the data fields.  
b. Click on  
to Change IP, Alias Name, and Description and then  
becomes enable.  
c. Click on  
d. Click on  
to apply the change to the system.  
to exit the window.  
Note:  
User can only change alias and description of the agent in the Mount agent list and  
changing IP is prohibited.  
If to activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,  
a. Select the required agent in the Demount agent list, and then click on the Mount  
button  
. The agent will appear on the Mount agent list.  
b. Click on  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations  
in the same window.  
If to de-activate the system’s monitoring of an agent,  
a. Select the required agent in the Mount agent list, and then click on the Demount  
button  
. The agent will then disappears from the Mount agent list and  
appears on the Demount agent list on the left.  
b. Click on  
to exit the window.  
IP DSLAM  
45  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.2.4 Telnet  
Users can use the Telnet to connect to a specific IP DSLAM, and then monitor and  
interact with the system.  
How to activate Telnet from Agent Desktop?  
a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.  
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Telnet or choose Telnet from  
tool menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Then Telnet screen will  
come up immediately.  
c. Enter user name and password to access the CID screen.  
Note:  
The default login and password are admin.  
IDL series User Guide  
46  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4.2.5 PING  
Ping is a command used to determine whether a particular IP DSLAM is currently  
connected to the agent. It works by sending a packet to the specific IP address and  
waiting for reply.  
How to activate PING from Agent Desktop?  
a. Select an agent IP on the Agent desktop.  
b. Click on the right button of mouse and then select Ping or choose it from tool  
menu in the IDL Manager window’s menu bar. Ping screen will come up  
immediately and then starts to send packets to check the connection with the IP  
DSLAM.  
c. After showing the connection status, the screen will be closed automatically.  
IP DSLAM  
47  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4.2.6 User Manager  
The IDL Manager uses user accounts, password as well as power level (system  
privileges) to control access and log in. There are three types of privileges, Supervisor,  
Constructor and Tester.  
Supervisor:  
The highest level user with this privilege can access ANY functions and data.  
Constructor:  
User can set and modify the configuration of network equipments.  
Tester:  
User can run maintenance test, such as loop back function.  
To perform user manager, proceed as follows,  
Choose User Manager from Tools Menu to access this window. From the following  
window, User Manager, you can add and remove users as well as change passwords,  
which are used to control the login.  
Field  
Definition  
User Account  
User Name  
Description  
Power Level  
an ID to be used for login  
The full name of a user  
Remarks for note purpose  
Privileges; Administrator and Tester  
IDL series User Guide  
48  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
If to add a User Account to the system,  
a. Click on  
, the Security window then prompts.  
b. Enter the account information as described in Security window below.  
c. Click on  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.  
If to remove a User Account from the system,  
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection  
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.  
b. Click on  
c. Click on  
to delete it.  
to exit the window or continue to perform other operations.  
If to change User Account information,  
a. Select a user account by clicking on the desired entry in User Account selection  
list. After selection, the designated one will be highlighted.  
b. Click on  
button, the Security window then prompts.  
c. Change the account information as described in Security window below.  
d. Click on  
button to exit the window or continue to perform other  
button, the Security window then prompts.  
operations. Or click on  
IP DSLAM  
49  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Field  
Definition  
User Account  
User Name  
Description  
Password  
An ID to be used for login  
The full name of a user  
Remark for note purpose  
Any character string, including blank  
Re-enter the password as a confirmation  
Verify Password  
To change password If this is checked, the associated user needs to change  
when next login  
Account Suspended  
Power Level  
their password at the next login.  
Suspend the account.  
Privileges; Administrator and tester  
This window is a daughter window of User Manager Window, and is used when  
adding a user account or changing account information.  
a. Either  
or  
is selected, this window appears.  
b. Enter data in the fields, User Account, User Name, Description, and Password  
as required. Re-enter the password in field, Verify Password, for purpose of  
verification.  
c. If to force the user to change their password at the next login, click on the  
checkbox to the left of the field, To Change Password When Login Next Time.  
d. If to suspend a user account, click on the checkbox to the left of the field,  
Account Suspended.  
e. If to assign a new Power Level to the user, click on the desired entry in the  
Demount list, then click on the Mount button,  
. The selected Power  
Level entry will then be added to the Mount list on the right.  
f. If to remove a Power Level from the user, click on the desired entry in the Mount  
list on the right, then click on the Demount button,  
Power Level entry will then be removed.  
. The selected  
g. Click on  
to complete the operation or  
to abort the  
change. Either one is selected; the window is exited to User Manager Window.  
IDL series User Guide  
50  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
2.4.3 Windows  
Users may open many daughter windows in the IDL Manager. To benefit user’s viewing  
every Window, Commands of the Windows menu is designed to arrange daughter windows.  
Those commands will be introduced separately.  
2.4.3.1 Cascade  
Choose Cascade from Windows menu in the IDL Manager menu bar. The cascade  
command can cascade those opened windows as follows. User can select a window  
to perform operations or view status simply by clicking on a specified window.  
2.4.3.2 Next Window  
Next Window helps user to view next window so that it will bring the window in the  
second layer to front.  
2.4.3.3 Previous Window  
Previous Window command can help user to bring the previous window to front.  
IP DSLAM  
51  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
2.4.3.4 Arrange Icons  
By selecting Arrange Icons of Windows Menu in the menu bar, it will locate those  
minimized daughter windows in the bottom left of IDL Manager Window as the  
following figure shown. User can select a required icon to perform IDL Manager  
Management.  
2.4.4 Help  
Allow users to view the software version.  
2.4.4.1 About  
To view the version of IDL Manager, choose “About” command via Help menu, as  
shown in the following figure. Click on  
to exit the window.  
IDL series User Guide  
52  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3. IDL Manager Management  
After successfully setting up the environment of IDL Manager, you can manage different IP  
DSLAM via your IDL Manager remotely. This chapter will tell you how to interact with a  
specified IP DSLAM.  
3.1 Agent Desktop  
Agent Desktop is the main window for the network administrators in performing their  
day-to-day network monitoring jobs. Like the standard desktop of MS Windows, Agent  
Desktop appears once the system is started. First appears on the Agent Desktop is the  
status of agents by an array of colors. By which you may monitor the status of agents, and  
judge if they are normal or in situations of alarms. You may then double click on the  
required agent IP to activate the event log window. Similarly, the Mounted Agents Desktop  
can be started up by double clicking on the icon of territory.  
3.1.1 Agent Desktop Window  
In the Agents Desktop, press  
to refresh the status of all agents.  
Gray icon indicates that the agent is disconnected.  
Green icon indicates that the agent is in normal condition.  
Red icon indicates that “Major Alarm” is occurred to the  
agent and requires network administrator’s attention.  
Network administrator pays attention to alarms by looking  
into the alarms using Event Log – Outstanding.  
The red icon will turn into a yellow icon after the network  
administrator has looked into the alarms. However, this  
does not mean the situation is released. If any new alarm  
happens, yellow will turn red.  
Black icon indicated that the agent is demounted.  
IP DSLAM  
53  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.1.2 Mounted Agent Desktop  
Mounted agent desktop provides users with flexibility in viewing your network using  
graphical presentation of network elements. Mounted agent desktop can be easily activated  
by double clicking the icon of territory in the agent desktop and appears promptly as shown  
in the following figure. By the mounted agent desktop, the location of agents and overall  
network status of a specific territory is presented.  
: This icon can be moved to where the agent is located in the map. In addition, its  
color also changes with the status of the agent. For example, the icon in red means that  
alarm is occurred to the agent and requires network administrator’s attention.  
IDL series User Guide  
54  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.2 Active Function Management Windows  
Via IDL Manager, users can remotely monitor the current status of a specified IP DSLAM,  
and then proceeding advanced configuration. To activate the function management  
windows, choose a specified agent that you want to manage, and then double click the  
agent. After that, the function management windows, including Function window and Front  
panel status window, will prompt as shown in the following figure.  
The Function management windows include Function List Window and Front Panel Status  
Window which are provided to monitor the status in real time and configure related settings.  
3.2.1 Function List Window  
From the Function List Window, users can activate a specified function  
immediately by double clicking a specified item.  
IP DSLAM  
55  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.2.2 Front Panel Status Window  
After choosing a specified agent, the Front Panel Status Window, together with the  
Function Window, will come out immediately to present the current status of front panel of  
the IP DSLAM.  
3.3 Default Setting  
This section describes how to get the information of the default setting of the IP DSLAM.  
Click on “Default Setting” from the Function List window. The window appears as follows.  
In the default setting window, the status of, IP, System, VCC connection, DSL line profile  
and Alarm profile are displayed clearly. How to modify them will be introduced in the  
following sections.  
IDL series User Guide  
56  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.4 System Information  
This section describes how to get and input the information of the IP DSLAM. Double Click  
on “System Information” from the Function List Window. The window appears as follows.  
Field  
Definition  
Name  
Alias name of the IP DSLAM  
Location  
Contact  
Vendor  
Location of the IP DSLAM  
The contact person of the IP DSLAM  
The vendor of the IP DSLAM  
Object ID  
DST  
UpTime  
HwVersion  
CPSwVersion  
Vendor ID  
Daylight Savings Time has been enabled or not.  
System up time  
Hardware version of the IP DSLAM.  
Control plant version  
The severity level of the trap equal to or lower than that shall be logged.  
0 represents log threshold is disabled. 1 is the lowest and represents critical  
traps. Valid values: 0-4  
Log Threshold  
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values, followed by their descriptions.  
IDLW - International Date Line West  
NT - Nome  
EET - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1  
IST - Israeli Standard  
HST - Hawaii Standard  
CAT - Central Alaska  
BT - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2  
IT - Iran  
AHST- Alaska-Hawaii Standard  
YST - Yukon Standard  
PST- US Pacific Standard  
MST- US Mountain Standard  
CST- US Central Standard  
EST- US Eastern Standard  
AST- Atlantic Standard  
NFST- Newfoundland Standard  
NFT- Newfoundland  
ZP4 - "Russia Zone 3"  
ZP5 - "Russia Zone 4"  
INST - "Indian Standard"  
ZP6 - "Russia Zone 5"  
NST - "North Sumatra"  
WAST - West Australian Standard  
SSMT - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6  
JT- Java  
CCT - China Coast, Russia Zone 7  
ROK - Korean Standard  
Time Zone  
BRST-Brazil Standard  
AT- Azores  
KST - Korean Standard  
WAT - West Africa  
JST - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8  
CAST - Central Australian Standard  
EAST - Eastern Australian Standard  
GST - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9  
IDLE - International Date Line East  
NZST - New Zealand Standard  
NZT - New Zealand  
GMT - Greenwich Mean  
UTC - Universal (Coordinated)  
WET - Western European  
CET - Central European  
FWT - French Winter  
MET - Middle European  
MEWT - Middle European Winter  
SWT - Swedish Winter  
Example: IDLW , that stands for  
International Date Line West  
Current Time  
The current time.  
IP DSLAM  
57  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5 Current Event  
Describes the facility for the network administrators to track and trace the history of events  
happened and released. Current Event window can be activated from Function List Window.  
There are three daughter windows provided to accomplish above tasks.  
3.5.1 Outstanding Event  
Allow you to view the outstanding events or status and system information. If to view the  
event log of a specific agent, click “Current Event” from Function List Window. The Event  
Log window appears as follow.  
Field  
Description  
Happen Time  
Agent  
The date/time when the event is occurred.  
The IP address of the agent associated  
Severity level of event or status.  
DSL Port  
Grade  
DSL  
Site  
Down stream or upstream  
The description of the event or status.  
Description  
IDL series User Guide  
58  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5.2 Closed Event  
This window allows you to browse the closed alarms and events of specified agents. Click  
on the tab of “Closed“, that will bring the closed screen to front as the following figure  
shown. Click on  
to clear all records or  
to exit the window.  
Field  
Description  
Happen Time  
The date/time when the event is occurred.  
The date/time when the event is closed.  
The IP address of the agent associated  
Severity level of event or status.  
DSL Port  
Release Time  
Agent  
Grade  
DSL  
Site  
Down stream or upstream  
Description  
The description of the event or status.  
IP DSLAM  
59  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.5.3 Archived  
This window allows you to browse the expired records, which can be configured in the  
Environment window. Click on the tab of “Archived“, that will bring the archived screen to  
front as the following figure shown. Click on  
exit the window.  
to clear all records or  
to  
Field  
Description  
Happen Time  
Release Time  
Agent  
The date/time when the event is occurred.  
The date/time when the event is closed.  
The IP address of the agent associated  
Severity level of event or status.  
DSL Port  
Grade  
DSL  
Site  
Down stream or upstream  
Description  
The description of the event or status.  
IDL series User Guide  
60  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.6 System  
This section allows users to perform commit and reboot that will be introduced as follows.  
3.6.1 Commit and Reboot  
This section describes how to commit the current configuration to flash or reboot the IP  
DSLAM. Double Click on “Commit and Reboot” from the Function List Window. The  
System Information screen appears as follows.  
a. If to commit the active configuration to the flash, click on  
.
b. If to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration, click on  
.
c. Click on  
to close the window.  
IP DSLAM  
61  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
3.7 Configuration  
This section describes how to configure the IP DSLAM by selecting Configuration from  
Function List window.  
3.7.1 VLAN  
Allow user to view and modify VLAN configuration. Double Click on “VLAN” from the  
Function List Window. The VLAN configuration window appears as follows.  
Field  
Definition  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting  
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for  
a multicast mac addr is shared across vlans hence vlan id  
is an optional parameter. In devices supporting  
"Independent Vlan for multicast" capability each vlan can  
have its own information for a multicast mac addr hence  
vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the commands  
other than - get. For No Vlan case vlan id is not required.  
VLAN ID  
VLAN Name  
Egress PVC  
Name of the VLAN  
The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the  
egress list for this VLAN by management.  
The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for  
this VLAN, as untagged.  
Untagged PVC  
IDL series User Guide  
62  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. Select the VLAN to view or modify by using the VLAN ID drop-down list.  
b. Use Egress PVC and Untagged PVC drop-down list to set the specified DSL port’s  
Egress PVC and Untagged PVC.  
c. Click on  
to submit your settings or click on  
to close the VLAN  
Configuration window.  
3.7.2 Ethernet  
Allow user to view and modify Ethernet configuration. Double Click on “Ethernet” from the  
Function List Window. The Ethernet Configuration window appears as follows.  
Field  
Definition  
DHCP  
Type  
DHCP client enabled or disabled  
Uplink or Downlink  
Admin Status  
Operation Status  
IP address  
Mask  
The desired state of UPLINK (enable/disable)  
System is enabled or not.  
IP address of the UPLINK  
The network mask of the UPLINK.  
Gateway IP  
Gateway  
VLAN for management traffic on this interface. Nonzero value  
of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'  
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create  
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify  
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'  
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the  
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.  
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is  
zero) doesn't exist on the system then management shall not  
happen on this interface till the corresponding VLAN is created  
with the Net side port as its member.  
Mgmt Vlan Index  
IP DSLAM  
63  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. To view the Ethernet Configuration of UPLINK1, UPLINK2, or MGNT by using the  
Select Ethernet drop-down list.  
b. If to modify the Ethernet Configuration, click on  
first and then proceeding  
advanced configurations as shown in the following figure.  
c. If to create a new Ethernet configuration, click on  
and then select a new  
Ethernet configuration by using Select Ethernet drop-down list. After that, users can  
set related parameters as follows.  
d. Click on  
to submit your settings or click on  
to close the Ethernet  
Configuration window.  
IDL series User Guide  
64  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.8 DSL  
This section describes how to configure DSL settings by selecting DSL from Function List  
Window.  
3.8.1 Profile  
Allow users to configure Line Profile and Alarm Profile.  
3.8.1.1 Line Profile  
If to configure Line Profile, double click on “Line Profile” from the Function List  
Window. The Line Profile configuration window appears.  
Field  
Definition  
Line Type  
The ADSL line type, Fast or Interleaved.  
Transmit Rate Mode  
Defines what form of transmitting rate, Fixed or adaptAtStartup.  
Target SNR (dB/10)  
Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Target Signal / Noise Margin. (0-310).  
The minimum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin  
Down Shift SNR (dB/10) falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its transmit  
rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.  
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can also  
be disabled.  
IntCorrectionUP  
Preferred standard compliance. Outcome is dependent  
upon standard support of the remote unit. GlobespanVirata High Speed  
ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.  
Preferred Standard  
Maximum Transmit Rate The maximum transmitting rate of ATU-C side or ATU-R side.  
Interleave Delay (ms)  
The value of Interleave Delay for this channel.  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin rises  
above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its transmit rate.  
In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.  
UP Shift SNR (dB/10)  
This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved  
buffer. RS can also be disabled.  
IntCorrectionDown  
Annex Type  
This parameter is set as per Annex compliance of the code release.  
GlobespanVirata High Speed ADSL DMT (ADSL+) applications only.  
IP DSLAM  
65  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
a. To create up a new line profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then  
select the blank.  
b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then  
name the new line profile.  
c. Click on  
profile.  
to submit your setting or click on  
to delete a line  
3.8.1.2 Alarm Profile  
If to configure Alarm Profile, double click on “Alarm Profile” from the Function List  
Window. The Alarm Profile Configuration window appears.  
IDL series User Guide  
66  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Field  
Definition  
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Frame Seconds”  
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.  
Loss of frame within 15 minutes  
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Signal Seconds”  
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.  
Loss of signal within 15 minutes  
Loss of link within 15 minutes  
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Link Seconds”  
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.  
(But only ATU-C side)  
The threshold of the number of “Loss of Power Seconds”  
within 15 minutes performance data collection period.  
Loss of power within 15 minutes  
Errored seconds  
The threshold of the number of “Errored Seconds” within  
15 minutes performance data collection period.  
a. To create a new alarm profile, click the DSL Name drop-down list and then  
select the blank.  
b. After that, the fields become enable. Input the values in those fields and then  
name the new alarm profile.  
c. Click on  
to submit or click on  
to delete a alarm profile.  
3.8.1.3 All Line Profile  
Display all the Line Profile Configuration.  
3.8.2 Port Config  
Allow users to configure port configuration. Double Click on “Port Config” from the  
Function List Window. The Port Configuration window appears.  
IP DSLAM  
67  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Field  
DSL Port  
VPI  
Definition  
Port No. of the IP DSLAM  
Virtual Path Identifier  
Virtual Channel Identifier  
VCI  
The state of learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)  
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the  
value disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is  
disabled on this bridge port.  
Learning Status  
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable (1)  
indicates that the entries learned on this port will not be aged out.  
It also indicates that the entries learned on this port shall not be  
learned on any other port. The entries learned on this port can  
only be removed by management action or by making the value  
as disable (2), so that the entries can be aged out.  
Sticky Status  
Pvid  
Port VID  
Accepted Frame Type Used to up/down connection.  
When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for  
Ingress Filter  
Priority  
VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set. When  
false, the port will accept all incoming frames.  
Optional Connection priority. No VLAN tag, no priority.  
a. Choose the port to configure from the DSL Port drop-down list.  
b. Configure the Administration status as “Up” or “Down”.  
c. Choose a Line Profile from the Line Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure a  
Line Profile, Click on  
to activate the Line Profile Configuration window.  
d. Choose an Alarm Profile from the Alarm Profile Name drop-down list. If to configure  
an Alarm Profile, Click on to activate the Alarm Profile Configuration window.  
If necessary, modify values of specified PVC, including VPI, VCI, Admin Status, Learning  
Status, Sticky Status, Pvid, Accepted Frame Type and Ingress Filter, and priority.  
e. Click on  
to submit or click on  
to close the fmBridgeport window.  
f. If to create new PVC, click on  
and then PVC2 appears and then users can  
set perimeters via PVC2. after that, click on  
to submit your setting.  
IDL series User Guide  
68  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP DSLAM  
69  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
3.9 DSL PM  
This section describes how to utilize DSL Performance Management by selecting “DSL  
PM” from Function List window.  
3.9.1 Physical Layer Info  
Allow users to view the physical layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP  
DSLAM. Double Click on “Physical Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The  
Physical Layer Info window appears.  
Field  
Definition  
SNR margin  
Noise margin value. (dB)  
Difference in the total power transmitted and the total power received by the peer  
atu. (db)  
Attenuation  
Status  
Current status of the ATU line.  
output power  
Total output power transmitted by atu. (dBm)  
attainable rate  
The maximum currently attainable data rate by the atu. (kbps)  
Actual standard used for connection, based on the outcome of the negotiation  
with the Remote Unit.  
ActualStandard  
Bert Error  
Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.  
Provides Tx ATM cell counter.  
TxAtm CellCt  
RxAtm CellCt  
Provides Rx ATM cell counter.  
Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr.  
0x0 – startup not in progress; 0x0 – 0x0FFF Handshake/Training/ Profile  
Management/ Fast Retrain in progress; 0x8000 – 0x8FFF DSP firmware Down-  
Load in progress; 0xF000 – 0xFFFF illegal Parameter  
Start Progress  
Idle Bert Error  
Idle Bert Cells  
Number of bit errors.  
Number of idle cells.  
IDL series User Guide  
70  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Bert Sync  
Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.  
Select Information Valid Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation conducted on the Xcvr.  
Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT information is valid on  
the Xcvr.  
Select Loop Length  
Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the SELT information is  
Select Loop End  
valid on the Xcvr.  
Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when the SELT information is  
Select Loop Gauge  
valid on the Xcvr.  
Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list to view a specified DSL’s physical Layer  
Info. Click on  
to close the window.  
3.9.2 Channel Layer Info  
Allow users to view the Channel layer information of a specified DSL port from the IP  
DSLAM. Double Click on “Channel Layer Info” from the Function List Window. The  
Channel Layer Info window appears.  
Field  
Definition  
Interleave delay  
Interleave delay for this channel. (milli-seconds)  
Previous TX rate  
Current TX rate  
CRC block length  
Previous actual transmit rate on this channel if ADSL loop retain. (kbps)  
Actual transmit rate on this channel. (kbps)  
The length of the channel data-block on which the CRC operates.  
Current Atm Status Indicates the current ATM Status.  
Indicates the number of DMT symbols per Reed-Solomon code word (S),  
in the downstream direction.  
Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream direction.  
Rs Symbols  
Rs Depth  
Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per Reed-Solomon code in  
the downstream direction  
Rs Redundency  
Select the port ID from the DSL Port drop-down list view a specified DSL’s channel Layer  
Info. Click on  
to close the window.  
IP DSLAM  
71  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4. Application Note  
4.1 Basic Configuration  
The IP DSLAM provides multiple services to users according to the demand of application  
scenarios. To reduce time consuming in deployment, this document provides simple and  
easy configuration procedure according different applications.  
4.1.1 Create a new user  
Users can create a root user whose user name and password are “admin” as follow.  
$create user name admin passwd admin root  
Entry Created  
Privilege  
UserName  
-----------------------------------  
admin  
admin  
Verbose Mode Off  
Entry Created  
$
4.1.2 FD.cfg Configuration  
Fd.cfg is a useful tool that contains a set of default configuration commands for IP DSLAM.  
Using FD.cfg, you can do as follow.  
z Restore the default configuration  
z Modify FD.cfg  
z Upload FD.cfg  
z Create new services  
IDL series User Guide  
72  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.2.1 Contents of FD.cfg  
Use WordPad or Word to open FD.cfg. (See the following figure)  
The default configuration in FD.cfg summarized as follows.  
z Default IP: 192.168.100.111  
z SNTP: disable  
z RFC-1483 Bridge mode only  
z One PVC (8/81) for each ADSL port  
z Bridge port numbering 1 to 48 mapping to PVC 8/81 for ADSL port1 to port 48/24  
z VLAN feature Disable  
z Eth0 enable (for uplink), its bridge port number is 385  
z Eth1 disable (for downlink)  
z MGMT interface disable  
Note:  
To view the detailed contents, please refer to the Appendix A.  
IP DSLAM  
73  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.2.2 Download procedure  
This section describes how to upload FD.cfg to IP DSLAM by tftp server. The  
configuration procedure is shown as follows.  
Step 1:  
Prepare FD.cfg and tftp server. (Including file_id.diz, tftpd32.exe;TFTPD32.HLP  
and uninst.exe)  
Step 2:  
Put the “FD.cfg” and “tftpd32” at the same folder on your PC.  
Step 3:  
Activate tftpd32 and then tftp32 window appears.  
Step 4:  
Click on  
to set the current directory where FD.cfg located.  
Step 5:  
Click Sever interface drop-down list to select the DHCP Server‘s IP.  
IDL series User Guide  
74  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 6:  
Assign an IP pool starting address.  
Step 7:  
Rename the boot file as FD.cfg.  
Step 8:  
Input the mask  
Step 9:  
Save the configuration.  
Step 10:  
If needed, click the settings button to re-configure your setting.  
Step 11:  
Activate Telnet and login IP DSLAM.  
IP DSLAM  
75  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 12:  
Input ‘list’ to show the path and s/w information  
$list  
Name  
Ver  
Time  
Size  
Acc State  
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
/nvram/bin/bootptftp/  
TftpBootp.bin  
1
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 111064  
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 1280744  
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 231572  
RO active  
RW active  
RW active  
/nvram/bin/control/  
CP.bin.gz  
1
/nvram/bin/dataplane/  
DP.bin.gz  
1
/nvram/bin/decompressor/  
Decompressor.bin  
/nvram/bin/dslphy/  
1
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 81928  
RO active  
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz  
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/  
FD.cfg  
1
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 155220  
RW active  
1
Wed Jun 30 14:12:36 2004 19136  
RW active  
$
Step 13:  
Input ‘remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1’ to remove the  
obsolete FD.cfg file.  
$remove fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 1  
FLASH program starts at ADDR 20008  
File Removed  
$
Step 14:  
Input ‘download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66’ to  
download config file “fd.cfg” from Server PC to IP DSLAM.  
Note:  
The file name to download could be different from FD.cfg but do not change the path.  
dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg is the path of firmware file located on IP DSLAM.  
IDL series User Guide  
76  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
$download src FD.cfg dest /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg ip 192.168.100.66  
Downloading the File...  
......................................  
Block 1 erase in progress  
........Flash block 1 erase successful...  
FLASH program starts at ADDR 20000  
###############  
Step 15:  
Input ‘upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg’ to upgrade and activate the  
access state.  
$upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/FD.cfg version 2  
FLASH program starts at ADDR 2000c  
$
Step 16:  
Input ‘commit’ to store your new configuration before rebooting.  
$commit  
Step 17:  
Input ‘reboot config default’ to let your new configuration take effect.  
$reboot config default  
IP DSLAM  
77  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.3 How to create myconfig.cfg  
z myconfig.cfg is a txt file that ensures all commands be executed at once.  
z 4.1.3.3 shows the format of myconfig.cfg.  
z If there are many configurations you would like to execute then you can write all  
commands into myconfig.cfg and then execute it at once.  
z Be note to save ($commit) to IP DSLAM if this would be executed after rebooting.  
z Required of equipment: TFTP Server (Tftpd32).  
4.1.3.1 TFTP Server Configuration  
Step Image  
Usage  
1. Click “Browse” bottom to indicate current  
directory of firmware.  
1
2. Click down-arrow bottom to indicate IP of  
DHCP Server.  
3. Assign starting address for IP pool.  
4. Input subnet mask  
5. Save input parameters.  
6. Press “Setting” bottom to configure more  
details  
(option)  
7. After assigned this parameter and reboot  
Tftpd32 that “Current Directory” at previous  
step will follow it.  
2
IDL series User Guide  
78  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.3.2 myconfig.cfg Configuration  
Step Image  
Usage  
1
Enable TFTP server (tftpd32)  
1. Enable TFTP Server  
and direct the  
myconfig.cfg path for it.  
2. List the table and verify  
that myconfig.cfg had not  
created.  
$list  
Name  
Acc State  
2
Ver Time  
Size  
-------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
/nvram/bin/bootptftp/  
TftpBootp.bin  
RO active  
/nvram/bin/control/  
CP.bin.gz  
RW active  
/nvram/bin/dataplane/  
DP.bin.gz  
RW active  
/nvram/bin/decompressor/  
Decompressor.bin  
RO active  
/nvram/bin/dslphy/  
gsv_dsl_AD_DM_3C00000C.bin.gz1  
RW active  
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/  
FD.cfg  
1
1
1
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 111064  
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 1293028  
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 231572  
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 81928  
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 155220  
Fri Oct 08 09:46:22 2004 18973  
1
1
RW active  
$download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip  
192.168.100.188  
Downloading the File...  
3
3. Download myconfig.cfg to  
NVRAM.  
....................................  
4. 192.168.100.188 is the  
PC of TFTP Server..  
Block 30 erase in progress  
........Flash block 30 erase successful...  
FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000  
###############  
FLASH program starts at ADDR 3c0000  
Download session Completed,Bytes received 18180...  
$
$apply fname /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg  
4
5. Apply to execute the  
commands step by step.  
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-71 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 82  
Entry Created  
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-71 lowif aal5-71  
:
:
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83  
Entry Created  
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145  
Entry Created  
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status  
enable  
Entry Created  
$
$commit  
5
6. If this myconfig.cfg will be  
running after  
7. It will be disappear after  
“reboot config default”.  
IP DSLAM  
79  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.3.3 Format of myconfig.cfg  
verbose off  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-49 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 82  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-49 lowif aal5-49  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-49 portid 50 learning enable status enable  
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-94 lowif atm-46 vpi 8 vci 82  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-94 lowif aal5-94  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-94 portid 95 learning enable status enable  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-95 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 82  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-95 lowif aal5-95  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-95 portid 96 learning enable status enable  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-96 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 83  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-96 lowif aal5-96  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-96 portid 97 learning enable status enable  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-97 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 83  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-97 lowif aal5-97  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-97 portid 98 learning enable status enable  
：
：
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-145 lowif atm-47 vpi 8 vci 83  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-145 lowif aal5-145  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-145 portid 146 learning enable status enable  
IDL series User Guide  
80  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.4 Line Rate Configuration  
This section describes how to configure the transmission rate manually via CLI. Before  
configuration, see follows.  
1. Input the line rate by using hexadecimal values. Following tables shows the  
hexadecimal values that are frequently used.  
Hexadecimal 0x1f38300 0x177000  
Decimal  
32M 1.5M  
0x109a00  
1M  
0x7d000  
512K  
0x1f400  
128K  
0xfa00  
64K  
0x7d00  
32K  
2. Be noted that GsStandard, GsTxPowerAtten and GsAnnexType must be modified  
at the same time.  
3. Frequently used commands are listed below for your reference:  
z aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype adsl2 atucgsstandard adsl2plus  
atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1  
z atucfastmintxrate 0xfa00 aturfastmintxrate 0x7d00 atucgsannextype annexa  
atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 type fastonly atucrateadaptation fixed  
RATE  
type  
Interleaved / fast  
only  
Standard  
Adsl2+ / G.dmt /  
G.lite / T1.413  
Adsl2+ / G.dmt /  
G.lite / T1.413  
Annex type  
ATUC Fixed/ Adaptive  
Adsl2 / annex A  
ATUR Fixed/ Adaptive  
Interleaved / fast  
only  
Adsl2 / annex A  
IP DSLAM  
81  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
4.1.4.1 Configuration  
Step 1:  
Disable the DSL port that you want to re-configure its transmission rate.  
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 disable  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
: Up  
Gs Action  
Oper Status  
: startup  
: Down  
: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped  
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P  
otsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
: -  
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
GsDmtTrellis  
: trellisOn  
Trans Atur Cap  
: ansit1413  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
PM Conf PMSF  
: -  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
: Down  
Gs Action  
Oper Status  
: startup  
: Down  
: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped  
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P  
otsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
: -  
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
GsDmtTrellis  
: trellisOn  
: -  
Trans Atur Cap  
IDL series User Guide  
82  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PM Conf PMSF  
: -  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
$
Thu Jan 01 00:01:49 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ADSL ATUC Up : Interface - dsl-1  
Step 2:  
Set the line rate you need.  
$modify adsl line profile ifname dsl-0 atucintlmaxtxrate 0x177000 aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 atucgsannextype  
annexa atucgsstandard glite atucgstxpoweratten 0 atucmaxintldelay 1  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 63  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
: 0x1f  
GsRxStartBin  
: 0x6  
GsRxEndBin  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsAdi2x  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
: standard  
: -  
GsEraseProfiles  
GsStandard  
: Disable  
: adsl2PlusAuto  
: 0  
GsInitiate  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsCodingGain  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: Auto  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: 1Ms  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: adsl2  
: Disable  
: Expanded  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
: Disable  
GsNtr  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
GsAnnexType  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
GsFullRetrain  
: Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode  
: notpresent  
: ecMode  
ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA  
GsDmtTrellis  
: on  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
IP DSLAM  
83  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GsDnBinUsage  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile  
Data Boost  
: -  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
:
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)  
MSG Min Ds  
: 180  
: 60  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)  
: 30  
: 0xfa000  
: 4000  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0  
FrontEnd H/W Design  
H/W Pwr Reduction  
GsUsBitSwap  
: El1508  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: 0x3e800  
Minimum INP  
: InpAuto  
: 0x7d000  
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate  
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate  
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 90  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 30  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 30  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
MSG Min Us  
: 30  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 16  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 4000  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310  
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310  
________________________________________________________________________  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 1  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x177000  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
: 0x1f  
GsRxStartBin  
: 0x6  
GsRxEndBin  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
GsEraseProfiles  
: Disable  
IDL series User Guide  
84  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GsAdi2x  
: standard  
GsStandard  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsNtr  
: gLite  
: 0  
GsInitiate  
: -  
GsCodingGain  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: Auto  
: Disable  
: 1Ms  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: AnnexA  
: Disable  
: Expanded  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
: Disable  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
GsAnnexType  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsFullRetrain  
: Adsl2NonovlpFlatDmtConfMode  
: notpresent  
: ecMode  
ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x2  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities : AnnexA  
GsDmtTrellis  
: on  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
GsDnBinUsage  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile  
Data Boost  
: -  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
:
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)  
MSG Min Ds  
: 180  
: 60  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)  
: 30  
: 0xfa000  
: 4000  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 0  
FrontEnd H/W Design  
H/W Pwr Reduction  
GsUsBitSwap  
: El1508  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: 0x3e800  
Minimum INP  
: InpAuto  
: 0x7d000  
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate  
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate  
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 90  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 30  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 30  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
MSG Min Us  
: 30  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 16  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x7d000  
: 4000  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310  
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 310  
IP DSLAM  
85  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 3:  
Enable the port  
$modify adsl line intf ifname dsl-0 enable  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
: Down  
Gs Action  
Oper Status  
: startup  
: Down  
: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped  
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P  
otsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
GsDmtTrellis  
: -  
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped  
: trellisOn  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
: -  
: -  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 0  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 0  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
: Up  
Gs Action  
Oper Status  
: startup  
: Down  
: ansit1413 q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9921PotsOverlapped q9921IsdnNonOverlapped  
q9921isdnOverlapped q9922potsOverlapped q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped q9923Adsl2P  
otsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
GsDmtTrellis  
: -  
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped  
: trellisOff  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
: -  
: -  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
IDL series User Guide  
86  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.5 Set System Time  
IDL series support SNTP (Simple Network Time Protocol), used to synchronize its clocks in  
the Internet. IP DSLAM will get the system time via SNTP server while a SNTP sever is  
created.  
4.1.5.1 Configuration  
Follow the steps below to set the SNTP server.  
Note:  
System time will lost while the system is powered off.  
Step 1:  
Set the IP DSLAM as the SNTP client  
$create sntp?  
Command  
-------  
Description  
-----------  
SNTP Server address  
servaddr  
$create sntp servaddr 192.168.100.253  
Entry Created  
Server Addr : 192.168.100.253 Status : active  
Step 2:  
Enable SNTP client  
$modify sntp cfg enable  
Status : Disable  
Set Done  
Status : Enable  
$
IP DSLAM  
87  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Step 3:  
Confirm the status of SNTP client  
$get sntp stats  
Requests count  
: 1  
Response count  
: 1  
Invalid Response count : 0  
Lost Response count : 0  
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Apr 29 10:24:36 2004  
Option 2: Set up the system time manually.  
Step 1:  
View the system information  
$get system info  
Description  
Name  
:
:
Location  
Contact  
:
:
Vendor  
:
LogThreshold  
Object-id  
: 0  
: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12  
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:4:46  
HwVersion  
: ADSL-1.0  
: 1.4  
CPLDVersion  
CPSwVersion  
: COL2.6.1.0.040412  
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL  
DPSwVersion  
System Time  
Time Zone  
DST  
: DP_B02_06_22_05  
: Thu Jan 01 00:04:46 1970  
: GMT  
: off  
Services  
$
: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications  
IDL series User Guide  
88  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 2:  
Get SNTP parameter definitions  
$modify system info?  
Parameter  
Description  
-----------  
Identification of the contact person  
---------  
[ contact "<name>" ]  
[ name "<name>" ]  
[ location "<name>" ]  
[ vendor "<name>" ]  
[ logthresh <decvalue> ]  
[ systime "<sys-time>" ]  
[ dst <on | off> ]  
Name of the system  
The physical location of this node  
Vendor-specific information  
The severity level of trap  
SysTime in format mon dd hh:mm:ss year  
Daylight Saving Time  
[ timezone "<timezone>" ]  
Time Zone  
______________________________________________________________  
Valid System Time Zone : IDLW|NT|HST|CAT|AHST|YST|PST|MST|CST|EST|AST|NFST|  
NFT|BRST|AT|WAT|GMT|UTC|WET|CET|FWT|MET|MEWT|SWT|  
EET|IST|BT|IT|ZP4|ZP5|INST|ZP6|NST|WAST|SSMT|JT|  
CCT|ROK|KST|JST|CAST|EAST|GST|IDLE|NZST|NZT  
Step 3:  
Set up system time and time zone  
$modify system info systime " May 10 10:17:00 2004" timezone "CCT"  
Description  
Name  
:
:
Location  
Contact  
:
:
Vendor  
:
LogThreshold  
Object-id  
: 0  
: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12  
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18  
HwVersion  
: ADSL-1.0  
: 1.4  
CPLDVersion  
CPSwVersion  
: COL2.6.1.0.040412  
CPSwVersion(Build): 1.00.040407-ADSL  
DPSwVersion  
System Time  
Time Zone  
DST  
: DP_B02_06_22_05  
: Mon May 10 10:17:23 2004  
: GMT  
: off  
Services  
: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications  
IP DSLAM  
89  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Set Done  
Description  
Name  
:
:
Location  
Contact  
:
:
Vendor  
:
LogThreshold  
Object-id  
: 0  
: 1.3.6.1.4.1.3278.1.12  
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 0:13:18  
HwVersion  
: ADSL-1.0  
: 1.4  
CPLDVersion  
CPSwVersion  
: COL2.6.1.0.040412  
CPSwVersion(Build) : 1.00.040407-ADSL  
DPSwVersion  
System Time  
Time Zone  
DST  
: DP_B02_06_22_05  
: Mon May 10 10:17:00 2004  
: CCT  
: off  
Services  
: physical datalink internet end-to-end end-to-end end-to-end applications  
IDL series User Guide  
90  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.6 VLAN Configuration  
IP series support port-based VLAN, and Group VLAN. This section describes how to create  
two VLAN groups (VLAN ID = 2, and 3). ADSL ports 1 & 2 (PVC 8/81) will join in VLAN  
group 2, and create new PVC (8/82) for ADSL1, and assign this PVC to VLAN group 3.  
Besides, uplink interface ETH-0 will join VLAN group 2 & 3 as trunk interface.  
4.1.6.1 Configuration  
Step 1:  
Create a VLAN group No.2, and assign to Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81),  
and 385(Eth-0)  
$create vlan static vlanname vlan2 vlanid 2 egressports 1 385 untaggedports 1  
Entry Created  
VLAN Name  
: vlan2  
: 2  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 1  
385  
: None  
: 1  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
$
: Residential  
: enable  
: enable  
Step 2:  
Set Bridge port 1(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/81) as PVID 2  
$modify gvrp port info portid 1 portvlanid 2 acceptframetypes all ingressfilteri ng true  
Port Id  
: 1  
: 1  
: False  
: 0  
: False  
Port VLAN Index  
Ingress Filtering  
Failed Registrations  
Restricted Vlan Registration  
Accept Frame Types: All  
Gvrp Status  
: Disable  
: 00:00:00:00:00:00  
Last Pdu Origin  
Set Done  
Port Id  
: 1  
: 2  
Port VLAN Index  
Accept Frame Types: All  
IP DSLAM  
91  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Ingress Filtering  
Failed Registrations  
Restricted Vlan Registration  
$
: True  
: 0  
Gvrp Status  
: Disable  
Last Pdu Origin  
: 00:00:00:00:00:00  
: False  
Step 3:  
Show current VLAN status  
$get vlan curr info  
VLAN Index  
VLAN Status  
Egress ports  
: 1  
: Other  
: 1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
31  
15  
32  
16  
33  
17  
18  
19  
36  
20  
37  
21  
38  
22  
39  
23  
40  
24  
41  
25  
42  
26  
43  
27  
44  
28  
45  
29  
46  
30  
34  
35  
4
7
48  
Untagged Ports  
14 15 16  
31 32 33  
385  
: 1  
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
28  
45  
13  
29  
46  
17  
34  
18  
35  
19  
36  
20  
37  
21  
38  
22  
39  
23  
40  
24  
41  
25  
42  
26  
43  
27  
44  
30  
4
7
48  
Bridging Mode  
Flood support Status  
385  
: Residential  
: enable  
Broadcast support Status : enable  
VLAN Index  
: 2  
VLAN Status  
: permanent  
Egress ports  
: 1  
: 1  
385  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
Flood support Status  
: Residential  
: enable  
Broadcast support Status : enable  
VLAN Index  
: 3  
VLAN Status  
: permanent  
Egress ports  
: 2  
: 2  
385  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
Flood support Status  
: Residential  
: enable  
Broadcast support Status : enable  
IDL series User Guide  
92  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 4:  
Create new PVC (8/82) in ADSL port 1  
z
Create atm vc and aal5 interface  
$create atm vc intf ifname aal5-48 lowif atm-0 vpi 8 vci 82  
Entry Created  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-48  
: 8  
Low IfName  
VCI  
: atm-0  
: 82  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: Up  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
Last Change (sec)  
Row Status  
: Up  
: 1536  
: 1536  
: AAL5  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
: LLC Mux  
: 0  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
z
Create eoa interface  
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-48 lowif aal5-48  
Entry Created  
IfName  
: eoa-48  
: False  
: ALL  
LowIfName  
: aal5-48  
FCS  
Pkt Type  
Oper Status  
: Up  
Admin Status : Up  
Step 5:  
Create a new bridge port 49, and maps to new created PVC 8/82 in ADSL port 1.  
$create bridge port intf ifname eoa-48 portid 49 learning enable status enable  
Entry Created  
Port Id  
: 49  
IfName  
: eoa-48  
Max Unicast Addresses : 16  
Learning Status : Enable  
Port Admin Status: Enable  
Port Oper Status  
Sticky Status  
: Enable  
: Disable  
FDB Modify  
: Enable  
Acl Global Deny Apply : Enable  
Acl Global Track Apply: Enable  
IP DSLAM  
93  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 6:  
Create a new VLAN group No.3, and assign to Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC  
8/82), and 385(Eth-0)  
$create vlan static vlanname vlan3 vlanid 3 egressports 49 385 untaggedports 49  
Entry Created  
VLAN Name  
: vlan3  
: 3  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 49  
385  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: None  
: 49  
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
: enable  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
: enable  
Step 7:  
Set Bridge port 49(ADSL port 1 PVC 8/82) as PVID 3  
$modify gvrp port info portid 49 portvlanid 3 acceptframetypes all ingressfiltering true  
Port Id  
: 49  
: 1  
Port VLAN Index  
Ingress Filtering  
Failed Registrations  
Accept Frame Types: All  
: False  
: 0  
Gvrp Status  
: Disable  
: 00:00:00:00:00:00  
Last Pdu Origin  
Restricted Vlan Registration: False  
Set Done  
Port Id  
: 49  
: 3  
Port VLAN Index  
Ingress Filtering  
Failed Registrations  
Accept Frame Types: All  
: True  
: 0  
Gvrp Status  
: Disable  
Last Pdu Origin  
: 00:00:00:00:00:00  
Restricted Vlan Registration: False  
IDL series User Guide  
94  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Step 8:  
Modify the VLAN group 2, and add Bridge port 2 (ADSL port 2 PVC 8/81)  
$modify vlan static vlanname vlan2 egressports 1 2 385 untaggedports 1 2  
VLAN Name  
: vlan2  
: 2  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 1  
385  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: None  
: 1  
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
: enable  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
: enable  
Set Done  
VLAN Name  
: vlan2  
: 2  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 1  
2
: None  
2
385  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: 1  
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
: enable  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
: enable  
Step 9:  
Add port3 to vlan2 use vlanid index  
$modify vlan static vlanid 2 egressports 1 2 3 385 untaggedports 1 2 3  
VLAN Name  
: vlan2  
: 2  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 1  
2
385  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: None  
: 1  
2
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
: enable  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
: enable  
Set Done  
VLAN Name  
VLAN Index  
: vlan2  
: 2  
IP DSLAM  
95  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Egress ports  
: 1  
2
3
385  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: None  
: 1  
2
3
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
: enable  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
: enable  
Step 10:  
Modify the VLAN from 8/81 to 0/35  
Set the AAL5 strat number is 0  
z
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 disable  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
: 8  
Low IfName  
VCI  
: atm-1  
: 81  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: Up  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
: Down  
: 1536  
: 1536  
: LLC Mux  
: 0  
: AAL5  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
Last Change (sec)  
Row Status  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
Set Done  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
Low IfName  
: atm-1  
: 8  
VCI  
Oper Status  
: 81  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: Down  
: 1536  
: Down  
: 1536  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
: AAL5  
: LLC Mux  
: 0  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
Last Change (sec)  
Row Status  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
z
(Set VPI / VCI is 0 / 35)  
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 vpi 0 vci 35  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
: 8  
Low IfName  
VCI  
: atm-1  
: 81  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: Down  
: 1536  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
: Down  
: 1536  
: AAL5  
: LLC Mux  
: Interleaved  
Last Change (sec)  
: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
96  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: Data  
: PVC  
Row Status  
: active  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
Set Done  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
: 0  
Low IfName  
: atm-1  
VCI  
: 35  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: Down  
: 1536  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
: Down  
: 1536  
: LLC Mux  
: AAL5  
AAL5 Encap  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
Last Change (sec)  
Row Status  
: 0  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
Step 11:  
Set AAL5 as enable  
$modify atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 enable  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
: 0  
Low IfName  
VCI  
: atm-1  
: 35  
Admin Status : Down  
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
: Down  
: 1536  
: LLC Mux  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: AAL5  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
Last Change (sec)  
Row Status  
: 0  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
Set Done  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-1  
Low IfName  
: atm-1  
: 0  
VCI  
: 35  
Admin Status : Up  
Aal5 Tx Size : 1536  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
: Down  
: 1536  
AAL Type  
Channel  
: AAL5  
AAL5 Encap  
: LLC Mux  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
Last Change (sec)  
: 0  
MgmtMode  
VC Type  
Row Status  
: active  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to P  
IP DSLAM  
97  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.7 Modify the Downstream/Upstream Rate  
4.1.7.1 Configuration  
Step 1:  
Set ADSL port12 disable  
$modify adsl line intf disable ifname dsl-11  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
Gs Action  
: startup  
: Up  
: Up  
Oper Status  
: ansit1413  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped  
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
q9922potsOverlapped  
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual : q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped  
GsDmtTrellis  
: trellisOn  
Trans Atur Cap  
: q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Adsl2PlusPotsOverlappe  
d
q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
PM Conf PMSF  
: idleop  
: inhibit  
Line DELT Conf LDSF  
Set Done  
Thu Jan 01 07:19:36 1970 : MAJOR ALARM : ADSL ATUC Down : Interface - dsl-11  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26  
Gs Action : startup  
Oper Status : Down  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped  
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads  
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
: Down  
: ansit1413  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
q9922potsOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual  
GsDmtTrellis  
: -  
: trellisOn  
: -  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
: idleop  
IDL series User Guide  
98  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
Step 2:  
Set ADSL port 12 interleave mode Downstream 512K. The value is hex so you  
must conversion to decimal.  
$modify adsl line profile atucintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0x20  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
GsRxStartBin  
GsRxEndBin  
: 0x1f  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsAdi2x  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
: standard  
: -  
GsEraseProfiles  
GsStandard  
: Disable  
: adsl2Plus  
: -  
GsInitiate  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsCodingGain  
: Auto  
: 1  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: 1Ms  
: 1  
: Disable  
: Expanded  
: Disable  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
: fdmMode  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: adsl2  
GsNtr  
GsAnnexType  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
: Disable  
: -  
GsFullRetrain  
DmtConfMode  
: notpresent  
ParamHybridLossTestStart  
GsDmtTrellis  
: 0x2  
: on  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: AnnexA  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
GsDnBinUsage  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile  
Data Boost  
: -  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
: pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable  
IP DSLAM  
99  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Rate(bps)  
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable  
: 180  
: 180  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30  
: 0x10000  
: disable  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 16  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
______________________________________________________________  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x7d000  
: 0x20  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
GsRxStartBin  
GsRxEndBin  
: 0x1f  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsAdi2x  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
: standard  
: -  
GsEraseProfiles  
GsStandard  
: Disable  
: adsl2Plus  
: -  
GsInitiate  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsCodingGain  
: Auto  
: 1  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: 1Ms  
: 1  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: adsl2  
: Expanded  
: Disable  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
: fdmMode  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
GsNtr  
GsAnnexType  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
: Disable  
: -  
GsFullRetrain  
DmtConfMode  
: notpresent  
ParamHybridLossTestStart  
: 0x2  
IDL series User Guide  
100  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40  
GsDmtTrellis  
: on  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: AnnexA  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
GsDnBinUsage  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile : -  
Data Boost  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
: pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable  
: 180  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Rate(bps)  
: 180  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30  
: 0x10000  
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable : disable  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 16  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
Step 3:  
Set ADSL port12 interleave mode upstream 512K. The value is hex so you must  
conversion to decimal.  
$modify adsl line profile aturintlmaxtxrate 0x7d000 ifname dsl-11  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0x20  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
: 0x1f  
GsRxStartBin  
GsRxEndBin  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
GsEraseProfiles  
: Disable  
IP DSLAM  
101  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GsAdi2x  
: standard  
: -  
GsStandard  
: adsl2Plus  
: -  
GsInitiate  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsNtr  
GsCodingGain  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: Auto  
: 1Ms  
: 1  
: 1  
: Disable  
: Expanded  
: Disable  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
: fdmMode  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: adsl2  
GsAnnexType  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
GsAlctlUsVer  
: Disable  
: -  
GsFullRetrain  
DmtConfMode  
: notpresent  
ParamHybridLossTestStart  
GsDmtTrellis  
: 0x2  
: on  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x40  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: AnnexA  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
GsDnBinUsage  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile : -  
Data Boost  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
: pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable  
: 180  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Rate(bps)  
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable  
: 180  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30  
: 0x10000  
: disable  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
: 16  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
______________________________________________________________  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: adaptAtStartup  
IDL series User Guide  
102  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60  
Max Snr Margin(dB/10)  
: 310  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 125us  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x1f38300  
: 0x20  
: 0x6  
: 0x1ff  
: 0x1f  
GsRxStartBin  
GsRxEndBin  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsAdi2x  
: 15  
GsMaxDCo  
: 256  
: Disable  
: standard  
: -  
GsEraseProfiles  
GsStandard  
: Disable  
: adsl2Plus  
: -  
GsInitiate  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsCodingGain  
: Auto  
: 1  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: 1Ms  
: 1  
: Disable  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: adsl2  
: Expanded  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
: Disable  
GsNtr  
: LocalOcs  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
GsAnnexType  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
: Disable  
: -  
GsFullRetrain  
DmtConfMode  
: fdmMode  
: notpresent  
ParamHybridLossTestStart: 0x2  
GsDmtTrellis : on  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd: 0x40  
GsAdvertisedCapabilities: AnnexA  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: Disable  
: interleavedOnly  
GsDnBinUsage  
: 0xFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF  
ParametricTestInputFile : -  
Data Boost  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
: Standard  
Conf PM Mode  
: pmstatel3enable pmstatel2enable  
: 180  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Rate(bps)  
Conf GsREADSL2 Enable  
: 180  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10) : 30  
: 0x10000  
: disable  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
---------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10): 60  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 120  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10): 0  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x7d00  
: 0x109a00  
IP DSLAM  
103  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
: 0x7d000  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 16  
Step 4:  
Set ADSL port12 enable.  
$modify adsl line intf enable ifname dsl-11  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
Gs Action  
: startup  
: Down  
: Down  
Oper Status  
: ansit1413  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped  
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
q9922potsOverlapped  
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual : -  
GsDmtTrellis  
: trellisOn  
: -  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
: idleop  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
Set Done  
IfName  
: dsl-11  
Line Type  
: interleavedOnly  
Coding Type  
: dmt  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr : 26  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr : 26  
Gs Clock Type  
Admin Status  
Trans Atuc Cap  
: oscillator  
Gs Action  
: startup  
: Down  
: Up  
Oper Status  
: ansit1413  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped q9921isdnOverlapped  
q9922Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlappedq9922Ads  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
q9922potsOverlapped  
l2PlusPotsOverlapped q9922Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
Trans Atuc Actual : -  
GsDmtTrellis  
: trellisOn  
: -  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
: idleop  
Line DELT Conf LDSF : inhibit  
IDL series User Guide  
104  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
4.1.8 Enable SNMP Function  
4.1.8.1 Configuration  
Step 1:  
Create SNMP community  
$create snmp comm community public rw  
Entry Created  
Community  
-------------------------  
public  
Access  
RW  
Setp 2:  
Create SNMP host  
$create snmp host ip 192.168.100.55 community public  
Entry Created  
Host Address  
-----------------------------------  
192.168.100.55  
$
Community  
public  
Setp 3:  
Create SNMP traphost  
$create snmp traphost ip 192.168.100.55 community public  
Entry Created  
Ip Address : 192.168.100.55  
Community : public  
Port  
: 162  
Version : v2c  
IP DSLAM  
105  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5. System Administration with CLI  
5.1 About CLI Administration  
Command Line Interface (CLI) is the primary user interface to administrate the system. CLI  
can be accessed either from the CID port or telnet session. All CLI commands are simple  
strings designed for the Administrator to manage your IP DSLAM easily.  
5.1.1 Notation Conventions  
z
z
Keywords in a command that you must enter exactly as shown are presented in bold.  
User specified values in a command are presented in regular typeface, i.e., not bold or  
italic.  
z
z
Parameter values enclosed in < > must be specified.  
Parameters enclosed in [ ] are optional. All modify parameters are shown as optional in  
CLI commands even if there exists only a single parameter.  
Parameter values are separated by a vertical bar ì|î only when one of the specified  
values can be used.  
z
z
z
Parameter values are enclosed in { } when you must use one of the values specified.  
Parameters are enclosed in [ ] + when you can specify the parameter one or more  
times, in the command line.  
5.1.2 Command Structure  
CLI commands conform to the following structure except for some basic service  
com-mands such as ping, traceroute etc.  
<Action>:  
This is the first keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the type of operation to be  
performed. "create" is an example of this keyword. However, if no action is specified it  
will mean ìmodifyî. For example, modify bridge port intf portid portid status enable and  
bridge port intf portid portid status enable ì mean the same.  
<Group>:  
This is the second keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the group of a CLI  
command. "Bridge" is an example of this keyword.  
IDL series User Guide  
106  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<Sub group>:  
This is the third keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI  
command. "Port" is an example of this keyword.  
<Sub sub group>:  
This is the fourth keyword of a CLI command. It indicates the sub group of a CLI  
command. "intf" is an example of this keyword.  
<tag1 value1> <tagN valueN>:  
These are <tag value> pairs and can vary from 0 to N. They indicate the parameter  
values passed to a CLI command. "ifname aal5-0", "portid 20", are examples of tag  
value pairs.  
5.1.3 Glossary of Terms and Acronyms  
This section contains a brief list of selected acronyms.  
Abbreviation  
Description  
AAL5  
ACL  
ATM Adaptation Layer 5  
Access Control list  
ADSL  
Attribute  
ATM  
CLI  
Asymmetric Digital Subscriber Line  
An element of an MO  
Asynchronous Transmission Mode  
Command Line Interface  
CP  
Control Plane  
DHCP  
DP  
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol  
Data Plane  
DRA  
DSL  
DHCP Relay Agent  
Digital Subscriber Line  
EOA  
GARP  
GMRP  
GVRP  
IGMP  
Index  
IP  
Ethernet over ATM  
Generic Attribute Registration Protocol  
GARP Multicast Registration Protocol  
GARP VLAN Regenration Protocol  
InternetGroup Management Protocol  
An element of a tabular MO that uniquely identifies an entry  
Internet protocol  
IRL  
Input Rate Limiting  
IVL  
IVM  
LACP  
LAN  
Individual VLAN Learning  
Individual VLAN for Multicast  
Link Aggregation Control Protocol  
Local Area Network  
ME - Management Entity The entity, modified, controlled and monitored through MOs.  
A unique number that identifies an MO. Interpretation of the  
MO ID - MO Identifier  
information passed to GenAg for an MO depends upon this  
identifier  
Logical unit of manageable information. It is similar to a MIB. An ME  
is visible to the outside world in the form of one or more MOs that  
MO - Managed Object  
constitute it.  
GAG supports five operations - Create, Delete, Modify, Get,  
Get-Next  
Output Rate Limiting  
Operations  
ORL  
IP DSLAM  
107  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
OAM  
PIA  
RMON  
STP  
Operations Administration and Management  
PPPoE Intermediate Agent  
Remote Monitoring  
Spanning Tree Protocol  
SNTP  
SVL  
Simple Network Time Protocol  
Shared VLAN Learning  
SVM  
Specific Agent  
TEA  
Shared VLAN for Multicast  
Entities that use GenAg interfaces to manage the system  
Target Engine Agent  
VC  
Virtual Channel  
VLAN  
Virtual LAN  
5.1.4 CLI Command Brief Description  
CLI Command - Action List  
<action>  
Description  
alias  
Used to create an alias for any CLI command.  
apply  
Used to apply a configuration file stored on the system  
climode  
commit  
Create  
Modes of cli/Prio change of CLI task  
Used to commit the active configuration to the flash.  
Used to create configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.  
Used to delete configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier and parameters.  
If the delete action is confirmed, the configuration of objects will no longer exist.  
delete  
defragment Defragment the compact blocks in flash  
download  
get  
help  
list  
logout  
memset  
Used to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from theremote host.  
Used to view information of the selected identifier and parameters.  
Used to view the detailed usage of CLI commands.  
Used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit  
Used to terminate the CLI.  
Specify the length of memory set  
Used to set or modify existing configuration of objects corresponding to the identifier  
and parameters.  
modify  
passwd  
permission  
Ping  
prompt  
rdf  
Used to change the password associated with a user login.  
Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash  
Used to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.  
Used to set the new CLI prompt.  
Used to read Flash  
rdm  
Used to read Memory  
reboot  
remove  
reset  
Used to restart the system.  
Used to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit  
Used to reset a port of system.  
save  
Sync  
Used to save the configuration to Flash RAM.  
Used to Sync  
traceroute  
unalias  
upgrade  
Used to trace the route to the specified destination.  
Used to delete an alias.  
Used to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.  
Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the  
execution of a command (create, delete, modify, get).  
Used to write Memory  
verbose  
wrm  
IDL series User Guide  
108  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.1.5 Categories of the CLI commands  
Command  
Implemented by Recommend for end-users  
802.1p Commands  
Bridge port accessprio Commands  
Bridge port prioinfo Commands  
Bridge port trfclassmap Commands  
Bridge port priomap commands  
ABOND  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ABOND group intf Commands  
Conexant  
Yes, but this is a legacy  
command and you should  
contact KEYMILE support  
personal when you plan to  
use.  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ABOND group stats Commands  
Abond link entry Commands  
Abond link stats Commands  
Aggregation Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Active Standby aggr info Commands  
Aggr intf Commands  
LACP Aggr Commands  
LACP AGGRPort Info Commands  
LACP AGGRPort List Command  
LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands  
Redundancy aggr info Commands  
Redundancy aggrport list Commands  
Redundancy aggr stats Commands  
ATM Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
AAL5 VC Statistics Commands  
ATM OAM CC Commands  
ATM OAM Loopback Commands  
ATM Port Commands  
ATM VC Commands  
ATM VC Statistics Commands  
Bridging Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Bridge forwarding Commands  
Bridge Mode Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Bridge Port Cap Commands  
Bridge port forwarding Commands  
Bridge Port Map Commands  
Bridge Port Stats Table Commands  
Bridge Port Table Commands  
Bridge static mcast Commands  
Bridge static ucast Commands  
Bridge tbg traps Commands  
GARP Port Info Commands  
STP Group Commands  
STP Port Commands  
Transparent Bridging Table Commands  
Bridge Multicast Commands  
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands  
Bridge mcast forwarding Commands  
Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands  
Bridge Static Multicast Commands  
DHCP Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
DHCP Client Commands  
Conexant  
Yes  
DSL Commands  
ADSL Alarm Profile Commands  
ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands  
ADSL ATUC Channel Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
IP DSLAM  
109  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands  
ADSL ATUC ChanIntvl Commands  
ADSL ATUC Interval Commands  
ADSL ATUC Perf Commands  
ADSL ATUC Physical Commands  
ADSL ATUC Trap Commands  
ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands  
ADSL ATUR ChanIntrvl Commands  
ADSL ATUR Channel Commands  
ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands  
ADSL ATUR Interval Commands  
Adsl atur intervalext Commands  
ADSL ATUR Perf Commands  
Adsl atur perfext Commands  
ADSL ATUR Physical Commands  
ADSL ATUR Traps Commands  
DSL ATUR Trapsext Commands  
ADSL Cap Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
ADSL Line Intf Commands  
ADSL Line Profile Commands  
Dsl chip Commands  
Dsl dsp chip Commands  
Dsl dsp port Commands  
Dsl system Commands  
EHDLC Commands  
Ehdlc intf Commands  
Conexant  
Yes  
Ethernet Commands  
Dot3 stats Commands  
Ethernet Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Filtering Commands  
ACL Global Macentry Commands  
Clfr list genentry commands  
ACL Port Macentry Commands  
Clfr namedlist genentry Commands  
Clfr namedlist info Commands  
Clfr namedlist map Commands  
Clfr profile branch Commands  
Clfr profile info Commands  
Clfr profile node Commands  
Clfr tree branch Commands  
Clfr tree info Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Clfr tree map Commands  
Clfr tree node Commands  
Clfr tree profile Commands  
Filter expr entry Commands  
Filter list genentry Commands  
Filter namedlist genentry Commands  
Filter namedlist info Commands  
Clfr tree node Commands  
Clfr tree profile Commands  
Filter expr entry Commands  
Filter list genentry Commands  
Filter namedlist genentry Commands  
Filter namedlist info Commands  
Filter namedlist map Commands  
Create filter namedlist map  
Filter rule actionmap Commands  
Filter rule entry Commands  
Filter rule map Commands  
Filter rule stats Commands  
Filter seq entry Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
110  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Filter seq info Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Filter subrule arp Commands  
Filter subrule clfrtree Commands  
Filter subrule ether Commands  
Filter subrule generic Commands  
Filter subrule ICMP Commands  
Filter subrule IGMP Commands  
Filter subrule IP Commands  
Filter subrule PPP Commands  
Filter subrule TCP Commands  
Filter subrule UDP Commands  
EOA Commands  
EOA Commands  
Conexant  
Yes  
IGMP Commands  
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands  
Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands  
Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands  
Igmpsnoop port info Commands  
Igmpsnoop port stats Commands  
Igmpsnoop querier info Commands  
Interface Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Interface Commands  
Conexant  
Yes  
IP Commands  
IP Net to Media Table Commands  
IP Route Commands  
Ipoa intf Commands  
ipoe intf Commands  
Rid static Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
MacProfile Commands  
Macprofile global Commands  
Resvdmac profile info Commands  
Resvdmac profile param Commands  
Management Traffic Commands  
Ctlpkt group info Commands  
Ctlpkt instance info Commands  
Ctlpkt profile info Commands  
PPPoE Tunneling Commands  
PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands  
PPPoE Global Config Commands  
PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands  
PPPoE Global Stats Commands  
Pppoe intf Commands  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Conexant  
Yes  
Yes  
Yes  
PPPoE Session Stats Commands  
PPPR Interface Commands  
IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands  
Dra global stats Commands  
Dra instance entry Commands  
Dra stats entry Commands  
Dra global config Commands  
Ia profile entry Commands  
Pia instance entry Commands  
Pia stats entry Commands  
Pia global config Commands  
QoS Commands  
IRL Map Commands  
IRL Profile Commands  
IRL Stats Commands  
Bridge rlinstance map Commands  
Rl actionprofile info Commands  
Rl instance info Commands  
Rl profile info Commands  
IP DSLAM  
111  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Scheduling profile class Commands  
Scheduling profile info Commands  
Trfclass profile class Commands  
Trfclass profile info Commands  
Trfclass stats Commands  
RMON Commands  
RMON Statistics Group Commands  
RMON Task Info Commands  
RMON Memory Pool info Commands  
RMON Queue info Commands  
RMON Net buffers info Commands  
RMON Semaphore info Commands  
RMON Event Group info Commands  
SNMP Commands  
SNMP Comm Commands  
SNMP Host Commands  
SNMP Stats Commands  
SNMP Traphost Commands  
SNTP Commands  
SNTP Cfg Commands  
SNTP servaddr Commands  
SNTP Stats Commands  
System Commands  
Cbuftrace cfg Commands  
System Configuration Save and Restore  
Commands  
System Control Table Commands  
System crash info commands  
System Info Commands  
System manuf info Commands  
System reboot info command  
Nbize Commands  
System Stats Commands  
System Traps Commands  
System Trap Log Table Commands  
System version commands  
Trace Log Configuration Commands  
Trace Log Statistics Commands  
VC Aggregation Commands  
Atm vcaggr intf Commands  
Atm vcaggr map Commands  
VLAN Commands  
GVRP Info Commands  
GVRP Port Info Commands  
GVRP Port Stats Commands  
Vlan curr info Commands  
VLAN mapprofile info Commands  
Vlan mapprofile param Commands  
VLAN Static Commands  
Miscelleneous Commands  
File Commands  
Other Commands  
PLANET CLI Commands  
System ADSL Port Operation Status  
Commands  
System Alarm Commands  
System Control Commands  
System Hardware Inventory Commands  
System ivmconfig Commands  
System SFP Commands  
System Version Commands  
System Debug Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
112  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configuration FD Commands  
Configuration USER Commands  
Temperature Configuration Commands  
Temperature State Commands  
Temperature Supervision Commands  
Temperature Configuration Commands  
Temperature State Commands  
Temperature Supervision Commands  
System Commands  
System Hardware Inventory Commands PLANET  
Yes  
System ivmconfig Commands  
System Debug Commands  
PLANET  
PLANET  
Yes  
No, for KEYMILE and  
PLANET support personal  
only  
IP DSLAM  
113  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2 802.1p commands  
5.2.1 Bridge port accessprio Commands  
5.2.1.1 Get bridge port accessprio  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port accessprio [portid <portid-val>] [regenprio <regenprio-val >]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val >  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
Type : Get-—Optional  
Valid values: 1-386  
regenprio <regenprio-val >  
Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is  
mapped.  
Type : Get —Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Example:  
$ get bridge port accessprio portid 1 regenPrio 1  
Output:  
PortId  
: 1  
regenPrio : 1  
AcessPriority : 0  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
regenPrio  
Regenerated user priority from which the access priority is mapped.  
The Outbound Access Priority the received frame is mapped to.  
AcessPriority  
References:  
Bridge port commands  
IDL series User Guide  
114  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.2.2 Bridge port prioinfo Commands  
5.2.2.1 Get bridge port prioinfo  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port prioinfo [portid <portid-val >]  
5.2.2.2 Modify bridge port prioinfo  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge port prioinfo portid portid [defprio <defprio-val>] [numtrfclass  
<numtrfclass-val>] [defsvprio <defsvprio-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid>  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 386  
defprio <defprio-val>  
The default ingress User Priority which can be configured by  
the user.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
numtrfclass  
The number of egress traffic classes supported on this port.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
<numtrfclass-val>  
defsvprio  
Not supported  
<defsvprio-val>  
Type: Modify Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Example:  
$ get bridge port prioinfo portid 1  
IP DSLAM  
115  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
PortId  
: 1  
DefaultPriority : 1  
DefaultSVPriority : 1  
NumTrafficClass : 3  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
DefaultPriority  
The default ingress User Priority which can be configured  
by the user. The default value of this attribute can be 0 or 0  
depending on interface over which the bridge port is  
created. The default value is 0 for bridge port created over  
ethernet or aggregator interface. And the default value is 0  
if the interface over which the bridge port has been created  
is one of EOA, PPPoE and IPoE.  
NumTrafficClass  
The number of egress traffic classes supported on this  
port. It depends on whether bridge port is over EOA, in  
which case, the max number of queues is value of  
maxnumeoaprioQs in gsvSystemSizingGroup and default  
value is also value of maxnumeoaprioQs in nbsize or over  
Ethernet / aggregated interface, in which case, the max  
number of queues is value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in nbsize  
and default value is also value of MaxNumEthPrioQs in  
nbsize. It is modifiable only when the bridge port is in  
disabled state.  
DefaultSVPriority  
Not supported  
References:  
Bridge port commands  
IDL series User Guide  
116  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.3 Bridge port trfclassmap Commands  
5.2.3.1 Get bridge port trfclassmap  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port trfclassmap [portid <portid-val >] [regenprio <regenprio-val >]  
5.2.3.2 Modify bridge port trfclassmap  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge port trfclassmap portid <portid-val > regenprio <regenprio-val >  
[trfclass <trfclass-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val >  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains  
bridge management information.  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1-386  
regenprio  
The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In  
our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This  
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority  
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user  
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag  
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that  
order. It lies in the range 0-7  
<regenprio-val >  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
trfclass <trfclass-val >  
The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The  
maximum value of trafficClass is defined by numTrfClass  
parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The default value of  
this field shall be determined according to table 7-2  
described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition  
IP DSLAM  
117  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the  
bridge port is in disabled state.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Example:  
$ get bridge port trfclassmap portid 1 regenPrio 1  
Output:  
PortId  
: 1  
regenPrio : 1  
TrafficClass : 2  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains  
bridge management information.  
regenPrio  
The Priority value evaluated for the received frame. In  
our case, it is the regenerated user priority. This  
regenerated priority is mapped from user priority  
determined by a) packet classifier rule indicating user  
priority for that port b) user priority received in the tag  
header and c) default source priority of the port, in that  
order. It lies in the range 0-7  
TrafficClass  
The Traffic Class the received frame is mapped to. The  
maximum value of trafficClass is defined by  
numTrfClass parameter of Bridge Port PrioInfo. The  
default value of this field shall be determined according to  
table 7-2 described in ANSI/IEEE Std 802.1d 1998 Edition  
Document. This mapping is modifiable only when the  
bridge port is in disabled state.  
References:  
Bridge port commands  
IDL series User Guide  
118  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.2.4 Bridge port priomap Commands  
5.2.4.1 Get bridge port priomap  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port priomap [portid <portid-val >] [usrprio <usrprio-val >]  
5.2.4.2 Modify bridge port priomap  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge port priomap portid <portid-val > usrprio <usrprio-val>  
[regenprio <regenprio-val >]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val >  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1-386  
usrprio <usrprio-val >  
The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it  
can arrive in a tag header, it can have range 0-7.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
regenprio  
The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped  
for this port.  
<regenprio-val >  
Type: Modify --Optional  
alid values: 0 - 7  
Example:  
$ get bridge port priomap portid 1 usrPrio 1  
IP DSLAM  
119  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
PortId  
: 1  
UserPriority : 1  
RegenUserPrio : 1  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Port number of the port for which this entry contains bridge  
management information.  
PortId  
The User Priority for a frame received on this port. Since it can arrive in  
a tag header, it can have range 0-7.  
UserPriority  
RegenUserPrio  
The priority to which the incoming User priority is mapped for this port.  
References:  
Bridge port commands  
IDL series User Guide  
120  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3 ABOND Commands  
5.3.1 ABOND group intf Commands  
5.3.1.1 Get abond group intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get abond group intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.3.1.2 Create abond group intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create abond group intf ifname<interface-name> groupid <groupid-val>  
[ minaggrrateupstrm <minaggrrateupstrm-val> ] [ minaggrratednstrm  
<minaggrratednstrm-val> ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm <diffdelaytolupstrm-val> ]  
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm <diffdelaytoldnstrm-val> ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]  
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio  
<maxrxbitrateratio-val> ] [ linkhecthrshld <linkhecthrshld-val> ]  
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold <asmirlthreshold-val> ]  
[ maxatmportusrate <maxatmportusrate-val> ]  
5.3.1.3 Delete abond group intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete abond group intf ifname <interface-name>  
IP DSLAM  
121  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.3.1.4 Modify abond group intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify abond group intf ifname <interface-name> [ groupid <groupid-val> ]  
[ minaggrrateupstrm <minaggrrateupstrm-val> ] [ minaggrratednstrm  
<minaggrratednstrm-val> ] [ diffdelaytolupstrm <diffdelaytolupstrm-val> ]  
[ diffdelaytoldnstrm <diffdelaytoldnstrm-val> ] [ asmprotocol Enable | Disable ]  
[ sidformat EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ] [ maxrxbitrateratio  
<maxrxbitrateratio-val> ] [ linkhecthrshld <linkhecthrshld-val> ]  
[ numoflinksupforgrpup One | All ] [ asmirlthreshold <asmirlthreshold-val> ]  
[ maxatmportusrate <maxatmportusrate-val> ] [ enable | disable ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding  
type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not  
possible if interface is enabled  
<interface-name>  
Type: Create－ Mandatory  
Delete --－Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 31  
groupid <groupid-val>  
This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is  
configured statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be  
changed while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an  
operator to help identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or  
debugging of the link.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Modify － Optional  
minaggrrateupstrm  
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<minaggrrateupstrm-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0  
minaggrratednstrm  
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream  
<minaggrratednstrm-val> direction.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
122  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
diffdelaytolupstrm  
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in  
Upstream direction. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<diffdelaytolupstrm-val>  
Valid values: 0 -4  
Default value: 4  
diffdelaytoldnstrm  
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in  
downstream direction. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<diffdelaytoldnstrm-val>  
Valid values: 0 -24  
Default value: 4  
asmprotocol Enable  
|Disable  
This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be  
exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be  
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration  
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the  
links participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these  
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: enable  
sidformat EightBitSid  
|TwelveBitSid  
SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 1  
maxrxbitrateratio  
The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in  
upstream direction.  
<maxrxbitrateratio-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -4  
Default value: 4  
linkhecthrshld  
HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold  
for link to be part of group in Rx direction  
Type: Create － Optional  
<linkhecthrshld-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -10  
Default value: 2  
numoflinksupforgrpup  
One | All  
This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start  
ASM protocol  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0  
IP DSLAM  
123  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
asmirlthreshold  
IRL Threshold for ASM messages  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<asmirlthreshold-val>  
Valid values: 1 -8  
Default value: 8  
maxatmportusrate  
Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<maxatmportusrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 -8000  
Default value: 4000  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create abond group intf ifname abond-0 groupid 1 minaggrrateupstrm 5  
minaggrratednstrm 5 diffdelaytolupstrm 0 diffdelaytoldnstrm 0 asmprotocol Disable  
sidformat EightBitSID maxrxbitrateratio 2 linkhecthrshld 1 numoflinksupforgrpup  
One asmirlthreshold 0 maxatmportusrate 0  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ifname  
: abond-0  
GroupId  
: 1  
MinAggrRateUpstrm : 5  
DiffDelayTolUpstrm : 4  
MinAggrRateDnstrm : 5  
DiffDelayTolDnstrm : 4  
AsmProtocol  
MaxRxBitRateRatio  
CtrlVpi  
: Disable  
: 2  
: 0  
SidFormat  
: EightBitSID  
: 1  
: 0  
LinkHecThreshold  
CtrlVci  
NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp : One  
AsmIrlThreshold  
: 0  
MaxAtmPortUsRate  
Oper Status  
: 0  
: Up  
Admin Status  
: Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
IDL series User Guide  
124  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair Bonding  
type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Modification and deletion is not  
possible if interface is enabled  
GroupId  
This specifies the group id configured for this interface. This field is configured  
statically when the bonded group is provisioned and must not be changed  
while the group is in service. These fields may be used by an operator to help  
identify mis-configuration or to assist in management or debugging of the link.  
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Upstream direction.  
Minimum Aggregate Data Rate in bits per second in Downstream direction.  
MinAggrRateUpstrm  
MinAggrRateDnstrm  
DiffDelayTolUpstrm  
DiffDelayTolDnstrm  
AsmProtocol  
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in  
Upstream direction.  
The maximum differential delay among member links in a bonding group in  
downstream direction.  
This parameter specifies whether Autonomous Status Messages will be  
exchanged between CO and CPE. If it is disabled then the group would be  
bonded statically and CO would assume CPE to know all the configuration  
parameters like SID format, number of links in the bonded group and the links  
participating in bonding. If it is enabled then CO would inform all these  
parameters to CPE using Autonomous Status Messages.  
SID Format: 8 bit or 12 bit SID. Only 8 bit format is being supported  
SidFormat  
MaxRxBitRateRatio  
The maximum bit rate ratio among member links in a bonding group in  
upstream direction.  
LinkHecThreshold  
CtrlVpi  
HEC Error percentage of the link upstream rate which will act as Threshold for  
link to be part of group in Rx direction  
Control Channel VPI: VPI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM  
Messages  
CtrlVci  
Control Channel VCI: VCI value being used for Sending and Receiving ASM  
Messages  
NoOfLinksUpForGrpUp  
This field specifies the number of links required to be up for bonding to start  
ASM protocol  
AsmIrlThreshold  
MaxAtmPortUsRate  
Oper Status  
IRL Threshold for ASM messages  
Maximum ATM port Upstream Rate  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.  
IP DSLAM  
125  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.2 ABOND group stats Commands  
5.3.2.1 Get abond group stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get abond group stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.3.2.2 Reset abond group stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset abond group stats ifname <interface-name>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM based Multi pair Bonding  
type of interfaces. Valid value is abond-X  
Type: Reset － Mandatory  
Ifname  
<interface-name>  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1  
Example:  
$ get abond group stats ifname abond-0  
Output:  
ifname  
: abond-0  
AchievedAggrRateUpstrm : 10  
AchievedAggrRateDnstrm  
CellLossDnstrmCurrent  
: 12  
: 20  
CellLossUpstrmCurrent  
CellLossUpstrmPrv15min  
: 12  
: 12  
CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min : 20  
CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay : 12  
CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay  
CellLossDnstrmPrevDay  
GroupFailureCntPrev15Min  
GrpFailureCntPrevDay  
: 20  
: 20  
: 15  
: 15  
CellLossUpstrmPrevDay  
GroupFailureCntCurrent  
GrpFailureCntCurrentDay  
: 12  
: 15  
: 15  
GrpUnavailableSecCurrent : 15  
GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay : 15  
GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min : 15  
GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay  
ASMRxCnt  
: 15  
: 10  
ASMTxCnt  
: 10  
IDL series User Guide  
126  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GrpFailureReason  
: MinRateNotAchievedUpAndDn  
: 10  
AsmRxCrcErrorCount  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based  
Multi pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X  
Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in upstream  
direction.  
AchievedAggrRateUpstrm  
AchievedAggrRateDnstrm  
CellLossUpstrmCurrent  
Achieved aggregate data rate in bits per sec in downstream  
direction.  
Group cell loss count upstream for current 15 minutes.  
CellLossDnstrmCurrent  
CellLossUpstrmPrv15min  
CellLossDnstrmPrev15Min  
CellLossUpstrmCurrentDay  
Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current 15 minutes.  
Group cell loss count upstream for Last 15 minutes.  
Group cell loss count downstream for Last 15 minutes.  
Group cell loss count upstream for current Day.  
CellLossDnstrmCurrentDay  
CellLossUpstrmPrevDay  
Group Rx cell loss count downstream for current Day.  
Group Rx cell loss count upstream for previous Day.  
CellLossDnstrmPrevDay  
GroupFailureCntCurrent  
GroupFailureCntPrev15Min  
GrpFailureCntCurrentDay  
GrpFailureCntPrevDay  
GrpUnavailableSecCurrent  
GrpUnavailableSecPrev15Min  
GrpUnavailblSecCurrentDay  
GrpUnavailblSecPrevDay  
ASMTxCnt  
Group Rx cell loss count downstream for Previous Day.  
Group failure count for current 15 minutes.  
Group failure count for previous 15 minutes.  
Group failure count for current Day.  
Group failure count for previous Day.  
Group unavailable second current.  
Group unavailable second previous 15 Min.  
Group unavailable second current Day.  
Group unavailable second for previous Day.  
Group ASM Tx count.  
ASMRxCnt  
Group ASM Rx count.  
GrpFailureReason  
Failure reason for the abond Group.  
group Asm Rx crc error count.  
AsmRxCrcErrorCount  
IP DSLAM  
127  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.3 ABOND link entry Commands  
5.3.3.1 Get abond link entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get abond link entry [ifname <interface-name>] [lowif <lowif-val>]  
5.3.3.2 Create abond link entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>  
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]  
[asmrxgroupintf <asmrxgroupintf>] [asmrxlinkindex <asmrxlinkindex>]  
5.3.3.3 Delete abond link entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>  
5.3.3.4 Modify abond link entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify abond link entry ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>  
[txlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable] [rxlinkadminstatus Enable | Disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
128  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi  
pair Bonding type of interfaces. ValidValue is abond-X. Link  
can not be created, deleted or modified if associated abond  
group interface is enabled.  
Ifname  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: abond-0-abond-1  
This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)  
entry. Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
lowif <lowif-val>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify －Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
txlinkadminstatus  
Enable | Disable  
This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group. Type:  
Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: enable  
rxlinkadminstatus  
Enable | Disable  
This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group. Type:  
Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: enable  
asmrxgroupintf  
Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Valid values: abond-0_ABONDGR_MAX_IFINDEX  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
<asmrxgroupintf>  
asmrxlinkindex  
Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
<asmrxlinkindex>  
Example:  
$ create abond link entry ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0 txlinkadminstatus enable  
rxLinkadminstatus enable asmrxgroupintf abond-0 asmrxlinkindex dsl-0  
IP DSLAM  
129  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ifname  
: abond-0  
: abond-0  
lowif  
: dsl-0  
: dsl-0  
AsmRxGroupIntf  
AsmRxLinkIndex  
TxLinkAdminStatus : enable  
RxLinkAdminStatus : enable  
RxLinkOperStatus : Disable  
TxLinkOperStatus  
AsmTxLinkStatus  
AsmRxLinkStatus  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
: Disable  
: SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic  
: SelectedToCarryBondingTraffic  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi pair  
Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X. Link can not be  
created , deleted or modified if associated abond group interface is  
enabled.  
lowif  
This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL) entry.  
Valid Value is dsl-X ,dsli-X , dslf-X  
AsmRxGroupIntf  
AsmRxLinkIndex  
TxLinkAdminStatus  
RxLinkAdminStatus  
TxLinkOperStatus  
RxLinkOperStatus  
AsmTxLinkStatus  
Abond group Interface Index of proxy link.  
Lower Interface Index of Proxy link.  
This specifies the Tx Status for the link in a Group.  
This specifies the Rx Status for the link in a Group.  
The current operational status of the abond link in Tx direction.  
This specifies the rx operational Status for the link in a Group.  
The current Tx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM  
Messages.  
AsmRxLinkStatus  
The current Rx Link status of the abond link as reflected in ASM  
Messages.  
IDL series User Guide  
130  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.3.4 ABOND link stats Commands  
5.3.4.1 Get abond link stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get abond link stats [ifname <interface-name>] [lowif <lowif-val>]  
5.3.4.2 Reset abond link stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset abond link stats ifname<interface-name> lowif <lowif-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi  
pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X  
Type: Reset － Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 － 30  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)  
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X  
Type: Reset － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Example:  
$ get abond link stats ifname abond-0 lowif dsl-0  
Output  
ifname  
: abond-0  
: 10  
lowif  
: dsl-0  
ASMTxCount  
ASMRxCount : 10  
TxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded  
RxLinkFailureReason : HecLimitExceeded  
IP DSLAM  
131  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the ATM Based Multi  
pair Bonding type of interfaces. Valid Value is abond-X  
This specifies the interface index used for the abond link (DSL)  
interfaces. Valid Value is dsl-X, dsli-X, dslf-X  
lowif  
ASMTxCount  
ASMRxCount  
Per-link ASM Tx count. These are not exact counts and have  
been kept for debugging.  
Per-link ASM Rx count. These are not exact counts and have  
been kept for debugging.  
TxLinkFailureReason  
RxLinkFailureReason  
Failure reason for the abond link in Tx direction.  
Failure reason for the abond link in Rx direction.  
5.4 Aggregation commands  
5.4.1 Active Standby aggr info Commands  
5.4.1.1 Get actstdby aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get actstdby aggr info [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.1.2 Modify actstdby aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
modify actstdby aggr info ifname <interface-name> [status Enable | Disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
132  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname ifname  
This specifies the aggregator interface index on which active standby is to be  
enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: aggr-0  
Status  
This specifies whether active standby mode is to be enabled or not.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
enable | disable  
Example:  
$ get actstdby aggr info IfName aggr-0  
Output:  
Interface Index : aggr-0  
Status  
: Enable  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Index  
This specifies the aggregator interface index on which  
active standby is to be enabled. Valid Value is aggr-0.  
This specifies whether active standby mode is to be  
enabled or not.  
Status  
Caution:  
z
Active Standby mode shall not be enabled, if aggregator interface and  
redundancy aggregator are not created, or if LACP aggregator is created for the  
aggregator interface.  
z
If only Active Standby is desired and no load sharing is expected then bridge  
port shall be created over the aggregator only after Active Standby has been  
enabled for redundancy aggregator. If the bridge port is created over aggregator  
before enabling Active Standby for it, the load sharing shall start and continue till  
Active Standby is enabled.  
z
References:  
Redundancy commands.  
IP DSLAM  
133  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4.2 Aggr info Commands  
5.4.2.1 Get aggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get aggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.2.2 Create aggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create aggr intf ifname <interface-name> [ ip <ip-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ]  
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val> ] [ mgmtsvlanid  
<mgmtsvlanid-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ enable | disable ]  
5.4.2.3 Delete aggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get aggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.2.4 Modify aggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create aggr intf ifname <interface-name> [ ip <ip-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ]  
[ usedhcp False | True ] [ mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val> ] [ mgmtsvlanid  
<mgmtsvlanid-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ enable | disable ]  
IDL series User Guide  
134  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type  
of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0 Type: Create －  
Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0  
ip <ip-val>  
This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
mask <mask-val>  
This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If  
either of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also  
be non-null and vice versa. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
usedhcp False | True  
This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to  
obtain an IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: False, True  
Default value: false  
mgmtvlanid  
VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface.  
Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is  
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management Vlanid is  
specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero  
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use  
the value of 'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created  
on this interface as the Management Vlan Index. In case the  
management vlan (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated  
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) doesn't exist on the system  
then IP based management on this management VLAN shall  
not happen on the interface till the corresponding VLAN is  
created with the Net side port as its member.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<mgmtvlanid-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 － 4095  
Default value: 0  
IP DSLAM  
135  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mgmtsvlanid  
Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for  
management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this  
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field  
is true. If no management Svlanid is specified (in the create  
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify  
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid'  
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the  
management vlan id. In case the management vlan (virtual  
vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't  
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the  
associated ' psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system  
then IP based management shall not happen on the interface  
till the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side  
port as its member.  
<mgmtsvlanid-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 – 4095  
Default value: 0  
priority <priority-val>  
Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on  
Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if  
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native  
Vlan mode this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in  
stacked vlan mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 7  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create aggr intf IfName aggr-0 ip 172.25.100.100 mask 255.255.0.0 usedhcp  
False mgmtvlanid 2 mgmtsvlanid 2 priority 2 enable  
IDL series User Guide  
136  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface Index  
IP Address  
: aggr-0  
: 172.25.100.100  
Mask  
: 255.255.0.0  
UseDhcp  
: False  
: 2  
Mgmt VLAN Index  
Mgmt S-VLAN Index  
: 2  
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio : 2  
Oper Status  
: Up  
Admin Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Index  
This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator type of  
interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0  
IP Address  
Mask  
This specifies the IP address configured for the interface.  
This specifies the network mask configured for the interface. If either  
of 'IP Address' or 'mask' is non-null the other must also be non-null  
and vice versa.  
UseDhcp  
This specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to obtain an  
IP address for this interface from a DHCP server.  
Mgmt VLAN Index  
VLAN(C-Vlan) for management traffic on this interface. Non-zero  
value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'  
field is true. If no Management Vlanid is specified (in the create  
operation) or it's value is set to zero (either in create or modify  
operation) then the system shall use the value of 'portvlanid'  
associated with the bridge port created on this interface as the  
Management Vlan Index. In case the management vlan (i.e.  
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero)  
doesn't exist on the system then IP based management on this  
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the  
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.  
Applicable only in stacked vlan mode, this is S-Vlan for management  
traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if  
either 'ip' field is nonzero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no management  
Svlanid is specified (in the create operation) or it's value is set to zero  
(either in create or modify operation) then the system shall use the  
value of 'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this  
Mgmt S-VLAN Index  
IP DSLAM  
137  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
interface as the management vlan id. In case the management vlan  
(virtual vlan mapped to S-VLAN and C-VLAN for the frame) doesn't  
exist (ie. Virtual vlan mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated '  
psvlanid ', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system then IP based  
management shall not happen on the interface till the corresponding  
virtual-VLAN is created with the Net side port as its member.  
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio Priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs sent on Management  
VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is  
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native Vlan mode this priority  
shall be used for C-Vlan tag while in stacked vlan mode it shall be  
used for S-Vlan tag.  
Oper Status  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.  
Admin Status  
Cautions:  
z
If an aggregator interface is being created, all configurations of aggregated  
links (layer2 Ethernet interfaces), should be same.  
5.4.3 LACP Aggr Commands  
5.4.3.1 Get lacp aggr  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
gets lacp aggr [aggrifname <aggrifname-val >]  
5.4.3.2 Create lacp aggr  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val> [actorsystemprio  
<actorsystemprio-val>] [actoradminkey <actoradminkey-val>]  
[collectormaxdelay <collectormaxdelay-val>] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]  
IDL series User Guide  
138  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.4.3.3 Delete lacp aggr  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val>  
5.4.3.4 Delete lacp aggr  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify lacp aggr aggrifname <aggrifname-val> [actorsystemprio  
<actorsystemprio-val>] [actoradminkey <actoradminkey-val>]  
[collectormaxdelay <collectormaxdelay-val>] [aggrtype Static | Lacp]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
aggrifname  
The Aggregator interface name.  
Type: Create ---－ Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
<aggrifname-val>  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: aggr-0  
actorsystemprio  
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority  
value associated with the Actor's System ID.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<actorsystemprio-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
Default value: 10  
actoradminkey  
The current administrative value of the Key for  
the Aggregator  
<actoradminkey-val>  
Type: Create Optional  
Modify Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 65535  
Default value: 0  
collectormaxdelay  
The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute  
defines the maximum delay,in tens of  
microseconds,that may be imposed by the  
<collectormaxdelay-val>  
IP DSLAM  
139  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Frame Collector between receiving a frame from  
an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the  
frame to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 65535  
Default value: 0  
aggrtype Static | Lacp  
Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: Static  
Example:  
$ create lacp aggr aggrifname aggr-0 actorsystemprio 2 actoradminkey 1000  
collectormaxdelay 2 aggrtype Static  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Aggr IfName  
: aggr-0  
Mac Address  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01 Aggregate  
: true  
Actor Sys Priority : 2  
Actor Sys ID  
Partner Sys Priority : 2  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01  
: 10  
Partner Sys ID  
Actor Oper Key  
Actor Admin Key  
Aggregation Type  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Partner Oper Key  
: 2  
: 1000  
Collector Max Delay : 2  
: Static  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Aggr IfName  
Mac Address  
The Aggregator interface name.  
A 6-octet read-only value carrying the individual MAC  
address assigned to the Aggregator.  
Aggregate  
A read-only Boolean value indicating whether the  
Aggregator represents an Aggregate (TRUE) or an  
Individual link (FALSE).  
Actor Sys Priority  
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority value  
IDL series User Guide  
140  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
associated with the Actor's System ID.  
Partner Sys Priority  
Actor Sys ID  
A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value  
associated with the Partners SystemID.  
A 6-octet read only MAC address value used as a unique  
identifier for the System that contains this Aggregator.  
A 6-octet read-only MAC address value consisting of the  
unique identifier for the current protocol Partner of this  
Aggregator.A value of zero indicates that there is no known  
Partner.  
Partner Sys ID  
Actor Oper Key  
The current operational value of the Key for the  
Aggregator.  
Partner Oper Key  
Actor Admin Key  
Collector Max Delay  
The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator  
is current protocol Partner.  
The current administrative value of the Key for the  
Aggregator  
The value of this 16-bit read-write attribute defines the  
maximum delay,in tens of microseconds,that may be  
imposed by the Frame Collector between receiving a frame  
from an Aggregator Parser,and either delivering the frame  
to its MAC Client or discarding the frame.  
Aggregation type. It can be either static or lacp  
Aggregation Type  
Cautions:  
z
z
LACP aggregator creation shall fail, if aggregator interface is not created.  
LACP aggregator shall not be created, if Redundancy aggregator is created  
for an aggregator interface.  
References:  
z
z
create aggr intf  
get aggr intf  
IP DSLAM  
141  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4.4 LACP AGGRPort Info Commands  
5.4.4.1 Get aggrport info  
Description:  
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port information.  
Command Syntax:  
get lacp aggrport info [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.4.2 Modify lacp aggrport info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify LACP aggregator port information.  
Command Syntax:  
modify lacp aggrport info ifname <interface-name> [actoradminkey  
<actoradminkey-val>] [partadminkey <partadminkey-val>] [actorportprio  
<actorportprio-val>] [partadminportprio <partadminportprio-val>] [actorsysprio  
<actorsysprio-val>] [partadminsysprio <partadminsysprio-val>] [partadminsysid  
<partadminsysid-val>] [partadminport <partadminport-val>] [actoradminstate  
activity | timeout | aggr] [partadminstate activity | timeout | aggr] [aggrstatus  
enable|disable] [pktpriority <pktpriority-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Ifname  
The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the  
aggregator.  
<interface-name>  
Type : Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*  
actoradminkey  
The current administrative value of the Key for the  
Aggregator.  
<actoradminkey-val>  
Type : Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1  
partadminkey  
The current administrative value of the Key for the  
Aggregator's current protocol Partner.  
Type : Optional  
<partadminkey-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 2^16 – 1  
actorportprio  
The priority value assigned to this Aggregation  
IDL series User Guide  
142  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<actorportprio-val>  
Port Type : Optional  
Valid values : 0 - 2^8 – 1  
partadminportprio  
<partadminportprio-val  
>
The current administrative value of the port priority,  
for the protocol Partner.  
Type : Optional  
Valid values: 0 – 255  
actorsysprio  
A 2-octet read-write value indicating the priority  
value associated with the Actor's System ID.  
Type : Optional  
<actorsysprio-val>  
Valid values: 0 – 255  
partadminsysprio  
A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority  
<partadminsysprio-val> value associated with the Partner's System ID.  
Type : Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
partadminsysid  
A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value  
representing the administrative value of the  
Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's SystemID  
Type : Optional  
<partadminsysid-val>  
Valid values: 00:00:00:00:00:00 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:ff  
The current administrative value of the port  
number for the protocol Partner.  
Type : Optional  
partadminport  
<partadminport-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 65535  
actoradminstate  
activity | timeout |  
aggr  
Administrative state of actor  
Type: Optional  
partadminstate  
activity | timeout |  
aggr  
Administrative state of Partner.  
Type: Optional  
aggrstatus  
Specifies whether aggregation(bonding) is to be  
enabled over this Aggregation Port.  
Type : Optional  
enable|disable  
Valid values: enable|disable  
pktpriority  
For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for  
choice of traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface.  
Type: Modify Optional  
<pktpriority-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
IP DSLAM  
143  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ get lacp aggrport info ifname eth-0  
Output:  
Interface  
: eth-0  
: 10  
Port Is Aggregate  
Partner Oper Key  
Partner Admin Key  
: true  
: 2  
: 2  
Actor Oper Key  
Actor Admin Key  
Actor Port Priority  
Actor System Priority  
Actor System ID  
Actor Port  
: 1000  
: 1  
: 2  
Partner Admin Port Priority : 1  
Partner Oper Port Priority : 1  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Admin Sys Priority : 2  
: 2 Partner Oper Sys Priority : 2  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Admin Port : 1  
: 1  
Partner Admin Sys Id  
Partner Oper Sys Id  
Port Actor Admin State  
: 23:45:67:89:00:01 Partner Oper Port  
: distrib  
Port Partner Admin State : activity  
Port Actor Oper State : default  
Port Partner Oper State : default  
Attached Agg ID  
: aggr-0  
: Enable  
Selected Agg ID  
: aggr-0  
:2  
Aggregation Status  
LACP PacketsPrio  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.  
Port Is Aggregate  
Boolean value indicating whether the Aggregation Port is able to  
Aggregate ('TRUE'), or is only able to operate as an Individual link  
('FALSE').  
Actor Oper Key  
The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator.  
The current operational value of the Key for the Aggregator's current  
protocol Partner.  
Partner Oper Key  
Actor Admin Key  
The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator.  
The current administrative value of the Key for the Aggregator's current  
protocol Partner.  
Partner Admin Key  
Actor Port Priority  
Partner Admin Port  
Priority  
The priority value assigned to this Aggregation Port.  
The current administrative value of the port priority for the protocol  
Partner.  
Actor System Priority  
A 2-octet, read-write value indicating the priority value associated with  
the Actor's System ID.  
Partner Oper Port Priority  
Actor System ID  
The current operational value of the port priority for the protocol Partner.  
A 6-octet, read-write MAC address value, used as a unique identifier for  
the System that contains this Aggregator.  
IDL series User Guide  
144  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Partner Admin Sys  
Priority  
A 2-octet, read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with  
the Partner's System ID.  
Actor Port  
The port number locally assigned to the Aggregation Port.  
A 2-octet read-only value that indicates the priority value associated with  
the PartnerÌs System ID.  
Partner Oper Sys Priority  
Partner Admin Sys Id  
Partner Admin Port  
Partner Oper Sys Id  
A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the administrative  
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.  
The current administrative value of the port number for the protocol  
Partner.  
A 6-octet read-write MACAddress value representing the operational  
value of the Aggregation Port’s protocol Partner's System ID.  
The current operational value of the port number for the protocol Partner.  
Administrative state of Actor.  
Partner Oper Port  
Port Actor Admin State  
Port Partner Admin State  
Port Actor Oper State  
Port Partner Oper State  
Attached Agg ID  
Administrative state of Partner.  
Operational state of Actor.  
Operational state of Partner.  
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has  
currently selected.  
Selected Agg ID  
The identifier value of the Aggregator that this Aggregation Port has  
currently selected.  
Aggregation Status  
LACP PacketsPrio  
Whether or not aggregation(bonding) is to be enabled over this  
Aggregation Port..  
For LACP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic  
class/Queue on outgoing interface.  
References:  
z
z
lacp aggrport list  
lacp aggrport stats  
IP DSLAM  
145  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.4.5 LACP AGGRPort List Commands  
5.4.5.1 Get lacp aggrport list  
Description:  
Use this command to get a LACP aggregator port list.  
Command Syntax:  
get lacp aggrport list [aggrifname <aggrifname-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Aggrifname  
The Aggregator interface name.  
Type : Optional  
<aggrifname-val>  
Valid values: aggr-*  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$ get lacp aggrport list  
Output:  
Aggr IfName : aggr-0  
Port List  
: eth-0 eth-1  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Aggr IfName  
Port List  
The Aggregator interface name.  
List of the ports corresponding to given aggregator index.  
References:  
z
z
z
lacp aggr  
lacp aggrport info  
lacp aggrport stats.  
IDL series User Guide  
146  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.4.6 LACP AGGRPort Stats Commands  
5.4.6.1 Get lacp aggrport stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get LACP aggregator port statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get lacp aggrport stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.6.2 Reset lacp aggrport stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset LACP aggregator port statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
reset lacp aggrport stats ifname <interface-name>  
Note:  
This command is not supported in this release.  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Ifname  
The IfName of the Ethernet interface for the  
aggregator.  
<interface-name>  
Type : Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values : eth-*, eoa-*  
Example :  
$ get lacp aggrport stats ifname eth-0  
Output:  
Interface  
: eth-0  
: 1  
LACPDUs Rx  
MarkerPDUs Rx  
LACPDUs Tx  
: 1  
: 1  
: 1  
MarkerPDUs Tx  
Marker Response PDUs Rx : 1  
Unknown Rx : 1  
Marker Response PDUs Tx : 1  
Illegal Rx : 1  
IP DSLAM  
147  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
The Interface name of the Ethernet interface for the aggregator.  
The number of valid LACP PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.  
The number of LACP PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.  
The number of valid Marker PDUs received on this Aggregation Port.  
LACPDUs Rx  
LACPDUs Tx  
MarkerPDUs Rx  
MarkerPDUs Tx  
Marker Response  
PDUs Rx  
The number of Marker PDUs transmitted on this Aggregation Port.  
The number of valid Marker Response PDUs received on this  
Aggregation Port.  
Marker Response  
PDUs Tx  
The number of Marker Response PDUs transmitted on this  
Aggregation Port.  
Unknown Rx  
The number of frames received, that either carry the Slow Protocols  
Ethernet Type value, but contain an unknown PDU, or, are addressed  
to the Slow Protocols group MAC Address, but do not carry the Slow  
Protocols Ethernet Type.  
Illegal Rx  
The number of frames received, that carry the Slow  
Protocols Ethernet Type value, but contain a badly  
formed PDU or an illegal value of Protocol Subtype.  
References:  
z
z
z
lacp aggr  
lacp aggrport list  
lacp aggrport info.  
5.4.7 Redundancy aggr info Commands  
5.4.7.1 Get rdncy aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rdncy aggr info [ifname <interface-name]  
IDL series User Guide  
148  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.4.7.2 Create rdncy aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create rdncy aggr info ifname ifname [revdistrib Enable | Disable] [fallback  
Enable | Disable]  
5.4.7.3 Delete rdncy aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete  
Command Syntax:  
delete rdncy aggr info ifname <interface-name>  
5.4.7.4 Modify rdncy aggr info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify  
Command Syntax:  
modify rdncy aggr info ifname <interface-name> [revdistrib Enable | Disable]  
[fallback Enable | Disable]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy  
Aggregator type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: aggr-0  
revdistrib Enable |  
It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced  
for traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are  
active, for this aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are  
expected on the redundant links (if uplink aggregating device is  
layer2 switch), Reverse distribution filtering may be enabled.  
Disable  
IP DSLAM  
149  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
But if there is no chance of such duplicate packets, or the  
duplicate packets need not have a special handling, reverse  
distribution filtering may be disabled.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
fallback Enable |  
This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator  
interface, when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to  
re-propagation of protocol PDUs to the links based on the state  
of the links, this may be enabled if re-propagation of protocol  
PDUs is required for immediate restoration of peer protocol  
state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is not required and  
Protocol time out may only be triggered for re-propagation,  
Fallback trigger should be disabled.  
Disable  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create rdncy aggr info IfName aggr-0 revdistrib disable fallback disable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface Index  
: aggr-0  
Reverse Distribution : disable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
FallBack : disable  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Index  
This specifies the interface index used for the Redundancy Aggregator  
type of interfaces. Valid Value is aggr-0  
Reverse Distribution  
It denotes whether reverse distribution filtering is to be enforced for  
traffic in the receiving direction, when both the links are active, for this  
aggregator interface. If duplicate packets are expected on the redundant  
links (if uplink aggregating device is layer2 switch) Reverse distribution  
filtering may be enabled. But if there is no chance of such duplicate  
packets or the duplicate packets need not have a special handling  
reverse distribution filtering may be disabled.  
IDL series User Guide  
150  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
FallBack  
This specifies whether fallback is to happen for aggregator interface,  
when a link goes down. As fallback trigger leads to re-propagation of  
protocol PDUs to the links based on the state of the links, this may be  
enabled if re-propagation of protocol PDUs is required for immediate  
restore of peer protocol state on uplink devices. If such a treatment is  
not required and Protocol time out may only be trigger for  
re-propagation, Fallback trigger should be disabled.  
Caution:  
z
Redundancy aggregator shall not be created, if aggregator interface is not  
created or if LACP aggregator is created for the aggregator interface.  
References:  
z
z
create aggr intf command  
get aggr intf command  
5.4.8 Redundancy aggrport list Commands  
5.4.8.1 Get aggrport list  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rdncy aggrport list [aggrifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
aggrifname  
Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2  
interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0  
Type: Get -- Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: aggr-0  
Example:  
$ get rdncy aggrport list aggrifname aggr-0  
IP DSLAM  
151  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Aggr IfName  
PortList  
: aggr-0  
: eth-0 eth-1  
Port List Interface type : None  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Aggr IfName  
Index of the redundancy aggregator, for which layer2  
interfaces are associated. Valid Value is aggr-0  
The complete list of active layer2 interfaces associated  
with the aggregator interface by virtue of redundancy.  
Each bit set represents the Ethernet interface, that is  
actively associated with redundancy based  
PortList  
aggregation. An interface is actively associated with  
aggregator interface, if data for the aggregator interface  
can be transmitted/received over it.  
Port List Interface type  
It denotes what type of interfaces (Physical ethernet)  
are present in Port List. If no interface are present in  
port list the value shall be None  
5.4.9 Redundancy aggr stats Commands  
5.4.9.1 Get rdncy aggr stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rdncy aggr stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.4.9.2 Reset rdncy aggr stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset rdncy aggr stats ifname <interface-name>  
IDL series User Guide  
152  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator  
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are  
desired. Valid Value is aggr-0  
Type: Reset -- Optional  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: aggr-0  
Example:  
$ get rdncy aggr stats IfName aggr-0  
Output:  
Interface Index  
Collapse Count  
DeCollapse Count  
: aggr-0  
: 1  
: 1  
Last Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS]  
: 04/21/2003:12:23:34  
Last De-Collapse Time [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : 04/21/2003:12:23:34  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Index  
This specifies the interface index used for the Aggregator  
type of interfaces for which the redundancy stats are desired.  
Valid Value is aggr-0  
Collapse Count  
This specifies the number of times one of the redundant  
interfaces has gone down and the traffic had to be moved on  
to the other redundant interface, which is up.  
DeCollapse Count  
Last Collapse Time  
This specifies the number of times one of the failed  
redundant interfaces has come up and the traffic had to be  
redistributed among mutually redundant interfaces.  
This specifies time at which the last collapse (one of the  
[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] redundant interface has gone down) occurred. The display  
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.  
Last De-Collapse Time  
This specifies time at which the last de-collapse (one of the  
[MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] failed redundant interface has come up) occured. The display  
format shall be mm/dd/yyyy:hr:min:sec.  
IP DSLAM  
153  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.5 ATM commands  
5.5.1 AAL5 VC Statistics Commands  
5.5.1.1 Get atm aal5 stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get AAL5 VC statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get atm aal5 stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Ifname  
This parameter specifies the interface for which  
information is desired  
<interface-name>  
Type : Get - Optional  
Valid values : aal5-0 -  
Example:  
$ get atm aal5 stats ifname aal5-0  
Output:  
Low IfName  
VPI  
: atm-0 VC IfName  
VCI  
Rx Frames count : 85  
: aal5-0  
: 0  
: 1  
Tx Frames count : 100  
Tx Bytes count : 1535  
Rx Bytes count  
Oversized SDU  
: 1200  
: 0  
CRC Errors count : 0  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VC IfName  
The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics needs to be  
retrieved.  
Low IfName  
VPI  
This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0  
This is the Virtual Port Identifier.  
VCI  
This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.  
Tx Frames count  
Rx Frames count  
Tx Bytes count  
Rx Bytes count  
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs transmitted on this AAL5 VCC.  
The number of AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.  
The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.  
The number of octets contained in AAL5 CPCS PDUs received on this AAL5 VCC.  
IDL series User Guide  
154  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
CRC Errors count  
Oversized SDU  
This specifies the number of CRC errors encountered.  
This specifies the number of oversized SDUs received.  
References:  
z
z
z
atm vc related commands  
atm port and statistics related commands  
atm vc statistics commands.  
5.5.2 ATM OAM CC Commands  
5.5.2.1 Get oam cc vc  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get oam cc vc [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.5.2.2 Modify oam cc vc  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify oam cc vc ifname <interface-name> [action act | deact] [dir sink | src |  
both] [mode auto | manual]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired.  
In case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid  
interfaces should be displayed.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
action act | deact  
This field specifies the CC action to be taken. This is used along with  
CC direction field.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
dir sink | src | both  
This field specifies the direction for CC  
activation/Deactivation.Direction could be source (src), sink or both.  
IP DSLAM  
155  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type: Modify -- Optional  
mode auto | manual  
This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get oam cc vc ifname aal5-0  
Output:  
ifName  
------------------------------------------------------------  
aal5-0 Manual activated LOC  
Mode  
SourceOperStatus SinkOperStatus Initiator  
Self  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
ifName  
This parameter specifies the interface, for which information is desired. In  
case the field is not specified, then the information for all valid interfaces  
should be displayed.  
Mode  
This specifies the activation/deactivation capability at a VCC.  
This field specifies the current operational state of source point of the VCC.  
This field specifies the current operational state of sink point of the VCC.  
This field is valid only in auto mode and it specifies the current initiator of CC  
Activation/Deactivation.  
SourceOperStatus  
SinkOperStatus  
Initiator  
References:  
z
z
z
atm vc related commands.  
atm port and statistics related commands.  
atm oam loopback commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
156  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.5.3 ATM OAM Loopback Commands  
5.5.3.1 Get oam lpbk vc  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get oam lpbk vc [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.5.3.2 Modify oam lpbk vc  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify oam lpbk vc ifname <interface-name> [e2e | seg] [lbid <lbid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting  
configured.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Mandatory  
e2e | seg  
This specifies the loop back type used. It may be: e2e or segment.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Lbid < lbid-val>  
This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Example:  
$ get oam lpbk vc ifname aal5-0  
Output:  
IfName  
: aal5-0  
: e2e  
VPI : 1  
VCI : 1  
LB Type  
OAM Location Id : 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff  
OAM LB Result : E2e Succeeded  
IP DSLAM  
157  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.  
This is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.  
VPI  
VCI  
This is the Virtual Port Identifier.  
LB Type  
OAM Location Id  
OAM LB Result  
This specifies the loop back type used. It may be:e2e or segment.  
This defines the loopback site, which will loopback the cell.  
This specifies the result of the loop back test. It may be Result  
Unavailable, Seg Succeeded, Seg Failed, E2e Succeeded, E2e Failed,  
Test Aborted, or Test In Progress.  
References:  
z
z
atm vc related commands.  
atm port and statistics related commands.  
5.5.4 ATM Port Commands  
5.5.4.1 Get atm port  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get atm port [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.5.4.2 Create atm port  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create atm port ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> [ maxvc <maxvc-val> ]  
[ maxvpibits <maxvpibits-val> ] [ maxvcibits <maxvcibits-val> ] [ oamsrc  
<oamsrc-val> ] [ orl <orl-val> ] [ trfclassprofileid <trfclassprofileid-val> ]  
[ profilename <profilename-val> ] [ ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val> ]  
[ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ mirrormode data | mirror ] [ enable |  
disable ]  
IDL series User Guide  
158  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.5.4.3 Delete atm port  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete atm port ifname <interface-name>  
5.5.4.4 Modify atm port  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify atm port ifname <interface-name>[ maxvc <maxvc-val> ] [ maxvpibits  
<maxvpibits-val> ] [ maxvcibits <maxvcibits-val> ] [ oamsrc <oamsrc-val> ] [ orl  
<orl-val> ] [ trfclassprofileid <trfclassprofileid-val> ] [ profilename  
<profilename-val> ] [ atmtransporttype cell | packet ] [ enable | disable ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
Physical interface index  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
<interface-name>  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is  
configured. Lower interface can be of type dsl-* or dsli-* or dslf-* or  
abond-*  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
maxvc <maxvc-val>  
This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at  
this ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the  
value packet  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -8  
Default value: 8  
maxvpibits  
The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM  
<maxvpibits-val>  
interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
159  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
Default value: 8  
maxvcibits  
This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use  
at this ATM interface.  
<maxvcibits-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 16  
Default value: 16  
oamsrc <oamsrc-val>  
Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will  
respond to all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not  
valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff  
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be  
applied on this interface.  
orl <orl-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 64 - 6000  
Default value: 54000  
trfclassprofileid  
This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<trfclassprofileid-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -8  
Default value: 1  
profilename  
This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<profilename-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "SPPROFILE"  
ctlpktinstid  
This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this  
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while  
creating an interface an instance is created internally from the default  
profile governed by the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will  
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.  
The default instance is governed by macro 0. Type: Create － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -146  
<ctlpktinstid-val>  
Default value: 0  
atmtransporttype cell  
|packet  
This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either  
Cell which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the  
IDL series User Guide  
160  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
UTOPIA interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells  
corresponding to Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM  
interface. This is not modifiable if any ATM VC is created on top of this  
ATM port.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 1  
mirrormode data |  
mirror  
This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror  
mode, only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and  
regular customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in  
mirror mode.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: data  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0 maxvc 5 maxvpibits 6 maxvcibits 12S  
oamsrc 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff orl 3000 trfclassprofileid 3 profilename gold  
ctlpktinstid 1 atmtransporttype Cell mirrormode mirror enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName  
: atm-0  
: 5  
LowIfName  
: dsl-0  
MaxVccs  
MaxVpiBits  
MaxVciBits  
OAMSrc  
: 6  
: 12  
: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff  
: 3000  
ORL(kbps)  
UnknownVPI  
ProfileName  
: 35  
UnknownVCI  
: 35  
: gold  
Current Output Rate : 64  
trfclassprofileid : 3  
Ctl Pkts Instance Id : 1  
ATM Transport Type  
Mirror Mode  
: Cell  
: mirror  
: Up  
Oper Status  
Admin Status : Enable  
IP DSLAM  
161  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
Physical interface index  
LowIfName  
This is the IfIndex of the low interface on which this ATM port is configured.  
Lower interface can be of type 94 or 124 or 125 or 0xfffffff9  
This specifies the maximum number of VCCs (PVCCs), supported at this  
ATM interface. This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value  
packet  
MaxVccs  
MaxConfVccs  
MaxVpiBits  
This specifies the current number of VCCs configured on this port.  
The maximum number of active VPI bits configured for use at the ATM  
interface.  
MaxVciBits  
OAMSrc  
This specifies the maximum number of active VCI bits configured for use at  
this ATM interface.  
Loopback source id assigned to the ATM port. The ATM port will respond to  
all loopback cells, which carry this OAM id. This field is not valid if the  
atmtransporttype has the value packet.  
ORL(kbps)  
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value in KBPS to be applied  
on this interface.  
UnknownVPI  
UnknownVCI  
This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VPI on this ATM interface.  
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.  
This parameter specifies the last seen unknown VCI on this ATM interface.  
This field is not valid if the atmtransporttype has the value packet.  
This specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the ATM port.  
This parameter specifies the current output rate value in KBPS that is  
available on this interface, based on the minimum of DSL trained rate and  
OutPut Rate limit configured for the ATM port.  
ProfileName  
Current Output Rate  
trfclassprofileid  
This specifies the traffic class profile to be associated with the ATM port.  
This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this  
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while creating an  
interface an instance is created internally from the default profile governed by  
the macro 1 and associated to the interface. This will reduce the total number  
to instances that can be now created by one. The default instance is  
governed by macro 0.  
Ctl Pkts Instance Id  
ATM Transport Type This specifies the transport type of the atm interface. This can be either Cell  
which means that actual Atm Cells shall be received over the UTOPIA  
interface, or Packet , which means that Pseudo Cells corresponding to  
Packet VDSL shall be received over this ATM interface. This is not modifiable  
IDL series User Guide  
162  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
if any ATM VC is created on top of this ATM port.  
Mirror Mode  
This field configures ATM port in data mode or mirror mode. In mirror mode,  
only the mirrored packets are allowed to go out of the port and regular  
customer data is forbidden. Scheduling profile field is ignored in mirror mode.  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or down.  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.  
Oper Status  
Admin Status  
5.5.5 ATM VC Commands  
5.5.5.1 Create atm vc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create a new ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).  
Command Syntax :  
create atm vc intf ifname <interface-name> vpi <vpi-val> vci <vci-val> lowif  
<atm-port-interface-name> [enable | disable] [aal5] [a5txsize  
<aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size>] [a5rxsize <aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size>] [vcmux | llcmux | auto  
| ethernet] [pvc] [channel fast|interleaved] [ mgmtmode  
data|mgmt|DataAndMgmt| raw] [ maxnumproto <maxnumproto-val> ]  
[ autostatus Enable|Disable ] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]  
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype  
dynamic | opstatechange ] [ ctlpktgroupid <ctlpktgroupid> | none ]  
5.5.5.2 Delete atm vc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete an existing ATM Virtual Circuit (VC).  
Command Syntax:  
delete atm vc intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.5.5.3 Get atm vc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to display information corresponding to a single VC, or for all  
VCs.  
Command Syntax: get atm vc intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
IP DSLAM  
163  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.5.5.4 Modify atm vc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify ATM VC parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
modify atm vc intf ifname <interface-name> [vpi <vpi-val>] [vci <vci-val>]  
{enable | disable} [a5txsize <aal5-cpcs-tx-sdu-size>] [a5rxsize  
<aal5-cpcs-rx-sdu-size>] [vcmux | llcmux | auto | ethernet] [ mgmtmode data |  
mgmt | DataAndMgmt | raw] [ autosupportedprot none|{pppoa | eoa | ipoa}+]  
[ autovcmuxforcedprot None | pppoa | eoa | ipoa] [ autosensetriggertype  
dynamic | opstatechange ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies name of VC Interface.  
Type: Create – Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Delete – Mandatory  
Get – Optional  
Modify – Mandatory  
Valid values : aal5-0 - *  
lowif  
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.  
<atm-port-interfacenam Type: Mandatory  
e>  
Valid values : atm-0 - *  
vpi <vpi-val>  
Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new  
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also,  
the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in  
one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be  
0.  
Type : Create – Mandatory  
Modify – Optional  
Valid values : 0-2^8  
vci <vci-val>  
Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the  
new VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled.  
Also, the VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status  
in one command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to  
be 0.  
Type: Create – Mandatory  
Modify – Optional  
Valid values : 1-2^16  
IDL series User Guide  
164  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
mgmtmode Data |  
Mgmt | DataAndMgmt  
| Raw  
It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only  
data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of  
remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that  
ATM VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode,  
data transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on  
the same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the acceptable  
values for atmVCCAAL5EncapType are llcmux and auto. In Mgmt  
mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM VC and both  
Ethernet as well as non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be  
received at the Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created,  
then only non-ethernet packets on that ATM VC shall be received at the  
Control Plane. However, if EoA is not created then all the packets on  
that ATM VC shall be received at the Control Plane. However, to  
configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, a good practice is to to  
create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to prevent  
flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be  
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to  
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the  
ATM VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode  
cannot be changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not  
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: Data  
enable|disable  
This specifies the Admin Status of the VC.  
Type: Optional  
Default Value: enable  
aal5  
This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL  
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM  
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.  
Type: Create Optional  
Default value: aal5  
a5txsize  
This specifies the maximum transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.  
<aal5-cpcs-txsdu-size > Type: Optional  
Valid values : 1-1536  
Default Value: 1536  
a5rxsize  
This specifies the maximum receive CPCS SDU size to be used  
<aal5-cpcs-rxsdu-size> Type: Optional  
Valid values : 1-1536  
Default Value: 1536  
vcmux|llcmux|auto|  
ethernet  
This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5  
SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode  
IP DSLAM  
165  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is only used to sense the llc/vcmux. Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet  
can be created only over an ATM port which has value of  
atmtransporttype as packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be  
0/0. aaltype, mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for  
an ATM VC with encaptype as Ethernet.  
Type: Optional  
Default Value: llcmux  
Pvc  
This specifies the type of VC. The only value supported is PVC.  
Type: Optional  
Default Value: pvc  
channel  
This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's  
cells have to be transmitted/ received. This field is deprecated and  
currently not in use.  
fast|interleaved  
Type: Optional  
Default Value: Interleaved  
Maxnumproto  
This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active  
protocol stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol  
stack is supported.  
<maxnumproto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: 1  
Autostatus  
This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In  
the Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and  
created based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For  
example, if the protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA  
packet, then the corresponding EoA stack will be created above this  
interface. However, the corresponding EoA interface must have been  
created with the config status field set as config mode. This field is not  
valid if encaptype is Ethernet.  
Enable|Disable  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: disable  
autosupportedprot  
none|{pppoa | eoa |  
ipoa}+  
This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto  
detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols  
mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is  
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 1  
autovcmuxforcedprot  
None | pppoa | eoa |  
ipoa  
This field specifies that if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user  
can configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. It can only  
be present with the autostatus flag as enable. In case of a conflict with  
IDL series User Guide  
166  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: none  
autosensetriggertype  
dynamic |  
This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or  
higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when  
Operational Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is  
'dynamic', then detection can happen anytime a packet is received. If its  
value is 'opstatechange', then autodetection happens only when  
Operational status of ATM VC changes to UP. This field is not valid if  
encaptype is Ethernet.  
opstatechange  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: dynamic  
ctlpktgroupid  
The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows  
for this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as  
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt  
group info command. If this group does not have entries for some of the  
flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port,  
for which this VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows  
shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being  
created.  
ctlpktgroupid | none  
Type: Create － Optional  
Valid values: 0 -50  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create atm vc intf ifname aal5-0 lowif atm-0 vpi 10 vci 10 enable aal5 pvc  
a5txsize 1536 a5rxsize 1536 llcmux mgmtmode data autosupportedprot pppoa  
eoa autovcmuxforcedprot pppoa autosensetriggertype dynamic ctlpktgroupid none  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
VC IfName  
VPI  
: aal5-0  
: 0  
Low IfName  
VCI  
: atm-0  
: 35  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
AAL Type  
channel  
: Up  
Oper Status  
Aal5 Rx Size  
AAL5 Encap  
: Down  
: 1536  
: 1536  
: AAL5  
: Interleaved  
: Data  
: llcmux  
Last Change(sec) : 0  
Row Status  
MgmtMode  
: active  
IP DSLAM  
167  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
VC Type  
: PVC  
VC Topology  
: Point to Point  
Max simultaneous protocol : 1  
Auto Status  
: Disable  
: pppoa eoa  
Auto Supported Protocol  
Auto VC Mux Forced Protocol : None  
Auto Sense Trigger Type : dynamic  
Auto Curr Sensed Encaps Typee : none  
Ctl Pkts Group Id : none  
Auto Supported Protocol : pppoa eoa  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VC Interface Name. It can be : aal5-0 - *  
VC IfName  
Low IfName  
VPI  
Interface Index of the ATM port, on which this VC is getting configured.  
Virtual Path Identifier. In order to modify, the VPI value shall be the new  
VPI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the  
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one  
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.  
Virtual Circuit Identifier. In order to modify, the VCI value shall be the new  
VCI value and the admin status of VC interface shall be disabled. Also, the  
VPI and VCI value cannot be modified along with admin status in one  
command. If encaptype is Ethernet than value of this field has to be 0.  
This specifies the actual/current state of the interface. It can be either Up  
or Down  
VCI  
Oper Status  
Admin Status  
Aal5 Tx Size  
Aal5 Rx Size  
Aal Type  
This specifies the desired state of the interface. It may be either Up/Down.  
This specifies the transmit CPCS SDU size to be used.  
This specifies the receive CPCS SDU size to be used.  
This specifies the AAL type in use for this VC. The only type of AAL  
supported in Columbia Packet is AAL5. This field is not valid for an ATM  
VC with encaptype as Ethernet.  
Aal5 Encap  
This specifies the data encapsulation method to be used over the AAL5  
SSCS layer. "auto" means autosense the muxType(llc/vc). Auto mode is  
only used to sense the llc/vcmux . Atm VC with encaptype as ethernet can  
be created only over an ATM port which has value of atmtransporttype as  
packet.The VPI/VCI values for this atm vc shall be 0/0. aaltype,  
mgmtmode and oam related parameters are not valid for an ATM VC with  
encaptype as Ethernet.  
channel  
This extension specifies the type of channel on which the ATM VC's cells  
have to be transmitted/received. This field is deprecated and currently  
not in use.  
IDL series User Guide  
168  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Last Change  
MgmtMode  
The value of sysUpTime at the time this VC entered its current operational  
state.  
It denotes the Management Mode of the ATM VC. If it is Data, then only  
data transmission can take place. If it is Mgmt, then management of  
remote CPE device can happen on that ATM VC and packets on that ATM  
VC shall start coming to Control Plane. In DataAndMgmt mode, data  
transmission as well as remote CPE management can happen on the  
same ATM VC interface. In DataAndMgmt mode, the only acceptable  
value for atmVCCAAL5EncapType is llc. In Mgmt mode, EoA interface  
can't be created on the ATM VC and both Ethernet as well as non-Ethernet  
packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. In  
DataAndMgmt mode, if EoA is created then only non-Ethernet packets on  
that ATM VC shall be received at Control Plane. However, if EoA is not  
created then all the packets on that ATM VC shall be received at Control  
Plane. However, to configure ATM VC in DataAndMgmt mode, good  
practice is to create ATM VC in disable mode till EoA is created on it, to  
prevent flooding at Control Plane. In order to run STP, the mode has to be  
DataAndMgmt. If the mode is RawATM(4), ATM cells are given to  
Control Plane. In this mode, EoA interface cannot be created on the ATM  
VC. If EoA interface is already created on the ATM VC, its mode cannot be  
changed to either Mgmt(2) or RawATM(4). This field is not valid if  
encaptype is Ethernet.  
RowStatus  
VC Type  
This defines the row-status of the interface entry  
This field specifies whether VC type is PVC or SVC.  
VC Topology  
Max simultaneous  
protocol  
This field specifies the VC connection topology type.  
This field specifies the maximum number of simultaneous active protocol  
stacks supported on this interface. Currently, only one protocol stack is  
supported.  
Auto Status  
This field specifies whether the Auto mode is to be enabled or not. In the  
Auto mode, the stack above this interface will be determined and created  
based on the protocol packets sensed on this interface. For example, if the  
protocol packet sensed above this interface is an EoA packet, then the  
corresponding EoA stack will be created above this interface. However,  
the corresponding EoA interface must have been created with the  
gsvEoaConfigMode field's bit corresponding to the 'Auto' set.  
This field specifies Higher layer protocols which are supported for auto  
detection on the given ATM VC. Only the packets if the protocols  
mentioned in this field can lead to Auto detection. This field is meaningful  
only when autostatus flag is enable.  
Auto Supported  
Protocol  
Auto VC Mux Forced  
This field specifies if the encap type detected is VCMux, the user can  
IP DSLAM  
169  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Protocol  
configure to build a specific protocol stack automatically. This field is  
meaningful only when autostatus flag as enable. In case of conflict with  
autoSupportedProtocols, its value will override.  
Auto Sense Trigger  
Type  
This field specifies at what time autodetection of Encapsulation type or  
higher protocol layers is to be done - all the time or only when Operational  
Status of ATM VC is changed to UP. If its value is 'dynamic', then detection  
can happen anytime a packet is received. If its value is 'opstatechange',  
then autodetection happens only when Operational status of ATM VC  
changes to UP. This field is not valid if encaptype is Ethernet.  
This field specifies the current sensed Encapsulation type in case the  
Encapsulation type is being autodetected. The value of this field will be the  
same as the field 'AAL5 Encapsulation Type' if the Encapsulation type is  
preconfigured. This is a read only field for all agents, except for the Auto  
Sense Agent.  
Auto Curr Sensed  
Encaps Type  
Ctl Pkts Group Id  
The Control packet instance group associated with this VC. The flows for  
this interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as mapped for  
the flows corresponding to the groupid configured in ctrlpkt group info  
command. If this group does not have entries for some of the flows, then  
those flows shall be mapped to the ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this  
VC is being created. If the group id is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped  
to ctlpktinstid of ATM port, for which this VC is being created.  
Caution:  
The specified lower interface should exist. Please refer to the create atm port  
command.  
References:  
z
z
z
z
ATM interface commands  
ATM statistics commands  
ATM OAM commands  
ATM VC statistics commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
170  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.5.6 ATM VC Statistics Commands  
5.5.6.1 Get atm vc stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get statistical information about a specific or all ATM virtual  
circuits.  
Command Syntax:  
get atm vc stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This specifies the Virtual Circuit. If this is not specified,  
then information for all VCs is displayed.  
Type : Get – Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values : aal5-0 - *  
Example:  
$ get atm vc stats ifname aal5-0  
Output:  
Low IfName  
VPI  
: atm-0  
: 1  
VC IfName  
VCI  
: aal5-0  
: 1  
Total Tx Cells count : 250  
CLPI 0 Rx Cells count : 10  
Total Rx Cells count : 20  
Rx Pkts Rejected count : 0  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
LowIf  
VPI  
This specifies the ATM port name. It can be : atm-0  
It is the Virtual Port Identifier.  
VCI  
It is the Virtual Circuit Identifier.  
VC IfName  
The name of the aal5 (aal5-0 etc) interface, for which statistics  
needs to be retrieved.  
Total Tx Cells count  
Total Rx Cells count  
CLPI 0 Rx Cells  
The total number of valid ATM cells transmitted by this interface.  
The total number of valid ATM cells received by this interface.  
The number of valid ATM cells received by this interface with  
CLP=0.  
Rx Pkts Rejected count  
The total number of valid ATM cells discarded by the interface.  
IP DSLAM  
171  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
References:  
z
z
z
z
Other atm vc related commands  
oam lpbk command  
atm port related commands  
atm statistics related commands  
IDL series User Guide  
172  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6 Bridging Commands  
5.6.1 Bridge forwarding Commands  
5.6.1.1 Get bridge forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]  
5.6.1.2 Delete bridge forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or  
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the  
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is  
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id  
used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor  
learnt in the system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid  
range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of  
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Delete － Optional  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
macaddr  
A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering  
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall  
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an  
individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.  
Type: Delete － Optional  
<macaddr-val>  
Get － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
173  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get bridge forwarding vlanid 10 macaddr 02:2e:22:3d:44:56  
Output:  
MAC Addr  
PortId  
VlanId  
10  
Status  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
02:2e:22:3d:44:56  
10  
learned  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
MAC Addr  
A unicast MAC address for which the bridge has forwarding and/or filtering  
information. In the case of "delete all" entries in a given FDB; the MacAddr shall  
have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual  
entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.  
VlanId  
Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding and/or  
filtering information. To delete an individual learnt entry or all learnt entries, the  
FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is  
ignored except when the value is 4097 which is the value of a special Vlan Id used  
for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are neither created nor learnt in the  
system. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also  
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and  
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
PortId  
Status  
Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to the  
value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This  
may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port  
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.  
The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that the value of the  
corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was learned, and is being used. mgmt  
(5) - the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the  
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value internal (6) indicates  
that the entry is an internal entry and cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets  
created for the IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those  
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address in this entry shall be  
the one specified in the mac address profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of  
the Bridge Port.The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky  
port.  
IDL series User Guide  
174  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
References:  
z
z
z
z
bridge port related commands  
bridge port stats command  
bridge static related commands  
bridge mode related commands.  
5.6.2 Bridge Mode Commands  
5.6.2.1 Get bridge mode  
Description:  
Use this command to get the current bridging mode.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge mode  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get bridge mode  
Output:  
Bridging Mode is Enabled  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
z
z
z
z
z
z
modify bridge mode command  
bridge port command  
bridge port stats command  
bridge static command  
bridge forwarding command  
DHCP Client commands.  
IP DSLAM  
175  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.6.3 Bridge Port Cap Commands  
5.6.3.1 Get bridge port cap  
Description:  
Use this command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port cap [portid <portid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
The index of base port  
Type :Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 386  
Default value: None  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$get bridge port cap  
Output:  
Portid : 45  
Port Capabilities : Tagging FrameTypes IngressFiltering  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
portid  
The index of base port.  
Port Capabilites  
Capabilities that are allowed on a per-port basis.  
IDL series User Guide  
176  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.6.4 Bridge port forwarding Commands  
5.6.4.1 Get bridge port forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port forwarding [portid <portid-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr  
<macaddr-val>]  
5.6.4.2 Delete bridge port forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge port forwarding portid <portid-val> [vlanid <vlanid-val>]  
[macaddr <macaddr-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Port number of the port on which a frame having a source address equal to  
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been  
seen. This may have a value of "0" if the statically configured address has a  
dynamic port binding and the port has not been learnt yet.  
Type: Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 386  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has forwarding  
and/or filtering information. To delete an individual learned entry or all  
learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a valid value in case of IVL. In  
SVL case, this value is ignored except when the value is 4097, which is the  
value of a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that  
are neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan transparency  
feature is supported, the valid range for this also includes 4097. VLAN here  
means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case  
of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Delete － Optional  
Get － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
177  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 0 -4096  
macaddr  
In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a given FDB; the  
MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To  
delete an individual entry, valid value of Mac address has to be specified.  
Type: Delete － Optional  
<macaddr-val>  
Get － Optional  
Example:  
$ get bridge port forwarding portid 10 vlanid 10 macaddr 02:03: ee: 34:55:66  
Output :  
Port Id : 10  
Mac Addr : 02:03:ee:34:55:66  
Status : Mgmt  
vlan id : 10  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
Port number of the port on which a frame having a source  
address equal to the value of the corresponding instance of  
dot1qTpFdbAddress, has been seen. This may have a value of  
"0" if the statically configured address has a dynamic port  
binding and the port has not been learnt yet.  
vlan id  
Vlan Id to uniquely identify the entry for which the bridge has  
forwarding and/or filtering information. To delete an individual  
learned entry or all learned entries, the FdbId should be set to a  
valid value in case of IVL. In SVL case, this value is ignored  
except when the value is 4097, which is the value of a special  
Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are  
neither created nor learned in the system. When Vlan  
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for this also  
includes 4097. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of  
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan  
Mode.  
Mac Addr  
In the case of "delete all" entries corresponding to a port in a  
given FDB; the MacAddr shall have INVALID value specified by  
FF: FF: FF: FF: FF: FF. To delete an individual entry, valid  
value of Mac address has to be specified.  
Status  
The status of this entry. The value learned (3), indicates that  
the value of the corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbPort was  
learned, and is being used. mgmt (5) - the value of the  
IDL series User Guide  
178  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
corresponding instance of dot1qTpFdbAddress is also the  
value of an existing instance of dot1qStaticAddress. The value  
internal (6) indicates that the entry is a internal entry and  
cannot be deleted by the user. This entry gets created for the  
IPOE/PPPOE interfaces when the bridge port over those  
IPOE/PPOE interfaces gets admin enabled. The mac address  
in this entry shall be the one specified in the mac address  
profile and VlanId shall be the PortVlanId of the Bridge Port.  
The value other (1) indicates that this is associated with a sticky  
port.  
5.6.5 Bridge Port Map Commands  
5.6.5.1 Get bridge port map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port map [portid <portid-val>] [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.6.5.2 Create bridge port map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create bridge port map portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name>  
5.6.5.3 Delete bridge port map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge port map portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name>  
IP DSLAM  
179  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
The bridge port with which a lower interface is being associated in the  
autosensing scenario.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*  
'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces  
belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for this  
interface.  
ifname  
<interface-name>  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Values: eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe-*  
Example:  
$ create bridge port map portid 2 ifname eoa-0  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Port Id : 2  
Interface Index : eoa-0  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
The bridge port with which a lower interface is being  
associated in the autosensing scenario.  
Interface Index  
'ifname' associated with 'portid'. Only the indices of interfaces  
belonging the types eoa, pppoe or ipoe, are valid values for  
this interface..  
IDL series User Guide  
180  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.6 Bridge Port Starts Table Commands  
5.6.6.1 Get bridge port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get the statistics of a single port, or all the ports.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port stats [portid <portid-val>]  
5.6.6.2 Reset bridge port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset bridge port statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
reset bridge port stats portid <portid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid  
This is the bridge port identifier. If this is not specified in  
the get command, then information for all ports is  
displayed.  
<portid-val>  
Type : Get － Optional  
Reset － Mandatory  
Valid values : 1- 578  
Example:  
$ get bridge port stats portid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
PortId  
: 1  
: 138  
: 3  
: 300  
: 350  
: 400  
Max Info Size  
In Frames  
: 1500  
: 129  
Out Frames  
In Discards  
HC In Frames  
HC Out Frames  
HC In Discards  
IP DSLAM  
181  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
This is the bridge port identifier. It can be : 1- 386  
The maximum size of the INFO (non-MAC) field that this port will  
receive or transmit.  
Max Info Size  
Out Frames  
In Frames  
The number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its  
segment.  
The number of frames that have been received by this port from its  
segment.  
In Discards  
Count of valid frames received, which were discarded (i.e., filtered)  
by the Forwarding Process.  
HC In Frames  
HC Out Frames  
HC In Discards  
Number of frames that have been received by this port from its  
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.  
Number of frames that have been transmitted by this port to its  
segment. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.  
Count of valid frames received and discarded (i.e filtered) by the  
Forwarding Process. This is valid only for Ethernet interfaces.  
5.6.7 Bridge Port Table Commands  
5.6.7.1 Create bridge port intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create a new bridge port.  
Command Syntax:  
create bridge port intf portid <portid-val> ifname <interface-name> [maxucast  
<max-ucast-addresses> ] [learning enable|disable][status enable|disable]  
[stickystatus enable | disable] [FdbModify enable | disable][ aclglbdenyapply  
Enable | Disable ] [ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable |  
disable ] [ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype  
trusted | untrusted ]  
5.6.7.2 Delete bridge port intf  
Description:  
This command is used to delete an existing bridge port.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge port intf portid <portid-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
182  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.6.7.3 Get bridge port intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge port intf [portid <portid-val>]  
5.6.7.4 Modify bridge port intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge port intf portid <portid-val> [ maxucast <maxucast-val> ]  
[ learning enable | disable ] [ status enable | disable ] [ stickystatus enable |  
disable ] [ fdbmodify enable | disable ] [ aclglbdenyapply Enable | Disable ]  
[ aclglbtrackapply Enable | Disable ] [ proxyarpstatus enable | disable ]  
[ arptstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ porttype trusted |  
untrusted ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
The bridge port id  
Type: Modify －Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 578  
ifname  
Interface name associated with the Port,  
<interface-name>  
Type: mandatory,  
Values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*, ipoe-*, vir-*  
maxucast  
This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can be  
learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of bridge  
port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be  
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 128. The default value  
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a CPE  
side bridge port is 16. Max of number of unicast entries that can be  
learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The default value  
for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a bridge  
port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that can be  
learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256. The default  
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on a  
<maxucast-val>  
IP DSLAM  
183  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an  
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field  
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
learning enable |  
The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1) indicates  
that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value disable  
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this bridge port.  
The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side bridge ports  
shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value shall be enable.  
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over a PPPOE/IPOE  
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be  
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
disable  
status enable | disable  
The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall be  
created in enabled AdminStatus by default.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
stickystatus enable  
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1) indicates  
that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also indicates that  
the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any other port. The  
entries learnt on this port can only be removed by management action or  
by making the value as disable (2) so that the entries can be aged out.  
This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an PPPOE/ IPOE  
interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field shall be  
ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
|disable  
fdbmodify enable |  
This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding  
database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an  
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field  
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
disable  
aclglbdenyapply  
This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by  
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value  
of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the  
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value  
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an  
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field  
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Enable |Disable  
aclglbtrackapply  
This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by  
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default value  
Enable |Disable  
IDL series User Guide  
184  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side ports, the  
default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the default value  
shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an  
PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed. Any value of this field  
shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
proxyarpstatus enable The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field  
|disable  
indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port. This  
field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or  
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a filter  
rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as  
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user  
wants to receive proxy arp requests.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
arptstatus Enable |  
This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP packets  
received/transmitted on this port. When enabled, ARP source MAC  
address of the incoming ARP packets (both request/reply) will be changed  
to virtual MAC address (if applicable) and the ARP target MAC address of  
the outgoing ARP reply packets will be changed to the original host MAC  
address (if applicable).  
Disable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
darpstatus Enable |  
This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port are to  
be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port  
mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only on the NET  
side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute  
'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of 'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP  
packets are to be directed as mentioned above, only if both the flags are  
enabled. If any of the two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded  
as per the normal bridging flow.  
Disable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
porttype trusted |  
This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information is  
used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on trusted  
ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
untrusted  
Example:  
$ create bridge port intf ifname eth-0 portid 10 maxucast 10 learning enable  
stickystatus enable status enable fdbmodify disable aclglbdenyapply Disable  
aclglbtrackapply Disable proxyarpstatus enable arptstatus enable darpstatus  
enable porttype trusted  
IP DSLAM  
185  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Port Id  
: 10  
Max Unicast Addresses : 10  
Learning Status  
Port Admin Status  
FDB Modify  
: enable  
: Disable  
: Disable  
Port Oper Status  
Sticky Status  
: Disable  
: enable  
Acl Global Deny Apply : Disable  
Acl Global Track Apply : Disable  
ProxyArpStatus  
ArpTStatus  
Port Type  
: enable  
: enable  
: trusted  
Sensed IfIndex  
: eoa-1  
Directed ARP status : enable  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
The bridge port id  
Port Id  
If Name  
The interface name associated with the given port.  
Max Unicast Addresses  
This specifies the maximum number of unicast addresses, which can  
be learnt from this port. This is modifiable when the admin status of  
bridge port is disabled. Max of number of unicast entries that can be  
learnt/configured on a birdge port on CPE side is 4096. The default  
value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or configured on  
a CPE side bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries that  
can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on NET side is 4096. The  
default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or  
configured on a bridge port is 4096. Max of number of unicast entries  
that can be learnt/configured on a birdge port on downlink side is 256.  
The default value for number of unicast entries that can be learnt or  
configured on a bridge port is 256. This field is unused if the bridge  
port is created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is  
sensed. Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port  
created over a PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Learning Status  
The State of Learning on this bridge port. The value enable (1)  
indicates that unicast Mac address learning is enabled and the value  
disable indicates that unicast Mac address learning is disabled on this  
bridge port. The default value of learning status for CPE/Downlink side  
bridge ports shall be enable and for NET side bridge port default value  
shall be disable. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over  
an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of  
this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE  
interface.  
Port Oper Status  
The current operational state of the bridge port. If AdminStatus of the  
IDL series User Guide  
186  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bridge port is disable (2), then OperStatus of the port should be disable  
(2). If AdminStatus of the bridge port is changed to enable(1), then  
OperStatus of the port should change to enable(1) if the bridge port is  
ready to transmit and receive network traffic. The bridge port will have  
the OperStatus value as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the bridge  
port is 'config' and it is waiting for a packet to be sensed, on its lower  
interface index, to get activated.  
Port Admin Status  
Sticky Status  
The desired state of the bridge port. On creation the bridge port shall  
be created in enabled AdminStatus by default.  
Indicates if the port has been set as sticky. The value enable(1)  
indicates that the entries learnt on this port won't be aged out. It also  
indicates that the entries learnt on this port shall not be learnt on any  
other port. The entries learnt on this port can only be removed by  
management action or by making the value as disable (2) so that the  
entries can be aged out. This field is unused if the bridge port is  
created over an PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.  
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
FDB Modify  
This specifies whether this port can overwrite an existing forwarding  
database entry. This field is unused if the bridge port is created over an  
PPPOE/ IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed. Any value of this  
field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a PPPOE/IPOE  
interface.  
Acl Global Deny Apply  
This specifies whether the global acl macentry deny list represented by  
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default  
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side  
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the  
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is  
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/IPOE is sensed.  
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
Acl Global Track Apply  
This specifies whether the global acl macentry track list represented by  
MO AclGlobalMacList is to be applied to this port or not. The default  
value of this parameter shall depend on the port type. For Net side  
ports, the default value shall be disable and for the cpe side ports the  
default value shall be enable. This field is unused if the bridge port is  
created over an PPPOE/IPOE interface or PPPOE/ IPOE is sensed.  
Any value of this field shall be ignored for a bridge port created over a  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
ProxyArpStatus  
The Proxy Arp Status on this bridge port. The value enable of this field  
IP DSLAM  
187  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
indicates that Proxy Arp request can be received through this port.  
This field can be enabled only on bridge port created over ethernet or  
aggregator interface. Before enabling this field user should create a  
filter rule with rule action as Copy to Control and rule description as  
IPOE_CONTROL and map it to all those interfaces through which user  
wants to receive proxy arp requests.  
Sensed IfIndex  
This specifies the sensed interface index corresponding to the bridge  
port. This field is used to determine the stack sensed for this bridge  
port in the auto sensing scenario. This field cannot be modified. If the  
oper status of the bridge port is 'enable' or 'disable' then the value of  
this field gives the interface index on which the bridge port is currently  
stacked. If the oper status is 'dormant' and the value of this field is  
other than '-', then it represents the last interface index on which the  
bridge port had been stacked.  
ArpTStatus  
This specifies whether ARP translation will be done on the ARP  
packets received/transmitted on this port. When enabled, ARP  
source MAC address of the incoming ARP packets (both  
request/reply) will be changed to virtual MAC address (if applicable)  
and the ARP target MAC address of the outgoing ARP reply packets  
will be changed to the original host MAC address (if applicable).  
This specifies whether the ARP packets received on this bridge port  
are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to  
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. This field can be enabled only  
on the NET side bridge port. This attribute is effective in conjunction  
with the attribute 'gsv dot1qVlanStaticDirectedARP' of  
Directed ARP status  
'Dot1qVlanStatic' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned  
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the two is disabled,  
the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the normal bridging flow.  
This field specifies whether the port is trusted or not. This information  
is used by some of the control plane applications to send packet on  
trusted ports, in case the application fails to uniquely determine a port.  
Port Type  
IDL series User Guide  
188  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.8 Bridge static mcast Commands  
5.6.8.1 Get bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]  
5.6.8.2 Create bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
[egressports egressports | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> |  
none]  
5.6.8.3 Delete bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
5.6.8.4 Modify bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge static mcast vlanid <vlanid-val> mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
[egressports <egressports-val> | none | none] [forbidegressports  
<forbidegressports-val>> | none]  
IP DSLAM  
189  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast"  
capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is shared across VLANS.  
Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In  
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can  
have its own information for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a  
mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case  
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value  
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with  
vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode  
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
mcastaddr  
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the filtering  
information of this entry applies.  
<mcastaddr-val>  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
egressports  
<egressports-val>  
|none  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a  
specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A port may not be added in  
this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0  
Default value: 0  
Forbidegressports  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and destined for a  
<forbidegressports-val> specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded, regardless of any  
| none  
dynamic information. A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member  
of the set of ports in EgressPorts.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0  
Default value: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
190  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 recvport 0  
egressports 10 forbidegressports 20 SKIP 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
VLan Index  
: 7  
: 10  
Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01  
Egress ports  
Forbidden Egress ports : 20  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VLan Index  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is  
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed  
as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent  
Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information  
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory  
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case  
when the attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable"  
has value "none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not  
supported for VLAN with vlanid as  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan  
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan  
Mode.  
Mcast Address  
Egress ports  
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the  
filtering information of this entry applies.  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and  
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded. A  
port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of  
ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.  
Forbidden Egress ports  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and  
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be forwarded,  
regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not be added in  
this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in EgressPorts.  
IP DSLAM  
191  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cautions:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
References:  
z
Bridge Commands  
5.6.9 Bridge static ucast Commands  
5.6.9.1 Get bridge static ucast  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge static ucast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>]  
5.6.9.2 Create bridge static ucast  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>  
[portid <portid-val>]  
5.6.9.3 Delete bridge static ucast  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
192  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.6.9.4 Modify bridge static ucast  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge static ucast vlanid <vlanid-val> ucastaddr <ucastaddr-val>  
[portid <portid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of device  
capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is a valid value.  
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode  
and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
ucastaddr  
The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering info applies.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<ucastaddr-val>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
portid <portid-val>  
The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific unicast  
address will be flooded in the event that it has not been  
learned. It also specifies the set of ports a specific unicast  
address may be dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only  
the CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set in this  
list. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values:1-386  
Example:  
$create bridge static ucast vlanid 1 ucastaddr 1:1:1:1:1:1 recvport 0 portid 2 status  
1 cfgmode Config  
IP DSLAM  
193  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Vlan Index : 1  
Ucast Address : 1:1:1:1:1:1  
Port Id  
: 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Vlan Index  
The VLAN index referring to this VLAN. In case of  
device capability not supporting vlans, vlan id "0" is  
a valid value. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in  
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case  
of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Ucast Address  
Port Id  
The destination unicast MacAddr to which filtering  
info applies.  
The set of ports, for which a frame with a specific  
unicast address will be flooded in the event that it  
has not been learned. It also specifies the set of  
ports a specific unicast address may be  
dynamically learnt on. This list shall have only the  
CPE side ports. Currently only one port can be set  
in this list. Type - optional, Valid values:1-386  
Cautions:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
References:  
z
Bridge Commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
194  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.10 Bridge tbg traps Commands  
5.6.10.1 Get bridge tbg traps  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge tbg traps  
5.6.10.2 Modify bridge tbg traps  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge tbg traps [bindingstatus enable | disable] [fdbtrapstatus enable |  
disable] [vmactrapstatus enable | disable] [traploss Ok | Notok]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
bindingstatus enable  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding  
status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry  
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same  
Forwarding Database.  
|disable  
Type: Modify － Optional  
fdbtrapstatus enable  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of  
forwarding table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is  
learnt/ created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by  
the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
|disable  
vmactrapstatus  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap  
when MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the  
M2VMac database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps  
shall be given by the packet filter module to the applications registered for  
these traps.  
enable |disable  
Type: Modify － Optional  
traploss Ok | Notok  
This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table  
trap is acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability  
of resources. ‘OK’ means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap  
is lost an indication shall be given to the application, which can then  
IP DSLAM  
195  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
synchronize its database with the forwarding table. ‘NotOK’ means trap loss is  
not acceptable. In this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any  
forwarding table entry getting learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get  
learnt/modified/delete.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Example:  
$ get bridge tbg traps  
Output:  
Binding Status Changed Trap : enable  
Forwarding Table Trap : enable  
Virtual Mac Trap  
: enable  
Forwarding Table Trap Loss : OK  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Binding Status  
Changed Trap  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of 'binding  
status changed' trap. This trap is sent when the port binding of a unicast entry  
changes, i.e. the same address is learnt on a different port in the same Forwarding  
Database.  
Forwarding Table  
Trap  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of forwarding  
table trap. This trap is sent when an entry in the forwarding table is learnt/  
created/modified/deleted or aged out. These traps shall be given by the packet  
filter module to the applications registered for these traps.  
Virtual Mac Trap  
This parameter allows the user to enable or disable the generation of trap when  
MAC to Virtual MAC mapping for the MAC address is not found in the M2VMac  
database associated with the corresponding interface. These traps shall be given  
by the packet filter module to the applications registered for these traps.  
This parameter tells whether the loss of binding status and forwarding table trap is  
acceptable or not. Such a trap can be lost because of the unavailability of  
resources. OK means trap loss is acceptable. In this case, when the trap is lost an  
indication shall be given to the application, which can then synchronize its  
database with the forwarding table. NotOK means trap loss is not acceptable. In  
this case, if it is not possible to raise the trap for any forwarding table entry getting  
learnt/modified/deleted, that entry shall not get learnt/modified/delete.  
Forwarding Table  
Trap Loss  
References:  
z
Bridge Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
196  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.11 GARP Port Info Commands  
5.6.11.1 Get garp port info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get garp port info [portid <portid-val>]  
5.6.11.2 Modify garp port info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify garp port info portid <portid-val> [jointimer <jointimer-val>] [leavetimer  
<leavetimer-val>] [leavealltimer <leavealltimer-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Index of the Bridge Port  
Type  
: Get - Optional  
Modify - Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 386  
jointimer  
The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be  
less than half the Leave time value  
<jointimer-val>  
Type  
:Optional  
Valid values: 10-255  
leavetimer  
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value should  
be greater than 2 times Join time value.  
<leavetimer-val>  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 10-255  
leavealltimer  
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value  
should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time value.  
<leavealltimer-val>  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 10-65535  
Example:  
$ get garp port info  
IP DSLAM  
197  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
PortId  
Join Timer Leave Timer LeaveAll Timer  
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------  
6
30  
90  
5000  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
Index of the Bridge Port.  
Join Timer  
The GARP Join time, in centiseconds. Join time value should be  
less than half the Leave time value.  
Leave Timer  
The GARP Leave time, in centiseconds. Leave time value  
should be greater than 2 times Join time value.  
The GARP LeaveAll time, in centiseconds. LeaveAll time value  
should be large (more than 15 times) relative to Leave time  
value.  
LeaveAll Timer  
References:  
z
GVRP Commands  
5.6.12 STP Group Commands  
5.6.12.1 Get stp info  
Description:  
Use this command to display the current status of the Spanning Tree Protocol  
Group.  
Command Syntax:  
get stp info  
5.6.12.2 Modify stp info  
Description:  
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol group.  
Command Syntax:  
modify stp info [priority <priority-val>] [maxage <maximum-age>] [htime  
<hello-time>] [fdelay <forward-delay>] [enable|disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
198  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.6.12.3 Reset stp stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset STP global statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
reset stp stats  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Priority <priority-val>  
The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the  
first two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other  
(last) 6 octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of  
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 65535.  
Maxage  
The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information  
learned from the network on any port before it is discarded,  
in units of seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge  
is currently using.  
<maximum-age>  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 6 - 40.  
htime <hello-time>  
The amount of time between the transmission of  
Configuration bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it  
is the root of the spanning tree or trying to become so, in  
units of second. This is the actual value that this bridge is  
currently using.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 10  
Fdelay <forward-delay>  
This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,  
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when  
moving towards the Forwarding state. The value  
determines how long the port stays in each of the Listening  
and Learning states, which precede the Forwarding state.  
This value is also used, when a topology change has been  
detected and is underway, to age all dynamic entries in the  
Forwarding Database.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 4 - 30  
Enable|disable  
Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.  
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan  
IP DSLAM  
199  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
mode.  
Type : Optional  
Valid values:  
disable | enable  
Example:  
$ modify stp info priority 0x20 maxage 25 htime 5 fdelay 20 enable  
Output:  
Protocol Spec. : IEEE 8021D  
Priority : 0x20  
Top. Changes  
Desig Root  
Root Port  
: 1  
Curr Top. Age(sec) : 35.0  
: 00:30:4F:10:5A:6C:DB:20 Root Cost : 0  
: None  
Hold Time (sec) : 1.0  
Curr Max Age (sec) : 20.0  
Curr Hello Time(sec) :2.0  
Curr Fwd Delay (sec) :15.0  
Br Max Age(sec) : 25  
Br Hello Time(sec) : 5  
Br Fwd Delay(sec) : 20  
STP status  
: enable  
Verbose Mode Off  
Set Done  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Protocol Spec  
An indication of what version of the Spanning Tree Protocol is  
being run.  
Priority  
The value of the write-able portion of the Bridge ID,i.e.,the first  
two octets of the (8 octet long) Bridge ID. The other (last) 6  
octets of the Bridge ID are given by the value of  
dot1dBaseBridgeAddress.  
Top. Changes  
Curr Top. Age(Sec)  
Desig Root  
The total number of topology changes detected by this bridge  
since the management entity was last reset or initialized.  
The time (in second) since the last time a topology change was  
detected by the bridge entity.  
The bridge identifier of the root of the spanning tree as  
determined by the Spanning Tree Protocol as executed by this  
node. This value is used as the Root Identifier parameter in all  
Configuration Bridge PDUs originated by this node.  
The cost of the path to the root as seen from this bridge.  
The port number of the port which offers the lowest cost path from  
this bridge to the root bridge.  
Root Cost  
Root Port  
Hold Time (Sec)  
This time value determines the interval length during which no  
more than two Configuration bridge PDUs shall be transmitted by  
IDL series User Guide  
200  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
this node, in units of seconds.  
Br Max Age(Sec)  
The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned  
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of  
seconds, when this bridge is the root of the spanning tree. Note  
that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the range for this parameter is  
related to the value of dot1dStpBridgeHelloTime.  
The maximum age of Spanning Tree Protocol information learned  
from the network on any port before it is discarded, in units of  
seconds. This is the actual value that this bridge is currently  
using.  
Curr Max Age (Sec)  
Br Hello Time(Sec)  
The value that all bridges use for HelloTime when this bridge is  
acting as the root.  
Curr Hello Time(Sec)  
The amount of time between the transmission of Configuration  
bridge PDUs by this node on any port when it is the root of the  
spanning tree or trying to become so, in units of second. This is  
the actual value that this bridge is currently using.  
The value that all bridges use for ForwardDelay when this bridge  
is acting as the root. Note that IEEE-802.1D specifies that the  
range for this parameter is related to the value of  
dot1dStpBridgeMaxAge.  
Br Fwd Delay(Sec)  
Curr Fwd Delay (Sec)  
This is the actual time value, measured in units of seconds,  
controls how fast a port changes its spanning state when moving  
towards the Forwarding state. The value determines how long the  
port stays in each of the Listening and Learning states, which  
precede the Forwarding state. This value is also used, when a  
topology change has been detected and is underway, to age all  
dynamic entries in the Forwarding Database.  
STP status  
Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.  
Spanning Tree Protocol can not be enabled in Stacked Vlan  
mode.  
References:  
z
z
get stp info command  
stp port related commands.  
IP DSLAM  
201  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.13 STP Port Commands  
5.6.13.1 Get stp port  
Description:  
Use this command to display port specific information for the Spanning Tree  
Protocol, for all ports, or for the specified port.  
Command Syntax:  
get stp port info portid <portid-val>  
5.6.13.2 Modify stp port  
Description:  
Use this command to alter the configuration for the spanning tree protocol.  
Command Syntax:  
modify stp port info portid <portid-val> [enable|disable] [pcost <pcost-val>]  
[priority <priority-val>] [pktpriority <pktpriority-val>]  
5.6.13.3 Reset stp port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset the STP port stats for a specific interface.  
Command Syntax:  
reset stp port stats portid <portid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning  
Tree Protocol management information.  
Type : Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 to 386;  
enable|disable  
Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Port or not  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
pcost <pcost-val>  
The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the  
spanning tree root, which include this port.  
Type : Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
priority <priority-val>  
The value of the priority field which is contained in the most  
IDL series User Guide  
202  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)  
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet  
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given  
by the value of dot1dStpPort.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: 0 -255.  
pktpriority  
For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic  
class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is  
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the  
VC, on which the packet is to be sent.  
<pktpriority-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Example:  
$ modify stp port portid 1 disable pcost 1000 priority 0x10  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Port ID : 1  
Priority  
: 0x0  
State : Forwarding  
Path Cost : 100  
PortStatus : Enable  
Desig Cost : 0  
Desig Root:00:30:4F0:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C  
Desig Port : 0x8000  
STP Status : Enable  
Fwd Transitions : 1  
Set Done  
Port ID : 1  
Priority : 0x0  
PortStatus : Enable  
Desig Cost : 0  
State : Forwarding  
Path Cost : 100  
Desig Root:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C Desig Bridge:00:30:4F:10:5A:6C  
Desig Port : 0x8000  
STP Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off  
Set Done  
Fwd Transitions : 1  
STP PacketsPrio : 2  
IP DSLAM  
203  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
The port number of the port for which this entry contains Spanning  
Tree Protocol management information.  
Priority  
The value of the priority field which is contained in the most  
significant 6 bits of the more significant octet of the (2 octet long)  
Port ID. The least significant 2 bits of the more significant octet  
and the less significant octet (total 10 bits) of the Port ID is given  
by the value of dot1dStpPort.  
State  
The port's current state as defined by application of the Spanning  
Tree Protocol. This state controls what action a port takes on  
reception of a frame.  
Port Status  
Path Cost  
The enabled/disabled status of the port.  
The contribution of this port to the path cost of paths towards the  
spanning tree root which include this port.  
Desig Cost  
Desig Root  
The path cost of the Designated Port of the segment connected to  
this port. This value is compared to the Root Path Cost field in  
received bridge PDUs.  
The unique Bridge Identifier of the Bridge recorded as the Root in  
the Configuration BPDUs transmitted by the Designated Bridge  
for the segment to which the port is attached.  
Desig Bridge  
Desig Port  
The Bridge Identifier of the bridge which this port considers to be  
the Designated Bridge for this port's segment.  
The Port Identifier of the port on the Designated Bridge for this  
port's segment.  
Fwd Transitions  
The number of times this port has transitioned from the Learning  
state to the Forwarding state.  
STP status  
Spanning Tree Protocol to be enabled on the Bridge or not.  
For STP PDUs, this priority shall be used for choice of traffic  
class/ Queue on out¦going interface. In case the bridge port is  
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the  
VC, on which the packet is to be sent  
STP PacketsPrio  
Caution:  
z
The specified interface should be an existing bridge interface.  
References:  
bridge port intf command.  
z
IDL series User Guide  
204  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.6.14 Transparent Bridging Table Commands  
5.6.14.1 Modify bridge tbg info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntac:  
modify bridge tbg info [aging <aging-timeout> ] [slaveaging <aging-timeout> ]  
[netaging <aging-timeout> ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport  
enable | disable] [ mcastsupport enable | disable ] [ mcastdrop enable | disable ]  
[ dropiffdbfull <dropiffdbfull-val> ] [ resnetlearning <resnetlearning-val> ]  
[resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ]  
5.6.14.2 Get Bridge tbg info  
Description:  
Use this command to get bridging related global information.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge tbg info  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Aging <aging-timeout> The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned  
forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can be configured  
when aging is to be stopped.  
Type: Modify Optional  
Valid values: 10 -1000000  
slaveaging  
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned  
forwarding information learned from the slave device. The  
recommended value for this is more than or equal to the value for  
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be configured when aging is to  
be stopped.  
<aging–timeout>  
Valid values: 10 -1000000  
netaging <aging –  
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically learned  
forwarding information from NET side port. This is used only for full  
bridge configuration. The recommended value of net aging timeout  
should be greater than that of the ìAgingî parameter. The value 0 can  
be configured when aging is to be stopped.  
timeout>  
Valid values: 10 -1000000  
IP DSLAM  
205  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
floodsupport enable |  
This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets are to be  
flooded or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan  
configuration for flood support to determine if flooding has to be done  
for unknown unicast packet.  
disable  
Type : Optional  
Valid Values: enable | disable  
bcastsupport  
This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported or not.  
The value for this is used along with per vlan configuration broadcast  
support, to determine if broadcasting has to be done for the broadcast  
packet.  
enable|disable  
mcastsupport  
Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.  
Type : Optional  
enable|disable  
Valid Values: enable| disable  
mcastdrop  
Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be dropped, or to  
be forwarded, if multicast is not supported. This is only valid if  
dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.  
enable|disable  
Type : Optional  
Valid Values: enable|disable  
dropiffdbfull enable |  
This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be done  
because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be dropped. If this  
is enabled the frame for which learning could not be done because of  
limit exceeded shall be dropped, else forwarded based on bridge  
forwarding logic.This being enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a  
response to such a frame from which learning could not be done shall  
come the frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,  
shall not be found in forwarding table.  
disable  
Type : Optional  
Valid Values: enable or disable  
Default value: enable  
resnetlearning enable  
This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for residential  
bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in case of vlan with  
residential bridging if 'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and  
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of vlan with  
'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is governed only by per  
port configuration i.e. 'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification  
of this parameter is not supported.  
| disable  
Type : Optional  
Valid Values: enable or disable  
Default value: enable  
resvmacprofileid  
The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved Mac  
IDL series User Guide  
206  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<resvmacprofileid-val>  
destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses are the  
multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE  
802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid value then the behavior for  
Reserved Mac destined frames is determined based on Resvd Mac  
profile associated with the VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN  
here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual  
Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -4  
Example:  
$ modify bridge tbg info aging 20 slaveaging 100  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
MacAddress  
No. of Ports  
: 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF  
: 0  
: Transparent  
: 300  
Base Type  
Aging Timeout(sec)  
Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 600  
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600  
Flood Support  
: Disable  
: Enable  
BroadCast Support  
MultiCast Drop  
Unrestricted  
: Enable  
: Disable  
MultiCast Support  
Full Bridging Status  
:
Drop If FDB full status: Enable  
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1  
ResidentialNetLearning : Enable  
Set Done  
MacAddress  
No. of Ports  
: 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF  
: 0  
: Transparent  
: 20  
Base Type  
Aging Timeout(sec)  
Slaveaging TimeOut(sec) : 100  
Netaging TimeOut(sec) : 600  
Flood Support  
: Disable  
: Enable  
BroadCast Support  
MultiCast Drop  
Unrestricted  
: Enable  
: Disable  
MultiCast Support  
Full Bridging Status  
:
Drop If FDB full status: Enable  
Reserved Mac Profile Id: 1  
ResidentialNetLearning : Enable  
IP DSLAM  
207  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
MacAddress  
The MAC address used by this bridge, when it must be  
referred to, in a unique fashion. It is the address of one of the  
Ethernet ports.  
No. of Ports  
Base Type  
The maximum number of ports that can be controlled by this  
bridge.  
Indicates what type of bridging this bridge can perform. It is  
always Transparent Bridging or STP.  
Aging TimeOut  
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically  
learned forwarding information from CPEs. The value 0 can  
be configured when aging is to be stopped.  
Slaveaging TimeOut  
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically  
learned forwarding information learned from the slave device.  
The recommended value for this is more than or equal to the  
value for dot1dTpAgingTimeOut. The value 0 can be  
configured when aging is to be stopped.  
Floodsupport  
Bcastsupport  
This is used to specify whether the unknown unicast packets  
are to be flooded or not. The value for this is used along with  
per vlan configuration for flood support to determine if  
flooding has to be done for unknown unicast packet.  
This is used to specify whether the broadcasting is supported  
or not. The value for this is used along with per vlan  
configuration broadcast support, to determine if broadcasting  
has to be done for the broadcast packet.  
Mcastsupport  
Mcastdrop  
Used to specify whether the multicast is supported or not.  
Used to specify whether the multicast packets are to be  
dropped, or to be forwarded, if multicast is not supported.  
This is only valid if dot1dTpMcastSupport is false.  
The timeout period, in seconds, for aging out dynamically  
learned forwarding information from NET side port. This is  
used only for full bridge configuration. The recommended  
value of net aging timeout should be greater than that of  
dot1dTpAgingTimeOut.  
NetAgingTimeout  
Full Bridging Status  
This specifies the current state of full bridging on the bridge.  
Thebridge can be set to residential bridging, restricted full  
bridging or unrestricted full bridging. In residential bridging, all  
packets from a CPE side port are sent to Net side port without  
doing a lookup in the forwarding table. In restricted full  
bridging, there is a lookup and a packet coming from a CPE  
IDL series User Guide  
208  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
port destined for another CPE port is dropped. Hence,  
CPE-CPE switching is not permitted. In unrestricted full  
bridging, all traffic is forwarded based on lookup.  
Drop If FDB full status  
This specifies if the frame for which learning could not be  
done because of forwarding table limit being reached, is to be  
dropped. If this is enabled the frame for which learning could  
not be done because of limit exceeded shall be dropped, else  
forwarded based on bridge forwarding logic.This being  
enabled shall reduce flooding, as when a response to such a  
frame from which learning could not be done shall come the  
frame shall be flooded, as the entry for that unicast address,  
shall not be found in forwarding table.  
ResidentialNetLearning This specifies if learning can be done over net side port for  
residential bridging. Learning shall be done on Net port in  
case of vlan with residential bridging if  
'dot1dPortGsLearningStatus' and  
'dot1dTpGsResidentialNetLearning'is enabled. In case of  
vlan with 'unrestricted' or 'restricted' bridging the learning is  
governed only by per port configuration i.e.  
'dot1dBasePortTable'. Currently the modification of this  
parameter is not supported.  
Reserved Mac Profile Id The Profile is used to determine the behavior for Reserved  
Mac destined frames on the bridge. Reserved Mac addresses  
are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in IEEE  
802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. If it does not contain any valid  
value then the behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames is  
determined based on Resvd Mac profile associated with the  
VLAN in which the frame belongs to.VLAN here means the  
802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in  
case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
References:  
z
z
z
Bridge Port commands  
Bridge Port stats commands  
Ethernet commands  
IP DSLAM  
209  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.7 Bridge Multicast Commands  
5.7.1 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands  
5.7.1.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid <vlanid-val>]  
5.7.1.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdall  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge mcast fwdall [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [egressports  
<egressports-val> | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> | none]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan  
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC  
address is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional  
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for  
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for  
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory  
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan  
case, vlan id is not required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan  
in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked  
Vlan Mode.  
Type: Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
egressports  
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to  
which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be  
forwarded. More than one value can be given, separated by  
spaces.  
<egressports-val> | none  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0  
forbidegressports  
The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for  
IDL series User Guide  
210  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
<forbidegressports-val> |  
which the Service Requirement attributes Forward All Multicast  
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More  
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
none  
Valid values: 0  
Example:  
$ get bridge mcast fwdall vlanid 1  
Output:  
VLAN Index  
: 1  
Forward All Ports  
Forward All Static Ports  
: 34  
: 1 2 3 5  
Forward All Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10 11  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Vlan Index  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address  
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In  
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,  
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC  
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the  
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not  
required. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native  
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which all multicast  
group-addressed frames are to be forwarded. This includes ports  
for which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP,  
or configured statically by management.  
Forward All Ports  
Forward All Static Ports The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, to  
which all multicast group-addressed frames are to be forwarded.  
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
Forward All Forbidden  
Ports  
The set of ports configured by management in this VLAN, for  
which the Service Requirement attribute Forward All Multicast  
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than  
one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
IP DSLAM  
211  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Cautions:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
References:  
z
bridge static multicast  
5.7.2 Bridge mcast forwarding Commands  
5.7.2.1 Get bridge mcast forwarding  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge mcast forwarding [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [macaddr <macaddr-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is  
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as  
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability.  
Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.  
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of vlanid  
must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan  
transparency feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also  
includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always  
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is created.  
VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and  
Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
macaddr  
The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this entry's  
filtering information applies  
<macaddr-val>  
Type: Get -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
212  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get bridge mcast forwarding vlanid 1 macaddr 00:30:4F:00:08:01  
Output:  
Vlan Index : 1  
Egress ports : 1 2  
Group Learnt : 1  
Mac Address : 00:30:4F:00:08:01  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Index  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is  
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed  
as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"  
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast  
MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a  
valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is  
not required. When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the  
valid range for vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan  
Multicast also there shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the  
VLAN with that VLAN Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q  
Vlan in case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of  
Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Mac Address  
Egress ports  
The destination Group MAC address in a frame, to which this  
entry's filtering information applies  
The complete set of bridge ports, in this VLAN, to which frames  
destined for this Group MAC address are currently being explicitly  
forwarded. This does not include ports for which this address is  
only implicitly forwarded, in the dot1qForwardAllPorts list.  
The subset of bridge ports in EgressPorts, which were learned by  
GMRP or some other dynamic mechanism, in this Filtering  
database.  
Group Learnt  
References:  
z
bridge static multicast  
IP DSLAM  
213  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.7.3 Bridge mcast fwdunreg Commands  
5.7.3.1 Get bridge mcast fwdunreg  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid <vlanid-val>]  
5.7.3.2 Modify bridge mcast fwdunreg  
Description Syntax:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge mcast fwdunreg [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [egressports  
<egressports-val> | none] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> | none]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan  
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC  
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required  
and is passed as zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan  
for multicast" capability. Each vlan can have its own information  
for a multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory  
parameter and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For No  
Vlan case VLAN id is not required. When Vlan transparency  
feature is supported, the valid range for vlanid also includes  
4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there shall always  
be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN Id is  
created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native  
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
egressports  
The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to  
which multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no  
more specific forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More  
than one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
<egressports-val> | none  
IDL series User Guide  
214  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0  
forbidegressports  
<forbidegressports-val> |  
none  
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for  
which the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered  
Multicast Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP.  
More than one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0  
Example:  
$ get bridge mcast fwdunreg vlanid 1  
Output:  
VLAN Index  
: 1  
: 45  
: 1 2 3 6  
Forward Unregistered Ports  
Forward Unregistered Static Ports  
Forward Unregistered Forbidden Ports : 4 9 10  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Index  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is  
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is not required and is passed as  
zero. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast"  
capability. Each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC  
address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value  
of vlanid must be passed. For No Vlan case VLAN id is not required.  
When Vlan transparency feature is supported, the valid range for  
vlanid also includes 4097. In case of "Shared Vlan Multicast also there  
shall always be a seperate entry for 4097 if the VLAN with that VLAN  
Id is created. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native  
Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Forward Unregistered The complete set of ports in this VLAN, to which multicast  
Ports  
group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific  
forwarding information, will be forwarded. This includes ports, for  
which this need has been determined dynamically by GMRP, or  
configured statically by management.  
Forward Unregistered  
Static Ports  
The set of ports, configured by management, in this VLAN, to which  
multicast group-addressed frames for which there is no more specific  
forwarding information, are to be forwarded. More than one value can  
IP DSLAM  
215  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
be given, separated by spaces.  
Forward Unregistered  
Forbidden Ports  
The set of ports, configured by management in this VLAN, for which  
the Service Requirement attribute Forward Unregistered Multicast  
Groups, may not be dynamically registered by GMRP. More than one  
value can be given, separated by spaces.  
Cautions:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
References:  
z
Bridge commands.  
5.7.4 Bridge Static Multicast Commands  
5.7.4.1 Create bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command is used to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
[egressports <egressports-val>] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val>]  
5.7.4.2 Delete bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command is used to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
5.7.4.3 Get bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
216  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.7.4.4 Modify bridge static mcast  
Description:  
Use this command is used to modify  
Command Syntax:  
modify bridge static mcast [vlanid <vlanid-val>] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>  
[egressports <egressports-val>] [forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan  
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC  
address is shared across VLANs. Hence vlan id is an optional  
parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for  
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for  
a multicast MAC address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory  
parameter in all the commands other than - get. For No Vlan  
case, vlan id is not required. This feature is not supported for  
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.  
Type: Optional for all commands  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
Default value:  
mcastaddr  
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which this  
entry's filtering information applies. Bit 0 of the first octet of the  
MAC address indicates a group (multicast) MAC address, if the  
bit is SET. For example, 01:00:00:00:00:00,03:FF:FF:FF:FF.  
Addresses in the range 01:80:C2:00:00:00 -01:80:C2:00:00:0f  
and 01:80:C2:00:00:20 -01:80:C2:00:00:2f have been blocked  
as value of this index, as these are reserved GARP addresses.  
Type : Create － Mandatory  
<mcastaddr-val>  
Modify － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Default value:  
egressports  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port  
<egressports-val>|none and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be  
forwarded. A port may not be added in this set, if it is already a  
member of the set of ports in ForbidEgressPorts. More than  
one value can be given, separated by spaces.  
Type :Optional for all commands  
IP DSLAM  
217  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1 – 386  
Default value: none  
forbidegressports  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port  
<forbidegressports-val> and destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be  
|none  
forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may  
not be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of  
ports in EgressPorts. Type :Optional for all commands  
Valid values : 1 – 386  
Default value: none  
Example:  
$ create bridge static mcast vlanid 7 mcastaddr 00:30:4F:00:00:01 egressports 10  
forbidegressports 20  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On:  
Entry Created  
VLan Index  
: 7  
: 10  
Mcast Address : 00:30:4F:00:00:01  
Egress ports  
Forbidden Egress ports : 20  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VLan Index  
The VLAN ID for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address  
is shared across vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In  
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability,  
each vlan can have its own information for a multicast MAC  
address. Hence vlanid is a mandatory parameter in all the  
commands other than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not  
required. This feature is not supported for VLAN with vlanid as  
4097  
Mcast Address  
Egress ports  
The destination multicast MAC address in a frame, to which the  
filtering information of this entry applies.  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and  
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must be forwarded.  
A port may not be added in this set if it is already a member of the  
set of ports in ForbiddenEgressPorts.  
IDL series User Guide  
218  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Forbidden Egress ports  
The set of ports, to which frames received from a specific port and  
destined for a specific Multicast MAC address must not be  
forwarded, regardless of any dynamic information. A port may not  
be added in this set if it is already a member of the set of ports in  
EgressPorts.  
Cautions:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
References:  
z
Bridge commands.  
IP DSLAM  
219  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.8 DHCP Commands  
5.8.1 DHCP Client Commands  
5.8.1.1 Get dhcp client info  
Description:  
Use this command to get DHCP client information for clients, on the specified  
interface, or for all the interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
get dhcp client info [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this  
is not specified, then information for clients on all such interfaces will  
be displayed.  
Ifname  
<interface-namef>  
Type : Optional  
Valid values : eth-*, aggr-*  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$get dhcp client info ifname eth-0  
Output:  
If-name  
Server  
Status Lease Start Date Lease Time (sec)  
------------------------------------------------------------  
eth-0  
1.1.1.1  
Bound  
Thu Jan 01 00:00:38 1970 500  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be :  
eth-*, aggr-*  
If-Name  
This specifies the address of the DHCP server with whom  
the client has obtained the IP address and other  
configuratio.s  
Server  
Status  
This specifies the current state of the client. It may be:Init,  
IDL series User Guide  
220  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Selecting, Bound, Requesting, Renew or Bind.  
This signifies the date on which the DHCP server leased  
out the IP address to the client.  
Lease Start Date  
Lease Time  
This specifies the time period, (in seconds), for which an IP  
address was leased out by the server.  
The client is expected to renew the lease before the expiry  
of this timer or release the IP Address.  
References:  
dhcp client stats related commands  
z
5.8.1.2 Get dhcp client stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get DHCP client statistics on an interface on which the DHCP  
client is running, or on all such interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
get dhcp client stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname <interface-name> This specifies the interface name on which DHCP is running. If this is  
not specified then information for clients on all such interfaces will be  
displayed.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values : eth-0- *  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$get dhcp client stats ifname eth-0  
Output:  
If-name  
: eth-0  
: 4  
Msgs Sent  
Msgs Rcvd  
: 0  
: 0  
Decline Sent  
Discover Msgs Sent  
Req Sent  
: 0  
Offer Msgs Rcvd  
: 4  
: 0  
Acks Rcvd  
: 0  
IP DSLAM  
221  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Rel Sent  
: 0  
: 0  
Nacks Rcvd  
Invalid Rcvd  
: 0  
: 0  
Inform Sent  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
If-Name  
This is an interface on which DHCP is running: It can be : eth-0  
This specifies number of DHCP messages received sent on this  
interface.  
Msgs Sent  
This specifies number of DHCP messages sent received on this  
interface.  
Msgs Rcvd  
Decline Sent  
Offer Msgs Rcvd  
This specifies number of DHCP decline messages sent on this interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP offer messages received on this  
interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP discover messages sent on this  
interface.  
Discover Msgs Sent  
Req Sent  
This specifies number of DHCP request messages sent on this interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP acks received on this interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP release messages sent on this interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP nacks received on this interface.  
This specifies number of DHCP inform messages sent on this interface.  
This specifies number of invalid dhcp messages received on this  
interface.  
Acks Rcvd  
Rel Sent  
Nacks Rcvd  
Inform Sent  
Invalid Rcvd  
References:  
z
dhcp client info related commands  
IDL series User Guide  
222  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9 DSL Commands  
5.9.1 ADSL Alarm Profile Commands  
5.9.1.1 Get adsl alarm profile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl alarm profile [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.9.1.2 Modify adsl alarm profile  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify adsl alarm profile ifname <interface-name> [ atucthresh15minlofs  
<atucthresh15minlofs-val> ] [ atucthresh15minloss <atucthresh15minloss-val> ]  
[ atucthresh15minlols <atucthresh15minlols-val> ] [ atucthresh15minlprs  
<atucthresh15minlprs-val> ] [ atucthresh15miness <atucthresh15miness-val> ]  
[ atucthreshfastrateup <atucthreshfastrateup-val> ] [ atucthreshintlrateup  
<atucthreshintlrateup-val> ] [ atucthreshfastratedn <atucthreshfastratedn-val> ]  
[ atucthreshintlratedn <atucthreshintlratedn-val> ] [ atucinitfailtrap False | True ]  
[ atucoptrapenable False | True ] [ aturthresh15minlofs  
<aturthresh15minlofs-val> ] [ aturthresh15minloss <aturthresh15minloss-val> ]  
[ aturthresh15minlprs <aturthresh15minlprs-val> ] [ aturthresh15miness  
<aturthresh15miness-val> ] [ aturthreshfastrateup <aturthreshfastrateup-val> ]  
[ aturthreshintlrateup <aturthreshintlrateup-val> ] [ aturthreshfastratedn  
<aturthreshfastratedn-val> ] [ aturthreshintlratedn <aturthreshintlratedn-val> ]  
[ atucgspmstatetrapenable False | True ] [ linealarmgscntrsreset False | True ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <fname-val>  
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or  
viewed  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
atucthresh15minlofs  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
<atucthresh15minlofs-val>  
IP DSLAM  
223  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minloss  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.  
<atucthresh15minloss-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minlols  
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.  
<atucthresh15minlols-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minlprs  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.  
<atucthresh15minlprs-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15miness  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface  
within any given 15 minute performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.  
<atucthresh15miness-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthreshfastrateup  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing  
an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucthreshfastrateup-val>  
atucthreshintlrateup  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucthreshintlrateup-val>  
atucthreshfastratedn  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing  
an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
<atucthreshfastratedn-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
224  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucthreshintlratedn  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
<atucthreshintlratedn-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucinitfailtrap False | True  
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted  
disable.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: False, True  
atucoptrapenable False |  
Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
True  
Valid values: False, True  
aturthresh15minlofs  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'  
<aturthresh15minlofs-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh15minloss  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'  
<aturthresh15minloss-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh15minlprs  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'  
<aturthresh15minlprs-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh15miness  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface  
within any given 15 minutes performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'  
<aturthresh15miness-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthreshfastrateup  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing  
an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
<aturthreshfastrateup-val>  
IP DSLAM  
225  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
aturthreshintlrateup  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturthreshintlrateup-val>  
aturthreshfastratedn  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate causing  
an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturthreshfastratedn-val>  
aturthreshintlratedn  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this object.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturthreshintlratedn-val>  
atucgspmstatetrapenable  
This indicates change in power mangement state  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
False | True  
Valid values: False, True  
linealarmgscntrsreset False  
This parameter resets performance counters at runtime  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
| True  
Valid values: False, True  
Example:  
$ get adsl alarm profile ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
------------------------------  
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)  
: 10 Thresh 15Min Loss(sec) : 20  
: 30 Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 50  
: 40 Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps): 70  
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps) : 30 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10  
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 30 Init Fail Trap : true  
: false PowerMgmtTrapEnable : True  
OpStateTrapEnable  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
------------------------------  
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)  
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec) : 10  
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps: 10  
: 10 Thresh Fast Rate Down(bps):10  
Thresh Intl Rate Down(bps) : 10  
IDL series User Guide  
226  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified  
or viewed  
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Lols(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)  
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps)  
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 15 minutes performance data  
collection period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLofsThreshTrap'.  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLossThreshTrap'.  
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLolsThreshTrap'.  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfLprsThreshTrap'.  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAtucPerfESsThreshTrap'.  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this  
object.  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate >= ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this  
object.  
Thresh Fast Rate  
Down(bps)  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
Thresh Intl Rate  
Down(bps)  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAtucRateChangeTrap. A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate <= ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
IP DSLAM  
227  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Init Fail Trap  
Enables and disables the InitFailureTrap. This object is defaulted  
disable.  
OpStateTrapEnable  
Enables/disables the OpStateChangeTrap  
PowerMgmtTrapEnable  
Thresh 15Min Lofs(sec)  
This indicates change in power mangement state  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLofsThreshTrap'  
Thresh 15Min Loss(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Lprs(sec)  
Thresh 15Min Ess(sec)  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLossThreshTrap'  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLprsThreshTrap'  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfESsThreshTrap'  
Thresh Fast Rate Up(bps)  
Thresh Intl Rate Up(bps)  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate > ChanPrevTxRate plus the value of this object.  
Applies to 'Fast' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
Thresh Fast Rate  
Down(bps)  
Thresh Intl Rate  
Down(bps)  
Applies to 'Interleave' channels only. Configured change in rate  
causing an adslAturRateChangeTrap A trap is produced when:  
ChanCurrTxRate < ChanPrevTxRate minus the value of this  
object.  
References:  
z
ADSL Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
228  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.2 ADSL Alarm Profilext Commands  
5.9.2.1 Get adsl alarm profilext  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl alarm profilext [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.9.2.2 Modify adsl alarm profilext  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify adsl alarm profilext ifname <interface-name> [ atucthresh15minffstr  
<atucthresh15minffstr-val> ] [ atucthresh15minsesl <atucthresh15minsesl-val> ]  
[atucthresh15minuasl <atucthresh15minuasl-val> ] [atucthresh15minfecsl  
<atucthresh15minfecsl-val>] [ atucthresh1daylofs <atucthresh1daylofs-val> ]  
[atucthresh1dayloss <atucthresh1dayloss-val> ] [ atucthresh1daylols  
<atucthresh1daylols-val> ][ atucthresh1daylprs <atucthresh1daylprs-val> ]  
[ atucthresh1dayess <atucthresh1dayess-val> ][ atucthresh1daysesl  
<atucthresh1daysesl-val> ] [ atucthresh1dayuasl <atucthresh1dayuasl-val>]  
[atucthresh1dayfecsl <atucthresh1dayfecsl-val> ] [ aturthresh15minsesl  
<aturthresh15minsesl-val> ] [ aturthresh15minuasl  
<aturthresh15minuasl-val> ][aturthresh15minfecsl <aturthresh15minfecsl-val>]  
[ aturthresh1daylofs <aturthresh1daylofs-val> ] [ aturthresh1dayloss  
<aturthresh1dayloss-val> ] [aturthresh1daylprs <aturthresh1daylprs-val> ]  
[ aturthresh1dayess <aturthresh1dayess-val> ] [aturthresh1daysesl  
<aturthresh1daysesl-val> ] [ aturthresh1dayuasl  
<aturthresh1dayuasl-val> ][aturthresh1dayfecsl <aturthresh1dayfecsl-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <fname-val>  
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be modified or  
viewed  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
atucthresh15minffstr  
The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL interface within  
any giving 15 minute performance data collection period, which cause the  
<atucthresh15minffstr-val>  
IP DSLAM  
229  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SNMP agent to send an adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minsesl  
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAtucSesLTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh15minsesl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minuasl  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 15 minutes performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP agent to send an adslAtucUasLThreshTrap  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh15minuasl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh15minfecsl  
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh15minfecsl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
atucthresh1daylofs  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
<atucthresh1daylofs-val>  
'adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1dayloss  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
<atucthresh1dayloss-val>  
'adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1daylols  
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,  
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes  
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh1daylols-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1daylprs  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
<atucthresh1daylprs-val>  
'adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
230  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1dayess  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,  
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes  
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAtucPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh1dayess-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1daysesl  
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
<atucthresh1daysesl-val>  
'adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1dayuasl  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP agent to send an  
<atucthresh1dayuasl-val>  
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
atucthresh1dayfecsl  
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection  
period, which causes atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<atucthresh1dayfecsl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh15minsesl  
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 15 minute performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP to send an adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<aturthresh15minsesl>  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh15minuasl  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP agent to send an  
<aturthresh15minuasl>  
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh15minfecsl  
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any giving 15 Minutes performance data collection  
period, which causes adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<aturthresh15minfecs-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 900  
aturthresh1daylofs  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
IP DSLAM  
231  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<aturthresh1daylofs-val>  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1dayloss  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap'.  
<aturthresh1dayloss-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1daylprs  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap'.  
<aturthresh1daylprs-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1dayess  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL interface,  
within any given 1 day performance data collection period, which causes  
the SNMP agent to send an 'adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<aturthresh1dayess-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1daysesl  
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes the SNMP agent to send an  
'adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap'.  
<aturthresh1daysesl-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1dayuasl  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any giving 1 day performance data collection period,  
which cause the SNMP agent to send an  
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap  
<aturthresh1dayuasl-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
aturthresh1dayfecsl  
The number of Forward error correction seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance data collection period,  
which causes aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<aturthresh1dayfecsl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 86400  
IDL series User Guide  
232  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ get adsl alarm profilext ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec) : 10  
: 14  
Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec)  
Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
The ADSL alarm interface name, whose profile is to be  
modified or viewed  
Atuc Thresh 15Min Fail FastR(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 15Min SesL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)  
The number of failed retrains encountered by an ADSL  
interface within any given 15 minute performance data  
collection period, which causes adslAtucFailedFastRTrap.  
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance  
data collection period, which causes adslAtucSesLTrap.  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered  
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute  
IP DSLAM  
233  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
performance data collection period, which causes  
adslAtucUasLThreshTrap.  
Atuc Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lols(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)  
Atuc Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 15Min Sesl(sec)  
Atur Thresh 15Min UasL(sec)  
The number of Forward error correction seconds  
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15  
Minute performance data collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfFecsLThreshTrap.  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Loss of Link Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfLolsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by  
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance  
data collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered  
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance  
data collection period, which causes  
adslAtucPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Forward error correction seconds  
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day  
performance data collection period, which causes  
atucPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Severe errored seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface within any given 15 minute performance  
data collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfSesLThresh15MInTrap.  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered  
by an ADSL interface within any given 15 Minute  
IDL series User Guide  
234  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
performance data collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.  
Atur Thresh 15Min FecsL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lofs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Loss(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day Lprs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day ESs(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day SesL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day UasL(sec)  
Atur Thresh 1 Day FecsL(sec)  
The number of Forward error correction seconds  
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 15  
Minute performance data collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfFecsLThreshTrap.  
The number of Loss of Frame Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfLofsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Loss of Signal Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfLossThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Loss of Power Seconds encountered by an  
ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfLprsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Errored Seconds encountered by an ADSL  
interface, within any given 1 day performance data  
collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfESsThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Severe errored Seconds encountered by  
an ADSL interface, within any given 1 day performance  
data collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfSesLThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of unavailable errored seconds encountered  
by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day performance  
data collection period, which causes  
adslAturPerfUasLThresh1DayTrap.  
The number of Forward error correction seconds  
encountered by an ADSL interface within any given 1 day  
performance data collection period, which causes  
aturPerfFecsLThresh1DayTrap.  
References:  
z
ADSL Commands  
IP DSLAM  
235  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.3 ADSL ATUC Channel Commands  
5.9.3.1 Get adsl atuc channel  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc channel [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <fname-val>  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
Type: Get – Optional  
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc channel ifname dsli-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
Interleave Delay(ms) : 20  
Prev Tx Rate(bps) : 40  
Gs Curr Atm Status : NoAtmDefect GsSymbolsPerRsWord : 10  
: dsli-0  
Curr Tx Rate(bps)  
: 80  
Crc Block Length(byte) : 90  
GsRsDepth  
: 20  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode: 100  
AtucChanPerfAtmCD  
AtucChanGsINPdn  
AtucChanGsM0dn  
AtucChanGsB0dn  
AtucChanPerfAtmCU  
AtucChanGsL0dn  
AtucChanGsT0dn  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
Interleave delay for this channel.  
Interleave Delay(ms)  
Curr Tx Rate(bps)  
Prev Tx Rate(bps)  
Actual transmit rate on this channel.  
The rate at the time of the last adslAtucRateChangeTrap  
event.  
Crc Block Length(byte)  
Gs Curr Atm Status  
Indicates the length of the channel data-block, on which  
the CRC operates.  
Indicates the current ATM Status.  
IDL series User Guide  
236  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GsSymbolsPerRsWord  
GsRsDepth  
Indicates the number of DMT symbols per  
Reed-Solomon code word (S), in the downstream  
direction.  
Indicates interleaving depth (D), in the downstream  
direction.  
GsRedundantBytesPer  
RsCode  
Indicates the number of redundant bytes (R), per  
Reed-Solomon code in the downstream direction.  
Provides a count of the total number of cells passed  
through the cell delineation and HEC function process  
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC  
state.(length = 4 bytes).  
AtucChanPerfAtmCD  
AtucChanPerfAtmCU  
AtucChanGsINPdn  
Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM  
Data Path delivered at the logical interface between the  
ATU-C and a digital network element, such as one or  
more switching systems.  
The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)  
symbols for the downstream interleaved channel. One  
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a  
correction time of 250 µs.  
AtucChanGsL0dn  
AtucChanGsM0dn  
AtucChanGsT0dn  
The number of bits from the upstream latency path  
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes).  
It is not available for ADSL.  
The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in  
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is  
not available for ADSL.  
The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the  
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path  
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for  
ADSL.  
AtucChanGsB0dn  
The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per  
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream  
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not  
available for ADSL.  
IP DSLAM  
237  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.4 ADSL ATUC Chanperf Commands  
5.9.4.1 Get adsl atuc chanperf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc chanperf [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <fname-val>  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name, for which  
performance is to be viewed.  
Type : Get － Optional  
Valid values : dsli-0 - *, dslf-0 - *  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc chanperf ifname dsli-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsli-0  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
Perf Valid 1Day Intvl  
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl  
: 20  
: 30  
: 20  
: 20  
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day  
Time Elapsed  
/Monitored(sec)  
Rx Blocks  
15  
10  
10  
45  
20  
30  
45  
89  
Tx Blocks  
20  
25  
30  
65  
35  
95  
70  
35  
80  
48  
25  
30  
Corrected Blocks  
Uncorrected Blocks  
NCD Count  
90  
86  
35  
20  
OCD Count  
60  
45  
42  
21  
15  
75  
20  
35  
HEC Count  
NCD Failure Count  
LCD Failure Count  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
20  
IDL series User Guide  
238  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
IfIndex of the interface of type adslfast and adslInterleave.  
The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for which  
data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of  
"adslAtucChanPerfValidIntervals" for which no data is available. This object  
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals are  
not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length = 4 bytes)  
The number of previous 1-Day intervals in the interval table for which data  
was collected.(length = 4 bytes)  
Perf Valid 1Day Intvl  
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of  
adslAtucChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no data is available. This  
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some  
intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes)  
Time  
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day and  
Elapsed/Monitored(se Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.  
c)  
Rx Blocks  
Performance Data :  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel since agent was  
reset .  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in the current 15  
minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Performance Data :  
Tx Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel since agent reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel in the current  
15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.  
Performance Data :  
Corrected Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel  
since agent reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected errors on this channel,  
in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Performance Data :  
Uncorrected Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this  
channel since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this  
IP DSLAM  
239  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
channel in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Performance Data :  
NCD Count  
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation) error.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Number of packets with NCD error received in the current 15-minute/  
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.  
OCD Count  
Performance Data :  
Number of packets with OCD (Out of Cell Delineation) error.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Number of packets with OCD error received in the current 15-minute/  
current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.  
HEC Count  
Performance Data :  
Number of packets with HEC error.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Number of packets with HEC error received in the current 15 minute/  
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
NCD Failure Count  
Performance Data :  
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures since  
agent reset. An NCD failure is declared when an NCD defect is present for  
2-3 seconds after SHOWTIME. (length = 4 bytes).  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation(NCD) failures in the  
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1  
day interval.  
LCD Failure Count  
Performance Data :  
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures since  
agent reset. An LCD failure is declared when an LCD defect persists for  
more than 2 - 3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes).  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation(LCD) failures in  
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1  
day interval.  
IDL series User Guide  
240  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.5 ADSL ATUC Chanlntvl Commands  
5.9.5.1 Get adsl atuc chanintvl  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc chanintvl [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <fname-val>  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
Type: Get － Mandatory  
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23  
Performance Data Interval number.  
Type: Get － Mandatory  
nintrvl <nintrvl-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 96  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc chanintvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 1  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsli-0  
: 10  
IntervalNumber  
Tx Blocks  
: 1  
: 45  
Rx Blocks  
Corrected Blocks  
Gs Time Elapsed(sec)  
GsNoCellDelineation  
: 20  
Uncorrected Blocks : 1  
Valid Data : true  
: 30  
: 20  
GsHeaderErrorCheck : 0  
AtucChanIntvlNcds : 20  
GsOutOfCellDelineation : 0  
AtucChanIntvlLcds  
: 20  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
IntervalNumber  
Rx Blocks  
Tx Blocks  
Performance Data Interval number.  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel during this interval.  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel during this  
interval.  
Corrected Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on  
this channel during this interval.  
IP DSLAM  
241  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Uncorrected Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected errors on this  
channel during this interval.  
Gs Time Elapsed(sec)  
Valid Data  
Total time elapsed (in seconds) in this interval.  
Indicates if the data for this interval is valid.  
GsNoCellDelineation  
GsHeaderErrorCheck  
Count of no cell delineation on this channel for this interval.  
GlobespanVirata parameter. Header error check counter (hec) on this  
channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).  
GsOutOfCellDelineatio  
GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of out of cell delineation (ocd) on this  
channel during this interval (length = 4 bytes).  
n
AtucChanIntvlNcds  
Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this  
interval.(length = 4 bytes).  
AtucChanIntvlLcds  
Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this  
interval.(length = 4 bytes).  
5.9.6 ADSL ATUC Interval Commands  
5.9.6.1 Get adsl atuc interval  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc interval ifname <interface-name> [nintrvl <num-of-intervals>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
Type: Get -- Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Number of intervals.  
<interface-name>  
nintrvl  
<num-of-intervals>  
Type: Get – Optional  
Valid values : 1- 96  
Default Value : 12  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc interval ifname dsl-0 sintrvl 1 nintrvl 1  
IDL series User Guide  
242  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
: 12  
IntervalNumber  
IntervalLofs(sec)  
IntervalLols(sec)  
IntervalESs(sec)  
IntervalFastR  
IntervalSesL(sec)  
IntervalValidData  
IntervalLoss(sec)  
IntervalLprs(sec)  
IntervalInits  
: False  
: 84  
: 83  
: 85  
: 87  
: 86  
: 88  
: 191  
: 193  
IntervalFailedFastR : 192  
IntervalUasL(sec) : 194  
GsTimeElapsed(sec) : 1001  
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 15  
IntervalInitsFailed : 15  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
The ADSL ATUC channel interface name.  
Ifname  
IntervalNumber  
Count from 1 through 96 of 15-minute intervals. Performance  
Data Interval number 1 is the most recent previous interval;  
interval 96 is 24 hours ago (length = 4 bytes).  
This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Link.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.  
Count of Errored Seconds in the interval.  
IntervalValidData  
IntervalLofs(sec)  
IntervalLoss(sec)  
IntervalLols(sec)  
IntervalLprs(sec)  
IntervalESs(sec)  
IntervalInits  
Count of the line initialization attempts during the interval.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Fast Retrains.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Failed Fast  
Retrains.  
IntervalFastR  
IntervalFailedFastR  
IntervalSesL(sec)  
IntervalUasL(sec)  
IntervalFecsL(sec)  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored  
seconds.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable  
errored seconds.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error  
correction seconds (length = 4 bytes).  
GsTimeElapsed(sec)  
IntervalInitsFailed  
Total elapsed seconds in this interval.  
Count of the failed full line initialization attempts during the  
interval (length = 4 bytes).  
IP DSLAM  
243  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.7 ADSL ATUC Perf Commands  
5.9.7.1 Get adsl atuc perf  
Description:  
Use this command to get ADSL ATUC interface performance.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc perf [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL ATUC interface name, for which performance is to  
be viewed.  
<interface-name>  
Type : Get – Optional  
Valid values : dsl-0 - dsl-*  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc perf ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
AtucPerfStatLossL  
: 20  
: 30  
: 10  
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day Prev1Day  
Time Elapsed  
/Monitored(sec)  
LOFS (sec)  
LOSS (sec)  
LOLS (sec)  
LPRS (sec)  
ES (sec)  
30  
40  
10  
45  
20  
35  
30  
50  
30  
30  
10  
90  
60  
65  
35  
95  
85  
42  
75  
65  
30  
32  
15  
20  
10  
80  
90  
20  
INITS  
Perf Stat FastR  
45  
21  
46  
75  
40  
35  
45  
Perf Stat Failed FastR 43  
Perf Stat SESL  
41  
37  
10  
48  
49  
67  
90  
65  
50  
Perf Stat UASL  
Perf Stat FecsL  
16  
11  
11  
Perf Stat InitsFailed 10  
16  
11  
11  
IDL series User Guide  
244  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
Ifindex of the type Adsl port Count of the number of Loss of  
Framing failures since agent reset.  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table,  
for which data was collected. (length = 4 bytes)  
The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of  
"adslAtucPerfValid-Intervals", for which no data is available. This  
object will typically be zero except in cases where the data for  
some intervals are not available (e.g., in proxy situations). (length  
= 4 bytes)  
AtucPerfStatLossL  
Time  
Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more loss of signal  
(LOS) defects. (Not available for ADSL)  
Performance Data : Total time elapsed in seconds  
Elapsed/Monitored(se Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min, Curr1Day  
c)  
and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day  
LOFS (sec)  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of Framing failures  
since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of Framing.  
LOSS (sec)  
LOLS (sec)  
LPRS (sec)  
ES (sec)  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of signal failures  
since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of signals.  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of link failures  
since agent reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of link.  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of power failures  
since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of power.  
Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since  
agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in  
the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.  
IP DSLAM  
245  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
INITS  
Performance Data : Count of line initialization attempts since  
agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of line initialization  
attempts in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day  
interval.  
Includes both successful and failed attempts.  
Performance Data : Count of fast retrain.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Fast Retrain.  
Perf Stat FastR  
Perf Stat Failed FastR Performance Data : Count of failed fast retrain.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when  
there was Failed Fast Retrain.  
Perf Stat SESL  
Perf Stat UASL  
Perf Stat FecsL  
Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when  
there was severely errored second.  
Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval when  
there was unavailable errored seconds.  
Performance Data:  
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error  
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for  
ADSL)  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:  
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current  
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error  
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)  
Performance Data:  
Perf Stat InitsFailed  
Count of the failed full initialization attempts in current  
15-minute/current 1-day/previous 1-day interval. A failed full  
initialization is when showtime is not reached at the end of the full  
initialization procedure.  
IDL series User Guide  
246  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.8 ADSL ATUC Physical Commands  
5.9.8.1 Get adsl atuc physical  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc physical [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.  
Type: Get – Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc physical ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Serial Number  
: Conexant 1.0  
: 0039  
Vendor ID  
Version Number  
Curr Status  
: 1.0  
: NoDefect  
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)  
CurrAttainable Rate(bps)  
GsOpState  
: 20  
: 40  
Curr Atn(dB/10) : 80  
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10):90  
: Data  
GsActualStandard  
GsTxAtmCellCounter  
GsStartProgress  
GsIdleBertError  
GsBertSync  
: T1_413  
: 214 GsRxAtmCellCounter : 215  
: 213  
: 200 GsIdleBertCells  
: BertOutOfSync  
: 0  
: 100  
GsBertError  
Data Boost Status  
: Enable Chan Perf CD  
: 2  
IP DSLAM  
247  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Chan Perf BE  
: 5  
PM State  
: L2  
Chan Perf Cu  
: 10  
: 2  
:4000  
Extended PSD Status  
Pilot Tone  
: True Chip Version  
: 21 Overhead Channel  
: FlatMsk  
: 12345678  
: 10 Atuc G9941 Vendor ID:12345678  
: 90 AtucStartBin(GSpan++):90  
Psd Mask  
System Vendor ID  
ATU-C Self Test Result  
Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10)  
StartUp Error Code  
BitSwapCount  
: StartupErrorCodeMAXNOMATPus  
: 90  
ModPhase  
: FlatRateCheck  
Transmit Spectrum Shaping info  
-----------------------------------  
[ 0]  
90  
UpStream Gains per bin  
---------------------------  
[ 0]  
15  
GsSeltInfoValid  
: NotConnected  
: 20  
GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet)  
GsSeltLoopEnd  
: open  
GsSeltLoopGauge  
: greater_26awg  
: 10  
GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps)  
GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps)  
Selt InbandNoise Len (dBM/Hz)  
----------------------------------  
[ 0] 0110030607  
: 20  
Selt Termination Resp (0-18Kft ms)  
---------------------------------------  
[ 0] 0110030607  
Selt UpMgnAtRate (dB/10)  
-----------------------------  
[ 0] 0110030607  
IDL series User Guide  
248  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Selt DownMgnAtRate (dB/10)  
-------------------------------  
[ 0] 0110030607  
Delt HLINSCus  
Delt HLOGMTus  
DELT Last Tx State  
Delt SnrmtUs  
: 2  
: 2  
: dmtatucg9941  
Delt LNMTus  
: 2  
: 100  
DELT Curr Status: FailedUnknown  
Delt HLINpsus  
------------------  
[ 0]  
5
Delt HLOGpsus  
------------------  
[ 0]  
20  
Delt QLNpsus  
-----------------  
[ 0] 12  
Delt DMT Bin SNR  
---------------------  
[ 0] 16  
Signal Atn(dB/10)  
GsParametricTestResult  
Parametric Info  
--------------------  
: 40  
: Ok  
Bin Number  
Number of bits/bin  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL ATUC physical interface name.  
The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor  
equipment.  
Serial Number  
Vendor ID  
Vendor ID Code.  
Version Number  
The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU as  
part of the initialization messages.  
IP DSLAM  
249  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Curr Status  
Indicates current state of the ATUC line. This is a bit-map  
of possible conditions.  
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Curr Atn(dB/10)  
Noise Margin as seen by this ATU with respect to its  
received signal in tenth dB.  
Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the  
peer ATU and the total power received by this ATU.  
Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by  
the ATU. This value will be equal to, or greater than the  
current line rate.  
CurrAttainable Rate(bps)  
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10)  
Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This  
is the measurement that was reported during the last  
activation sequence.  
GsOpState  
Operational state of the Xcvr.  
GsActualStandard  
Actual standard used for connection, based on the  
outcome of the negotiation with the Remote Unit.  
Provides Tx ATM cell counter.  
GsTxAtmCellCounter  
GsRxAtmCellCounter  
GsStartProgress  
Provides Rx ATM cell counter.  
Defines the current detailed start up state of Xcvr. 0x0ñ  
startup not in progress; 0x0 ñ 0x0FFF  
Handshake/Training/ Profile Management/ Fast Retrain  
inprogress; 0x8000 ñ 0x8FFF DSP firmware DownLoad in  
progress; 0xF000 ñ 0xFFFF illegal Parameter  
Number of bit errors.  
GsIdleBertError  
GsIdleBertCells  
GsBertSync  
Number of idle cells.  
Indicates whether the Signal is in Sync or not.  
Provides the number of bit errors detected during BERT.  
Conexant parameter that indicates whether DataBoost is  
utilized for the connection.  
GsBertError  
Data Boost Status  
Chan Perf CD  
The near-end delineated total cell count performance  
parameter is a count of the total number of cells passed  
through the cell delineation and HEC function process,  
operating on the ATM Data Path, while in the SYNC state.  
(Not available for ADSL)  
Chan Perf BE  
The near-end idle bit error count performance parameter is  
a count of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload  
received in the ATM Data Path at the near-end. (Not  
available for ADSL)  
PM State  
The Line Power Management state. (Not available for  
ADSL)  
Chan Perf Cu  
The total number of data-only cells received by ATUC.  
IDL series User Guide  
250  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Extended PSD Status  
Conexant parameter that indicates whether an extended  
upstream PSD is used - for G.Span Plus mode of  
operation only. Only supported for G.Span Plus, therefore  
this parameter is not valid for ADSL2/ADSL2plus modes of  
operation.  
Chip Version  
Pilot Tone  
The DSP version number.  
Conexant parameter that indicates the Pilot Tone Index.  
Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not  
supported by DSLPHY as yet.  
Overhead Channel  
Psd Mask  
Conexant parameter that indicates the actual Psd Mask  
currently being used.  
System Vendor ID  
Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the  
Overhead Messages(ADSL2). Typically identifies the  
ATU-C system integrator which usually refers to the  
vendor of the smallest field-replaceable unit. ATU-C  
System Vendor ID may not be the same as ATU-C Vendor  
ID. It is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets  
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2  
octet vendor revision number.  
ATU-C Self Test Result  
Atuc G.994.1 Vendor ID  
Atuc ACTPSDus (dB/10)  
Defines the ATU-C selftest result. The most significant  
octet is: 00 hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the  
self-test failed. Interpretation of the other octets is vendor  
discretionary and can be interpreted in combination with  
G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.  
Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-C in the  
G.994.1 CL message. Typically identifies the vendor of the  
ATU-C G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets  
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2  
octet vendor revision number.  
This parameter defines the average upstream transmit  
power spectrum density over the used subcarriers  
delivered by the ATU-C at the U-C reference point, at the  
instant of measurement. It's value ranges from -90 to 0, in  
0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.  
This Gspan++ parameter indicates the start bin of the bit  
loading up array.  
AtucStartBin (GSpan++)  
StartUp Error Code  
BitSwapCount  
Conexant parameter which indicates the startup error  
code.  
This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It  
can read only in data mode  
IP DSLAM  
251  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ModPhase  
Conexant parameter to monitor the status of MoD  
This parameter provides the Upstream Transmit Spectrum  
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points  
exchanged during G994.1. Each breakpoint consists in a  
subcarrier index and the associated shaping parameter.  
Value of this parameter is in range 0 - 127, in multiples of  
-0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the subcarrier is  
not transmitted. It is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus.  
This parameter defines the upstream gains allocation table  
per subcarrier. It is an array of integer values in the 0 to  
4093 range for subcarriers 0 to NSCus-1. The gain value  
is represented as a multiple of 1/512 on linear scale. It is  
supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.  
Atuc TSSpsUs  
GainspsUs  
GsSeltInfoValid  
Indicates the information validity for the SELT operation  
conducted on the Xcvr.  
GsSeltLoopLen (in Feet)  
GsSeltLoopEnd  
Indicates the LOOP Length in Feet once when the SELT  
information is valid on the Xcvr.  
Indicates whether the loop is short or open once when the  
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.  
GsSeltLoopGauge  
Indicates the LOOP wire gauge information once, when  
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.  
GsSeltUpShannonCap (in bps)  
GsSeltDownShannonCap (in bps)  
AtucGsSeltInbandNoise  
AtucGsSeltTerminationResp  
AtucGsSeltUpMgnAtRate  
Indicates the upstream shannon capacity once, when the  
SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.  
Indicates the downstream shannon capacity once, when  
the SELT information is valid on the Xcvr.  
512 values that indicate inband noise length in dBM/Hz,  
covering both bands from 0 to 1.1 MHz.  
180 discrete values that indicate termination response  
magnitude from 0 to 18Kft.  
300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a  
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15  
Mbps.  
AtucGsSeltDownMgnAtRate  
Delt HLINSCus  
300 values that indicate SNR margin in dB/10 at a  
particular rate are provided, at 100K increments, up to 15  
Mbps.  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor  
to be applied to the upstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available  
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
Delt HLOGMTus  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of  
symbols used to measure the upstream Hlog (f). (Not  
IDL series User Guide  
252  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
Delt QLNMTus  
DELT Last Tx State  
Delt SnrmtUs  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of  
symbols used to measure the upstreamQLN (f) values.  
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the last  
successful transmitted initialization state by the ATUC.  
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
DELT-related parameter that provides the number of  
symbols used to measure the upstream SNR(f) values.  
(Not available for ADSL and ADSL2plus).  
Current Status of Atuc Line in DELT Mode  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of  
complex upstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not  
available for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
DELT Curr Status  
Delt HLINpsus  
Delt HLOGpsus  
Delt QLNpsus  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of  
real upstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for  
ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of  
real upstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for  
ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
Delt DMT Bin SNR  
Signal Atn(dB/10)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of  
real upstream SNR (f) values in dB. (Not available for  
ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
DELT-related parameter that provides the upstream signal  
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus).  
GsParametricTestResult  
Parametric Info  
Indicates the Result of the Parametric Test conducted on  
the Xcvr.  
Conexant parameter that indicates the Parametric Test  
Array.  
AtucDMTBinBits  
Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element  
of the string. The 0th element contains the number of bits  
for bin 0 through to the 31st element, which contains the  
number of bits for bin 31. The range of expected values is  
from 0 to 15 bits per bin.  
IP DSLAM  
253  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.9 ADSL ATUC Trap Commands  
5.9.9.1 Get adsl atuc traps  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc traps [ifname <interface-name>  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc traps ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Lofs Thresh Trap : 0  
Lols Thresh Trap : 0  
ESs Thresh Trap : 1  
Rate Change Trap : 0  
Loss Thresh Trap  
Lprs Thresh Trap  
Init Failure Trap  
Gs OpState Trap  
: 1  
: 1  
: 1  
: 1  
PM State Trap  
: 2  
Command Failure Trap : 2  
Output Fields :  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The IfIndex of DSL port.  
Lofs Thresh Trap  
Loss Thresh Trap  
Lols Thresh Trap  
Lprs Thresh Trap  
ESs Thresh Trap  
Init Failure Trap  
Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).  
Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).  
Loss of Link 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).  
Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).  
Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached (length = 4 bytes).  
ATU-C initialization failed. Refer to adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons  
(length = 4 bytes).  
Rate Change Trap  
Gs OpState Trap  
PM State Trap  
The ATU-Cs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only) (length = 4 bytes).  
Op State change (length = 4 bytes).  
PM state change trap used for ADSL2/ADSL2plus PM operation. This trap is not  
valid for ADSL mode.  
Command Failure Trap When the APIs fail to send a customer command to the DSP, the customer is  
notified by a new trap and they need to re-issue the command.  
IDL series User Guide  
254  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.10 ADSL ATUC Trapsext Commands  
5.9.10.1 Get adsl atuc trapsext  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atuc trapsext [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The IfIndex of DSL port.  
Type: Get -- Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atuc trapsext ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Failed FastR Thresh 15Min Trap : 1 SesL Thresh 15Min Trap:1  
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap  
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap  
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap  
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap  
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap  
: 1 FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap:0  
: 0 Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 1  
: 1 Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap: 1  
: 0 SesL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0  
: 1 FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap: 0  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The IfIndex of DSL port.  
Failed FastR Thresh  
15Min Trap  
Failed retrains 15-minute interval threshold reached.  
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap  
Severely Errored Seconds 15-minute interval threshold  
reached.  
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap  
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap  
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap  
Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold  
reached.  
Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval threshold  
reached.  
Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.  
IP DSLAM  
255  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap  
Lols Thresh 1Day Trap  
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap  
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap  
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap  
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap  
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap  
Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Loss of Link 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Severely Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Unavailable Errored Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval threshold  
reached.  
5.9.11 ADSL ATUR Chanlntrvl Commands  
5.9.11.1 Get adsl atuc chanintrvl  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur chanintrvl [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name  
Type: Get － Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23  
Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.  
Type: Get － Mandatory  
nintrvl <nintrvl-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 96  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur chanintrvl ifname dsli-0 nintrvl 2  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsli-0  
: 10  
IntervalNumber  
Tx Blocks  
: 2  
: 10  
Rx Blocks  
Corrected Blocks  
: 10  
Uncorrected Blocks : 10  
GsHeaderErrorCheck : 10  
AturChanIntvlNcds : 20  
GsNoCellDelineation : 10  
Valid Data  
: true  
: 20  
AturChanIntvlLcds  
IDL series User Guide  
256  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL interface name  
IntervalNumber  
Rx Blocks  
Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel, during this interval.  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel, during this interval.  
Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that were corrected on this  
channel, during this interval.  
Tx Blocks  
Corrected Blocks  
Uncorrected Blocks  
GsNoCellDelineation  
GsHeaderErrorCheck  
Count of all encoded blocks received with errors that cannot be corrected,  
on this channel, during this interval.  
GlobespanVirata parameter. Count of no cell delineation (ncd) on this  
channel during this interval.  
Conexant parameter. Header error check counter (HEC) on this channel,  
during this interval.  
Valid Data  
This indicates if the data for this interval is valid.  
Count of all blocks received with NCD errors on this channel during this  
interval.(length = 4 bytes).  
AturChanIntvlNcds  
AturChanIntvlLcds  
Count of all blocks received with LCD errors on this channel during this  
interval.(length = 4 bytes).  
References:  
z
atur interval related commands  
5.9.12 ADSL ATUR Channel Commands  
5.9.12.1 Get adsl atur channel  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur channel [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name  
Type: Get － Mandatory  
Valid values: dsli-0 - dsli-23  
<interface-name>  
IP DSLAM  
257  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get adsl atur channel ifname dsli-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dslf-0  
Interleave Delay(ms) : 10  
Curr Tx Rate(bps)  
: 10  
: 10  
Prev Tx Rate(bps)  
: 10  
Crc Block Length(byte)  
GsSymbolsPerRsWord  
Gs Curr Atm Status : 1  
: 10  
GsRsDepth  
: 10  
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode : 10  
AturChanPerfAtmCD  
AturChanGsINPup  
AturChanGsM0up  
AturChanGsB0up  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
AturChanPerfAtmCU  
AturChanGsL0up  
AturChanGsT0up  
: 10  
: 10  
: 10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL Interface Name  
Interleave Delay(ms)  
Interleave delay for this channel. Interleave delay  
applies only to the interleave channel and defines the  
mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input  
bytes at the interleaver input and their placement in the bit  
stream at the interleaver output. Larger numbers provide  
greater separation between consecutive input bytes in the  
output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise  
immunity at the expense of payload latency.  
Actual transmit rate on this channel  
Curr Tx Rate(bps)  
Prev Tx Rate(bps)  
The rate at the time of the last adslAturRateChangeTrap  
event.  
Crc Block Length(byte)  
Gs Curr Atm Status  
Indicates the length of the channel data-block on which  
the CRC operates.  
Indicates an ncd or lcd failure if the counter surpasses  
127. If neither ATM counter surpasses 127, the return  
value will be NoAtmDefect.  
GsSymbolsPerRsWord  
Indicates number of DMT symbols per Reed- Solomon  
code word (S) in the upstream direction Note that S is not  
restricted to interleaved mode only. Even in fast mode, S  
is a valid constant value and is equal to 1.  
GsRsDepth  
Indicates interleaving depth (D) in the upstream direction  
Note that D is not restricted to interleaved mode only.  
Even in fast mode, D is a valid constant value and is  
IDL series User Guide  
258  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
equal to 1.  
GsRedundantBytesPerRsCode  
AturChanPerfAtmCD  
Indicates number of redundant bytes (R) per  
Reed-Solomon code in the upstream direction  
Provides a count of the total number of cells passed  
through the cell delineation and HEC function process  
operating on the ATM Data Path while in the SYNC  
state.(length = 4 bytes).  
AturChanPerfAtmCU  
AturChanGsINPup  
Provides a count of the total number of cells in the ATM  
Data Path delivered at the interface(s) between ATU-R  
and ATM switching layer.(length = 4 bytes).  
The actual number of Impulse Noise Protection(INP)  
symbols for the upstream interleaved channel. One  
symbol equals 250 µs, so an INP of 1 correlates to a  
correction time of 250 µs.  
AturChanGsL0up  
AturChanGsM0up  
AturChanGsT0up  
AturChanGsB0up  
The number of bits from the upstream latency path  
function #0 included per DMT symbol.(length = 4 bytes). It  
is not available for ADSL.  
The number of Mux Data Frames per FEC Data Frame in  
upstream latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is  
not available for ADSL.  
The ratio of the number of Mux Data Frames to the  
number of sync octets in the upstream latency path  
function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not available for ADSL.  
The nominal number of octets from frame bearer #0 per  
Mux Data Frame at Reference Point A in upstream  
latency path function #0.(length = 4 bytes). It is not  
available for ADSL.  
References:  
z
ADSL commands  
IP DSLAM  
259  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.13 ADSL ATUR Chanperf Commands  
5.9.13.1 Get adsl atur chanperf  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur chanperf [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsli-0 – dsli-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur chanperf ifname dsli-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsli-0  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
Perf valid 1Day Intvl  
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl  
: 10  
: 10  
: 20  
: 20  
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day  
Prev1Day  
10  
Time Elapsed  
/Monitored(sec)  
Rx Blocks  
-
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
Tx Blocks  
10  
10  
10  
10  
Corrected Blocks  
10  
10  
Uncorrected Blocks 10  
NCD Count  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
20  
20  
10  
10  
20  
20  
10  
10  
20  
20  
HEC Count  
NCD Failure Count 20  
LCD Failure Count 20  
IDL series User Guide  
260  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Number of previous 15-minute intervals, for which the  
data was collected.  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
Perf valid 1Day Intvl  
Perf Invalid 1Day Intvl  
Number of previous 15- minute intervals, for which no  
data is available.  
The number of previous 1-day intervals in the interval  
table for which data was collected.(length = 4 bytes).  
The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value  
of adslAturChanPerfValid1DayIntervals for which no  
data is available. This object will typically be zero except  
in cases where the data for some intervals are not  
available (e.g., in proxy situations).(length = 4 bytes).  
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,  
Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.  
Performance Data :  
Time  
Elapsed/Monitored(sec)  
Rx Blocks  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel,  
since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received on this channel in  
the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day  
interval.  
Tx Blocks  
Performance Data :  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this Channel,  
since agent reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks transmitted on this channel  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day  
interval.  
Corrected Blocks  
Performance Data :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected  
errors on this channel, since agent reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with corrected  
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current  
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Uncorrected Blocks  
Performance Data :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected  
errors on this channel, since agent was reset.  
IP DSLAM  
261  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all encoded blocks received with uncorrected  
errors on this channel, in the current 15 minute/ current  
1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
NCD Count  
Performance Data :  
Number of packets with NCD (No Cell Delineation)  
errors.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Number of packets with NCD error, received in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day  
interval.  
HEC Count  
Performance Data :  
Number of packets with HEC error.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Number of packets with HEC error received in the  
current 15 minute/ current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Performance Data :  
NCD Failure Count  
Count of all blocks received with no cell delineation  
(NCD) failures since agent reset. An NCD failure is  
declared when an NCD defect is present for 2-3  
seconds after SHOWTIME.(length = 4 bytes).  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all blocks received with no cell  
delineation(NCD) failures in the current 15 minute/  
current 1 day/ previous 1 day interval.  
Performance Data :  
LCD Failure Count  
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation  
(LCD) failures since agent reset. An LCD failure is  
declared when an LCD defect persists for more than 2 -  
3 seconds.(length = 4 bytes)  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day :  
Count of all blocks received with loss of cell delineation  
(LCD) failures in the current 15 minute/ current 1 day/  
previous 1 day interval.  
References:  
ADSL commands  
z
IDL series User Guide  
262  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.14 ADSL ATUR Interval Commands  
5.9.14.1 Get adsl atur interval  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur interval ifname <interface-name> [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Number of 15 minutes intervals.  
Type: Get － Optional  
<interface-name>  
nintrvl <nintrvl-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 96  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur interval ifname dsl-0 nintrvl 1  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
: 1  
IntervalNumber  
IntervalValidData : true  
IntervalLoss(sec) : 10  
IntervalLofs(sec) : 10  
IntervalLprs(sec) : 10  
IntervalLESs(sec) : 10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The IfIndex of DSL port  
IntervalNumber  
Count from 1 through 96 of 15 minute intervals. Performance Data Interval number 1 is the  
most recent previous interval; interval 96 is 24 hours ago.  
IntervalValidData This variable indicates if the data for this interval is valid.  
IntervalLofs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Framing.  
IntervalLoss(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Signal.  
IntervalLprs(sec) Count of seconds in the interval when there was Loss of Power.  
IntervalESs(sec)  
Count of Errored Seconds in the interval. The errored second parameter is a count of  
one-second intervals containing one or more crc anomalies, or one or more los or sef defects.  
IP DSLAM  
263  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.15 Adsl atur intervalext Commands  
5.9.15.1 Get adsl atur intervalext  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur intervalext [ifname <interface-name>] [nintrvl <nintrvl-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Mandator  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.  
Type: Get -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 96  
nintrvl <nintrvl-val>  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur intervalext IFNAME dsl-0 NINTRVL 1  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
: 1  
IntervalNumber  
IntervalSesl(sec) : 10  
IntervalFecsL(sec) : 10  
IntervalUasL(sec) : 10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
IntervalNumber  
IntervalSesl(sec)  
IntervalUasL(sec)  
IntervalFecsL(sec)  
Count from 1 through 96, of 15 minute intervals.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was severely errored seconds.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was unavailable errored seconds.  
Count of seconds in the interval when there was Forward error correction seconds.  
References  
z
atur interval related commands  
IDL series User Guide  
264  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.16 ADSL ATUR Perf Commands  
5.9.16.1 Get adsl atur perf  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur perf [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23.  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur perf ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Perf Valid Intervals  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
: 10  
: 10  
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day  
Prev1Day  
10  
Time Elapsed/Monitored(sec) -  
LOFS (sec)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
LOSS (sec)  
10  
10  
10  
10  
LPRS (sec)  
ES (sec)  
10  
10  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifindex of the type Adsl port  
Ifname  
Perf Valid Intervals  
The number of previous 15-minute intervals in the interval table for  
which data was collected.  
Perf Invalid Intervals  
The number of intervals in the range from 0 to the value of  
'adslAturPerfValid-Intervals' for which no data is available. This object  
will typically be zero except in cases where the data for some intervals  
are not available (e.g., in proxy situations).  
Time  
Total elapsed seconds in the intervals – Curr15Min,  
IP DSLAM  
265  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Elapsed/Monitored(sec) Curr1Day and Monitored seconds in Prev1Day.  
LOFS (sec)  
LOSS (sec)  
LPRS (sec)  
ES (sec)  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of  
Framing failures since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of Framing.  
Performance Data : Count of number of Loss of  
signal failures since agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval, when  
there was Loss of signals.  
Performance Data: Count of number of Loss of power failures, since  
agent was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval, when  
there was Loss of power.  
Performance Data : Count of number of errored seconds since agent  
was reset.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of errored seconds in the  
current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1-day interval.  
5.9.17 Adsl atur perfext Commands  
5.9.17.1 Get adsl atur perfext  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur perfext [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> Ifindex of the type Adsl port  
Type: Get -- Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur perfext ifname dsl-0  
IDL series User Guide  
266  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
AturPerfStatLossL : 14  
PerfData Curr15Min Curr1Day  
Prev1Day  
10  
10  
21  
Perf Stat SESL  
Perf Stat UASL  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
10  
Perf Stat FecsL 11  
13  
19  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifindex of the type Adsl port  
Ifname  
AturPerfStatLossL  
Count of 1-second intervals containing one or more far end loss of  
signal (LOS) defects (Not available for ADSL)  
Perf Stat SESL  
Perf Stat UASL  
Perf Stat FecsL  
Performance Data : Count of severely errored second line.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,  
when there was severely errored second.  
Performance Data : Count of unavailable errored seconds.  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day : Count of seconds  
in the current 15-minute/ current 1-day/ previous 1- day interval,  
when there was unavailable errored seconds.  
Performance Data:  
Count of 1-second intervals, with one or more forward error  
correction (FEC) anomalies, since agent reset. (Not available for  
ADSL)  
Curr15Min/Curr1Day/Prev1Day:  
Count of 1-second intervals, in the current 15-minute/current  
1-day/previous 1-day interval, with one or more forward error  
correction (FEC) anomalies. (Not available for ADSL)  
References:  
z
atur perfdata related commands  
IP DSLAM  
267  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.18 ADSL ATUR Physical Commands  
5.9.18.1 Get adsl atur physical  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur physical [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
<interface-name>  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur physical ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Serial Number  
Vendor ID  
: CO123456  
: Vendor123  
: VerNo98114  
: LossOfFraming  
: 10  
Version Number  
Curr Status  
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Curr  
Atn(dB/10)  
: 10  
CurrAttainable Rate(bps)  
10  
: 10  
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10) :  
AturGsConfig  
Chan Perf CD  
: 0x0121020203  
: 5  
Chan Perf  
CU  
: 5  
Chan Perf BE  
: 5  
Overhead Channel  
ID : 12345678  
: 4000  
System Vendor  
ATU-R Self Test Result  
ID : 12345678  
: 0x10  
: 90  
ATUR G9941 Vendor  
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10)  
BitSwapCount  
: 90  
PSDMaskMode  
: CoMsk2  
IDL series User Guide  
268  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DownStream Gains per bin  
-----------------------------  
[ 0]  
15  
Transmit Spectrum Shaping info  
-----------------------------------  
[ 0]  
90  
Delt HLINSCds  
Delt HLOGMTds  
QLNMTds  
: 2  
: 8  
Delt  
Delt  
: 5  
DELT Last Tx State  
SnrmtDs  
: dmtaturg9941  
: 100  
Delt HLINpsds  
------------------  
[ 0]  
18  
Delt HLOGpsds  
------------------  
[ 0]  
20  
Delt QLNpsds  
-----------------  
[ 0] 22  
Delt DMT Bin SNR  
---------------------  
[ 0] 22  
Signal Atn(dB/10)  
: 40  
Bin Number  
Number of bits/bin  
-------------------------------------  
[ 0] 0110030607  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
The ADSL Interface Name  
Ifname  
Serial Number  
The vendor specific string that identifies the vendor equipment  
(EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).  
Vendor ID  
Vendor ID code (EOC - read 5 seconds after data mode).  
The vendor specific version number sent by this ATU,as part of  
the initialization messages (EOC - read 5 seconds after data  
mode).  
Version Number  
Curr Status  
Indicates current State of ATUR Line. This is a bitmap of possible  
conditions. Due to the isolation of the ATU-R when line problems  
occur, many state conditions such as loss of power, loss of quality  
IP DSLAM  
269  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
signal, and initialization errors, cannot be determined.  
Noise Margin as seen by this ATU, with respect to its received  
signal, in tenth dB.  
Curr Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Curr Atn(dB/10)  
Measured difference in the total power transmitted by the peer  
ATU, and the total power received by this ATU.  
CurrAttainable Rate(bps)  
Curr Output Pwr(dB/10)  
Indicates the maximum currently attainable data rate by the ATU.  
This value will be equal to, or greater than, the current line rate.  
Measured total output power transmitted by this ATU.This is the  
measurement that was reported during the last activation  
sequence.  
AturGsConfig  
Chan Perf CD  
The upstream and downstream ATU-R configuration data (EOC -  
read 5 sec after data mode).  
The far-end delineated total cell count performance parameter is a  
count of the total number of cells passed through the cell  
delineation and HEC function process, operating on the ATM Data  
Path, while in the SYNC state. (Not available for ADSL)  
The far-end user total cell count performance parameter is a count  
of the total number of cells in the ATM Data Path delivered at the  
V-C (for ATU-C) or TR (for ATUR) interface. (Not available for  
ADSL)  
Chan Perf CU  
Chan Perf BE  
The far-end idle bit error count performance parameter is a count  
of the number of bit errors in the idle cell payload received in the  
ATM Data Path at the far-end. (Not available for ADSL)  
Indicates the Overhead Channel. This feature is not supported by  
DSLPHY as yet.  
Overhead Channel  
System Vendor ID  
Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Embedded  
Operations Channel(ADSL). Typically identiies the ATU-R system  
integrator which usually refers to the vendor of the smallest  
field-replaceable unit. ATU-R System Vendor ID may not be the  
same as ATU-R G.994.1 Vendor ID. For ADSL2, provides the  
Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the Overhead Messages. It  
is not available for ADSL. This is string of 8 octets containing 2  
octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet vendor revision  
number.  
ATU-R Self Test Result  
ATUR G9941 Vendor ID  
Defines the ATU-R selftest result. The most significant octet is: 00  
hex if the self-test passed or 01 hex if the self-test failed.  
Interpretation of the other octets is vendor discretionary and can be  
interpreted in combination with G.994.1 and system Vendor IDs.  
Indicates the Vendor ID as inserted by the ATU-R in the G.994.1  
CLR message.The G.994.1 Vendor ID typically identifies the  
IDL series User Guide  
270  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
vendor of the ATU-R G.994.1 functionality. This is string of 8 octets  
containing 2 octet country code , 4 octet vendor id and 2 octet  
vendor revision number.  
Atur ACTPSDds (dB/10)  
This parameter defines the average downstream transmit power  
spectrum density over the used subcarriers delivered by the ATU-C  
at the U-C reference point, at the instant of measurement. It's value  
ranges from -90 to 0, in 0.1 dB/Hz steps. It is available only for  
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.  
BitSwapCount  
PSDMaskMode  
Gain Spsds  
This Conexant parameter indicates the bit swap count. It can read  
only in data mode  
This conexant parameter that indicates the actual PSD Mask  
currently being used by ATU-R  
This parameter defines the downstream gains allocation table per  
bin. It is supported for ADSL2/ADSl2plus only.  
This parameter provides the Downstream Transmit Spectrum  
Shaping parameter expressed as the set of break points  
exchanged during G994.1. Value of this parameter is in range 0 -  
127, in multiples of -0.5 dB. 127 is a special value indicating the  
subcarrier is not transmitted. It is available only for  
ADSL2/ADSL2plus.  
Atur TSSpsds  
Delt HLINSCds  
Delt HLOGMTds  
Delt QLNMTds  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the scale factor to be  
applied to the downstream Hlin (f) values. (Not available for ADSL  
and ADSL2plus)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols  
used to measure the downstream Hlog (f). (Not available for ADSL  
and ADSL2plus)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the number of symbols  
used to measure the downstream QLN (f) values. (Not available for  
ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
DELT Last Tx State  
The DELT-related parameter that provides the last successful  
transmitted initialization state by ATU-R. (Not available for ADSL  
and ADSL2plus)  
Delt SnrmtDs  
Delt HLINpsds  
DELT-number of symbols to measure DS SNR  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of complex  
downstream Hlin (f) values in linear scale. (Not available for ADSL  
and ADSL2plus)  
Delt HLOGpsds  
Delt QLNpsds  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real  
downstream Hlog (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus)  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real  
IP DSLAM  
271  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
downstream QLN (f) values in dB. (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus)  
DMT Bin SNR  
The DELT-related parameter that provides an array of real  
downstream SNR (f) values in dB (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus)  
Signal Atn(dB/10)  
AturDMTBinBits  
DELT-related parameter that provides the downtream signal  
attenuation (length = 4 bytes). (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus).  
Number of bits per bin for the bin indexed by this element of the  
string. The 0th element contains the number of bits for bin 0  
through to the 255th element, which contains the number of bits for  
bin 255. The range of expected values is from 0 to 15 bits per bin  
(256 bytes for Annex A and Annex B, 512 bytes for G.Span/Adsl+,  
1024 bytes for G.Span Plus).  
References:  
z
ADSL commands  
5.9.19 ADSL ATUR Traps Commands  
5.9.19.1 Get adsl atur traps  
Description:  
This command is used to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur traps [ifname <interface-name]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL interface name.  
Type : Get – Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
<interface-name>  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur traps ifname dsl-0  
IDL series User Guide  
272  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
Lofs Thresh Trap : 1  
Lprs Thresh Trap : 1  
Rate Change Trap : 0  
Loss Thresh Trap : 1  
ESs Thresh Trap : 0  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The ADSL Interface Name  
Lofs Thresh Trap  
Loss Thresh Trap  
Lprs Thresh Trap  
ESs Thresh Trap  
Rate Change Trap  
Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold reached  
Loss of Signal 15-minute interval threshold reached  
Loss of Power 15-minute interval threshold reached  
Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold reached  
The ATU-Rs transmit rate has changed (RADSL mode only).  
References  
z
ADSL Commands  
5.9.20 ADSL ATUR Trapsext Commands  
5.9.20.1 Get adsl atur trapsext  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl atur trapsext [ifname <interface-name]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The ADSL Interface Name  
Type: Get -- Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Example:  
$ get adsl atur trapsext ifname dsl-0  
IP DSLAM  
273  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Ifname  
: dsl-0  
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap : 1  
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap: 0  
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1  
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap : 1  
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap : 1  
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0  
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap : 0  
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap : 0  
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap  
: 1  
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap : 0  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
The ADSL Interface Name.  
Ifname  
SesL Thresh 15Min Trap  
Severely Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold  
reached.  
UasL Thresh 15Min Trap  
FecsL Thresh 15Min Trap  
Unavailable Error Seconds 15-minute interval threshold  
reached.  
Forward error correction Seconds 15-minute interval  
threshold reached.  
Lofs Thresh 1Day Trap  
Loss Thresh 1Day Trap  
Lprs Thresh 1Day Trap  
ESs Thresh 1Day Trap  
SesL Thresh 1Day Trap  
Loss of Frames 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Loss of Signal 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Loss of Power 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold reached.  
Severely Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold  
reached.  
UasL Thresh 1Day Trap  
FecsL Thresh 1Day Trap  
Unavailable Error Seconds 1-day interval threshold  
reached.  
Forward error correction Seconds 1-day interval  
threshold reached.  
References:  
ADSL Commands  
z
IDL series User Guide  
274  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.21 ADSL Cap Commands  
5.9.21.1 Get adsl cap  
Description:  
Use this command to view DSL transmission capability.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl cap  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get adsl cap  
Output:  
Tx Capability : q9921potsOverlapped q9921potsNonOverlapped  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
This bitmap specifies which all transmission modes, which the  
ATU-C is capable of supporting. Right now support for Annex A,  
Annex B, G.Span/ADSL+ and G.Span Plus is present. This value  
depends on the DSL PHY firmware present on Columbia MxU.  
Tx Capability  
References:  
z
z
create dsl system  
get dsl system  
IP DSLAM  
275  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.22 ADSL Line Intf Commands  
5.9.22.1 Get adsl line intf  
Description:  
Use this command to view ADSL line configuration.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl line intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.9.22.2 Modify adsl line intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify adsl line intf ifname <interface-name> [ lineconfgsaction startup |  
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb | atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |  
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr | hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest | rcvFilterTest  
| rcvPowerPerBinTest | idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest | selt | shutdown |  
wakeup | AbortReq ] [ linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce | L0ToL2StateForce |  
L3StateForce | L2ToL0StateForce ] [ linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force ]  
[ linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921isdnOverlapped |  
q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9922potsNonOverlapeed | q9922potsOverlapped | q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped  
| q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped | q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |  
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped  
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped | q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9925IsdnOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ] [ dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable ]  
[ enable | disable ]  
IDL series User Guide  
276  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name>  
The interface name of the DSL port.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Allows action on per-line basis.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
lineconfgsaction startup |  
spectrumReverb | analogLb | digitalLb |  
atmLp | spectrumMedley | spectrumPilot |  
spectrumCMtpr | spectrumRMtpr |  
hybridLossTest | rcvLinearityTest |  
rcvFilterTest | rcvPowerPerBinTest |  
idleNoisePerBinTest | totalIdleNoiseTest  
| selt | shutdown | wakeup | AbortReq  
linepmconfpmsf L3ToL0StateForce |  
L0ToL2StateForce | L3StateForce |  
L2ToL0StateForce  
PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a  
change in the line state. (Not available for  
ADSL/ADSL2Plus)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
linedeltconfldsf inhibit | force  
The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force  
the line into the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available  
for ADSL and ADSL2plus)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
linetransatucconfig ansit1413 | etsi |  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921PotsOverlapped |  
The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of  
supporting. The modes available are limited by the  
design of the equipment. REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2  
ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921isdnOverlapped |  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
q9921tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921tcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9922potsNonOverlapeed |  
q9922potsOverlapped |  
q9922tcmIsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9922tcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9921tcmIsdnSymmetric |  
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |  
IP DSLAM  
277  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
adslPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe  
d | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped  
| q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9923IsdnOverlapped |  
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9925IsdnOverlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped  
| q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped  
| q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped  
dsbinsnrupdate Disable | Enable  
Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of  
downstream SNR bin status  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
enable | disable  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ get adsl line intf ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
Line Type  
dmt  
: noChannel  
Coding Type  
GsUtopia  
:
GsUtopia L2TxAddr  
: 23  
L2RxAddr  
: 10  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd  
L2TxAddr2nd : 11  
Gs Clock Type  
analoglb  
: 11  
GsUtopia  
: oscillator  
: ansit1413  
Gs Action  
:
Trans Atuc Cap  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
GsDmtTrellis  
: q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
: ansit1413  
: trellisOn  
Trans Atur Cap  
: ansit1413  
IDL series User Guide  
278  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
PM Conf PMSF  
: idleop  
: inhibit  
Line DELT Conf LDSF  
Curr Output Pwr(dBm/10)  
Enable  
: 10  
DS Bin SNR Update  
:
Bin Number  
SNR Margin/bin  
---------------------------------  
[ 0] 16  
Oper Status  
Enable  
: Up  
Admin Status  
:
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
The interface name of the DSL port.  
Line type used by the DSL port.  
Line coding type used by the port.  
UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for a line.  
UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address.  
Line Type  
Coding Type  
GsUtopia L2TxAddr  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr  
GsUtopia L2RxAddr2nd Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Rx address for the  
secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4  
bytes)  
GsUtopia  
Conexant parameter to set UTOPIA Level 2 Tx address for the  
secondary bearer channel in case of Dual Latency. (length = 4  
bytes)  
L2TxAddr2nd  
Gs Clock Type  
Gs Action  
Indicates use of crystal or oscillator.  
Allows action on per-line basis.  
Trans Atuc Cap  
Trans Atuc Actual  
Trans Atuc Config  
Transmission modes that ATU-C is capable of.  
Transmission modes  
The transmission modes that the ATU-C is capable of supporting.  
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment.  
REFERENCE"Section 7.3.2 ITU G.997.1" (length = 4 bytes).  
Indicates whether trellis coding has been enabled or not.  
The transmission modes that the ATU-R is capable of supporting.  
The modes available are limited by the design of the equipment  
(length = 4 bytes).  
GsDmtTrellis  
Trans Atur Cap  
PM Conf PMSF  
PM-related parameter used by ATU-C to force a change in the  
line state. (Not available for ADSL/ADSL2Plus)  
The DELT-related parameter used by ATU-C to force the line into  
the loop diagnostics mode. (Not available for ADSL and  
ADSL2plus)  
Line DELT Conf LDSF  
IP DSLAM  
279  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Curr Output  
Pwr(dBm/10)  
This conexant parameter indicates the measure of total output  
power transmitted by this ATU. The value of this parameter is  
dynamic and will also show the change in Tx power due to Power  
Management. For example, the value will decrease in L2 low  
power mode. This value can be negative.  
DS Bin SNR Update  
Conexant parameter to enable or disable collection of  
downstream SNR bin status  
Bin SNR Margin(dB/10)  
Oper Status  
Bin SNR margin for particular sub carrier  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up or  
down.  
Admin Status  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or Down.  
5.9.23 ADSL Line Profile Commands  
5.9.23.1 Get adsl line profile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get adsl line profile [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.9.23.2 Modify adsl line profile  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify adsl line profile ifname <interface-name> [ atucrateadaptation fixed |  
adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ gsparamtestinputfile  
<gsparamtestinputfile-val> ] [ atuctargetsnr <atuctargetsnr-val> ]  
[ atucmaxsnrmargin <atucmaxsnrmargin-val> ] [ atucgsrsintcorrectionup  
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms | 2ms | 4ms | disable ] [ atucdnshiftsnrmargin  
<atucdnshiftsnrmargin-val> ] [ atucupshiftsnrmargin <atucupshiftsnrmargin-val> ]  
[ atucminupshifttime <atucminupshifttime-val> ] [ atucmindnshifttime  
<atucmindnshifttime-val> ] [ atucfastmintxrate <atucfastmintxrate-val> ]  
[ atucintlmintxrate <atucintlmintxrate-val> ] [ atucfastmaxtxrate  
<atucfastmaxtxrate-val> ] [ atucintlmaxtxrate <atucintlmaxtxrate-val> ]  
[ atucmaxintldelay <atucmaxintldelay-val> ] [ type noChannel | fastOnly |  
interleavedOnly | fastOrInterleaved | fastAndInterleaved ] [ atucgstxendbin  
<atucgstxendbin-val> ] [ atucgstxstartbin <atucgstxstartbin-val> ]  
IDL series User Guide  
280  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[ atucgsmaxbitsperbin <atucgsmaxbitsperbin-val> ] [ atucgsrxstartbin  
<atucgsrxstartbin-val> ] [ atucgsrxendbin <atucgsrxendbin-val> ]  
[ atucgsrxbinadjust disable ] [ atucgsltriggermode locCrc | rmtCrc | snrInc |  
snrDec | disable ] [ atucgsadi2x standard ] [ atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone |  
initiatePn ] [ atucgstxpoweratten 0 | point1 | point2 | point3 | point4 | point5 |  
point6 | point7 | point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 | 14 | 15  
| 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 | 21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 | 28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |  
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40 ] [ atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256 ]  
[ atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ]  
[ atucgsrsintcorrectiondn 125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms | 2Ms | 4Ms | Disable ]  
[ atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25 | 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable ] [ atucgsdrstby Disable |  
Enable ] [ atucgsexpexch Expanded | Short ] [ atucgsescfastretrain Enable |  
Disable ] [ atucgsfastretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsbitswap Disable | Enable ]  
[ atucgsntr LocalOcs | Refck8K ] [ atucgsalctlusver Unknown ]  
[ atucgsusecustombin Enable | Disable ] [ atucgsdnbinusage  
<atucgsdnbinusage-val> ] [ atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256 | 511 ]  
[ atucgsfullretrain Enable | Disable ] [ atucgspsdmasktype CoMsk2 | FlatMsk |  
CabMsk2 | CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi | CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 | Adsl2NonovlpM1  
| Adsl2NonovlpM2 | Adsl2NonovlpFlat ] [ atucgseraseprofs enable | disable ]  
[ atucgsextrsmemory notpresent | present ] [ paramhybridlossteststart  
<paramhybridlossteststart-val> ] [ paramhybridlosstestend  
<paramhybridlosstestend-val> ] [ dmttrellis on | off ] [ aturtargetsnrmargin  
<aturtargetsnrmargin-val> ] [ aturdnshiftsnrmargin <aturdnshiftsnrmargin-val> ]  
[ aturupshiftsnrmargin <aturupshiftsnrmargin-val> ] [ aturminupshifttime  
<aturminupshifttime-val> ] [ aturmindnshifttime <aturmindnshifttime-val> ]  
[ aturfastmintxrate <aturfastmintxrate-val> ] [ aturintlmintxrate  
<aturintlmintxrate-val> ] [ aturfastmaxtxrate <aturfastmaxtxrate-val> ]  
[ aturintlmaxtxrate <aturintlmaxtxrate-val> ] [ aturmaxintldelay  
<aturmaxintldelay-val> ] [ databoost Enable | Disable ] [ upstreampsd Extended |  
Standard | Jj100 ] [ atucconfpmmode pmstatel3enable | pmstatel2enable |  
disable ] [ atucconfpml0time <atucconfpml0time-val> ] [ atucconfpml2time  
<atucconfpml2time-val> ] [ atucconfpml2atpr <atucconfpml2atpr-val> ]  
[ atucconfpml2minrate <atucconfpml2minrate-val> ] [ atucconfmsgminds  
<atucconfmsgminds-val> ] [ aturconfmsgminus <aturconfmsgminus-val> ]  
[ atucminsnrmgn <atucminsnrmgn-val> ] [ aturminsnrmgn  
<aturminsnrmgn-val> ] [ atucfrontenddesigntype El1508 | El1528 | Le87213 ]  
[ atuchwpwrreduction Disable | Enable ] [ atucgsusbitswap Disable | Enable ]  
[ aturmaxsnrmgn <aturmaxsnrmgn-val> ] [ atucconfmininp Inp0 | InpPoint5 |  
Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ atucpml2entrythreshrate  
atucpml2entrythreshrate ] [ atucpml2exitthreshrate  
<atucpml2exitthreshrate-val> ] [ atucpml2entryratemintime  
IP DSLAM  
281  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<atucpml2entryratemintime-val> ] [ atucgscabinethsenable Disable | Enable ]  
[ atucgsseltlooptype RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400 ] [ atucgsrxstartbinu1  
<atucgsrxstartbinu1-val> ] [ atucgsrxendbinu1 <atucgsrxendbinu1-val> ]  
[ gspsdmaskdsenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]  
[ gspsdmaskusenable PsdMaskDisable | PsdMaskEnable | PsdMaskEnableMod ]  
[ psdmaskdsfallbackenable False | True ] [ psdmaskusfallbackenable False |  
True ] [ atucconfmaxnompsdds <atucconfmaxnompsdds-val> ]  
[ aturconfmaxnompsdus <aturconfmaxnompsdus-val> ]  
[ atucconfmaxnomatpds <atucconfmaxnomatpds-val> ]  
[ aturconfmaxnomatpus <aturconfmaxnomatpus-val> ] [ atucconfpsdmaskds  
<atucconfpsdmaskds-val> ] [ aturconfpsdmaskus <aturconfpsdmaskus-val> ]  
[ aturratemode fixed | adaptAtStartup | adaptAtRuntime ] [ aturconfmininp Inp0 |  
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 | InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16 ] [ gsannexcoltocxswitch  
CxSwitch19DB | CxSwitch20DB | CxSwitch21DB | CxSwitch22DB | CxSwitch23DB  
| CxSwitch24DB | CxSwitch25DB | CxSwitch26DB | CxSwitch27DB |  
CxSwitch28DB | CxSwitch29DB | CxSwitch30DB ] [ atucconfgsannexcswitch  
Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB | Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB | Gspan23DB |  
Gspan24DB | Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB | GspanPlus8DB | GspanPlus9DB |  
GspanPlus10DB | GspanPlus11DB | GspanPlus12DB | GspanPlus13DB |  
GspanPlus14DB | GspanPlus15DB ] [ gsannexctouqswitch CUqSwitch6DB |  
CUqSwitch6_5DB | CUqSwitch7DB | CUqSwitch8DB | CUqSwitch9DB |  
CUqSwitch10DB | CUqSwitch11DB | CUqSwitch12DB | CUqSwitch13DB |  
CUqSwitch14DB | CUqSwitch15DB ] [ atucminsnrmgntime  
<atucminsnrmgntime-val> ] [ atuccustomerid WorldWide | France | China |  
Portugal ] [ atucmpsdmasktype Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 | Adsl2MEu56 |  
Adsl2MEu52 | Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 | Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |  
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll ] [ atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg | 24awg ]  
[ atucconfrateratio <atucconfrateratio-val> ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname<interface-name>  
The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to bemodified or viewed  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
atucrateadaptation fixed |  
adaptAtStartup |  
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this  
modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
adaptAtRuntime  
gsparamtestinputfile  
<gsparamtestinputfile-val>  
Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array Size,  
lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is specified  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
282  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
atuctargetsnr  
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin the  
modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or better, to  
successfully complete initialization.  
<atuctargetsnr-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucmaxsnrmargin  
Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the Noise  
Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its power  
output to optimize its operation.  
<atucmaxsnrmargin-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucgsrsintcorrectionup  
125us | 250us | 500us | 1ms |  
2ms | 4ms | disable  
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS can  
also be disabled.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucdnshiftsnrmargin  
<atucdnshiftsnrmargin-val>  
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin  
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its  
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value  
will be 0.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucupshiftsnrmargin  
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin  
rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase its  
transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucupshiftsnrmargin-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucminupshifttime  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before  
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will  
be 0.  
<atucminupshifttime-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 16383  
atucmindnshifttime  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn before  
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will  
be 0.  
<atucmindnshifttime-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 16383  
atucfastmintxrate  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also  
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL  
mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucfastmintxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucintlmintxrate  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.  
IP DSLAM  
283  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<atucintlmintxrate-val>  
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding  
RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucfastmaxtxrate  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also  
refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL  
mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucfastmaxtxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucintlmaxtxrate  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding  
RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucintlmaxtxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucmaxintldelay  
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave  
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping  
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver  
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.  
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input  
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise  
immunity at the expense of payload latency.  
<atucmaxintldelay-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
type noChannel | fastOnly |  
interleavedOnly |  
This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
fastOrInterleaved |  
fastAndInterleaved  
atucgstxendbin  
The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucgstxendbin-val>  
Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff  
atucgstxstartbin  
The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucgstxstartbin-val>  
Valid values: 0x06 - 0xff  
atucgsmaxbitsperbin  
The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucgsmaxbitsperbin-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 15  
atucgsrxstartbin  
The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<atucgsrxstartbin-val>  
Valid values: 0x01 - 0x1ff  
atucgsrxendbin  
The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.  
IDL series User Guide  
284  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<atucgsrxendbin-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0x06 - 0x1ff  
atucgsrxbinadjust disable  
This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsltriggermode locCrc |  
rmtCrc | snrInc | snrDec |  
disable  
The type of event that triggers a fast retrain  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsadi2x standard  
For non-standard compliant ADI CPE  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsinitiate waitPn | ctone  
Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a C-tone to  
the remote unit.  
| initiatePn  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgstxpoweratten 0 |  
The value in dB of Tx power attenuation  
point1 | point2 | point3 | point4 Type: Modify -- Optional  
| point5 | point6 | point7 |  
point8 | point9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 |  
6 | 7 | 8 | 9 | 10 | 11 | 12 | 13 |  
14 | 15 | 16 | 17 | 18 | 19 | 20 |  
21 | 22 | 23 | 24 | 25 | 26 | 27 |  
28 | 29 | 30 | 31 | 32 | 33 | 34 |  
35 | 36 | 37 | 38 | 39 | 40  
atucgscodinggain Auto | 0 |  
Sets the coding gain in dB increments  
1 | 2 | 3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | 256  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsrsfastovrhddn 50 | 25 This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream fast  
| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable  
buffer. RS can also be disabled.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsrsintcorrectiondn  
This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream interleaved  
125Us | 250Us | 500Us | 1Ms | buffer.RS can also be disabled.  
2Ms | 4Ms | Disable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsrsfastovrhdup 50 | 25 This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream fast  
| 12 | 6 | 3 | 1 | Disable  
buffer.RS can also be disabled.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsdrstby Disable |  
Enable  
This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line driver  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsexpexch Expanded |  
Short  
T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsescfastretrain Enable This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain capability  
| Disable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsfastretrain Enable |  
Disable  
This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability. Currently  
supported only in G.lite mode.  
IP DSLAM  
285  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsbitswap Disable |  
Enable  
This parameter enables/disables bit swapping  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsntr LocalOcs |  
Refck8K  
This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsalctlusver Unknown  
For T1.413 demo purposes only  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsusecustombin Enable This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511 bins  
| Disable  
will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsdnbinusage  
'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a '0'  
disables usage of corresponding bin.  
<atucgsdnbinusage-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsmaxdco 64 | 128 | 256 Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's hardware  
| 511  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsfullretrain Enable |  
Disable  
Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgspsdmasktype  
CoMsk2 | FlatMsk | CabMsk2  
| CoMsk2Rfi | FlatMskRfi |  
CabMsk2Rfi | CoMsk2Rfi0 |  
Adsl2NonovlpM1 |  
Adsl2NonovlpM2 |  
Adsl2NonovlpFlat  
atucgseraseprofs enable |  
disable  
This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain  
profiles at startup  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsextrsmemory  
notpresent | present  
Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
paramhybridlossteststart  
Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value mentioned  
<paramhybridlossteststart-val is an indicative value only, for exact value refer to document number  
>
DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff  
paramhybridlosstestend  
<paramhybridlosstestend-val  
>
End bin for range of bins to be measured.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0x0 - 0x1ff  
dmttrellis on | off  
This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding should  
always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
286  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
aturtargetsnrmargin  
Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power  
7 or better to successfully complete initialization  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturtargetsnrmargin-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturdnshiftsnrmargin  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise margin  
falls below this level, the modem should attempt to decrease its  
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not present, the value  
will be 0.  
<aturdnshiftsnrmargin-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturupshiftsnrmargin  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise margin  
rises above this level, the modem should attempt to increase itís  
transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will be 0.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturupshiftsnrmargin-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturminupshifttime  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn, before  
an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present, the value will  
be 0.  
<aturminupshifttime-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturmindnshifttime  
Minimum time that the current margin is below DownshiftSnrMgn,  
before a downshift occurs. In the case that RADSL mode is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
<aturmindnshifttime-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturfastmintxrate  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also  
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL  
mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturfastmintxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturintlmintxrate  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding  
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturintlmintxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturfastmaxtxrate  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps. Also  
refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding RADSL  
mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturfastmaxtxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
IP DSLAM  
287  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
aturintlmaxtxrate  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information regarding  
RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R receive rates.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturintlmaxtxrate-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
aturmaxintldelay  
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel. Interleave  
delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines the mapping  
(relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at the interleaver  
input and their placement in the bit stream at the interleaver output.  
Larger numbers provide greater separation between consecutive input  
bytes in the output bit stream, allowing for improved impulse noise  
immunity at the expense of payload latency  
<aturmaxintldelay-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
databoost Enable | Disable  
Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
upstreampsd Extended |  
Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either  
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Standard | Jj100  
atucconfpmmode  
PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link states.  
Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input. Additional  
value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
pmstatel3enable |  
pmstatel2enable | disable  
atucconfpml0time  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This  
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an exit  
from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2 state. It ranges from 0 to  
255 seconds.  
<atucconfpml0time-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
atucconfpml2time  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This  
parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds) between an Entry  
into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the L2 state and between  
two consecutive Power Trims in the L2 State. It ranges from 0 to 255  
seconds.  
<atucconfpml2time-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
atucconfpml2atpr  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This  
parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit power  
reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single Power Trim in  
the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.  
<atucconfpml2atpr-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
288  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucconfpml2minrate  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state. This  
parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low power  
state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range from 0x1F40  
(8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.  
<atucconfpml2minrate-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0x1F40 - 0xFA000  
atucconfmsgminds  
Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This feature is  
not supported by DSLPHY as yet.  
<atucconfmsgminds-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 4000 - 64000  
aturconfmsgminus  
Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature is not  
supported by DSLPHY as yet.  
<aturconfmsgminus-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 4000 - 64000  
atucminsnrmgn  
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise  
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or  
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value  
mentioned is an indicative value only.  
<atucminsnrmgn-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
aturminsnrmgn  
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise  
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7 or  
better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value  
mentioned is an indicative value only.  
<aturminsnrmgn-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
atucfrontenddesigntype  
Front end hardware reference design  
El1508 | El1528 | Le87213  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atuchwpwrreduction Disable Hardware configuration parameter  
| Enable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsusbitswap Disable |  
Enable  
This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
aturmaxsnrmgn  
<aturmaxsnrmgn-val>  
Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise Margin. If  
the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to reduce its power  
output to optimize its operation. The value set by the user is in dB/10,  
and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 310  
IP DSLAM  
289  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
atucconfmininp Inp0 |  
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |  
InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16  
atucpml2entrythreshrate  
<atucpml2entrythreshrate-val  
>
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for  
the downstream bearer channel.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucpml2exitthreshrate  
<atucpml2exitthreshrate-val>  
PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
atucpml2entryratemintime  
<atucpml2entryratemintime-v  
al>  
PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 900 - 65535  
atucgscabinethsenable  
Disable | Enable  
Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsseltlooptype  
RealCable | Dls90 | Dls400  
Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for SELT. The  
default value mentioned is an indicative value only.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsrxstartbinu1  
Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for Rx  
signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and  
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special  
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)  
<atucgsrxstartbinu1-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsrxendbinu1  
Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for Rx  
signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive start and  
end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special  
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)  
<atucgsrxendbinu1-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
gspsdmaskdsenable  
PsdMaskDisable |  
PsdMaskEnable |  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
PsdMaskEnableMod  
gspsdmaskusenable  
PsdMaskDisable |  
PsdMaskEnable |  
Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)  
feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2 Annex A  
ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)  
PsdMaskEnableMod  
psdmaskdsfallbackenable  
False | True  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback  
mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2  
depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2  
Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
290  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: False, True  
psdmaskusfallbackenable  
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD) fallback  
mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the base ADSL2  
depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only for ADSL2 Annex  
A.(length = 4 bytes)  
False | True  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: False, True  
atucconfmaxnompsdds  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit  
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value  
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter  
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only  
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -40 in steps of 0.1  
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)  
<atucconfmaxnompsdds-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: (-600) - (-400)  
aturconfmaxnompsdus  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit  
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime. Value  
depends on CO MIB element settings and near end transmitter  
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only  
for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to -38 in steps of 0.1  
dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)  
<aturconfmaxnompsdus-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: (-600) - (-380)  
atucconfmaxnomatpds  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit  
power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value  
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is  
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for  
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1  
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)  
<atucconfmaxnomatpds-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
aturconfmaxnomatpus  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate transmit  
power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and showtime. Value  
depends on CO MIB element settings and local capabilities and is  
exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available only for  
ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps of 0.1  
dBm.(length = 4 bytes)  
<aturconfmaxnomatpus-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
atucconfpsdmaskds  
This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD mask  
IP DSLAM  
291  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
<atucconfpsdmaskds-val>  
applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may  
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in  
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length = 4 bytes).  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
aturconfpsdmaskus  
This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask  
applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may  
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined in  
the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available only for  
Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<aturconfpsdmaskus-val>  
aturratemode fixed |  
adaptAtStartup |  
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this  
modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
adaptAtRuntime  
aturconfmininp Inp0 |  
InpPoint5 | Inp1 | Inp2 |  
InpAuto | Inp4 | Inp8 | Inp16  
gsannexcoltocxswitch  
CxSwitch19DB |  
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection for  
the upstream bearer channel. Supported for ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)  
CxSwitch20DB |  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
CxSwitch21DB |  
CxSwitch22DB |  
CxSwitch23DB |  
CxSwitch24DB |  
CxSwitch25DB |  
CxSwitch26DB |  
CxSwitch27DB |  
CxSwitch28DB |  
CxSwitch29DB |  
CxSwitch30DB  
atucconfgsannexcswitch  
Gspan19DB | Gspan20DB |  
Gspan21DB | Gspan22DB |  
Gspan23DB | Gspan24DB |  
Gspan25DB | GspanPlus7DB  
| GspanPlus8DB |  
GspanPlus9DB |  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and  
G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
GspanPlus10DB |  
GspanPlus11DB |  
GspanPlus12DB |  
GspanPlus13DB |  
GspanPlus14DB |  
IDL series User Guide  
292  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GspanPlus15DB  
gsannexctouqswitch  
CUqSwitch6DB |  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
CUqSwitch6_5DB |  
CUqSwitch7DB |  
CUqSwitch8DB |  
CUqSwitch9DB |  
CUqSwitch10DB |  
CUqSwitch11DB |  
CUqSwitch12DB |  
CUqSwitch13DB |  
CUqSwitch14DB |  
CUqSwitch15DB  
atucminsnrmgntime  
<atucminsnrmgntime-val>  
This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is  
allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min snr, the  
DSL line is dropped by the APIs.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 255  
atuccustomerid WorldWide | This parameter indicates the customer ID.  
France | China | Portugal  
atucmpsdmasktype  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used for  
Adsl2M.  
Adsl2MEu64 | Adsl2MEu60 |  
Adsl2MEu56 | Adsl2MEu52 |  
Adsl2MEu48 | Adsl2MEu44 |  
Adsl2MEu40 | Adsl2MEu36 |  
Adsl2MEu32 | Adsl2MAll  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucgsseltloopgauge 26awg This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.  
| 24awg  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
atucconfrateratio  
<atucconfrateratio-val>  
This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a dual  
latency configuration. This parameter must be set the parameter to a  
value greater than 0 and less than 100.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 100  
Example:  
$ get adsl line profile ifname dsl-0  
IP DSLAM  
293  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
IfName  
: dsl-0  
ADSL ATUC Configuration :  
------------------------------  
Rate Adaptation  
: fixed  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20  
Max Snr Mgn(dB/10)  
: 40  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
: 1ms  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
GsTxEndBin  
: 70  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
GsTxStartBin  
: 10  
: 0x20  
: 0x50  
: 10  
: 0x40  
: 0x60  
: 0x20  
: 0x06  
GsRxStartBin  
: 0x06  
: 15  
GsRxEndBin  
: 0x1f  
: 64  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsInitiate  
GsMaxDCo  
: enable  
: waitPn  
: Auto  
GsAdi2x  
: standard  
: point6  
: 1  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsFastRetrain  
GsCodingGain  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsDrStby  
: 125Us  
: Disable  
: Enable  
: Enable  
: Unknown  
: Enable  
: FlatMsk  
: 50  
: Short  
: Enable  
: LocalOcs  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
GsBitSwap  
GsNtr  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsExtRsMemory  
GsFullRetrain  
: Enable  
: enable  
GsEraseProfiles  
: ExtRsMemory  
ParamHybridLossTestStart : 0x10  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd : 0x23  
GsDmtTrellis  
: on  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
: rmtCrc  
: noChannel  
: 0xff  
GsDnBinUsage  
ParametricTestInputFile : TestFile  
Data Boost  
: Enable  
Upstream PSD  
Conf PM Mode  
: Extended  
: pmstatel3enable pmstatel3disable  
IDL series User Guide  
294  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)  
MSG Min Ds  
: 120  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
: 255  
: 30  
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps) : 0xFA00  
: 4000  
Min Snr Mrg(dB/10)  
: 20  
FrontEnd H/W Design  
H/W Pwr Reduction  
GsUsBitSwap  
: El1508  
: Enable  
: Enable  
: 0x1000  
Minimum INP  
: Inp0  
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate  
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate  
CabinetHsEnable  
: 0x1000  
: Disable  
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time : 1800  
GsSeltLoopType  
GsRxStartBinU1  
: Real Cable  
: 0x3aa  
: 0x4a6  
GsRxEndBinU1  
PsdMaskEnable  
PSD MoD Enable  
:
PsdMod FallBackEnable  
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)  
Downstream PSD Mask :  
--------------------------  
: Enable  
: 204  
Max Nom PSD(dB/10)  
: -40  
[ 0]  
0
GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch  
: CxSwitch19DB  
: Gspan19DB  
GsAnnexCSwitch  
CUqSwitch6_5DB  
GsAnnexCToUqSwitch  
GsSeltLoopGauge  
:
Min SnrMgnTime(sec)  
Customer ID  
: 20  
: WorldWide  
: Adsl2MEu32  
: 30  
GsMPsdMaskType  
Rate Ratio  
: 26awg  
ADSL ATUR Configuration :  
------------------------------  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 50  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10) : 35  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
: 70  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
MSG Min Us  
: 10  
: 0x20  
: 0x40  
: 10  
: 0x10  
: 0x60  
: 4000  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20  
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10) : 20  
PSD MoD Enable  
: Enable  
: PSDFallbackEnable Max Nom PSD(dB/10)  
PsdMod FallBackEnable  
: -38  
IP DSLAM  
295  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)  
Min INP  
: 125  
Rate Adaptation  
: fixed  
: Inp0  
Upstream PSD Mask :  
------------------------  
[ 0]  
0
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
The ADSL line interface name, whose profile is to be modified or  
viewed  
Rate Adaptation  
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on  
this modem. Refer to ADSL Forum TR-005 for more information.  
Configured Target Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise Margin  
the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7, or  
better, to successfully complete initialization.  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Max Snr Mgn(dB/10)  
Configured Maximum acceptable Signal/Noise Margin. If the  
Noise Margin is above this, the modem hould attempt to reduce its  
power output to optimize its operation.  
GsRsIntCorrectionUp  
Sets the correction time for the upstream interleaved buffer. RS  
can also be disabled.  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)  
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise  
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to  
decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not  
present, the value will be 0.  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)  
Configured Signal/Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise  
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to  
increase its transmit rate. In thecase that RADSL is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn  
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn  
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for  
ATU-C receive rates.  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in  
IDL series User Guide  
296  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and refer to ATU-R transmit rate for  
ATU-C receive rates.  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C  
receive rates.  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in  
bps. Also refer to 'adslAtucConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-R transmit rate for ATU-C  
receive rates.  
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.  
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines  
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at  
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the  
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation  
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing  
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload  
latency.  
GsTxStartBin  
GsTxEndBin  
GsRxStartBin  
GsRxEndBin  
GsMaxBitsPerBin  
GsMaxDCo  
The lowest bin number allowed for Tx signal.  
The highest bin number allowed for Tx signal.  
The lowest bin number allowed for Rx signal.  
The highest bin number allowed for Rx signal.  
The maximum Rx number of bits per bin.  
Maximum interleaving depth supported by the customer's  
hardware  
GsRxBinAdjust  
GsAdi2x  
This parameter employs Rx Start/End bin settings  
For non-standard compliant ADI CPE  
GsInitiate  
Specifies which end initiates startup. It is also used to send a  
C-tone to the remote unit.  
GsTxPowerAtten  
GsCodingGain  
The value in dB of Tx power attenuation  
Sets the coding gain in dB increments  
GsRsFastOvrhdDown  
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the downstream  
fast buffer. RS can also be disabled.  
GsRsIntCorrectionDown  
GsRsFastOvrhdUp  
GsDrStby  
This parameter sets the correction time for the downstream  
interleaved buffer.RS can also be disabled.  
This parameter sets the percentage overhead for the upstream  
fast buffer.RS can also be disabled.  
This parameter provides the ability to disable power to the line  
driver  
IP DSLAM  
297  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
GsExpandedExchange  
GsEscapeFastRetrain  
T1.413 parameter that Enables/Disables EES  
This parameter enables/disables escape to the fast retrain  
capability  
GsFastRetrain  
This parameter enables/disables the fast retrain capability.  
Currently supported only in G.lite mode.  
GsBitSwap  
GsNtr  
This parameter enables/disables bit swapping  
This parameter enables/disables NTR on a per chip basis  
For T1.413 demo purposes only  
GsAlctlUsVer  
GsUseCustomBin  
This parameter enables/disables user selection which of the 511  
bins will be enabled for upstream and downstream transmission.  
Indicates enable/disable of auto retrain capability  
This parameter selects the PSD mask option to be used  
This parameter enables/disables the ability to erase all fast retrain  
profiles at startup  
GsFullRetrain  
GsPsdMaskType  
GsEraseProfiles  
GsExtRsMemory  
Indicates whether customer's Hardware uses external RS RAM  
Start bin for range of bins to be measured. The default value  
mentioned is an indicative value only, for exact value refer to  
document number DO-400523-AN and DO-401163-AN.  
End bin for range of bins to be measured.  
ParamHybridLossTestStart  
GsParamHybridLossTestEnd  
GsDmtTrellis  
This parameter enables/disables trellis coding. Trellis coding  
should always be enabled for its clear performance advantage.  
The type of event that triggers a fast retrain  
GslTriggerMode  
Type  
This object is used to configure the ADSL physical line mode.  
'1' in bit position indicates usage of corresponding bin,whereas a  
'0' disables usage of corresponding bin.  
GsDnBinUsage  
ParametricTestInputFile  
Indicates Name of the Input file from which to take the Mask Array  
Size, lower and upper mask Array. Null string means no file is  
specified  
Data Boost  
Conexant parameter that enables/disables DataBoost option.  
Conexant parameter that sets the upstream PSD to be either  
extended or standard. Used for GSpan Plus only.  
PM-related parameter used by the ATU-C to set the allowed link  
states. Both bit values can be given simultaneously in the input.  
Additional value to disable pmmode is disable, which is equal to 0.  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.  
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)  
between an exit from the L2 state and the next entry into the L2  
state. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.  
Upstream PSD  
Conf PM Mode  
Conf PML0 Time(sec)  
Conf PML2 Time(sec)  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.  
This parameter represents the minimum time (in seconds)  
IDL series User Guide  
298  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
between an Entry into the L2 state and the first Power Trim in the  
L2 state and between two consecutive Power Trims in the L2  
State. It ranges from 0 to 255 seconds.  
Conf PML2 ATPR (dB/10)  
Conf PML2 Min Rate(bps)  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.  
This parameter represents the maximum aggregate transmit  
power reduction (in dB) that can be performed through a single  
Power Trim in the L2 state. It ranges from 0 dB/10 to 310 dB/10.  
PM configuration parameter, related to the L2 low power state.  
This parameter specifies the minimum net data rate during the low  
power state (L2). The data rate is coded in bit/s, and can range  
from 0x1F40 (8000) bps to 0xFA000 (1024000) bps.  
Configures downstream overhead channel bandwidth. This  
feature is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.  
MSG Min Ds  
Min Snr Mrg(dB/10)  
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise  
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7  
or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value  
mentioned is an indicative value only.  
FrontEnd H/W Design  
H/W Pwr Reduction  
GsUsBitSwap  
Front end hardware reference design  
Hardware configuration parameter  
This parameter enables/disables upstream bit swapping  
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection  
for the downstream bearer channel.  
Minimum INP  
PML2 Entry Thresh Rate  
PML2 Exit Thresh Rate  
PML2 Entry Rate Min Time  
CabinetHsEnable  
PM config param. L2 state entry data rate.  
PM config param. L2 state exit data rate.  
PM config param.Min L2 entry rate time  
Enable/Disable HS tones in Cabinet mode  
GsSeltLoopType  
Conexant parameter that is used to specify the loop type for  
SELT. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.  
Conexant parameter that specifies lowest bin number allowed for  
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive  
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special  
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)  
GsRxStartBinU1  
GsRxEndBinU1  
Conexant parameter that specifies highest bin number allowed for  
Rx signal in G.Span Plus SUQ mode. By selecting the receive  
start and end bin numbers, the user can limit the bins for special  
configurations.(length = 4 bytes)  
PSD MoD Enable  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)  
PsdMod FallBackEnable  
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)  
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the  
IP DSLAM  
299  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
base ADSL2 depending upon the downstream rate. It is avaiable  
only for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)  
Max Nom PSD(dB/10)  
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)  
DS PSD Mask  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit  
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.  
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end  
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It  
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to  
-40 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate  
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and  
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local  
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available  
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps  
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)  
This configuration parameter defines that the downstream PSD  
mask applicable at the U-C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask  
may impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask  
defined in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). (length =  
4 bytes).  
GsAnnexCOlToCxSwitch  
GsAnnexCSwitch  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between DBM-OL and XOL.(length = 4 bytes)  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between Annex C and G.Span (IFM) and between Annex C and  
G.Span Plus.(length = 4 bytes)  
GsAnnexCToUqSwitch  
Min SnrMgnTime(sec)  
Conexant parameter that is used to configure the switching point  
between Annex C and G.Span Plus SUQ.(length = 4 bytes)  
This parameter indicates the time when the snr margin violation is  
allowed. After this time expires and current snr is less than min  
snr, the DSL line is dropped by the APIs.  
Customer ID  
This parameter indicates the customer ID.  
GsMPsdMaskType  
Conexant parameter that selects the PSD mask option to be used  
for Adsl2M.  
GsSeltLoopGauge  
Rate Ratio  
This parameter should be set to the expected loop gauge.  
This parameter specifies the latency rate for both channels in a  
dual latency configuration. This parameter must be set the  
parameter to a value greater than 0 and less than 100.  
Noise Margin the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the  
power 7 or better to successfully complete initialization  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate downshift. If the noise  
margin falls below this level, the modem should attempt to  
Target Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Dnshift SnrMargin(dB/10)  
IDL series User Guide  
300  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
decrease its transmit rate. In the case that RADSL mode is not  
present, the value will be 0.  
Upshift SnrMargin(dB/10)  
Configured Signal/ Noise Margin for rate upshift. If the noise  
margin rises above this level, the modem should attempt to  
increase itís transmit rate. In the case that RADSL is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
Min Upshift Time(sec)  
Min Dnshift Time(sec)  
Fast Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Minimum time that the current margin is above UpshiftSnrMgn,  
before an upshift occurs. In the case that RADSL is not present,  
the value will be 0.  
Minimum time that the current margin is below  
DownshiftSnrMgn, before a downshift occurs. In the case that  
RADSL mode is not present, the value will be 0.  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R  
receive rates.  
Intl Min Tx Rate(bps)  
Fast Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Intl Max Tx Rate(bps)  
Max Intl Delay(ms)  
Configured Minimum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in  
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR  
receive rates.  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Fast' channels, in bps.  
Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATUR  
receive rates.  
Configured Maximum Transmit rate for 'Interleave' channels, in  
bps. Also refer to 'adslAturConfRateChanRatio' for information  
regarding RADSL mode and to ATU-C transmit rate for ATU-R  
receive rates.  
Configured maximum Interleave Delay for this channel.  
Interleave delay applies only to the interleave channel and defines  
the mapping (relative spacing) between subsequent input bytes at  
the interleaver input and their placement in the bit stream at the  
interleaver output. Larger numbers provide greater separation  
between consecutive input bytes in the output bit stream, allowing  
for improved impulse noise immunity at the expense of payload  
latency  
MSG Min Us  
Configures upstream overhead channel bandwidth.This feature  
is not supported by DSLPHY as yet.  
Minimum Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Atuc Configured Minimum Signal/Noise Margin. This is the Noise  
Margin, the modem must achieve with a BER of 10 to the power -7  
IP DSLAM  
301  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or better, to successfully complete initialization. The default value  
mentioned is an indicative value only.  
Maximum Snr Margin(dB/10)  
Configured Maximum acceptable downstream Signal/Noise  
Margin. If the Noise Margin is above this the modem attempts to  
reduce its power output to optimize its operation. The value set by  
the user is in dB/10, and ranges from 0 to 31 dB in 1 dB steps.  
Conexant parameter used to enable the Mask on Demand(MoD)  
feature in the upstream direction. It is available only for ADSL2  
Annex A ONLY.(length = 4 bytes)  
PSD MoD Enable  
PsdMod FallBackEnable  
Conexant parameter used to enable Mask on Demand (MoD)  
fallback mode. When enabled, the system chooses MoD or the  
base ADSL2 depending upon the upstream rate. It is avaiable only  
for ADSL2 Annex A.(length = 4 bytes)  
Max Nom PSD(dB/10)  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal transmit  
PSD(MAXNOMPSD) level during initialization and showtime.  
Value depends on CO MIB element settings and near end  
transmitter capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It  
is available only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from -60 to  
-38 in steps of 0.1 dBm/Hz.(length = 4 bytes)  
Max Nom AtpPsd(dB/10)  
This parameter specifies the maximum nominal aggregate  
transmit power(MAXNOMATP) level during initialization and  
showtime. Value depends on CO MIB element settings and local  
capabilities and is exchanged in the G.994.1 Phase. It is available  
only for ADSL2/ADSL2plus. Value ranges from 0 to 25.5 in steps  
of 0.1 dBm.(length = 4 bytes)  
Rate Adaptation  
Min INP  
Defines what form of transmit rate adaptation is configured on this  
modem. The default value mentioned is an indicative value only.  
Parameter used to specify the minimum impulse noise protection  
for the upstream bearer channel. Supported for  
ADSL2/ADSL2plus ONLY  
US PSD Mask  
This configuration parameter defines that the upstream PSD mask  
applicable at the U C2 reference point. This MIB PSD mask may  
impose PSD restrictions in addition to the Limit PSD mask defined  
in the relevant Recommendation (e.g., G.992.5). It is available  
only for Annexes J and M of ADSL2/ADSL2plus.(length = 4 bytes)  
References:  
z
ADSL Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
302  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.9.24 Dsl chip Commands  
5.9.24.1 Get adsl chip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dsl chip [chipid <chipid-val>]  
5.9.24.2 Create dsl chip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
create dsl chip chipid <chipid-val> [ dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl ]  
[ linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm ] [ adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped | q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921IsdnOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped | q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |  
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]  
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]  
IP DSLAM  
303  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.24.3 Delete dsl chip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
delet dsl chip chipid <chipid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
chipid <chipid-val>  
Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 9  
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl  
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
linecoding Other | Dmt | Cap |  
Qam | Mcm | Scm  
ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi |  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921PotsOverlapped |  
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system  
is configured. Its default value depends on the Annex  
Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
q9921IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921IsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9922PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9922PotsOverlapped |  
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric |  
adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverla  
pped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped  
| q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlap  
ped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped |  
IDL series User Guide  
304  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlappe  
d | adslPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOv  
erlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverla  
pped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped  
| q9923IsdnOverlapped |  
q9925IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9925IsdnOverlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve  
rlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap  
ped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOve  
rlapped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlap  
ped  
shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2  
Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the  
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Example:  
$ create dsl chip chipid 1 dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413  
q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped shdsltxmode region1 Region2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Chip Id  
: 1  
: Adsl  
: Dmt  
DSL Type  
Line coding  
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413 q9921PotsOverlapped q9921PotsNonOverlapped  
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
305  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Chip Id  
Identifies the chip to be build and initialized.  
DSL Type  
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.  
Line coding  
Adsl Tx Config  
ADSL line coding type. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL system is configured. Its default value  
depends on the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Annexure Type, specifies the regional settings for the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.  
Shdsl Tx Mode  
5.9.25 Dsl dsp chip Commands  
5.9.25.1 Get dsl dsp chip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dsl dsp chip [chipid <chipid-val>]  
5.9.25.2 Reset dsl dsp chip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
reset dsl dsp chip  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
chipid chipid  
This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 9  
Example:  
$ get dsl dsp chip chipid 1  
IDL series User Guide  
306  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
ChipId  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
1
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
ChipId  
This object is the Index of Dsl Chip for which reset is to be done.  
5.9.26 Dsl dsp port Commands  
5.9.26.1 Get dsl dsp port  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dsl dsp port [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.9.26.2 Reset dsl dsp port  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
reset dsl dsp port ifname <interface-name>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
Example:  
$ get dsl dsp port ifname dsl-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
dsl-0  
IP DSLAM  
307  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
This object is the Index of Dsl Port for which reset is to be done.  
5.9.27 Dsl system Commands  
5.9.27.1 Get dsl system  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dsl system  
5.9.27.2 Create dsl system  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create dsl system [dsltype Adsl | Sdsl | Shdsl | Vdsl] [linecoding Other | Dmt |  
Cap | Qam | Mcm | Scm] [adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi | q9921PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921PotsOverlapped | q9921IsdnNonOverlapped | q9921IsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9922PotsNonOverlapped | q9922PotsOverlapped |  
q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped | q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric | adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPotsNonOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped |  
q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Adsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped | q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped | q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped |  
adslPlusPotsOverlapped | q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped | q9923IsdnNonOverlapped |  
q9923IsdnOverlapped | q9925IsdnNonOverlapped | q9925IsdnOverlapped |  
q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped |  
q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped | q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped ]  
[ shdsltxmode Region1 | Region2 ]  
IDL series User Guide  
308  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.9.27.3 Delete dsl system  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
delet dsl system  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
dsltype Adsl | Sdsl |Shdsl | Vdsl  
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: Adsl  
linecoding Other | Dmt |Cap | Qam |  
ADSL line code type.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Mcm | Scm  
Default value: Dmt  
adsltxcfg ansit1413 | etsi|  
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL  
system is configured. Its default value depends on the  
Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Type: Create － Optional  
q9921PotsNonOverlapped |  
q9921PotsOverlapped  
|q9921IsdnNonOverlapped  
|q9921IsdnOverlapped  
|q9921TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|  
q9921TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9922PotsNonOverlapped  
|q9922PotsOverlapped  
|q9922TcmIsdnNonOverlapped|  
q9922TcmIsdnOverlapped |  
q9921TcmIsdnSymmetric  
|adslPlusPotsNonOverlapped|q9921Gspa  
nPlusPotsNonOverlapped  
|q9921GspanPlusPotsOverlapped  
|q9923Adsl2PotsOverlapped|q9923Adsl2  
PotsNonOverlapped  
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsOverlapped  
|q9925Adsl2PlusPotsNonOverlapped  
|q9923Readsl2PotsOverlapped  
|q9923Readsl2PotsNonOverlapped  
|adslPlusPotsOverlapped  
|q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsNonOverlappe  
d |q9921GspanPlusPlusPotsOverlapped  
|q9923IsdnNonOverlapped  
IP DSLAM  
309  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
|q9923IsdnOverlapped  
|q9925IsdnNonOverlapped  
|q9925IsdnOverlapped  
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped  
|q9923AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped  
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsNonOverlapped  
|q9925AnnexMPotsExtUsOverlapped  
shdsltxmode Region1 |Region2  
Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for the  
SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: Region1 |Region2  
Example:  
$ create dsl system dsltype Adsl linecoding Dmt adsltxcfg ansit1413 shdsltxmode  
region1 Region2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
DSL Type  
: Adsl  
: Dmt  
Line coding  
Adsl Tx Config : ansit1413  
Shdsl Tx Mode : region1 Region2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
DSL Type  
Identifies the firmware to be downloaded.  
ADSL line code type.  
Line coding  
Adsl Tx Config  
Transmission capabilities with which the DSL  
system is configured. Its default value depends on  
the Annex Type supported. Not valid for SHDSL.  
Annexure Type specifies the regional settings for  
the SHDSL line. Only valid for SHDSL.  
Shdsl Tx Mode  
IDL series User Guide  
310  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.10 EHDLC Commands  
5.10.1 Ehdlc intf Commands  
5.10.1.1 Get ehdlc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ehdlc intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.10.1.2 Create ehdlc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create ehdlc intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [sarstatus Enable |  
Disable] [enable | disable]  
5.10.1.3 Delete ehdlc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete  
Command Syntax:  
delete ehdlc intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.10.1.4 Modify ehdlc intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify  
Command Syntax:  
modify ehdlc intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [sarstatus Enable |  
Disable] [enable | disable]  
IP DSLAM  
311  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.  
Valid Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: IAD_MIN_EHDLC_IFINDEX -  
IAD_MAX_EHDLC_IFINDEX  
lowif<lowif-val>  
This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of  
the DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values  
start from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: dsl-0 – dsl-23  
sarstatus Enable |  
This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the  
hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to  
support longer snmp messages, it should be turn off. By  
default, the option taken is 'disable'.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Disable  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: disable  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface  
Type: Optional  
Example:  
$ create ehdlc intf ifname ehdlc-0 lowif dsl-0 SarStatus Enable enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName  
: ehdlc-0  
LowIfName  
: dsl-0  
EHDLC Sar Status : enable  
Admin Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
312  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface. Valid  
Values starts from ehdlc-0 and continues to ehdlc-*  
This specifies the lower interface index. This is the ifindex of the  
DSL port on which EHDLC is being created. Valid Values start  
from dsl-0 and continues to dsl-*  
LowIfName  
EHDLC Sar Status  
This defines the segmentation and reassembly status of the  
hdlc/dsl interface. HDLC supports only 508 as frame size, to  
support longer snmp messages, it should be turned off. By  
default, the option taken is 'disable'.  
Admin Status  
Administrative status of the Ehdlc interface  
5.11 Ethemet Commands  
5.11.1 Dot3 stats Commands  
5.11.1.1 Get dot3 stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dot3 stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to  
an ethernet-like medium.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Get -- Optional  
Valid values:eth-0 – eth01  
Example  
$ get dot3 stats Ifname eth-0  
Output  
IfName  
: eth-0  
: 11  
Alignment Errors  
FCS Errors  
: 12  
: 18  
Single Collision Frames : 13  
Multiple Collision Frames : 14  
Deferred Tx Frames  
: 15  
Late Collisions  
: 16  
Excess Collisions Frames : 17  
Mac Tx Errors Frames  
IP DSLAM  
313  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Carrier Sense Errors  
Mac Rx Error Frames  
FullDuplex  
: 18  
: 20  
Too Long Frames  
Duplex Status  
: 19  
:
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
An index name that uniquely identifies an interface to an  
ethernet-like medium.  
Alignment Errors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are not  
an integral number of octets in length and do not pass the FCS  
check. The count represented by an instance of this object is  
incremented when the alignmentError status is returned by the  
MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames  
for which multiple error conditions pertain are, according to the  
conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer Management, counted  
exclusively according to the error status presented to the LLC.  
This counter does not increment for group encoding schemes  
greater than 4 bits per group. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s,  
this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is  
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time  
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in  
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is  
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsAlignmentErrors object for 10  
Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this  
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,  
and at other times as indicated by the value of  
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
FCS Errors  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that are an  
integral number of octets in length but do not pass the FCS  
check. This count does not include frames received with  
frame-too-long or frame-too-short error. The count represented  
by an instance of this object is incremented when the  
frameCheckError status is returned by the MAC service to the  
LLC (or other MAC user). Received frames for which multiple  
error conditions pertain are, according to the conventions of IEEE  
802.3 Layer Management, counted exclusively according to the  
error status presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10  
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is  
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time  
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in  
IDL series User Guide  
314  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is  
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsFCSErrors object for 10 Gb/s or  
faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can  
occur at e-initialization of the management system, and at other  
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
A count of frames that are involved in a single collision, and are  
subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is counted by  
an instance of this object is also counted by the corresponding  
instance of the ifOutUcastPkts, ifOutMulticastPkts, or  
Single Collision  
Frames  
ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by the corresponding  
instance of the dot3StatsMultipleCollisionFrames object. This  
counter does not increment when the interface is operating in  
full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can  
occur at re-initialization of the management system, and at other  
times as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
A count of frames that are involved in more than one collision and  
are subsequently transmitted successfully. A frame that is  
counted by an instance of this object is also counted by the  
corresponding instance of either the ifOutUcastPkts,  
Multiple Collision  
Frames  
ifOutMulticastPkts, or ifOutBroadcastPkts, and is not counted by  
the corresponding instance of the  
dot3StatsSingleCollisionFrames object. This counter does not  
increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at  
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as  
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Deferred Tx Frames  
A count of frames for which the first transmission attempt on a  
particular interface is delayed because the medium is busy. The  
count represented by an instance of this object does not include  
frames involved in collisions. This counter does not increment  
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at  
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as  
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Late Collisions  
The number of times that a collision is detected on a particular  
interface later than one slotTime into the transmission of a  
packet. A (late) collision included in a count represented by an  
instance of this object is also considered as a (generic) collision  
for purposes of other collision-related statistics. This counter does  
not increment when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at  
IP DSLAM  
315  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as  
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Excess Collisions  
Frames  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface  
fails due to excessive collisions. This counter does not increment  
when the interface is operating in full-duplex mode.  
Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at  
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as  
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Mac Tx Errors Frames  
A count of frames for which transmission on a particular interface  
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer transmit error. A frame is  
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by  
the corresponding instance of either the dot3StatsLateCollisions  
object, the dot3StatsExcessiveCollisions object, or the  
dot3StatsCarrierSenseErrors object. The precise meaning of the  
count represented by an instance of this object is  
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object  
may represent a count of transmission errors on a particular  
interface that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating  
at 10 Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is  
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time  
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in  
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is  
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacTransmitErrors object  
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this  
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,  
and at other times as indicated by the value of  
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Carrier Sense Errors  
The number of times that the carrier sense condition was lost or  
never asserted when attempting to transmit a frame on a  
particular interface. The count represented by an instance of this  
object is incremented at most once per transmission attempt,  
even if the carrier sense condition fluctuates during a  
transmission attempt. This counter does not increment when the  
interface is operating in full-duplex mode. Discontinuities in the  
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the  
management system, and at other times as indicated by the value  
of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Too Long Frames  
A count of frames received on a particular interface that exceed  
the maximum permitted frame size. The count represented by an  
instance of this object is incremented when the frameTooLong  
status is returned by the MAC service to the LLC (or other MAC  
IDL series User Guide  
316  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
user). Received frames for which multiple error conditions pertain  
are, according to the conventions of IEEE 802.3 Layer  
Management, counted exclusively according to the error status  
presented to the LLC. For interfaces operating at 10 Gb/s, this  
counter can roll over in less than 80 minutes if it is incrementing  
at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time could be less  
than management station's poll cycle time, in order to avoid a loss  
of information, a management station is advised to poll the  
dot3HCStatsFrameTooLongs object for 10 Gb/s or faster  
interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this counter can occur at  
re-initialization of the management system, and at other times as  
indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Mac Rx Error Frames  
A count of frames for which reception on a particular interface  
fails due to an internal MAC sublayer receive error. A frame is  
only counted by an instance of this object if it is not counted by  
the corresponding instance of either the  
dot3StatsFrameTooLongs object, the dot3StatsAlignmentErrors  
object, or the dot3StatsFCSErrors object. The precise meaning of  
the count represented by an instance of this object is  
implementation-specific. In particular, an instance of this object  
may represent a count of receive errors on a particular interface  
that are not otherwise counted. For interfaces operating at 10  
Gb/s, this counter can roll over in less than 5 minutes if it is  
incrementing at its maximum rate. Since that amount of time  
could be less than a management station's poll cycle time, in  
order to avoid a loss of information, a management station is  
advised to poll the dot3HCStatsInternalMacReceiveErrors object  
for 10 Gb/s or faster interfaces. Discontinuities in the value of this  
counter can occur at re-initialization of the management  
system, and at other times as indicated by the value of  
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Duplex Status  
The current mode of operation of the MAC entity.'unknown'  
indicates that the current duplex mode could not be determined.  
Management control of the duplex mode is accomplished thrugh  
'duplexmode' in ethernet command. Note that this object provides  
redundant information with etherActualDuplexMode  
inetherIfTable.  
IP DSLAM  
317  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.11.2 Ethernet Commands  
5.11.2.1 Create ethernet intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create a physical Ethernet interface.  
Command Syntax:  
create ethernet intf ifname <interface-name> [ip <ip-address>] [mask  
<net-mask>][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type  
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]  
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename <profilename-val>]  
[mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val>] [priority <priority-val>] [trfclassprofileid  
<trfclassprofileid-val> ] [Ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val>] [ ctlpktgroupid  
<ctlpktgroupid-val> | none ] [mgmtsvlanid <mgmtsvlanid-val>] [m2vmacdbid  
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [ mgmttvlanid <mgmttvlanid-val> ]  
5.11.2.2 Delete ethernet intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete a physical Ethernet interface.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ethernet intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.11.2.3 Get ethernet intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get information about a particular physical Ethernet interface,  
or about all the interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
get ethernet intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.11.2.4 Modify ethernet intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify physical Ethernet interface configuration.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ethernet intf ifname <interface-name> [ip <ip-address>] [mask  
<net-mask>][usedhcp true|false] [speed {auto|100BT|1000BT}] [type  
uplink|downlink][enable | disable] [pkttype Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUcast|All|None]  
[orl decvalue][duplex half| full|auto] [profilename <profilename-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
318  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
[mgmtvlanid <mgmtvlanid-val>] [priority <priority-val>] [trfclassprofileid  
<trfclassprofileid-val> ] [Ctlpktinstid <ctlpktinstid-val>] [ ctlpktgroupid  
<ctlpktgroupid-val> | none ] [mgmtsvlanid <mgmtsvlanid-val>] [m2vmacdbid  
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [ mgmttvlanid <mgmttvlanid-val> ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
This parameter specifies the interface index used for the Ethernet type of  
interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0 and continues to eth-*  
<interface-name>  
Type  
:
Create  
Delete  
Get  
– Mandatory  
– Mandatory  
– Optional  
Modify – Mandatory  
Valid values : eth-0 - *  
ip <ip-address>  
This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the interface. This  
is required to be configured only if this interface is used for management  
IP traffic. If it is not configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as  
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow through this  
interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet interface shall be  
supported only if some IP address is configured on the interface or  
'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is  
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp field shall be  
set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this field shall not be specified  
together.  
Type  
: Create - Optional.  
Modify - Optional  
Valid Values: Any valid class A/B/C / Classless IP address.  
Default Value: None  
IP DSLAM  
319  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mask <net-mask>  
This parameter specifies the network mask configured for the interface.  
This is given in conjunction with IP Address configured and shall be  
given only if IP address has been given. This shall be removed whenever  
IP Address is removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet  
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on the  
interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If  
Usedhcp is GS_TRUE and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp  
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not be  
specified together.  
Type : This field is not allowed when a physical interface is specified and  
IP is 0.0.0.0. In all other cases the field is mandatory.  
Valid Values  
:
255.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.255  
Default Value: None  
usedhcp true | false  
This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be triggered to  
obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is configured as GS_FALSE  
and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not configured, then management IP traffic will  
not flow through the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’  
is done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and ‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields  
shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall  
not be specified together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not  
be set to GS_TRUE.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid value  
: true or false  
Default value: false  
speed {auto |100 BT|  
The Ethernet speed for the net-side interfaces.  
1000BT}+  
Type  
:
Optional.  
Valid Values : auto, 100BT, 1000BT.  
Default Value : auto.  
type uplink|downink  
This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces. The Net is  
towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave means the physical interface  
connected to the slave device.  
Type  
:
Optional.  
Valid Values : uplink, downlink.  
Default Value : uplink.  
enable|disable  
Administrative status of the Ethernet interface.  
Type  
: Modify - Mandatory  
Valid values : enable or disable  
Default value: enable  
IDL series User Guide  
320  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Duplex auto|half|full  
This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet Interface can  
come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’, ‘full duplex’ or a  
combination of these. Based on the values configured, the Ethernet  
interface negotiates with the peer entity.  
Type  
: optional  
Valid values: auto, half, full  
Default value: auto  
Pkttype  
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.  
Mcast|Bcast|UnknownUc ‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every Ethernet  
ast | All|None  
interface. By default, all packets will be transmitted. The interface shall  
not transmit any other packet type than that configured.  
Type: Create - optional  
Modify - optional  
Valid values : Mcast, Ucast, UnknownUcast, All  
Default Value: All  
Orl decvalue  
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be applied on  
this Interface. The unit for the same is in Mbits/sec.  
Type: Create - Optional  
Modify - Optional  
Valid Values: 1 -100  
Default Value: 100  
ProfileName  
This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be associated with the  
Ethernet interface.  
<profilename-val>  
Type  
:
Optional.  
Default Value : SPROFILE  
mgmtvlanid  
This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for management traffic on  
this interface. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either 'ip' field is  
non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. If no Management VLAN id is  
specified (in the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in  
create or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of  
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this interface as  
the Management VLAN Index. In case the management VLAN (i.e.  
'mgmtvlanid' or the associated 'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does  
not exist on the system, then IP-based management on this  
management VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the  
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its member. In  
stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering mentioned above is based on  
virtual-VLAN mapped to C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.  
Type : Create - optional  
<mgmtvlanid>  
Modify - optional  
Valid values:  
0 -4095  
IP DSLAM  
321  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
priority <priority-val>  
This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged Ethernet PDUs  
sent on Management VLAN over this interface. This field is valid only if  
either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN  
mode, this priority shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN  
mode it shall be used for S-Vlan tag.  
Type: Create - optional  
Modify - optional  
Valid values: 0 -7  
trfclassprofileid  
This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to be  
associated with the Ethernet interface.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values:1 to 10  
Default Value: 1  
Ctlpktinstid  
This specifies the control packet instance identifier associated with this  
interface. If the user does not provide any instance identifier while  
creating an interface, an instance is created internally from the default  
profile governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface. This will  
reduce the total number to instances that can be now created by one.  
The default instance is governed by the macro 0.  
TYPE: Create -- Optional  
Valid Values:1 - 26  
Default Value: 0  
ctlpktgroupid  
<ctlpktgroupid-val> |  
none  
This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group associated  
with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this interface shall be mapped  
to control packet instances as mapped for the flows corresponding to the  
groupid configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does not  
have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall be mapped to the  
ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the flows shall be mapped to  
ctlpktinstid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 -50  
Default value: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
322  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
mgmtsvlanid  
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management traffic on this  
interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN Mode. Non-zero value of  
this field is valid only if either 'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or  
'etherUseDhcp' field is true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in  
the create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or modify  
operation), then the system shall use the value of 'psvlanid' associated  
with the bridge port created on this interface as the management VLAN  
id. In case the management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and  
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN mapped to  
'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if 'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the  
system, then IP-based management shall not happen on the interface till  
the corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its  
member.  
Type : Create - optional  
Modify - optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
m2vmacdbid  
This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this  
interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this  
interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.  
Type: Create - optional  
Modify - optional  
Valid values: 1 -GS_CFG_MAX_M2VMAC_DATABASES  
This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or vlan id of  
the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet frames and that is expected  
in received frames over this interface. Currently this is configurable and  
supported only for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet  
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used from the  
system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id configured on a  
management Ethernet interface is zero then third vlan tag shall not be  
added neither shall it be supported in received frames. This attribute is  
applicable only in stacked-VLAN mode.  
mgmttvlanid  
<mgmttvlanid-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
create ethernet intf ifname eth-0 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0 speed 100bt  
profilename sprofile mgmtvlanid 2 priority 2 trfclassprofileid 1 Ctlpktinstid 1  
ctlpktgroupid 1  
IP DSLAM  
323  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface  
: eth-0  
: Uplink  
Type  
UseDhcp  
Mask  
: False  
IP Address  
: 192.168.1.1  
: Mcast  
: 100  
: 255.255.0.0  
Pkt Type  
Orl(mbps)  
Configured Duplex  
Configured Speed  
Profile Name  
Mgmt VLAN Index  
: Auto  
Duplex  
: None  
: Auto  
: SPPROFILE  
: 2  
Mgmt S-VLAN Index : 2  
Mgmt T-VLAN Index : 2  
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio: 2  
trfclassprofileid  
: 1  
Ctl Pkts Instance Id:1  
Speed  
Ctl Pkts Group Id : 1  
: -  
Operational Status : Down  
Admin Status : Up  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
If-Name  
This parameter specifies the interface index used for the  
Ethernet type of interfaces. Valid Values starts from eth-0  
and continues to eth-*  
Type  
This parameter specifies the type of the Ethernet interfaces.  
The Net is towards the NET side (2 at most) and slave  
means the physical interface connected to the slave device.  
This parameter specifies whether a DHCP client is to be  
triggered to obtain an IP address for this interface. If this is  
configured as GS_FALSE and ‘etherIfIpAddress’ is not  
configured, then management IP traffic will not flow through  
the interface. If an IP address is configured and ’modify’ is  
done for this field, then ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ and  
UseDhcp  
‘tAggrIfNetMask’ fields shall be set to Zero (0.0.0.0). Both  
Usedhcp and ‘tEtherIfIpAddress’ shall not be specified  
IDL series User Guide  
324  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
together. In case Iftype is ‘slave’, then this field can not be  
set to GS_TRUE.  
Ip Address  
This parameter specifies the IP address configured for the  
interface. This is required to be configured only if this  
interface is used for management IP traffic. If it is not  
configured and 'etherUseDhcp' is configured as  
GS_FALSE, then management IP traffic will not flow  
through this interface. ‘Modify’ of IP Address for an Ethernet  
interface shall be supported only if some IP address is  
configured on the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was  
configured to "GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is  
GS_TRUE and ‘modify’ is done for this field, then Usedhcp  
field shall be set to GS_FALSE. Both ‘Usedhcp’ and this  
field shall not be specified together.  
Mask  
This parameter specifies the network mask configured for  
the interface. This is given in conjunction with IP Address  
configured and shall be given only if IP address has been  
given. This shall be removed whenever IP Address is  
removed. ’Modify’ of network mask for an Ethernet interface  
shall be supported only if some IP address is configured on  
the interface or 'etherUseDhcp' was configured to  
"GS_TRUE" previously. If Usedhcp is GS_TRUE  
and ’modify’ is done for this field, then usedhcp field shall  
be set to GS_FALSE. Both usedhcp and this field shall not  
be specified together.  
pkttype  
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the  
interface. ‘etherPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for  
every Ethernet interface. By default, all packets will be  
transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any other  
packet type than that configured.  
Orl  
This parameter specifies the output rate limiting value to be  
applied on this Interface.The units for the same is in  
Mbits/sec  
Configured Duplex  
Duplex  
The duplex mode to be used by the interface, as configured  
by the user.  
This parameter defines the modes, in which the Ethernet  
Interface can come up. It can be configured as ‘auto’, ‘half’,  
‘full duplex’ or a combination of these. Based on the values  
configured, the Ethernet interface negotiates with the peer  
entity.  
IP DSLAM  
325  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Configured Speed  
Mgmt VLAN Index  
The Ethernet speed for the net-side interfaces.  
This parameter specifies the VLAN (C-Vlan) for  
management traffic on this interface. Non-zero value of this  
field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero or 'usedhcp'  
field is true. If no Management VLAN id is specified (in the  
create operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create  
or modify operation), then the system shall use the value of  
'portvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this  
interface as the Management VLAN Index. In case the  
management VLAN (i.e. 'mgmtvlanid' or the associated  
'portvlanid', if 'mgmtvlanid' is zero) does not exist on the  
system, then IP-based management on this management  
VLAN shall not happen on the interface till the  
corresponding VLAN is created with the Net-side port as its  
member. In stacked-VLAN mode, the VLAN filtering  
mentioned above is based on virtual-VLAN mapped to  
C-Vlan and S-Vlan for the frame.  
Mgmt S-VLAN Index  
This parameter specifies the S-VLAN for management  
traffic on this interface. It is applicable only in stacked-VLAN  
Mode. Non-zero value of this field is valid only if either  
'etherIfIpAddress' field is non-zero or 'etherUseDhcp' field is  
true. If no management S-Vlan id is specified (in the create  
operation) or its value is set to zero (either in create or  
modify operation), then the system shall use the value of  
'psvlanid' associated with the bridge port created on this  
interface as the management VLAN id. In case the  
management VLAN (virtual VLAN mapped to S-VLAN and  
C-VLAN for the frame) does not exist (ie. Virtual VLAN  
mapped to 'mgmtsvlanid' or the associated 'psvlanid', if  
'mgmtsvlanid' is zero) on the system, then IP-based  
management shall not happen on the interface till the  
corresponding virtual-VLAN is created with the Net-side  
port as its member.  
Tagged Mgmt PDU Prio This parameter specifies the priority to be set in Tagged  
Ethernet PDUs sent on Management VLAN over this  
interface. This field is valid only if either 'ip' field is non-zero  
or 'usedhcp' field is true. In Native-VLAN mode, this priority  
shall be used for C-Vlan tag, while in stacked-VLAN mode it  
shall be used for S-Vlan tag.  
ProfileName  
This parameter specifies the scheduling profile to be  
associated with the Ethernet interface.  
IDL series User Guide  
326  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Speed  
The actual speed of the interface.  
Operational Status  
Admin Status  
trfclassprofileid  
The operational status of the interface.  
The administrative status of the interface.  
This parameter specifies the traffic class profile identifier to  
be associated with the Ethernet interface.  
Ctl Pkts Instance Id  
This specifies the control packet instance identifier  
associated with this interface. If the user does not provide  
any instance identifier while creating an interface, an  
instance is created internally from the default profile  
governed by the macro 2 and associated to the interface.  
This will reduce the total number to instances that can be  
now created by one. The default instance is governed by  
the macro 0.  
Ctl Pkts Group Id  
This parameter specifies the Control packet instance group  
associated with this Ethernet interface. The flows for this  
interface shall be mapped to control packet instances as  
mapped for the flows corresponding to the groupid  
configured in ctlpkt group info command. If this group does  
not have entries for all of the flows, then those flows shall  
be mapped to the ctlpktinstid. If groupid is 0, then all the  
flows shall be mapped to ctlpktinstid.  
M2VMacDbId  
This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated  
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature  
is disabled on this interface. This field can be modified only  
when the interface is disabled.  
Mgmt T-VLAN Index  
This specifies the value to be used for inserting TVLAN id or  
vlan id of the third Vlan tag in the transmitted Ethernet  
frames and that is expected in received frames over this  
interface. Currently this is configurable and supported only  
for management Ethernet interface. For data Ethernet  
interface, the value of TVLAN id is configurable and used  
from the system sizing table. If the value for TVLAN id  
configured on a management Ethernet interface is zero  
then third vlan tag shall not be added neither shall it be  
supported in received frames. This attribute is applicable  
only in stacked-VLAN mode.  
References:  
Ethernet stats command.  
z
IP DSLAM  
327  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.12 EOA Commands  
5.12.1 EOA Commands  
5.12.1.1 Create eoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create an EoA interface towards the CPE side.  
Command Syntax:  
create eoa intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <low-interface-name> [pkttype  
{multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast} + | all|None] [fcs false | true]  
[enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl <inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [m2vmacdbid  
<m2vmacdbid-val> |none] [configstatus normal | config]  
5.12.1.2 Delete oea intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete an EoA interface.  
Command Syntax:  
delete eoa intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.12.1.3 Get eoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get information on a particular EoA interface, or on all the  
EoA interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
get eoa intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.12.1.4 Modify eoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify the properties of an eoa interface.  
Command Syntax:  
modify eoa intf ifname <interface-name> [pkttype {multicast |broadcast  
|unknown- unicast} + | all| none] [fcs false | true] [m2vmacdbid  
<m2vmacdbid-val> | none] [enable|disable] [inactivitytmrintrvl  
<inactivitytmrintrvl>]  
IDL series User Guide  
328  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname<interface-name This parameter specifies the name assigned to this interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
>
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Modify － Mandatory  
Valid values: eoa-0,eoa-1….  
lowif  
This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It contains ifindex of  
the AAL5 or VC Aggregation interface.  
<low-interface-name>  
Type: Mandatory  
Valid Values : aal5-0 - *  
pkttype {multicast  
|broadcast  
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the interface.  
‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured for every CPE side  
Ethernet interface. By default, the option taken is 'ALL' and it means that  
all packets will be transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal  
Ucast packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not transmit any  
other packet type than the ones configured.  
Type: Optional.  
|unknownunicast}+ |  
all|none  
Valid Values: {multicast |broadcast |unknown-unicast}+ | all  
Default Value: all.  
fcs false | true  
This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be computed for the CPE  
side Ethernet interfaces. This can be set to true only if encaptype of the  
lower interface is Ethernet.  
Type: Optional  
Valid Values: false or true  
Default Value: false.  
Enable|disable  
Administrative status of the interface  
Type: Optional  
Valid values : enable or disable  
Default Values: enable  
inactivitytmrintrvl  
This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which interfaces shall be  
marked inactive if there is no data activity on this interface during this  
interval. This is used only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is  
set for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is not  
running. In Aautosensing scenario, an inactive interface is a candidate  
to deletion in case another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on  
which this interface is created.  
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>  
Type: Optional  
Valid Values: 0 to 0xffffffff  
IP DSLAM  
329  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default Value: 0  
configstatus normal |  
config  
This parameter describes the configuration mode for this interface.The  
value of this parameter can be normal or config. If the value is config,  
then this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant status. Only  
after the receipt of an EoA packet from the CPE side, this interface shall  
become active.  
Type: Optional  
Valid Values: normal | config  
Default Value: normal  
m2vmacdbid  
<m2vmacdbid-val> |  
none  
This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated with this  
interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC feature is disabled on this  
interface. This field can be modified only when the interface is disabled.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 1154  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$create eoa intf ifname eoa-0 lowif aal5-0 m2vmacdbid 1 enable fcs false  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName  
: eoa-0  
: False  
: ALL  
LowIfName  
: aal5-0  
FCS  
Pkt Type  
InActivity Tmr Interval : 3  
M2VMac Database Id  
Config Status  
Oper Status  
: 1  
: Normal  
: Down  
Admin Status : Up  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
The name of the interface that has been created.  
This parameter specifies the lower interface index. It  
contains ifindex of the AAL5 or VC Aggregation  
interface.  
LowIfName  
FCS  
This specifies whether Ethernet FCS needs to be  
computed for the CPE side Ethernet interfaces. This can  
IDL series User Guide  
330  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
be set to true only if encaptype of the lower interface is  
Ethernet.  
Pkt Type  
This parameter defines the packet type supported by the  
interface. ‘EoAPktTypeSupported’ shall be configured  
for every CPE side Ethernet interface. By default, the  
option taken is 'ALL' and it means that all packets will be  
transmitted. The value 'None' means that normal Ucast  
packets will be transmitted. The interface shall not  
transmit any other packet type than the ones configured.  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or  
Down  
Admin Status  
Oper Status  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either  
up or down.  
InActivity Tmr Interval This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which  
interfaces shall be marked inactive if there is no data  
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used  
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set  
for gsvEoaConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the  
timer is not running. In Aautosensing scenario, an  
inactive interface is a candidate to deletion in case  
another protocol is sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which  
this interface is created.  
Config Status  
This parameter describes the configuration mode for this  
interface.The value of this parameter can be Normal,  
Config, NotInUse, or InUse. If the value is Config, then  
this interface shall be created, but will have a dormant  
status. Only after the receipt of an EoA packet from the  
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The 'InUse'  
and 'NotInUse' bits are read-only bits. The 'NotInUse' bit  
indicates that the entry is dormant and the 'InUse' bit  
indicates that the entry is activated.  
M2VMac Database Id  
This field specifies the M2VMac Database Id associated  
with this interface. The value 0 means Virtual MAC  
feature is disabled on this interface. This field can be  
modified only when the interface is disabled.  
References:  
z
z
Ethernet commands  
Ethernet Stats commands.  
IP DSLAM  
331  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13 Filtering Commands  
5.13.1 ACL Global Macentry Commands  
5.13.1.1 Get acl global macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get acl global macentry [macaddr <macaddr-val >]  
5.13.1.2 Create acl global macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val > [deny disable |enable]  
[track disable | enable]  
5.13.1.3 Delete acl global macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val >  
5.13.1.4 Modify acl global macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify acl global macentry macaddr <macaddr-val > [deny disable | enable]  
[track disable | enable]  
IDL series User Guide  
332  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access  
Type: Create --Mandatory  
macaddr  
Delete --Mandatory  
<macaddr-val >  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get  
Optional  
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.  
Type: Create --Optional  
deny disable | enable  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A  
trap is raised when packet from the address comes over a port for the first time  
and when it changes the port.  
track disable | enable  
Type: Create --Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: disable  
Example:  
$ create acl global macentry macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34 deny enable track enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Mac Address  
: 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34  
: true Track : enable  
Deny  
Number of times Port changed : 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Mac Address  
Deny  
Unicast Source MAC Address, which needs to be tracked/denied access  
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be denied access.  
This flag specifies if the MAC address is to be tracked accross different ports. A  
trap is raised in case packet from the address comes over a port for the first time  
and when it changes the port.  
Track  
Number of times  
Port changed  
This specifies the number of times port has been changed by the MAC address.  
IP DSLAM  
333  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.2 Clfr list genentry commands  
5.13.2.1 Get clfr list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
5.13.2.2 Create clfr list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr list genentry ifname <interface-name>value <value-val> [valtype  
U8|U16|U32]  
5.13.2.3 Delete clcfr list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr list genentry ifname <interface-name> [value <value-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the  
classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are  
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or  
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and  
PPPOE-192.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: eth-*, eoa-*, pppoe-*,ipoe*  
List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
value <value-val>  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
334  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valtype U8|U16|U32  
This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all  
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match  
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on  
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP  
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or  
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'  
value is supported.Create -- Optional.  
Create -- Optional  
Example:  
$ create clfr list genentry Ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u8  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
If Name  
Value  
: eoa-1  
: 0xAC1901AA  
Value Type : U32  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
If Name  
Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the  
classifier generic list is created. Valid values for the field are  
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or  
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and  
PPPOE-192.  
Value  
List Entry Value, of the classifier generic list  
Value Type  
This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all  
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should match  
value type of matchingenlist nodes in case a tree attached on  
same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP  
subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or  
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'  
value is supported.  
IP DSLAM  
335  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.3 ACL Port Macentry Commands  
5.13.3.1 Get acl port macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get acl port macentry [portid <portid-val >] [macaddr <macaddr-val >]  
5.13.3.2 Create acl port macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create acl port macentry portid <portid-val > macaddr <macaddr-val >  
5.13.3.3 Delete acl port macentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete acl port macentry portid <portid-val > macaddr <macaddr-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC Address entry is created  
Type: Create --Mandatory  
Delete --Mandatory  
portid <portid-val>  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1-578  
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to be allowed access over the  
particular port.  
macaddr  
Type: Create --Mandatory  
Delete --Mandatory  
<macaddr-val>  
Get -- Optional  
Example:  
$ create acl port macentry portId 2 macaddr 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34  
IDL series User Guide  
336  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
PortId  
: 2  
Mac Address : 00:30:4f:a0:d1:34  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Bridge Port Id, for which the port MAC  
Address entry is created  
PortId  
Unicast Source MAC Address, which is to  
be allowed access over the particular port.  
Mac Address  
Caution:  
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
z
PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
5.13.4 Clfr namedlist genentry Commands  
5.13.4.1 Get namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr namedlist genentry [listid <listid-val>] [value <value-val>]  
5.13.4.2 Create clfr namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr namedlist genentry listid <listid-val>value <value-val>  
IP DSLAM  
337  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.4.3 Delete clfr namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr namedlist genentry listid <listid-val>value <value-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
listid <listid-val>  
This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row  
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
value <value-val>  
This field specifies the list entry value. The value range  
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier  
Named List table.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Example:  
$ create clfr namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ListId : 2  
Value : 0xAC1901AA  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
ListId  
This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row  
indexed on the same id in the Classifier Named List Table.  
This field specifies the list entry value. The value range  
depends upon value type of list, as specified in Classifier  
Named List table.  
Value  
IDL series User Guide  
338  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.5 Clfr namedlist info Commands  
5.13.5.1 Get clfr namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr namedlist info [listid <listid-val>]  
5.13.5.2 Create clfr namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]  
5.13.5.3 Delete clfr namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val>  
5.13.5.4 Delete clfr namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
listid listid  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
IP DSLAM  
339  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
valtype U8 | U16 | U32  
This field specifies the value type of list. Value type  
should match value type of matchingenlist nodes in case  
a tree attached on same interface as the list. It should be  
'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule or Generic  
subrule with cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is  
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is  
supported.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: U32  
Example:  
$ create clfr namedlist info listid 2 valtype u32  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ListId  
: 2  
Value Type : u32  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
ListId  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
This field specifies the value type of list. Value  
type should match value type of matchingenlist  
nodes in case a tree attached on same interface  
as the list. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with  
cmptype as InGenList or NotInGenList is  
attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32'  
value is supported.  
Value Type  
IDL series User Guide  
340  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.6 Clfr namedlist map Commands  
5.13.6.1 Get clfr namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr namedlist map [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.13.6.2 Create clfr namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr namedlist map ifname <interface-name>listid <listid-val>  
5.13.6.3 Delete clfr namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr namedlist map ifname <interface-name>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which  
named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field are between  
EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and  
IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-192.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
listid <listid-val>  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Example  
$ create clfr namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2  
IP DSLAM  
341  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName : eoa-1  
ListId : 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet  
interface to which named generic list is attached.  
Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and  
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between  
IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and  
PPPOE-192.  
ListId  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
5.13.7 Clfr profile branch Commands  
5.13.7.1 Get clfr profile branch  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr profile branch [pname <pname-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>] [brtype  
<brtype-val>]  
5.13.7.2 Create clfr profile branch  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr profile branch pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val>brtype  
<brtype-val> [cnodeid <cnodeid-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
342  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.7.3 Delete clfr profile branch  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr profile branch pname <pname-val> nodeid <nodeid-val>brtype  
<brtype-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
pname <pname-val>  
Name of the classifier profile  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
nodeid <nodeid-val>  
Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be  
attached.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
brtype <brtype-val>  
This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,  
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For  
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,  
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are  
allowed. For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr  
(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For  
Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is  
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,  
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
cnodeid <cnodeid-val>  
Child Node Id  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create clfr profile branch pname IGMP nodeid 3 brtype truebr  
IP DSLAM  
343  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Name : IGMP  
Node Id  
: 3  
Branch type : true  
Child NodeId : 5  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Name  
Node Id  
Name of the classifier profile  
Node Id of the node, with which the branch is to be  
attached.  
Branch type  
This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node,  
only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For  
binary type and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only)  
type, TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)  
are allowed. For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc),  
GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed.  
For Linear, Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is  
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32, U64,  
atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.  
Child NodeId  
Child Node Id  
5.13.8 Clfr profile info Commands  
5.13.8.1 Get clfr profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr profile info [pname <pname-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
344  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.8.2 Create clfr profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr profile info pname <pname-val>  
5.13.8.3 Delete clfr profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr profile info pname <pname-val>  
5.13.8.4 Modify clfr profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr profile info pname <pname-val> [descr <descr-val>] [rnode  
<rnode-val>] [enable | disable]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
pname <pname-val>  
Name of the classifier profile  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
descr <descr-val>  
A brief description can be given with profile, to identify the profile  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
rnode <rnode-val>  
Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have only one root  
node id  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
IP DSLAM  
345  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
enable | disable  
A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A tree can only  
use a profile, if it is enabled. A profile cannot be disabled, if a  
tree is using it.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 2  
Example:  
$ create clfr profile info pname IGMP  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Name : IGMP  
Root NodeId : 0  
Status : Enable  
Description : Profile to match the IGMP packet  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Name  
Root NodeId  
Name of the classifier profile  
Root node Id of the profile. Each profile can have  
only one root node id  
Status  
A Profile can only be modified, if it is disabled. A  
tree can only use a profile, if it is enabled. A  
profile cannot be disabled, if a tree is using it.  
A brief description can be given with profile, to  
identify the profile  
Description  
IDL series User Guide  
346  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.9 Clfr profile node Commands  
5.13.9.1 Get clfr profile node  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr profile node [pname <pname-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]  
5.13.9.2 Create clfr profile node  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr profile node pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val> [ descr  
<descr-val> ] [export true|false ] Ntype  
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear modmask  
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None  
[ actval  
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD  
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype  
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval  
<offsetval-val> ] [ maskval <maskval-val> ] [ value <value-val> ] [ valend  
<valend-val> ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt  
<shiftcnt-val>] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio  
low|high|asintree ]  
5.13.9.3 Delete clfr profile node  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr profile node pname <pname-val> nodeid <nodeid-val>  
5.13.9.4 Modify clfr profile node  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
IP DSLAM  
347  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr profile node pname <pname-val>nodeid <nodeid-val> [ descr  
descr ] [export true|false ] Ntype Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternary|Linear|NonLinear  
modmask  
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask|Val|ValueEnd|SBType|SBShiftCnt|SBMplr|Descrip|None  
[ actval  
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|TerCmp|SetPrio|MatchInList|AccD  
eny|SetBase|Count|Retagprio | MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule|allow ] [ valuetype  
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|VlanId ][ offsetval  
<offsetval-val> ] [ maskval <maskval-val> ] [ value <value-val> ] [ valend  
<valend-val> ] [ sbasetype Abs|Add|Compute|SetFromVar ] [shiftcnt  
<shiftcnt-val>] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [ sbvarindex l2start|l3start ] [ nodeprio  
low|high|asintree ]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
pname <pname-val>  
Name of the classifier profile  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
nodeid <nodeid-val>  
descr <descr-val>  
export true|false  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: -----  
A brief description can be given with node, to identify the node. If  
the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and  
it can be used by the applications to receive the packets coming  
from control plane because of this node.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
Some of the nodes of a profile can be exported. This flag tells  
whether this node is exported or not  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
348  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default value: FALSE  
Ntype  
This specifies the type of the Classifier node.  
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar Type: Create -- Optional  
y|Linear|NonLinear  
maskval <maskval-val>  
Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a packet.  
If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and  
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is  
used to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the  
individual bits of the field of the packet used to compute the new  
base offset. This field is valid only if the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8, U16, U32 or U64.  
This field is also valid if the g gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is  
MatchInGenList.  
Type : Create --Optional  
Default Value : --  
value <value-val>  
Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types,  
this field is not valid. For Linear node types, this  
value is used to specify the start of the range. If  
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and  
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then  
this field is used to specify the value, which is to be  
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If  
the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field  
is used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet.  
If the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this field is not  
valid. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is Count then this field is  
read only and specifies total number of octets of the packets  
hitting this node.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: ---  
valend <valend-val>  
For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end  
of the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is  
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of  
the range. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is count  
then this field is used to specify the total number of  
packet hitting this node. For other actions this field is not valid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
sbasetype Abs | Add |  
This field is valid only for the SET_BASE action type. It is used to  
specify, whether the base off set is to be set to an absolute value,  
Compute |  
IP DSLAM  
349  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to  
calculate new base offset value, or the new base offset value is to  
be computed using some value in the packet.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: ---  
shiftcnt <shiftcnt-val>  
ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the  
packet is to be shifted before multiplying it with the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase. Value 32 is meant for  
internal purpose and Agents should not pass this value to GAG.  
GAG may return 32 value to Agent, in which case Agent should  
treat it as invalid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 31  
Default value: ---  
mplr <mplr-val>  
Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by  
ShiftCount. It is used to calculate the new base  
offset. This field is valid only if the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 32  
Default value: ----  
Modmask  
This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and  
Act|ValType|Offset|Mask can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.  
|Val|None|ValueEnd|Sbt  
ype|SBShiftCnt|SBMlpr|  
Descrip  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Actval  
Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the  
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpT packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means  
oCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange|Te Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the  
rCmp|  
packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'  
means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means  
go to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next  
rule is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq'  
means check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt'  
means check if the value at the location specified in the packet is  
greater than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location  
specified in the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means  
SetPrio|MatchInList|Acc  
Deny|SetBase|Count|  
Retagprio |  
MatchIngenlist  
|GoToNextRule|allow  
IDL series User Guide  
350  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
check if the value at the location specified in the packet is in the  
range specified by 'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if  
the value at the location specified in the packet is less than, equals  
to or greater than the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch  
of the node whose value is equals to the value at the location  
specified in the packet. 'AccDeny' means check if the value at the  
location specified in the packet is equals to any of the value of the  
branches of this node. 'SetBase' means set the base address as  
specified by 'setbase action'. 'SetPrio' means set the internal  
priority, which is used along with egress port traffic class mapping  
table, to determine the output queue. 'Count' means count the  
number of packet and bytes in the packets reaching this nodes.  
'RetagPrio' means set the priority in the outgoing packet, which is  
also used along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to  
determine the output queue. 'MatchInGenList' means match value  
in packet with values in genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd,  
FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and GoToNextRule are valid actions.  
For Unary node, Count, SetPrio and RetagPrio are valid actions.  
For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt, SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid  
actions. For Ternary node, TerCmp and InRange are valid actions.  
For Linear node, only MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear  
node, MatchinList and AccDeny are valid actions.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
Ntype  
This specifies the type of the Classifier node.  
Leaf|Unary|Binary|Ternar Type: Create -- Mandatory  
y|Linear|NonLinear  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: -----  
Offsetval offsetval  
OffSet, in  
the packet with respect to the base offset,  
from where we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If  
gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and  
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then this value is  
used to specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which  
shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the  
new base offset. If the gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U8 the offset  
can be odd or even. If the  
gsvClfrProfileNodeValType is U16, U32 or U64 then  
the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for  
any other value type.  
IP DSLAM  
351  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 64  
Default value: -----  
Valuetype valuetype  
Value type tells, the type of value which is to be  
matched/set. For leaf type nodes this field is not  
valid. If gsvClfrProfileNodeAction is SetBase and  
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType is Compute then  
this value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which  
shall be used to compute the new base offset. This field is not  
valid for other values of  
gsvClfrProfileNodeSetBaseType.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
sbvarindex  
This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if  
'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing  
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing Layer  
3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP packet  
before using 'L3Start' value  
L2Start|L3Start  
.Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Invalid  
nodeprio  
This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority  
value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as  
specified in the tree.  
Low|High|AsInTree  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: AsInTree  
Example:  
$ create clfr profile node pname IGMP nodeid 1 ntype binary actval eq valuetype  
u16 value 0xffff offsetval 12 maskval 0xffff  
IDL series User Guide  
352  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Name  
Node Id  
: IGMP  
: 3  
Exported  
: true  
Node Type  
Offset  
: Binary  
Modification Mask : Act  
Action  
: eq  
Value Type  
Mask  
: u16  
: 12  
: 0xffff  
: 0x800  
: None  
: none  
: none  
Value  
Value End  
Set Base type  
Shift Count  
Description  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Multiplier  
: none  
: Node to match the ip address  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Name  
Node Id  
Name of the classifier profile  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable  
Exported  
and can be modified while the profile is part of a classifier tree.  
This specifies the type of the Classifier node  
Node Type  
Modification Mask  
This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this  
node is an exported node.  
Action  
Action tells what is to be done by a node.  
Value Type  
Value type tells the type of value, which is to be matched/set.  
For leaf type nodes this field is not valid. if ActVal is SetBase and  
SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the  
value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used to compute the  
new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of  
SBaseType.  
Offset  
OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where  
we have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is  
SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to  
specify the offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be  
used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new  
IP DSLAM  
353  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
base offset. if the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even.  
If the ValueType is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be  
even. This field is not valid for any other value type.  
Mask  
Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a  
packet. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then  
this value is used to specify the mask, which shall be used to  
identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to  
compute the new base offset. This field is valid only if the  
ValueType is U8, U16, U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the  
ActVal is MatchInGenList.  
Value  
Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not  
valid. For Linear node types, this value is used to specify the  
start of the range. if ActVal is SetBase and SBaseTypeis  
Compute then this field is used to specify the value,  
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset.  
If the ActVal is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to  
specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If the  
ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not  
valid. If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and  
specifies total number of octet of the packets hitting this node.  
For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the  
range. If the ActVal is InRange then this field is used to specify  
the end of the range. If the ActVal is count then this field is used  
to specify the total number of packet hitting this node. For other  
actions this field is not valid.  
Value End  
Set Base type  
SetBaseType is used to specify whether the base off set is to be  
set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing  
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new  
base offset value is to be computed using some value in the  
packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.  
ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to  
be shifted before multiplying it with the Mplr. This field is valid  
only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value 32 is used to set shift count  
to an invalid value.  
Shift Count  
Multiplier  
Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is  
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if  
the ActVal is SetBase.  
Description  
Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or  
CpToCtl then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the  
applications to receive the packets coming from control plane  
IDL series User Guide  
354  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
because of this node.  
SBVar Index  
This specifies setbase variable index. This field is valid only if  
'SetBaseType' is 'SetFromVar'. 'L2Start' is read-only containing  
Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only containing  
Layer 3 header start offset. It should be ensured that packet is IP  
packet before using 'L3Start' value  
Node Priority  
This specifies the priority of profile node. Based on this priority  
value, the profile node is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'AsInTree', node priority will be same as  
specified in the tree.  
5.13.10 Clfr tree branch Commands  
5.13.10.1 Get clfr tree branch  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree branch [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]  
[brtype <brtype-val>]  
5.13.10.2 Create clfr tree branch  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr tree branch tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid  
<nodeid-val>brtype <brtype-val>childpid <childpid-val>  
5.13.10.3 Delete clfr tree branch  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr tree branch tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid  
<nodeid-val>brtype <brtype-val>  
IP DSLAM  
355  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
tname <tname-val>  
Name of the classifier tree  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: ND - ND  
pid <pid-val>  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
nodeid <nodeid-val>  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
brtype <brtype-val>  
This specifies the branch types. For a unary type node, only  
onlybr (0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is allowed. For binary type  
and Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,  
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe) are allowed.  
For ternary type nodes LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr  
(0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr (0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,  
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is allowed. The actual  
value can be U8, U16, U32, U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
childpid <childpid-val>  
This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child Profile Id value 0  
is used to add true and false branches to a AccessDeny type  
node.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create clfr tree branch tname t1 pid 2 nodeid 1 brtype truebr childpid 1  
IDL series User Guide  
356  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Tree Name  
: tree1  
Profile Id : 3  
Branch type : eq  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Node Id  
: 2  
Child Profile Id : 4  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Tree Name  
Profile Id  
Node Id  
Name of the classifier tree  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
This specifies the branch types. For a unary type  
node, only onlybr(0xfffffffffffffff9) branch type is  
allowed. For binary type and  
Branch type  
Linear/Non-Linear(Access Deny only) type,  
TrueBr(0xfffffffffffffffd) and FalseBr(0xfffffffffffffffe)  
are allowed. For ternary type nodes  
LtBr(0xfffffffffffffffc), GtBr (0xfffffffffffffffb), EqBr  
(0xfffffffffffffffa) are allowed. For Linear,  
Non-Linear (match in list) the actual value is  
allowed. The actual value can be U8, U16, U32,  
U64, atmIf, ethernetIf, aal5vc.  
Child Profile Id  
This object specifies Child Profile Id. The Child  
Profile Id value 0, is used to add true and false  
branches to a AccessDeny type node.  
IP DSLAM  
357  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.11 Clfr tree info Commands  
5.13.11.1 Get clfr tree info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree info [tname <tname-val>]  
5.13.11.2 Create clfr tree info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr tree info tname <tname-val> [descr <descry-val>] [enable | disable]  
[treeprio low | high]  
5.13.11.3 Delete clfr tree info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr tree info tname <tname-val>  
5.13.11.4 Modify clfr tree info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr tree info tname <tname-val> [descr <descry-val>] [enable | disable]  
[treeprio low | high]  
IDL series User Guide  
358  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
tname <tname-val>  
Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.  
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be  
used only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
descr <descry-val>  
A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
enable | disable  
A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be  
used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 2  
treeprio low | high  
Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is  
created in fast or slow memory.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: low  
Example:  
$ create clfr tree info tname tree1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Tree Name  
Status  
: tree1  
: disable  
: tree1  
Description  
Tree Priority : High  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
359  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Tree Name  
Status  
Name of the classifier tree  
A tree cannot be deleted or modified, if it is enabled. A tree can only be  
used, if it is enabled. A tree can not be disabled, if it is being used.  
A brief description can be given with tree, to identify the tree  
Tells the priority of the tree. Based on this priority value, the tree is  
created in fast or slow memory.  
Description  
TreePriority  
5.13.12 Clfr tree map Commands  
5.13.12.1 Get clfr tree map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree map [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.13.12.2 Create clfr tree map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr tree map ifname <interface-name>tname <tname-val> entrypid  
<entrypid-val>  
5.13.12.3 Delete clfr tree map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete clfr tree map ifname <interface-name>  
IDL series User Guide  
360  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Get -- Mandatory  
tname <tname-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
entrypid <entrypid-val>  
Example:  
$ create clfr tree map Ifname aal5-3 tname tree1 EntryPId 5  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
If Name : aal5-3  
Tree Name : tree1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Entry Profile Id : 5  
Output field  
Field  
Description  
Interface name, with which the tree is to be associated  
If Name  
Tree Name  
Entry Profile Id  
5.13.13 Clfr tree node Commands  
5.13.13.1 Get clfr tree node  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree node [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>] [nodeid <nodeid-val>]  
IP DSLAM  
361  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.13.2 Modify clfr tree node  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr tree node tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>nodeid <nodeid-val>  
[ descr <descry-val> ] [ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ value  
<value-val> ] [act Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InRange |TerCmp|  
SetPrio|MatchInList|AccDeny|SetBase|Count| Retagprio |  
MatchIngenlist|GoToNextRule| allow] [valend valend ] [sbasetype Abs | Add |  
Compute] [ shiftcnt <shiftcnt-val> ] [ mplr <mplr-val> ] [valtype  
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmIf|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|Dir|Prio|Len|vlanid][ sbvarindex  
l2start|l3start ] [nodeprio low]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
tname tname  
Name of the classifier tree  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
pid pid  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: -----  
nodeid nodeid  
descr descr  
offset offset  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: -----  
Description of the tree node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl  
then this field is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to  
receive the packets coming from control plane because of this node.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we  
have to take the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase  
and SBaseType is Compute then this value is used to specify the  
offset with respect to the base offset, which shall be used to specify  
the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. If the  
IDL series User Guide  
362  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ValueType is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType is  
U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not  
valid for any other value type.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 65  
Default value: -----  
mask mask  
Mask, used to select the individual bits to be matched in a  
packet. If gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and  
gsvClfrTreeNodeSetBaseType is Compute, then this value is used  
to specify the mask, which shall be used to identify the individual bits  
of the field of the packet used to compute the new base offset. This  
field is valid only if the gsvClfrTreeNodeValType is U8, U16, U32  
or U64. This field is also valid if the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is  
MatchInGenList.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
value value  
Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not  
valid. For Linear node types, this  
value is used to specify the start of the range. If  
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase and NodeSetBaseType is  
Compute then this field is used to specify the value, which is to be  
added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the  
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is  
used to specify the priority which is to be assigned to the packet. If  
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is MatchInGenList then this  
field is not valid. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is Count, then this  
field is read only and specifies total  
number of octets of the packets hitting this node.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
act  
Action tells what is to be done by a node. 'Drop' means drop the  
packet. 'Fwd' means Forward the packet. 'FwdToCtl' means  
Forward the packet to control plane. 'CpToCtl' means forward the  
packet and also send a copy of the packet to control plane.'Allow'  
Drop|Fwd|FwdToCtl|  
CpToCtl|Eq|Gt|Lt|InR  
ange|TerCmp|  
SetPrio|MatchInList|A means give the packet to the next stage. 'GoToNextRule' means go  
ccDeny|SetBase|Cou  
nt| Retagprio |  
to the next rule (ruleid) attached on that interface and if no next rule  
is attached on that interface then forward the packet. 'Eq' means  
check if value specified in the packet is equal to 'Value'. 'Gt' means  
check if the value at the location specified in the packet is greater  
than 'Value'. 'Lt' means check if the value at the location specified in  
the packet is Less than 'Value'. 'InRange' means check if the value  
MatchIngenlist|  
GoToNextRule|allow  
IP DSLAM  
363  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
at the location specified in the packet is in the range specified by  
'Value' and 'ValEnd'. 'TerCmp' means check if the value at the  
location specified in the packet is less than, equals to or greater than  
the 'Value'. 'MatchInList' means take the branch of the node whose  
value is equals to the value at the location specified in the packet.  
'AccDeny' means check if the value at the location specified in the  
packet is equals to any of the value of the branches of this node.  
'SetBase' means set the base address as specified by setbase  
action. 'SetPrio' means set the internal priority, which is used along  
with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output  
queue. 'Count' means count the number of packet and bytes in the  
packets reaching this nodes. 'RetagPrio' means set the prirority in  
the outgoing packet, which is also used along with egress port traffic  
class mapping table, to determine the output queue.  
'MatchInGenList' means match value in packet with values in  
genlist. For Leaf node, Drop, Fwd, FwdToCtl, CpToCtl, Allow and  
GoToNextRule are valid actions. For Unary node, Count, SetPrio  
and RetagPrio are valid actions. For Binary node, Eq, Gt, Lt,  
SetBase and MatchInGenList are valid actions. For Ternary node,  
TerCmp and InRange are valid actions. For Linear node, only  
MatchInList is a valid action. For NonLinear node, MatchinList and  
AccDeny are valid actions.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
valend valend  
For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If  
the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is InRange then this field is used to  
specify the end of the range. If the gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is count  
then this field is used to specify the total number of packets hitting  
this node. For other actions this field is not valid.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
sbasetype Abs | Add | SetBaseType, is used to specify, whether the base off set is to be  
Compute  
set to an absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing  
base offset value to calculate new base offset value or the new base  
offset value is to be computed using some value in the packet.This  
field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 4  
shiftcnt shiftcnt  
ShiftCount, is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be  
shifted before multiplying it with the  
gsvClfrTreeNodeMultiplier. This field is valid only if the  
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.  
IDL series User Guide  
364  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 – 31  
Default value: ----  
mplr mplr  
Multiplier, is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is  
used to calculate the new base offset. This field is valid only if the  
gsvClfrTreeNodeAction is SetBase.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 32  
Default value: ----  
valtype  
Value type tells the type of value that is to be matched/set.  
U8|U16|U32|U64|AtmI  
f|Aal5Vc|EoaIf|EthIf|D  
ir|Prio|Len|vlanid  
Sbvarindex  
This specifies the setbase variable index. 'L2Start' is read-only,  
containing Layer 2 header start offset. 'L3Start' is read-only,  
containing Layer 3 header start offset.  
l2start|l3start  
Nodeprio  
This specifies the priority of the tree node. Based on this priority  
value, the tree node is created in fast or slow memory.  
low|high|asintree  
Example:  
$ get clfr tree node tname tree1 pid 2 nodeid 3  
Output:  
Tree Name  
Profile Id  
Exported  
: tree1  
: 2  
: true  
Node Id  
: 3  
: Binary  
Node Type  
Modification Mask : act offset  
Action  
: eq  
Value Type  
Mask  
: u32  
Offset  
: 12  
: 0x0000000f  
: 0x0000000f  
: NA  
Value  
ValueEnd  
Set Base type  
Shift Count  
Description  
: NA  
: NA  
Multiplier  
: NA  
: Node to match the ip address  
IP DSLAM  
365  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Tree Name  
Profile Id  
Node Id  
Name of the classifier tree.  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree  
Node Id, should be unique within a profile  
Exported  
This specifies what fields of an exported node are modifiable and can be modified  
while the profile is part of a classifier tree.  
Node Type  
This specifies the type of the Classifier node  
Modification Mask  
This specifies what fields of this nodes can be modified, if this node is an  
exported node.  
Action  
Action tells what is to be done by a node.  
Value Type  
Value type tells, the type of value which is to be matched/set. For leaf type nodes  
this field is not valid. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is Compute then this  
value is used to specify the value type (U8, U16, U32), which shall be used  
to compute the new base offset. This field is not valid for other values of  
SBaseType.  
Offset  
OffSet, in the packet with respect to the base offset, from where we have to take  
the value, which is to be matched. If ActVal is SetBase and SBaseType is  
Compute then this value is used to specify the offset with respect to the base  
offset,  
which shall be used to specify the field of the packet used to compute the new  
base offset. If the valuetype is U8 the offset can be odd or even. If the ValueType  
is U16, U32 or U64 then the offset can only be even. This field is not valid for any  
other value type.  
Mask  
Mask, used to select the individual bits to be match in a packet. If ActVal is  
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this value is used to specify the mask,  
which shall be used to identify the individual bits of the field of the packet used to  
compute the new base offset.This field is valid only if the ValueType is U8, U16,  
U32 or U64. This field is also valid if the ActVal is MatchInGenList.  
Value, to be matched. For NonLinear node types, this field is not valid. For Linear  
node types, this value is used to specify the start of the range. if ActVal is  
SetBase and SBaseTypeis Compute then this field is used to specify the value,  
which is to be added to base offset to calculate new base offset. If the ActVal is  
SetPrio or RetagPrio then this field is used to specify the priority which is to be  
assigned to the packet. If the ActVal is MatchInGenList then this field is not valid.  
If the ActVal is Count then this field is read only and specifies total number of  
octet of the packets hitting this node.  
Value  
ValueEnd  
For Linear nodes this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is  
InRange then this field is used to specify the end of the range. If the ActVal is  
count then this field is used to specify the total number of packet hitting this node.  
IDL series User Guide  
366  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
For other actions this field is not valid.  
Set Base type  
Shift Count  
SetBaseTyp, is used to specify whether the base off set is to be set to an  
absolute value, or some value is to be added to existing base offset value to  
calculate new base offset value or the new base offset value is to be computed  
using some value in the packet. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.  
ShiftCount is the number of times the Value in the packet is to be shifted before  
multiplying it with the Mplr. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase. Value  
32 is used to set shift count to an invalid value.  
Multiplier  
Multiplier is used to multiply the value shifted by ShiftCount. It is used to calculate  
the new base offset. This field is valid only if the ActVal is SetBase.  
Description of the profile node. If the ActVal is FwdToCtl or CpToCtl then this field  
is mandatory and it can be used by the applications to receive the packets  
coming from control plane because of this node.  
Description  
5.13.14 Clfr tree profile Commands  
5.13.14.1 Get clfr tree profile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree profile [tname <tname-val>] [pid <pid-val>]  
5.13.14.2 Create clfr tree profile  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create clfr tree profile tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val>pname <pname-val>  
[isroot <isroot-val>]  
5.13.14.3 Delete clfr tree profile  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get clfr tree profile tname <tname-val> pid <pid-val>  
IP DSLAM  
367  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.14.4 Modify clfr tree profile  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify clfr tree profile tname <tname-val>pid <pid-val> [isroot true|false]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
tname <tname-val>  
Name of the classifier tree  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
pid <pid-val>  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: -----  
pname <pname-val>  
Name of the profile which is to be added  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Get -- Optional  
Default value: -----  
isroot <isroot-val>  
This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root profile or not. Only  
root profiles of the nodes can be specified as an entry point on an interface.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Delete -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: true, false  
Default value:FALSE  
Example:  
$ create clfr tree profile tname tree1 pid 4 pname srcip  
IDL series User Guide  
368  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Tree Name  
: tree1  
Profile Id : 4  
Profile Name : srcip  
Is Root  
: false  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Tree Name  
Profile Id  
Name of the classifier tree  
Profile Id. It should be unique within a tree  
Name of the profile which is to be added  
This specifies whether this profile is exported as a root  
profile or not. Only root profiles of the nodes can be  
specified as an entry point on an interface.  
Profile Name  
Is Root  
5.13.15 Filter expr entry Commands  
5.13.15.1 Get filter expr entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter expr entry [exprid <exprid-val>]  
5.13.15.2 Create filter expr entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter expr entry exprid <exprid-val>exprstring <exprstring-val>  
IP DSLAM  
369  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.15.3 Delete filter expr entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter expr entry exprid <exprid-val>  
Parameter  
Name  
Description  
exprid <exprid-val>  
Unique identifier for a filter expression.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 -65535  
exprstring  
Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a  
rule using the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for  
precedance) and actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop,  
allow, setprio, sendtocontrol, retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule,  
forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', only drop, allow, gotonextrule and  
forwardexit action types are valid. For eg. "(1|2):drop" will be used to  
drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
<exprstring-val>  
Example:  
$ create filter expr entry exprid 1 exprstring “(1|2):drop”  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Expr Id  
: 1  
Exprstring : (1|2):drop  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
370  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Expr Id  
Unique identifier for a filter expression.  
Exprstring  
Expression string contains the expression relating the subrules of a rule using  
the & (AND), | (OR), ! (NOT) operators, parenthesis (for precedance) and  
actions to be executed. Valid actions are drop, allow, setprio, sendtocontrol,  
retagprio, copytocontrol, gotonextrule, forwardexit. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out',  
only drop, allow, gotonextrule and forwardexit action types are valid. For eg.  
"(1|2):drop" will be used to drop all packets which match subrules 1 or 2.  
5.13.16 Filter list genentry Commands  
5.13.16.1 Get filter list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
5.13.16.2 Create filter list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter list genentry ifname <interface-name>value <value-val>] [valtype  
U8 | U16 | U32]  
5.13.16.3 Delete filter list genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter list genentry ifname <interface-name> value <value-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the  
generic filter generic list is created. Valid values for the field are  
between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or  
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and  
IP DSLAM  
371  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
PPPOE-191.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
value <value-val>  
List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value  
must be consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
valtype U8 | U16 | U32  
This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all  
entries on an interface should be same. Value type should  
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is  
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is  
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as  
InGenList or NotInGenList is attached on same interface.  
Currently only 'U32' value is supported.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: U32  
Example:  
$ create filter list genentry ifname eoa-1 value 0xAC1901AA valtype u32  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName  
Value  
: eoa-1  
: 0xAC1901AA  
Value Type : u32  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
Name of ethernet, eoa, ipoe or pppoe interface, for which the generic filter  
generic list is created. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and  
EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or  
between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.  
Value  
List Entry Value, for the generic filter generic list. This value must be  
IDL series User Guide  
372  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
consistent with the mentioned valuetype of generic list.  
Value Type  
This field specifies value type of the entry. The value type for all entries on an  
interface should be same. Value type should match value type of subrule field  
for which comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing  
the subrule is attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as InGenList or  
NotInGenList is attached on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is  
supported.  
5.13.17 Filter namedlist genentry Commands  
5.13.17.1 Get filter namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter namedlist genentry [listid <listid-val>] [value <value-val>]  
5.13.17.2 Create filter namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter namedlist genentry listid <listid-val> value value-val>] [valueto  
<valueto-val>]  
5.13.17.3 Delete filter namedlist genentry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter namedlist genentry listid <listid-val> value <value-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
listid <listid-val>  
This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on  
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
IP DSLAM  
373  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
value <value-val>  
This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value  
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value  
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower  
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
valueto <valueto-val>  
This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type  
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create filter namedlist genentry listid 2 value 0xAC1901AA valueto 0xAC1901AA  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ListId : 2  
Value  
: 0xAC1901AA  
ValueTo : 0xAC1901AA  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
ListId  
Value  
This field stores the list identifier value. There must be a row indexed on  
the same id in the Generic Filter Named List Table.  
This value is mandatory for all list types. The interpretation of value  
depends upon the type of the list. If the list type is discrete, then this value  
is the list entry value. If the list type is range, then this value is the lower  
limit of range. The upper limit of range is specified in valueto field.  
This value is not required for discrete lists but is mandatory for lists of type  
range. For range type lists this value specifies the upper limit of range.  
ValueTo  
IDL series User Guide  
374  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.18 Filter namedlist info Commands  
5.13.18.1 Get filter namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter namedlist info [listid <listid-val>]  
5.13.18.2 Create filter namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter namedlist info listid <listid-val> [listtype discrete | range] [valtype  
U8 | U16 | U32]  
5.13.18.3 Delete filter namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter namedlist info listid <listid-val>  
5.13.18.4 Modify filter namedlist info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter namedlist info listid <listid-val> [valtype U8 | U16 | U32]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
listid <listid-val>  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
IP DSLAM  
375  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
listtype discrete | range  
This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list  
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range,  
then list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be  
specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or  
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist  
of an interface.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: discrete  
valtype U8 | U16 | U32  
This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should  
match value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is  
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type  
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached  
on same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: U32  
Example:  
$ create filter namedlist info listid 2 listtype discrete valtype u32  
Output  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
ListId  
: 2  
List Type : discrete  
Value Type : u32  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
ListId  
This field stores the list identifier value.  
List Type  
This field identifies the type of list. If the type is discrete, then list  
can contain max. of 8 discrete entries. If the type is range, then  
list can contain max 4 entries. Lists of type range cannot be  
IDL series User Guide  
376  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
specified with subrules having cmptype as innamedlist or  
notinnamedlist. It can only be used for mapping to create genlist of  
an interface.  
Value Type  
This field specifies the value type of list. Value type should match  
value type of subrule field for which comparsion type is  
innamedlist or notinnamedlist. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with comparision type  
(srcaddrcmp / gencmp) as 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist' is attached on  
same interface. Currently only 'U32' value is supported.  
5.13.19 Filter namedlist map Commands  
5.13.19.1 Get filter namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter namedlist map [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.13.19.2 Create filter namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter namedlist map ifname <interface-name> listid <listid-val>  
5.13.19.3 Delete filter namedlist map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter namedlist map ifname <interface-name>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> This specifies the eoa ,pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to  
which named generic list is attached. Valid values for the field  
are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0 and eth-1or  
IP DSLAM  
377  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and  
PPPOE-191.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
listid <listid-val>  
This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id  
must exist in Generic Filter Named List Table. Value type of the  
list should match subrule field for which comparsion type is  
ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is  
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule  
containing IP subrule or Generic subrule with cmptype as  
ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same interface. The list  
type can either discrete or range.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Example:  
$ create filter namedlist map ifname eoa-1 listid 2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
IfName : eoa-1  
ListId : 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
IfName  
This specifies the eoa, pppoe, ipoe or ethernet interface to which named generic list is  
attached. Valid values for the field are between EOA-0 and EOA-23 or between eth-0  
and eth-1or between IPOE-0 and IPOE-191 or between PPPOE-0 and PPPOE-191.  
This field stores the list identifier value. A row indexed by this id must exist in Generic  
Filter Named List Table. Value type of the list should match subrule field for which  
comparsion type is ingenlist or notingenlist incase the rule containing the subrule is  
attached on the same interface. It should be 'U32' in case a rule containing IP subrule  
or Generic subrule with cmptype as ingenlist or notingenlist is attached on same  
interface. The list type can either discrete or range.  
ListId  
IDL series User Guide  
378  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.20 Filter rule actionmap Commands  
5.13.20.1 Get Filter rule actionmap  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter rule actionmap [ruleid <ruleid-val >] [orderindex <orderindex-val >]  
5.13.20.2 Create filter rule actionmap  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val > orderindex <orderindex-val>  
action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId  
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror  
[priority <priority-val>] [actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask  
<actionmask-val>]  
5.13.20.3 Delete filter rule actionmap  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val> orderindex <orderindex-val>  
5.13.20.4 Modify filter rule actionmap  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter rule actionmap ruleid <ruleid-val> orderindex <orderindex-val>  
[action SetPrio | RetagPrio | CopyToControl | ModifyTos | SetBacLevel | PktVlanId  
| RetagVlanId | PktServiceVlanId | RetagServiceVlanId | RetagServicePrio | Mirror]  
[priority <priority-val>] [actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask  
<actionmask-val>]  
IP DSLAM  
379  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is  
being created  
Type: Create -－ Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
orderindex  
This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in this  
table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple actions of  
the rule are applied in the increasing order of this field  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
<orderindex-val>  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -255  
action SetPrio |  
RetagPrio|  
This field specifies the action of the rule  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Modify － Optional  
CopyToControl  
|ModifyTos |  
SetBacLevel |PktVlanId  
| RetagVlanId  
|PktServiceVlanId  
|RetagServiceVlanId  
|RetagServicePrio |  
Mirror  
priority <priority-val>  
This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching  
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or 'retagprio'or  
'retagserviceprio'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 0  
actionval  
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that  
require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and  
retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this  
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap  
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos  
action this parameter should contain value to be set in TOS  
<actionval-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
380  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid  
for this action. The application of this value is dependent on the  
mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this parameter should  
contain valid Buffer Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For  
pktvlanid, retagvlanid, pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid  
actions this parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in  
the range 1 to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should  
be filled with valid mirror context id.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0  
actionmask  
This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits are  
taken into consideration for modifytos action and other bits are  
ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the  
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the  
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location  
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains  
unchanged.  
<actionmask -val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
Example:  
$ create filter rule actionmap ruleid 1 orderindex 1 action SetPrio priority 3  
actionval 0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
Action  
: 1  
Order Index : 1  
Priority : 3  
: SetPrio  
ActionValue : 0x00000000  
Action Mask : 0xffffffff  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
381  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule entry for which this mapping is  
being created  
Order Index  
This is the order index to allow creation of multiple entries in  
this table with a single rule identified by 'ruleid'. Multiple  
actions of the rule are applied in the increasing order of this  
field  
Action  
This field specifies the action of the rule  
Priority  
This field specifies the priority to be set for the matching  
packets. It is valid only if 'action' is either 'setprio' or  
'retagprio'or 'retagserviceprio'.  
ActionValue  
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions  
that require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio,  
and retagserviceprio actions. For copytocontrol action this  
parameter should contain trap level 0 (trap disabled) or 1 (trap  
enabled). Other values are invalid for this action. For  
modifytos action this parameter should contain value to be set  
in TOS field in the packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values  
are invalid for this action. The application of this value is  
dependent on the mask parameter. For setbaclevel action this  
parameter should contain valid Buffer Admission Control level  
value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid and pktservicevlanid actions this  
parameter should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1  
to 4094. For mirror action this parameter should be filled  
with valid mirror context id.  
Action Mask  
This field is valid for modifytos action only. Only lower 8-bits  
are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other  
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then  
the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the  
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location  
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field  
remains unchanged.  
IDL series User Guide  
382  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.21 Filter rule entry Commands  
5.13.21.1 Get Filter rule entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter rule entry [ruleid <ruleid-val>]  
5.13.21.2 Create filter rule entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter rule entry ruleid r<ruleid-val> [ action drop | allow | setprio |  
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit|  
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |  
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description  
<description-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ status enable | disable ]  
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ ruledir in | out ]  
[ applywhenreq enable | disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel  
interface | bridge ] [ exprid <exprid-val> ] [ actionval <actionval-val> ]  
[ actionmask <actionmask-val> ]  
5.13.21.3 Delete filter rule entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter rule entry ruleid <ruleid-val >  
5.13.21.4 Modify filter rule entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
IP DSLAM  
383  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
modify filter rule entry ruleid <ruleid-val> [ action drop | allow | setprio |  
sendtocontrol | retagprio | copytocontrol | clfrdef | gotonextrule | forwardexit |  
exprdef | modifytos | setbaclevel | pktvlanid | retagvlanid | pktservicevlanid |  
retagservicevlanid | retagserviceprio | ratelimiter | Mirror ] [ description  
<description-val> ] [ priority <priority-val> ] [ status enable | disable ]  
[ statsstatus enable | disable ] [ ruleprio low | high ] [ applywhenreq enable |  
disable ] [ pkttype Mcast | Bcast | Ucast ] [ snooplevel interface | bridge ] [ exprid  
<exprid-val> ] [ actionval <actionval-val> ] [ actionmask <actionmask-val> ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val >  
Unique identifier of a filter rule.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1-65535  
action drop | allow  
Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This field  
can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.  
|setprio | sendtocontrol  
|retagprio | copytocontrol| 'exprdef(10)' action has a special significance that action is defined  
clfrdef | gotonextrule  
|forwardexit | exprdef  
|modifytos | setbaclevel  
|pktvlanid | retagvlanid  
|pktservicevlanid  
in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be specified.  
For other types of actions, the default relationship between subrules  
is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef' and 'ratelimiter' action  
types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef', then the rule can have at  
most one subrule, that too of type 'clfrtree'. The actions setprio,  
retagprio and setserviceprio require priority value to be specified in  
ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol,  
modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid, retagvlanid, setservicevlanid,  
retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and mirror require an additional value  
to be specified in ruleActionVal parameter. The actions  
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos also require  
ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.  
|retagservicevlanid  
|retagserviceprio  
|ratelimiter | Mirror  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: drop  
description  
Description of the application that receives packets matching this  
rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is  
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be  
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable' Type: Create －  
<description-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
384  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
priority <priority-val>  
Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid  
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is  
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with  
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output  
queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority which  
is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used along with  
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output  
queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value  
'disable'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 0  
status enable | disable  
Admin status of the rule  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: disable  
statsstatus enable  
Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only  
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if  
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect  
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast  
packets hitting the rule.  
|disable  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: disable  
ruleprio low | high  
Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule is  
created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if  
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction'  
has value 'clfrdef'  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: high  
ruledir in | out  
Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces  
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: in  
IP DSLAM  
385  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
applywhenreq enable  
This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when required.  
Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to value 'enable'.  
This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'. This  
field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
|disable  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: disable  
pkttype Mcast | Bcast  
This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be  
applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets, 'Bcast'  
means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast' means this  
rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if 'ruleDir' is  
'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
|Ucast  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: Ucast  
snooplevel interface  
Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from  
Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If none  
of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then this field  
has no significance. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the  
value 'disable'. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
|bridge  
Default value: interface  
exprid <exprid-val>  
Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression Table  
to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'. In  
absence of this field, the default relationship between all subrules is  
all ANDed.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action setprio description lacp priority 7 status  
enable statsstatus disable ruleprio high ruledir in applywhenreq disable pkttype  
Ucast snooplevel interface exprid exprid 1 actionval 0x00000000 actionmask  
0xffffffff  
IDL series User Guide  
386  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
: 7  
Rule Action : setprio  
Admin status : enable  
Rule Priority : high  
Set Priority  
Stats admin status  
Rule Direction  
Pkt Type  
: disable  
: in  
ApplyWhenReq : disable  
: Ucast  
Application Description : lacp  
Snoop Level  
Expression Id  
Action Value  
Action Mask  
: interface  
: exprid 1  
: 0x00000000  
: 0xffffffff  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule.  
Rule Action  
Action to be applied for the packets matching this filter rule. This  
field can be modified only if 'ruleStatus' has the value 'disable'.  
‘exprdef (10)' action has a special significance that action is  
defined in the expression. In this case the 'ExprId' field must be  
specified. For other types of actions, the default relationship  
between subrules is all ANDed. If 'ruleDir' value is 'out', 'clfrdef'  
and 'ratelimiter' action types are invalid. If the action is 'clfrdef',  
then the rule can have at most one subrule, that too of type  
'clfrtree'. The actions setprio, retagprio and setserviceprio require  
priority value to be specified in ruleSetPrio parameter. The actions  
sendtocontrol, copytocontrol, modifytos, setbaclevel, setvlanid,  
retagvlanid, setservicevlanid, retagservicevlanid, ratelimiter and  
mirror require an additional value to be specified in ruleActionVal  
parameter. The actions sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and  
modifytos also require ruleActionMask parameter to be specified.  
Priority to be set for packets matching this rule. This field is valid  
only if RuleAction is 'setprio' or 'retagprio'. If the RuleAction is  
'setprio' then this value is internal priroity and is used along with  
egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the output  
Set Priority  
IP DSLAM  
387  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
queue. If the RuleAction is 'retagprio' then this value is priority  
which is to be tagged into the outgoing packet and it is also used  
along with egress port traffic class mapping table, to determine the  
output queue. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the  
value 'disable'.  
Admin status  
Admin status of the rule  
Stats admin status  
Admin status of rule statistics. Statitics of a rule are collected only  
when this field is set to 'enable'. This field can be modified only if  
'status' has the value 'disable'. NOTE - Statistics may not reflect  
correctly the number of egress mcast, bcast and unknown unicast  
packets hitting the rule.  
Rule Priority  
Tells the priority of the rule. Based on this priority value, the rule  
is created in fast or slow memory. This field can be modified only if  
'status' has the value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the  
'ruleAction' has value 'clfrdef'  
Rule Direction  
ApplyWhenReq  
Specifies whether the rule will be applied on incoming interfaces  
(ingress)or outgoing interfaces(egress).  
This specifies whether this rule is to be applied only when  
required. Rule description field is mandatory if this field is set to  
value 'enable'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the  
value 'disable'. This field is ignored if the 'ruleAction' has value  
'clfrdef'.  
Pkt Type  
This field specifies the types of packets on which this rule is to be  
applied. 'Mcast' means this rule is valid for multicast packets,  
'Bcast' means this rule is valid for broadcast packets and 'Ucast'  
means this rule is valid for unicast packets. This field is valid only if  
'ruleDir' is 'out'. This field can be modified only if 'status' has the  
value 'disable'.  
Application  
Description  
Description of the application that receives packets matching this  
rule. This field is valid and mandatory only if RuleAction is  
'sendtocontrol' or RuleApplyWhenReq is 'enable'. This field can be  
modified only if 'status' has the value 'disable'  
Snoop Level  
Snoop level specifies whether packet will be snooped directly from  
Interface or from Bridge after applying Bridging functionality .If  
none of the Rule actions is 'sendtoControl' or 'copytocontrol', then  
this field has no significance. This field can be modified only if  
'status' has the value 'disable'.  
Expression Id  
Identifies the expression id from the Generic Filter Expression  
Table to be used. This field is used only if 'ruleAction' is 'exprdef'.  
In absence of this field, the default relationship between all  
IDL series User Guide  
388  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
subrules is all ANDed.  
Action Value  
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that  
require an additional input, other than setprio, retagprio, and  
retagserviceprio actions. For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol  
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0-3). Other  
values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this  
parameter should contain value to be set in TOS field in the packet  
in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this action. The  
application of this value is dependent on the mask parameter. For  
setbaclevel action this parameter should contain valid Buffer  
Admission Control level value of 0 or 1. For pktvlanid, retagvlanid,  
pktservicevlanid and retagservicevlanid actions this parameter  
should be filled with VLAN ID value in the range 1 to 4094. For  
ratelimiter action this parameter should be filled with the valid  
user-defined flow type value. For mirror action this parameter  
should be filled with valid mirror context id. This parameter is  
ignored for other actions. Specifying an invalid value for an action  
would result in error when the rule is enabled.  
Action Mask  
This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos  
actions only. For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this  
parameter should contain trap level 0xffffffff (trap disabled) or  
0x00000000(trap enabled). Other values are invalid for this action.  
For modifytos action, only lower 8-bits are taken into consideration  
and other bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,  
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the  
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location  
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains  
unchanged.  
5.13.22 Filter rule map Commands  
5.13.22.1 Get Filter rule map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter rule map [ifname <interface-name> | all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |  
allcpe | allipoe] [stageid <stageid-val>] [ruleid <ruleid-val>]  
IP DSLAM  
389  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.22.2 Create filter rule map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |  
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val> [orderid <orderid-val>]  
5.13.22.3 Delete filter rule map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |  
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val>  
5.13.22.4 Modify filter rule map  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter rule map ifname <interface-name>| all | alleoa | alleth | allpppoe |  
allcpe | allipoe stageid <stageid-val> ruleid <ruleid-val> [orderid <orderid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Ifname  
Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,  
PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of  
this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'  
interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'  
indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'  
interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe  
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then  
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<interface-name>| all  
|alleoa | alleth |  
allpppoe| allcpe |  
allipoe  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: , all , alleoa, alleth, allpppoe, allcpe,| allipoe  
IDL series User Guide  
390  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
stageid <stageid-val>  
This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in  
the mapping belongs  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Rule Id of the rule in the mapping  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
orderid <ordered-val>  
This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.  
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Default value: Same As Ruleid  
Example:  
$ create filter rule map ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface : eoa-0  
Rule Id : 1  
Stage Id : 1  
Order Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
Name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EOA,  
PPPoE, IPOE and ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of  
this field is 'All', it indicates all interfaces, 'AllEoa' indicates all 'eoa'  
interfaces, and 'AllEth' indicates all 'ethernet'interfaces. AllPppoe'  
indicates all 'PPPoE'interfaces, 'AllIpoe' indicates all 'IPOE'  
IP DSLAM  
391  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
interfaces and 'AllCpe' indicates all eoa , all ipoe and pppoe  
interfaces. If a bridge port on aggregated interface is created then  
this field can not have ifIndex of any specific ethernet interface.  
This field specifies the stage on the interface to which the rule in  
the mapping belongs  
Stage Id  
Rule Id  
Rule Id of the rule in the mapping  
Order Id  
This field indicates the order of the rule in the attached sequence.  
The default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.  
5.13.23 Filter rule stats Commands  
5.13.23.1 Get Filter rule stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter rule stats [ruleid <ruleid-val>]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule  
Type: Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1- 65535  
Example:  
$ get filter rule stats ruleid 1  
Output:  
Rule Id : 1  
Num Hits : 4354  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule  
Num Hits  
Number of packets that hit this rule  
References:  
z
Generic Filter Commands  
IDL series User Guide  
392  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.24 Filter seq entry Commands  
5.13.24.1 Get Filter seq entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter seq entry [seqid <seqid-val >] [ruleid <ruleid-val >]  
5.13.24.2 Create filter seq entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val > [orderid  
<ordered-val >]  
5.13.24.3 Delete filter seq entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val >  
5.13.24.4 Modify filter seq entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter seq entry seqid <seqid-val > ruleid <ruleid-val > [orderid  
<ordered-val >]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
IP DSLAM  
393  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
seqid <seqid-val >  
Sequence Id of the sequence  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get – Optional  
Valid Values: 1-65535  
Rule Id of the rule  
ruleid <ruleid-val >  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid Values: 1-65535  
orderid <ordered-val > This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The default value  
for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid Values: 1-65535  
Example:  
$ create filter seq entry seqid 1 ruleid 1 orderId 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Sequence Id : 1  
Order Id : 1  
Rule Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Sequence Id  
Rule Id  
Sequence Id of the sequence  
Rule Id of the rule  
Order Id  
This field indicates the order of the rule in the sequence. The  
default value for this field will be same as the ruleid of the entry.  
References:  
z
Generic filter related commands  
IDL series User Guide  
394  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.25 Filter seq info Commands  
5.13.25.1 Get Filter seq info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter seq info [seqid <seqid-val >]  
5.13.25.2 Create filter seq info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter seq info seqid seqid [ifname <interface-name> | alleth] [stageid  
<stageid-val>] [seqdir in | out]  
5.13.25.3 Delete filter seq info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter seq info seqid <seqid-val>  
5.13.25.4 Modify filter seq info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter seq info seqid <seqid-val > [ifname <interface-name>| alleth]  
[stageid <stageid-val>] [seqdir in | out]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
IP DSLAM  
395  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
seqid <seqid-val>  
Sequence Id of the sequence  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid Values: 1-65535  
ifname  
The name of the interface whose mapping is being created. Only EoA, PPPoE,  
and Ethernet interfaces are allowed. If the value of this field is 'alleth', it  
indicates all 'Ethernet' interfaces. If the bridge port is created over the  
aggregated interface, then this field cannot have IfIndex of any specific  
Ethernet interface. If the bridge port over the aggregated interface is not  
created, then this field cannot have the value 'alleth'. This field should not be  
specified during creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during  
modify of an entry in this table.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
stageid <stageid-val>  
Identifier of the stage on the interface for which the sequence is being  
applied.This field should not be specified during creation of an entry in this  
table and must be specified during modify of an entry in this table  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1-2  
Default Value:1  
seqdir in | out  
This field specifies whether the sequence to be applied in ingress direction or  
egress direction on the interface.This field should not be specified during  
creation of an entry in this table and must be specified during modify of an entry  
in this table.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: In  
Example:  
$ create filter seq info seqid 1 ifname eoa-0 stageid 1 seqdir 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Sequence Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
396  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Sequence Id  
Sequence Id of the sequence  
References:  
Generic filter related commands  
z
5.13.26 Filter subrule arp Commands  
5.13.26.1 Get Filter subrule arp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule arp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.26.2 Create filter subrule arp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ srcmacaddrto <srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ dstmacaddrto <dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val> ] [ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange  
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |  
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ]  
[ ipdstaddrmask <ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]  
IP DSLAM  
397  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.26.3 Delete filter subrule arp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
5.13.26.4 Modify filter subrule arp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule arp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
[ opcode request | reply | any ] [ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ srcmacaddrto <srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ dstmacaddrto <dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val> ] [ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val> ]  
[ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange  
| exrange ] [ srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |  
ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange | ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ]  
[ ipdstaddrmask <ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
IDL series User Guide  
398  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
opcode request | reply |  
The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or  
reply. This field specifies the type of packets on which the  
subrule is to be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and  
reply packets are filtered.  
any  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
srcmacaddrfrom  
Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac  
addresses. This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This  
field and the srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac  
addresses if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<srcmacaddrfrom-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
srcmacaddrto  
End source Mac address of the range of source Mac  
addresses. This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a  
range of source Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either  
'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<srcmacaddrto-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"  
dstmacaddrfrom  
Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac  
addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This  
field and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination  
Mac addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'  
or'exrange'.  
<dstmacaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
dstmacaddrto  
End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac  
addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a  
range of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is  
either'inrange' or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<dstmacaddrto-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"  
IP DSLAM  
399  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
srcipaddrfrom  
Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.  
This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'  
or'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',  
this field and srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP  
addresses.  
<srcipaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
srcipaddrto  
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.  
This field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist'.If srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this  
field and srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP  
addresses.  
<srcipaddrto-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 255.255.255.255  
dstipaddrfrom  
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'  
or 'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange',  
this field and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP  
addresses.  
<dstipaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
dstipaddrto  
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist'  
or 'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a  
range of destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<dstipaddrto-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 255.255.255.255  
srcmacaddrcmp eq |  
neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange  
Source Mac address comparison type.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
dstmacaddrcmp eq |  
neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange  
Destination Mac address comparison type.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
IDL series User Guide  
400  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
srcipaddrcmp eq | neq | Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if  
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange |  
source IP address present in interface classifier generic  
list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not  
present in interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and  
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which  
this subrule is being created is 'out'.  
ingenlist | notingenlist  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
dstipaddrcmp eq | neq | Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means  
lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange |  
check if destination IP address present in interface classifier  
generic list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP  
address not present in interface classifier generic  
list.'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of  
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
ingenlist | notingenlist  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
ipsrcaddrmask  
The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied  
over the source IP address before checking against a value.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<ipsrcaddrmask-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
ipdstaddrmask  
The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is  
applied over the destination IP address before checking  
against a value.  
<ipdstaddrmask-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
subruleprio low | high |  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same  
as specified in the rule.  
asinrule  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
IP DSLAM  
401  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule arp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 opcode request srcmacaddrfrom  
00:01:02:03:04:05 srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom  
00:02:03:04:05:11 dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125  
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125  
srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange srcipaddrcmp inrange  
dstipaddrcmp exrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffff0000 ipdstaddrmask 0xffff0000  
subruleprio high  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
: request  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Opcode  
Start Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:05 End Src Mac Addr : 00:01:02:03:04:10  
Start Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:11 End Dest Mac Addr : 00:02:03:04:05:15  
Start Src Ip Addr  
: 172.25.1.125  
End Src Ip Addr  
: 172.25.5.125  
Start Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.6.125  
End Dest Ip Addr : 172.25.10.125  
Src Mac Addr Cmp  
Dest Mac Addr Cmp  
Src Ip Addr Cmp  
Dest Ip Addr Cmp  
Ip Src Addr Mask  
: inrange  
: exrange  
: inrange  
: exrange  
: 0xffff0000  
Ip Dest Addr Mask : 0xffff0000  
Subrule Prio  
: high  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Parameters  
Name  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created.  
Subrule Id  
Opcode  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
The opcode identifies whether the packet is ARP request or reply.  
This field specifies the type of packets on which the subrule is to  
be applied. If 'any' is specified, both request and reply packets are  
filtered.  
IDL series User Guide  
402  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start Src Mac Addr  
End Src Mac Addr  
Start Dest Mac Addr  
End Dest Mac Addr  
Start Src Ip Addr  
End Src Ip Addr  
Start source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.  
This field is invalid if srcmacaddrcmp is 'any'. This field and the  
srcmacaddrto field specify a range of source Mac addresses if  
srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.  
End source Mac address of the range of source Mac addresses.  
This field and the srcmacaddrfrom field specify a range of source  
Mac addresses, if srcmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange'  
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac  
addresses. This field is invalid if'dstmacaddrcmp'is 'any'.This field  
and the dstmacaddrto field specify a range of destination Mac  
addresses if dstmacaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or'exrange'.  
End destination Mac address of the range of destination Mac  
addresses. This field and the dstmacaddrfrom field specify a range  
of destination Mac addresses, if dstmacaddrcmp is either'inrange'  
or'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This  
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or'notingenlist'.If  
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and  
srcipaddrto field specify a range of source IP addresses.  
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This  
field is invalid if srcaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'.If  
srcaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field and  
srcipaddrfrom field specify a range of source IP addresses.  
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist'.If dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or 'exrange', this field  
and dstipaddrto field specify a range of destination IP addresses.  
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field is invalid if dstaddrcmp is 'any','ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist'.This field and the previous field specifiy a range of  
destination IP addresses, if dstaddrcmp is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start Dest Ip Addr  
End Dest Ip Addr  
Src Mac Addr Cmp  
Dest Mac Addr Cmp  
Source Mac address comparison type.  
Destination Mac address comparison type.  
IP DSLAM  
403  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Src Ip Addr Cmp  
Source IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if  
source IP address present in interface classifier generic  
list.'Notingenlist' means check if source IP address not present in  
interface classifier generic list. 'Ingenlist' and 'Notingenlist' are  
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being  
created is 'out'.  
Dest Ip Addr Cmp  
Destination IP address comparison type.'Ingenlist' means check if  
destination IP address present in interface classifier generic  
list.'Notingenlist' means check if destination IP address not  
present in interface classifier generic list.'Ingenlist' and  
'Notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which this  
subrule is being created is 'out'.  
Ip Src Addr Mask  
Ip Dest Addr Mask  
Subrule Prio  
The mask value for source IP address. The mask is applied over  
the source IP address before checking against a value.  
The mask value for destination IP address. The mask is applied  
over the destination IP address before checking against a value.  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as  
specified in the rule.  
5.13.27 Filter subrule clfrtree Commands  
5.13.27.1 Get Filter subrule clfrtree  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule clfrtree [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]  
5.13.27.2 Create filter subrule clfrtree  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
tname <tname-val > entrypid <entrypid-val >  
IDL series User Guide  
404  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.27.3 Delete filter subrule clfrtree  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
5.13.27.4 Modify filter subrule clfrtree  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule clfrtree ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
[tname <tname-val >] [entrypid <entrypid-val >]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify --Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1- 65535  
Subruleid <subruleid>  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
tname <tname>  
Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule of this rule.  
This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A classifier tree can be used  
only in one subrule. The Maximum length of Name should be 32.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
entrypid <entrypid>  
Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point for it.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
IP DSLAM  
405  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create filter subrule clfrtree ruleid 1 subruleid 2 tname igmp entrypid 2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
: igmp  
Subrule Id : 2  
Tree Name  
Entry Profile Id : 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created.  
Subrule Id  
Tree Name  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Name of the classifier tree which is to be included as subrule  
of this rule. This classifier tree should exist and be enabled. A  
classifier tree can be used only in one subrule. The Maximum  
length of Name should be 32.  
Entry Profile Id  
Profile Id of the tree, which shall be treated as an entry point  
for it.  
References:  
z
see generic filter related commands  
IDL series User Guide  
406  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.28 Filter subrule ether Commands  
5.13.28.1 Get Filter subrule ether  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule ether [ruleid <ruleid-val >] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]  
5.13.28.2 Create filter subrule ether  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val  
>[ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ srcmacaddrto  
<srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ dstmacaddrto  
<dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ ethertypefrom <ethertypefrom-val> ] [ ethertypeto  
<ethertypeto-val> ] [ vlanidfrom <vlanidfrom-val> ] [ vlanidto <vlanidto-val> ]  
[ priotagfrom <priotagfrom-val> ] [ priotagto <priotagto-val> ] [ dsapfrom  
<dsapfrom-val> ] [ dsapto <dsapto-val> ] [ ssapfrom <ssapfrom-val> ] [ ssapto  
<ssapto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp  
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |  
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]  
[ servicevlanidfrom <servicevlanidfrom-val> ] [ servicevlanidto  
<servicevlanidto-val> ] [ servicepriotagfrom <servicepriotagfrom-val> ]  
[ servicepriotagto <servicepriotagto-val> ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |  
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |  
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
IP DSLAM  
407  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.28.3 Delete filter subrule ether  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
5.13.28.4 Modify filter subrule ether  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule ether ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val  
>[ srcmacaddrfrom <srcmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ srcmacaddrto  
<srcmacaddrto-val> ] [ dstmacaddrfrom <dstmacaddrfrom-val> ] [ dstmacaddrto  
<dstmacaddrto-val> ] [ ethertypefrom <ethertypefrom-val> ] [ ethertypeto  
<ethertypeto-val> ] [ vlanidfrom <vlanidfrom-val> ] [ vlanidto <vlanidto-val> ]  
[ priotagfrom <priotagfrom-val> ] [ priotagto <priotagto-val> ] [ dsapfrom  
<dsapfrom-val> ] [ dsapto <dsapto-val> ] [ ssapfrom <ssapfrom-val> ] [ ssapto  
<ssapto-val> ] [ srcmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange ] [ dstmacaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange |  
exrange ] [ ethertypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
[ vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ priotagcmp  
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dsapcmp eq | neq | lt |  
leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ ssapcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ]  
[ servicevlanidfrom <servicevlanidfrom-val> ] [ servicevlanidto  
<servicevlanidto-val> ] [ servicepriotagfrom <servicepriotagfrom-val> ]  
[ servicepriotagto <servicepriotagto-val> ] [ servicevlanidcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |  
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ servicepriotagcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |  
geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
IDL series User Guide  
408  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
srcmacaddrfrom  
Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This  
field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcmacaddrto'  
specify a range of source MAC addresses if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'  
<srcmacaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
srcmacaddrto  
End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses. This  
field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC addresses, if  
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is  
invalid  
<srcmacaddrto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"  
Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.  
This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field  
specify a range of destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'  
dstmacaddrfrom  
<dstmacaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
dstmacaddrto  
End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC addresses.  
This field and the previous field specify a range of destination MAC  
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise  
this field is invalid  
<dstmacaddrto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
409  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"  
ethertypefrom  
Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if  
'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of ether  
types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange' Type: Create －  
Optional  
<ethertypefrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0  
ethertypeto  
End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the previous field  
specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
<ethertypeto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0xFFFF  
vlanidfrom  
Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of the rule  
for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if  
'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field specify a range of  
VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or'exrange'(9).In VLAN  
stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN ID. Type: Create  
－ Optional  
<vlanidfrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4094  
Default value: 1  
vlanidto <vlanidto-val>  
End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of the rule for  
which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the vlanidfrom  
field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or  
'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this  
parameter maps to customer VLAN ID.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4094  
Default value: 4094  
priotagfrom  
Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the  
rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid if  
'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field specify a range of  
priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN  
stacking mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<priotagfrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
410  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
priotagto  
End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction of the  
rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the  
priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either  
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In VLAN stacking  
mode this parameter maps to priority in the customer VLAN tag.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<priotagto-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 7  
dsapfrom  
Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is  
'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of DSAPs, if  
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create － Optional  
<dsapfrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0x00  
dsapto <dsapto-val>  
End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if 'dsapcmp' is  
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of DSAPs, if  
'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0xff  
ssapfrom  
Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is  
'any'. This object and the next object specify a range of SSAPs, if  
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create － Optional  
<ssapfrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0x00  
ssapto <ssapto-val>  
End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if 'ssapcmp' is  
'any'. This object and the previous object specify a range of SSAPs, if  
'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0xff  
srcmacaddrcmp eq |  
neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any| inrange | exrange  
Source mac address comparison type  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
dstmacaddrcmp eq |  
neq |lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any| inrange | exrange  
Destination mac address comparison type  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
411  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default value: any  
ethertypecmp eq | neq | Ether type comparison type  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
lt| leq | gt | geq | any  
|inrange | exrange  
Default value: any  
vlanidcmp eq | neq | lt  
|leq | gt | geq | any  
|inrange | exrange  
VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp' is not  
equal to 'any'  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
priotagcmp eq | neq | lt Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'vlanidcmp' is not  
|leq | gt | geq | any  
|inrange | exrange  
equal to 'any'"  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
ssapcmp eq | neq | lt |  
leq| gt | geq | any |  
inrange| exrange  
SSAP comparison type.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
subruleprio low | high  
|asinrule  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the  
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as  
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
servicevlanidfrom  
Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the  
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field  
is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the servicevlanidto field  
specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either  
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will  
result in error. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
<servicevlanidfrom-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 4094  
Default value: 1  
servicevlanidto  
End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the  
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field  
and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if  
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field  
is invalid In native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<servicevlanidto-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
412  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4094  
Default value: 4094  
servicepriotagfrom  
Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction  
<servicepriotagfrom-val> of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is invalid  
if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field and the etherPriorityTagTo  
field specify a range of priority tags, if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either  
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native mode configuring this parameter will  
result in error. Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 0  
servicepriotagto  
End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction  
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field and the  
etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of service priority tags, if  
'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).  
Otherwise this field is invalid. In native mode configuring this parameter will  
result in error.  
<servicepriotagto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
Default value: 7  
servicevlanidcmp eq |  
neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any| inrange | exrange  
Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be ‘any (7)', if  
etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to ‘any (7)'In native mode configuring  
this parameter will result in error.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
servicepriotagcmp eq |  
neq| lt | leq | gt | geq |  
any| inrange | exrange  
Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be ‘any (7)', if  
vlanidcmp is not equal to ‘any (7)'.In native mode configuring this  
parameter will result in error.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule ether ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcmacaddrfrom 00:01:02:03:04:05  
srcmacaddrto 00:01:02:03:04:10 dstmacaddrfrom 00:02:03:04:05:11  
dstmacaddrto 00:02:03:04:05:15 ethertypefrom 0x0800 ethertypeto 0x0810  
vlanidfrom 2 vlanidto 5 priotagfrom 2 priotagto 5 dsapfrom 0xf0 dsapto 0xff  
ssapfrom 0xf0 ssapto 0xff srcmacaddrcmp inrange dstmacaddrcmp exrange  
IP DSLAM  
413  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ethertypecmp inrange vlanidcmp exrange priotagcmp inrange dsapcmp inrange  
ssapcmp inrange subruleprio high servicevlanidfrom 2 servicevlanidto 5  
servicepriotagfrom 2 servicepriotagto 5 servicevlanidcmp exrange  
servicepriotagcmp inrange  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Start source mac address  
End source mac address  
Start destination MAC address  
End destination MAC address  
Start ethernet type  
Start VLAN Id  
: 00:01:02:03:04:05  
: 00:01:02:03:04:10  
: 00:02:03:04:05:11  
: 00:02:03:04:05:15  
: 0x0800  
: 2  
End ethernet type : 0x0810  
End VLAN Id  
End priority tag : 5  
End DSAP  
: 5  
Start priority tag  
: 2  
Start DSAP  
: 0xf0  
: 0xf0  
: 0xff  
Start SSAP  
End SSAP  
: 0xff  
Source MAC addrees comparison  
: inrange  
Desination MAC addr comparison : exrange  
Ether type comparison  
Vlan Id comparison  
: inrange  
: exrange  
: inrange  
: inrange  
: inrange  
: high  
Priority tag comparison  
DSAP comparison  
SSAP comparison  
Subrule Priority  
Start service VLAN Id  
End service VLAN Id  
Start service priority tag  
End service priority tag  
service Vlan Id comparison  
: 2  
: 5  
: 2  
: 5  
: exrange  
Service Priority tag comparison : inrange  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
414  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Subrule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Start source mac  
address  
Start source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.  
This field is invalid if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and  
'srcmacaddrto' specify a range of source MAC addresses if  
'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End source mac  
address  
End source MAC address of the range of source MAC addresses.  
This field and 'srcmacaddrfrom' specify a range of source MAC  
addresses, if 'srcmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Otherwise this field is invalid  
Start destination MAC  
address  
Start destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC  
addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is 'any'. This  
field and the next field specify a range of destination MAC  
addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End destination MAC address of the range of destination MAC  
addresses. This field and the previous field specify a range of  
destination MAC addresses if 'dstmacaddrcmp' is either 'inrange'  
or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
End destination MAC  
address  
Start ethernet type  
End ethernet type  
Start VLAN Id  
Start ether type of the range of ether types. This field is invalid if  
'ethertypecmp' is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range  
of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End ether type of the range of ether types. This field and the  
previous field specify a range of ether types, if 'ethertypecmp' is  
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
Start VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs. Invalid, if the direction of  
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field is  
invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the vlanidto field  
specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)  
or'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to  
customer VLAN ID.  
End VLAN Id  
End VLAN Id of the range of VLAN IDs.Invalid, if the direction of  
the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field  
and the vlanidfrom field specify a range of VLAN Ids, if 'vlanidcmp'  
is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise, this field is invalid.  
In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to customer VLAN  
ID.  
Start priority tag  
Start priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction  
IP DSLAM  
415  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field  
is invalid if 'priotagcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the priotagto field  
specify a range of priority tags, if 'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8)  
or 'exrange'(9).In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to  
priority in the customer VLAN tag.  
End priority tag  
End priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the direction  
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'. This field  
and the priotagfrom field specify a range of priority tags, if  
'priotagcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this  
field is invalid. In VLAN stacking mode this parameter maps to  
priority in the customer VLAN tag.  
Start DSAP  
End DSAP  
Start DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if  
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range  
of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End DSAP of the range of DSAPs. This object is invalid if  
'dsapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a  
range of DSAPs, if 'dsapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start SSAP  
End SSAP  
Start SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if  
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the next object specify a range  
of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End SSAP of the range of SSAPs. This object is invalid if  
'ssapcmp' is 'any'. This object and the previous object specify a  
range of SSAPs, if 'ssapcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Otherwise this field is invalid  
Source MAC addrees  
comparison  
Source mac address comparison type  
Desination MAC addr  
comparison  
Destination mac address comparison type  
Ether type comparison  
Vlan Id comparison  
Ether type comparison type  
VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any', if 'priotagcmp'  
is not equal to 'any'  
Priority tag comparison Priority tag comparison type. This field must be 'any', if  
'vlanidcmp' is not equal to 'any'"  
DSAP comparison  
SSAP comparison  
Subrule Priority  
DSAP comparison type.  
SSAP comparison type.  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as  
specified in the rule.  
IDL series User Guide  
416  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Start service VLAN Id  
Start service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs. Invalid, if  
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is  
'out'. This field is invalid if 'vlanidcmp' is 'any'(7). This field and the  
servicevlanidto field specify a range of service VLAN Ids, if  
'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In native  
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.  
End service VLAN Id  
End service VLAN Id of the range of service VLAN IDs.Invalid, if  
the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is  
'out'. This field and the servicevlanidfrom field specify a range of  
service VLAN Ids, if 'servicevlanidcmp' is either 'inrange'(8) or  
'exrange'(9).Otherwise, this field is invalid In native mode  
configuring this parameter will result in error.  
Start service priority  
tag  
Start service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the  
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.  
This field is invalid if 'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is 'any'(7). This field  
and the etherPriorityTagTo field specify a range of priority tags, if  
'etherhPrioTagCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).In  
native mode configuring this parameter will result in error.  
End service priority tag End service priority tag of the range of priority tags. Invalid, if the  
direction of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.  
This field and the etherhPriorityTagFrom field specify a range of  
service priority tags, if 'etherhServicePrioTagCmpType' is either  
'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9). Otherwise this field is invalid. In native  
mode configuring this parameter will result in error.  
service Vlan Id  
comparison  
Service VLAN Id comparison type. This field must be 'any(7)', if  
etherhPrioTagCmpType is not equal to 'any(7)'In native mode  
configuring this parameter will result in error.  
Service Priority tag  
comparison  
Service Priority tag comparison type.This field must be 'any(7)', if  
vlanidcmp is not equal to 'any(7)'.In native mode configuring this  
parameter will result in error.  
References:  
z
Generic filter commands  
IP DSLAM  
417  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.13.29 Filter subrule generic Commands  
5.13.29.1 Get Filter subrule generic  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule generic [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]  
5.13.29.2 Create filter subrule generic  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ offsethdr <Ethernet-val> | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]  
[ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ valuefrom <valuefrom-val> ] [ valueto  
<valueto-val> ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |  
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |  
asinrule ] [ namedlistid <namedlistid-val> ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
5.13.29.3 Delete filter subrule generic  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
5.13.29.4 Modify filter subrule generic  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule generic ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ offsethdr <Ethernet-val> | ip | tcp | udp | icmp | igmp | l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe ]  
[ offset <offset-val> ] [ mask <mask-val> ] [ valuefrom <valuefrom-val> ] [ valueto  
<valueto-val> ] [ gencmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange |  
ingenlist | notingenlist | innamedlist | notinnamedlist ] [ subruleprio low | high |  
asinrule ] [ namedlistid <namedlistid-val> ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
IDL series User Guide  
418  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The value  
'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is being created is of  
direction 'out'.  
offsethdr ethernet | ip |  
tcp | udp | icmp | igmp |  
l3Hdr | ppp | pppoe  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: ethernet  
offset <offset-val>  
Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 64  
Default value: 0  
mask <mask-val>  
Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
valuefrom  
Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is invalid if  
'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or  
<valuefrom-val>  
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next field  
specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
IP DSLAM  
419  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
valueto <valueto-val>  
End generic value of the range of generic values. This field and the  
previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
gencmp eq | neq | lt |  
leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange |  
ingenlist | notingenlist |  
innamedlist |  
Generic value comparision type.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
notinnamedlist  
subruleprio low | high | This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the  
asinrule  
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as  
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
namedlistid  
This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which will be used  
to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist' or 'notinnamedlist', this  
field is manadatory else it is extra.  
<namedlistid-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Default value: 1  
transporthdr ethernet |  
This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which  
corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this field is 'ethernet',  
then IP is being carried in ethernet header and if it is 'pppoe' then  
corresponding IP is being carried in PPP header.This field is valid only  
when value of 'offsethdr' is any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or  
igmp.Otherwise this field is extra  
pppoe  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: ethernet  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule generic ruleid 1 subruleid 2 offsethdr tcp offset 20 mask 0xFF  
valuefrom 0x20 valueto 0x40 gencmp inrange subruleprio high namedlistid -  
transporthdr Ethernet  
IDL series User Guide  
420  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id : 2  
Offset header  
: tcp  
Offset  
Mask  
: 20  
: 0xFF  
Generic header comparison : inrange  
Subrule Priority  
End value  
: high  
: 0x40  
Start value : 0x20  
Transport Header  
NamedList Id  
: ethernet  
: -  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule for which this sub rule is being  
created.  
Subrule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Offset header  
Type of offset header from where 'offset' to be measured. The  
value 'ethernet' is invalid if the rule for which this subrule is  
being created is of direction 'out'.  
Offset  
Offset value to be added to 'offsethdr' to get the field value  
Generic value comparision type.  
Generic header  
comparison  
Mask  
Mask to be applied to the contents of a packet at 'offset'  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same  
as specified in the rule.  
Subrule Priority  
Start value  
Start generic value of the range of generic values. This field is  
invalid if 'gencmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist','innamedlist',or'notinnamedlist'.This field and next  
field specifiy a range of generic values,if 'gencmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End value  
End generic value of the range of generic values. This field  
and the previous field specifiy a range of generic values,if  
'gencmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is  
invalid  
Transport Header  
This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in  
IP DSLAM  
421  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
which corresponding IP is being transported. If value of this  
field is 'ethernet', then IP is being carried in ethernet header  
and if it is 'pppoe' then corresponding IP is being carried in  
PPP header.This field is valid only when value of 'offsethdr' is  
any one of ip, tcp, udp, icmp or igmp.Otherwise this field is  
extra  
NamedList Id  
This specifies the list identifier value of the named list which  
will be used to do the lookup .In case 'gencmp' is 'innamedlist'  
or 'notinnamedlist', this field is manadatory else it is extra.  
References:  
z
Generic filter commands  
5.13.30 Filter subrule ICMP Commands  
5.13.30.1 Get Filter subrule icmp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule icmp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.30.2 Create filter subrule icmp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ icmptype<icmptype-val> ] [ icmpcode <icmpcode-val> ] [ icmptypecmp eq |  
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]  
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
5.13.30.3 Delete filter subrule icmp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
422  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.30.4 Modify filter subrule icmp  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule icmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ icmptype<icmptype-val> ] [ icmpcode <icmpcode-val> ] [ icmptypecmp eq |  
neq | any ] [ icmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]  
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
subruleid  
<subruleid-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
ICMP type  
icmptype  
<icmptype-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
icmpcode  
ICMP code  
<icmpcode-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
icmptypecmp eq | neq | ICMP type comparison type  
any  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
IP DSLAM  
423  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
icmpcodecmp eq | neq ICMP code comparison type  
| any  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
subruleprio low | high | This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on  
asinrule  
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or  
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule  
priority will be same as specified in the  
rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
transporthdr ethernet |  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in  
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of  
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet  
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried  
in the PPP header.  
pppoe  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: ethernet  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule icmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 icmptype 0 icmpcode 0  
icmptypecmp neq icmpcodecmp neq subruleprio high  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
: 0  
Subrule Id  
Icmp code  
: 2  
: 0  
Icmp type  
ICMP type comparison : neq  
ICMP code comparison : neq  
Subrule Priority  
: high  
: Ethernet  
Transport Header  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
424  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Subrule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
ICMP type  
Icmp type  
Icmp code  
ICMP code  
ICMP type comparison  
ICMP type comparison type  
ICMP code comparison ICMP code comparison type  
Subrule Priority  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on  
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or  
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule  
priority will be same as specified in the  
rule.  
Transport Header  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in  
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of  
this field is ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the ethernet  
header. If it is ‘pppoe’, then the corresponding IP is being carried  
in the PPP header.  
References:  
z
Generic Filter commands  
5.13.31 Filter subrule IGMP Commands  
5.13.31.1 Get Filter subrule igmp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule igmp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.31.2 Create filter subrule igmp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IP DSLAM  
425  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ igmptype <igmptype-val> ] [ igmpcode <igmpcode-val> ] [ groupaddrfrom  
<groupaddrfrom-val> ] [ groupaddrto <groupaddrto-val> ] [ igmptypecmp eq |  
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq  
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]  
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
5.13.31.3 Delete filter subrule igmp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
5.13.31.4 Modify filter subrule igmp  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule igmp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ igmptype <igmptype-val> ] [ igmpcode <igmpcode-val> ] [ groupaddrfrom  
<groupaddrfrom-val> ] [ groupaddrto <groupaddrto-val> ] [ igmptypecmp eq |  
neq | any ] [ igmpcodecmp eq | neq | any ] [ igmpgroupaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq  
| gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule]  
[ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
IDL series User Guide  
426  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
igmptype  
IGMP type  
<igmptype-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
igmpcode  
This fields specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of  
IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is any.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<igmpcode-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
groupaddrfrom  
Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This  
field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and  
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if  
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<groupaddrfrom-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
groupaddrto  
End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This  
field and 'groupaddrfrom' specify a range of IGMP group  
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<groupaddrto-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 4294967295  
igmptypecmp eq | neq  
IGMP type comparison type  
| any  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
igmpcodecmp eq | neq IGMP code comparison type  
| any  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
igmpgroupaddrcmp  
eq | neq | lt | leq | gt |  
geq | any | inrange |  
exrange  
IGMP group address comparison type  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
IP DSLAM  
427  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
subruleprio low | high | This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on  
asinrule  
this priority value, the subrule is created in fast or  
slow memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule  
priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
transporthdr ethernet |  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in  
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of  
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the  
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is  
being carried in the PPP header.  
pppoe  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: ethernet  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule igmp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 igmptype 0 igmpcode 0 groupaddr  
from 224.0.2.3 groupaddrto 224.10.20.30 igmptypecmp eq igmpcodecmp eq  
igmpgroupaddrcmp inrange subruleprio high  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
: 0  
: 0  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Igmp type  
IGMP type comparison : neq  
IGMP code comparison : neq  
Igmp code  
Start group address  
224.10.20.30  
: 224.0.2.3  
End group address  
:
IGMP group address comparison : inrange  
Subrule Priority : high  
Transport Header  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
: Ethernet  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Subrule Id  
Igmp type  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
IGMP type  
IDL series User Guide  
428  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IGMP type comparison  
Igmp code  
IGMP type comparison type  
This field specifies the Max Response Code (time) fields of  
IGMP packet. This field is invalid if igmphCodeCmpType is  
any.  
IGMP code comparison IGMP code comparison type  
Start group address  
Start group address of the range of igmp group addresses.This  
field is invalid if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is 'any'. This field and  
'groupaddrto' specify a range of IGMP group addresses, if  
'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End group address  
End group address of the range of igmp group addresses. This  
field and 'groupaddrfrom' specifiy a range of IGMP group  
addresses, if 'igmpgroupaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
IGMP group address comparison type  
IGMP group address  
comparison  
Subrule Priority  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as  
specified in the rule.  
Transport Header  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in  
which the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of  
this field is Ethernet(0x1), then the IP is being carried in the  
ethernet header. If it is pppoe(0x2), then the corresponding IP is  
being carried in the PPP header.  
References:  
z
Generic Filter commands  
5.13.32 Filter subrule IP Commands  
5.13.32.1 Get Filter subrule ip  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule ip [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val >]  
IP DSLAM  
429  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.32.2 Create filter subrule ip  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
[ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val > ] [ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val > ]  
[ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val > ] [ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val > ]  
[ prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val > ] [ prototypeto <prototypeto-val > ]  
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |  
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange  
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ] [ ipdstaddrmask  
<ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr  
ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom <tosfrom-val> ] [ tosto <tosto-val> ] [ tosmask  
<tosmask-val> ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
5.13.32.3 Delete filter subrule ip  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
5.13.32.4 Modify filter subrule ip  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule ip ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
[ srcipaddrfrom <srcipaddrfrom-val > ] [ srcipaddrto <srcipaddrto-val > ]  
[ dstipaddrfrom <dstipaddrfrom-val > ] [ dstipaddrto <dstipaddrto-val > ]  
[ prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val > ] [ prototypeto <prototypeto-val > ]  
[ srcaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange | ingenlist |  
notingenlist ] [ dstaddrcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange  
| ingenlist | notingenlist ] [ prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange ] [ ipsrcaddrmask <ipsrcaddrmask-val> ] [ ipdstaddrmask  
<ipdstaddrmask-val> ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule ] [ transporthdr  
IDL series User Guide  
430  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
ethernet | pppoe ] [ tosfrom <tosfrom-val> ] [ tosto <tosto-val> ] [ tosmask  
<tosmask-val> ] [ toscmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
srcipaddrfrom  
Start source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.  
This field is invalid if 'srcaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist'. This field and 'srcipaddrto' specify a range of source  
IP addresses if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<srcipaddrfrom-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
srcipaddrto  
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses.  
This field and 'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP  
addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Otherwise this field is invalid.  
<srcipaddrto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 255.255.255.255  
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or  
'notingenlist'. This field and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of  
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'.  
dstipaddrfrom  
<dstipaddrfrom-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0.0.0.0  
IP DSLAM  
431  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
dstipaddrto  
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP  
addresses. This field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of  
destination IP addresses, if 'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
Type: Create － Optional  
<dstipaddrto-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 255.255.255.255  
prototypefrom  
Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field  
is invalid if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto'  
specify a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
<prototypefrom-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0  
prototypeto  
End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field  
and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if  
'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field  
is invalid.  
<prototypeto-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 27  
srcaddrcmp eq | neq |  
lt |leq | gt | geq | any  
|inrange | exrange  
|ingenlist |  
Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if  
source ip address present in interface classifier generic list.  
'notingenlist' means check if source ip address not present in  
interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are  
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being  
created is 'out'  
notingenlist  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
dstaddrcmp eq | neq |  
lt |leq | gt | geq | any  
|inrange | exrange  
|ingenlist |  
Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check  
if destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.  
'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in  
interface classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are  
invalid if the direction of the rule for which this subrule is being  
created is 'out'.  
notingenlist  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
prototypecmp eq | neq  
| lt| leq | gt | geq | any  
IP Protocol type comparison type.  
Type: Create － Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
432  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
|inrange | exrange  
ipsrcaddrmask  
The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over  
the source ip address before checking against a value.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<ipsrcaddrmask-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
ipdstaddrmask  
The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied  
over the destination ip address before checking against a value.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<ipdstaddrmask-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
subruleprio low | high  
|asinrule  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as asinrule, subrule priority will be same as  
specified in the rule.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
transporthdr ethernet | This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which  
pppoe  
IP is being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP  
is being carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then  
IP is being carried in PPP header.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: ethernet  
tosfrom <tosfrom-val>  
Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if  
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a  
range of TOS values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or  
'exrange'(9). Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xff  
Default value: 0  
tosto <tosto-val>  
End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if  
'toscmp' is 'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of  
TOS values, if 'toscmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
433  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: 0 - 0xff  
Default value: 0xff  
tosmask  
The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS  
field value before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom'  
and 'tosto'.  
<tosmask-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0x01 - 0xff  
Default value: 0xff  
toscmp eq | neq | lt |  
leq| gt | geq | any |  
inrange| exrange  
TOS comparision type.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: any  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcipaddrfrom 172.25.1.125  
srcipaddrto 172.25.5.125 dstipaddrfrom 172.25.6.125 dstipaddrto 172.25.10.125  
prototypefrom 1 prototypeto 6 srcaddrcmp inrange dstaddrcmp inrange  
prototypecmp inrange ipsrcaddrmask 0xffffffff ipdstaddrmask 0xffffffff subruleprio  
high transportHdr ethernet tosfrom 0x01 tosto 0x06 tosmask 0xff toscmp inrange  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Start src ip addr : 172.25.1.125  
Start dest ip addr : 172.25.6.125  
Start IP prot type : 1  
End src ip addr  
: 172.25.5.125  
End dest ip addr : 172.25.10.125  
End IP prot type : 6  
Start TOS value  
Src ip addr comp  
: 0x01  
End TOS value  
Dest ip addr comp : inrange  
TOS comp type : inrange  
IP Dest Addr Mask : 0xffffffff  
: 0x06  
: inrange  
IP prot type comp : inrange  
IP Src Addr Mask : 0xffffffff  
Subrule Priority  
: high  
Transport Header : ethernet  
TOS Mask  
: 0xff  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
434  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule.  
Subrule Id  
End src ip addr  
End source IP address of the range of source IP addresses. This field and  
'srcipaddrfrom' specify a range of source IP addresses, if 'srcaddrcmp' is  
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This  
field is invalid if 'dstaddrcmp' is 'any', 'ingenlist' or 'notingenlist'. This field  
and 'dstipaddrto' specify a range of destination IP addresses, if  
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Start dest ip addr  
End dest ip addr  
Start IP prot type  
End IP prot type  
Start TOS value  
End TOS value  
Src ip addr comp  
End destination IP address of the range of destination IP addresses. This  
field and 'dstipaddrfrom' specifiy a range of destination IP addresses, if  
'dstaddrcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
Start IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types. This field is invalid  
if 'prototypecmp' is 'any'.This field and 'prototypeto' specify a range of IP  
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
End IP protocol type of the range of IP protocol types.This field and  
'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of IP protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is  
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid.  
Start TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if  
'TosCmpType' is 'any'(7).This field and TosTo field specify a range of TOS  
values, if 'TosCmpType' is either 'inrange'(8) or 'exrange'(9).  
End TOS value of the range of TOS values. This field is invalid if 'toscmp' is  
'any'.This field and 'tosfrom' field specify a range of TOS values, if 'toscmp'  
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Source IP addresss comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if source ip  
address present in interface classifier generic list. 'notingenlist' means  
check if source ip address not present in interface classifier generic list.  
'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction of the rule for which  
this subrule is being created is 'out'  
Dest ip addr comp  
Destination IP address comparison type. 'ingenlist' means check if  
destination ip address present in interface classifier generic list.  
'notingenlist' means check if destination ip address not present in interface  
classifier generic list. 'ingenlist' and 'notingenlist' are invalid if the direction  
of the rule for which this subrule is being created is 'out'.  
IP prot type comp  
TOS comp type  
IP Src Addr Mask  
IP Protocol type comparison type.  
TOS comparision type.  
The mask value for source ip address. The mask is applied over the source  
ip address before checking against a value.  
IP DSLAM  
435  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
IP Dest Addr Mask  
Subrule Priority  
The mask value for destination ip address. The mask is applied over the  
destination ip address before checking against a value.  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the  
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as  
asinrule, subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
This specifies the type of Transport header in the packet in which IP is  
being transported. If value of this field is ethernet (1), then IP is being  
carried in ethernet header and if it is pppoe (2) then then IP is being carried  
in PPP header.  
Transport Header  
TOS Mask  
The mask value for TOS field. The mask is applied over the TOS field value  
before checking against configured values in 'tosfrom' and 'tosto'.  
References:  
z
Generic filter commands  
5.13.33 Filter subrule PPP Commands  
5.13.33.1 Get Filter subrule ppp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule ppp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.33.2 Create filter subrule ppp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val>] [prototypeto <prototypeto-val>]  
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio  
low | high | asinrule]  
5.13.33.3 Delete filter subrule ppp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
IDL series User Guide  
436  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val>subruleid <subruleid-val>  
5.13.33.4 Modify filter subrule ppp  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule ppp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[prototypefrom <prototypefrom-val>] [prototypeto <prototypeto-val>]  
[prototypecmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange] [subruleprio  
low | high | asinrule]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val>  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<subruleid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp'  
is 'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of  
protocol types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'. Otherwise only this field is valid  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
prototypefrom  
<prototypefrom-val>  
Default value: 0  
IP DSLAM  
437  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
prototypeto  
End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.  
This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp  
protocol types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
<prototypeto-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 65535  
prototypecmp eq | neq Protocol comparison type  
| lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
subruleprio low | high | This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this  
asinrule  
priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory.  
In case priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will  
be same as specified in the rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule ppp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 prototypefrom 0x1 prototypeto 0x5  
prototypecmp inrange subruleprio high  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
: 0x5  
Start ProtoType  
: 0x1  
End ProtoType  
Protocol comparison : inrange  
Subrule Priority : high  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being  
created  
Subrule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Start ProtoType  
Start of range of PPP protocol types. Invalid if 'prototypecmp' is  
IDL series User Guide  
438  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
'any'. This field and the next field specify a range of protocol  
types, if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.  
Otherwise only this field is valid  
End ProtoType  
End PPP protocol type of the range of PPP protocol types.  
This field and 'prototypefrom' specifiy a range of ppp protocol  
types if 'prototypecmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Protocol comparison type  
Protocol comparison  
Subrule Priority  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority  
value, the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case  
priority is specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as  
specified in the rule.  
References:  
see generic filter related commands  
z
5.13.34 Filter subrule TCP Commands  
5.13.34.1 Get Filter subrule tcp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule tcp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.34.2 Create filter subrule tcp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val> ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val> ] [ dstportfrom  
<dstportfrom-val> ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val> ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |  
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any  
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet  
| pppoe ]  
IP DSLAM  
439  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.34.3 Delete filter subrule tcp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
5.13.34.4 Modify filter subrule tcp  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule tcp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val > ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val > ] [ dstportfrom  
<dstportfrom-val > ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val > ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |  
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any  
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet  
| pppoe ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val >  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1-65535  
subruleid <subruleid-val Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
>
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
srcportfrom  
Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is invalid  
if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'srcportto' specify a range of tcp  
source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<srcportfrom-val >  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
IDL series User Guide  
440  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
srcportto <srcportto-val  
End port number of the range of source port numbers. This field and  
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of TCP source port numbers if 'srcportcmp'  
is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
>
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 65535  
dstportfrom  
Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is  
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of  
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create --Optional  
<dstportfrom-val >  
Modify --Optional  
Default value: 0  
dstportto <dstportto-val  
End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field and  
'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if  
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'. Otherwise this field is invalid  
Type: Create -- Optional  
>
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 65535  
srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | Source port comparison type  
leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | Destination port comparison type  
leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
subruleprio low | high |  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the  
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as  
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
asinrule  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
transporthdr ethernet |  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the  
corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is 'Ethernet',  
then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is 'PPPoE', then  
the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
pppoe  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Ethernet  
IP DSLAM  
441  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$create filter subrule tcp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23  
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio  
high  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Start source port  
: 21  
End source port  
End destination port  
: 23  
Start destination port : 21  
: 23  
Source port comparison : inrange Destination port comparison : inrange  
Subrule Priority  
Transport Header  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
: high  
: Ethernet  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created.  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Subrule Id  
Start source port  
Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is  
invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range of  
tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End port number of the range of source port numbers. This field and  
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp source port numbers if 'srcportcmp' is  
either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End source port  
Start destination port  
End destination port  
Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is  
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of  
tcp destination port numbers if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field and  
'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of tcp destination port numbers if  
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid  
Source port  
Source port comparison type  
comparison  
Destination port  
comparison  
Destination port comparison type  
Subrule Priority  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value, the  
subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is specified as  
IDL series User Guide  
442  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which the  
corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is  
'Ethernet', then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is  
'PPPoE', then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.  
Transport Header  
References:  
z
Generic Filter Commands  
5.13.35 Filter subrule UDP Commands  
5.13.35.1 Get Filter subrule udp  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get filter subrule udp [ruleid <ruleid-val>] [subruleid <subruleid-val>]  
5.13.35.2 Create filter subrule udp  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
[srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val >] [srcportto <srcportto-val >] [ dstportfrom  
<dstportfrom-val > ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val > ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq |  
gt | geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any  
| inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet  
| pppoe ]  
5.13.35.3 Delete filter subrule udp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val > subruleid <subruleid-val >  
IP DSLAM  
443  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.13.35.4 Modify filter subrule udp  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify filter subrule udp ruleid <ruleid-val> subruleid <subruleid-val>  
[ srcportfrom <srcportfrom-val> ] [ srcportto <srcportto-val> ] [ dstportfrom  
<dstportfrom-val> ] [ dstportto <dstportto-val> ] [ srcportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt  
| geq | any | inrange | exrange ] [ dstportcmp eq | neq | lt | leq | gt | geq | any |  
inrange | exrange ] [ subruleprio low | high | asinrule] [ transporthdr ethernet |  
pppoe ] [ transporthdr ethernet | pppoe ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ruleid <ruleid-val >  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is being created  
Type: Create --Mandatory  
Delete --Mandatory Modify  
Mandatory Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1-65535  
subruleid  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Type: Create --Mandatory  
<subruleid-val >  
Delete – Mandatory  
Modify-- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4294967295  
srcportfrom  
Start port number of the range of source port numbers. This field is  
invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and 'srcportto' specifiy a range  
of udp source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
<srcportfrom-val >  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
srcportto  
End port number of the range of source port numbers.This field and  
'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers, if  
'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<srcportto-val >  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 65535  
dstportfrom  
Start port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field is  
invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of  
<dstportfrom-val >  
IDL series User Guide  
444  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
dstportto  
End port number of the range of destination port numbers. This field  
and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of udp destination port numbers, if  
'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<dstportto-val >  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 65535  
srcportcmp eq | neq | Source port comparison type  
lt | leq | gt | geq | any | Type: Create -- Optional  
inrange | exrange  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
dstportcmp eq | neq | Destination port comparison type  
lt | leq | gt | geq | any | Type: Create -- Optional  
inrange | exrange  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: any  
subruleprio low | high This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this priority value,  
|asinrule  
the subrule is created in fast or slow memory. In case priority is  
specified as 'asinrule', subrule priority will be same as specified in the  
rule.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: asinrule  
transporthdr ethernet This specifies the type of the transport header in the packet in which  
| pppoe  
the corresponding IP is being transported. If the value of this field is  
Ethernet, then the IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is  
PPPoE, then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP header.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Ethernet  
Example:  
$ create filter subrule udp ruleid 1 subruleid 2 srcportfrom 21 srcportto 23  
dstportfrom 21 dstportto 23 srcportcmp inrange dstportcmp inrange subruleprio  
high  
IP DSLAM  
445  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rule Id  
: 1  
Subrule Id  
: 2  
Start source port  
: 21  
End source port  
End destination port  
: 23  
Start destination port : 21  
: 23  
Source port comparison : inrange  
Destination port comparison : inrange  
Subrule Priority  
Transport Header  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
: high  
: ethernet  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Rule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter rule of which this sub rule is  
being created  
Subrule Id  
Unique identifier of a filter subrule  
Start source port  
Start port number of the range of source port numbers.  
This field is invalid if 'srcportcmp' is 'any'. This field and  
'srcportto' specifiy a range of udp source port numbers,  
if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or 'exrange'  
End port number of the range of source port numbers.  
This field and 'srcportfrom' specifiy a range of udp  
source port numbers, if 'srcportcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
End source port  
Start destination port  
Start port number of the range of destination port  
numbers. This field is invalid if 'dstportcmp' is 'any'.This  
field and 'dstportto' specifiy a range of udp destination  
port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either 'inrange' or  
'exrange'  
End destination port  
End port number of the range of destination port  
numbers. This field and 'dstportfrom' specifiy a range of  
udp destination port numbers, if 'dstportcmp' is either  
'inrange' or 'exrange'.Otherwise this field is invalid  
Source port  
Source port comparison type  
comparison  
Destination port  
comparison  
Destination port comparison type  
Subrule Priority  
This specifies the priority of the subrule. Based on this  
IDL series User Guide  
446  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
priority value, the subrule is created in fast or slow  
memory. In case priority is specified as 'asinrule',  
subrule priority will be same as specified in the rule.  
This specifies the type of the transport header in the  
packet in which the corresponding IP is being  
transported. If the value of this field is Ethernet, then the  
IP is being carried in the Ethernet header. If it is PPPoE,  
then the corresponding IP is being carried in the PPP  
header.  
Transport Header  
References:  
Generic Filter Commands  
z
5.14 IGMP Commands  
5.14.1 Igmpsnoop cfg info Commands  
5.14.1.1 Get igmpsnoop cfg info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get igmpsnoop cfg info  
5.14.1.2 Modify igmpsnoop cfg info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify igmpsnoop cfg info [ queryinterval <queryinterval-val> ] [ anxioustimer  
<anxioustimer-val> ] [ v1hosttimer <v1hosttimer-val> ] [ lastmembqryinterval  
<lastmembqryinterval-val> ] [ robustness <robustness-val> ] [ status Enable |  
Disable ] [ reportsup Enable | Disable ] [ qryrespinterval <qryrespinterval-val> ]  
[ proxyreportstatus Enable | Disable ] [ versionmask v1 | v2 | v3 ]  
[ startupqryinterval <startupqryinterval-val> ] [ startupqrycount  
<startupqrycount-val> ] [ lastmemberqrycount <lastmemberqrycount-val> ]  
[ unsolicrprtinterval <unsolicrprtinterval-val> ]  
IP DSLAM  
447  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
queryinterval  
This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when  
no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value of  
this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the  
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an  
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are  
received for it is approximately (((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness)  
+ Query Response Time received in Last Query)  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<queryinterval-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 0xff  
anxioustimer  
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before  
which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership  
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first  
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports  
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost  
reports. The unit is seconds.  
<anxioustimer-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
v1hosttimer  
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for  
which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are  
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this  
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
<v1hosttimer-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 260  
lastmembqryinterval  
This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is  
<lastmembqryinterval-v the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries  
al>  
sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the  
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. The  
value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency  
of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to detect  
the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this parameter  
is one-tenth of second.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 – 255  
robustness  
This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a  
subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]  
packet losses.  
<robustness-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 2 - 255  
IDL series User Guide  
448  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
status Enable | Disable This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be  
enabled in the system.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
reportsup Enable |  
Disable  
Report Suppression is enabled or not.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
qryrespinterval  
<qryrespinterval-val>  
This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled  
in General query that will be initiated from Columbia  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xff  
proxyreportstatus  
This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be supported  
at the global level.  
Enable | Disable  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
versionmask v1 | v2 |  
This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently  
supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP  
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
v3  
startupqryinterval  
<startupqryinterval-val  
>
This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries  
sent on receiving Port Up topology change trigger.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xff  
startupqrycount  
This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on  
receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the  
StartupQryInterval  
<startupqrycount-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xff  
lastmemberqrycount  
<lastmemberqrycount-  
val>  
This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or  
Group-and-Source-specific Queries sent before assuming there  
are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xff  
unsolicrprtinterval  
<unsolicrprtinterval-val  
>
This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited  
membership reports of a group sent for robustness no of  
times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is  
enabled.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xff  
Example:  
$ get igmpsnoop cfg info  
IP DSLAM  
449  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Query Interval  
StartUp Query Interval  
Anxious Timer  
: 12  
: 10  
Query Response Interval : 10  
UnSolicRprtInterval  
V1 Host Timer  
: 10  
: 125  
: 130  
: 2  
Last Member Query Interval : 125  
Robustness Variable  
Igmp Snoop Status  
Version Mask  
: Enable  
: v3  
Report Suppression Status : Enable  
Proxy Report Status  
: Enable  
: 100  
StartUp QryCount  
: 2  
Last Member QryCount  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Query Interval  
This parameter is used to calculate the entry age out timer, when  
no reports or queries are received on the entry. When the value  
of this parameter multiplied by 10, it should be greater than the  
Query Interval configured at the router. The time for which an  
entry created at Igmpsnoop module exists, if no messages are  
received for it is approximately  
(((QueryInterval*10)*Robustness) + Query Response Time  
received in Last Query)  
Query Response  
Interval  
This parameter is used to derive Max Response Code to be filled  
in General query that will be initiated from Columbia  
This parameter specifies the interval between General Queries  
sent on receiving Port Up topology change trigger.  
This parameter specifies the interval between unsolicited  
membership reports of a group sent for robustness no of  
times.This field is applicable only when proxy reporting is  
enabled.  
StartUp Query Interval  
UnSolicRprtInterval  
Anxious Timer  
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds) before  
which the IgmpSnoop module will forward all IGMP membership  
reports received. It is started once, whenever the first  
membership report is received for a group, to ensure that reports  
are forwarded for a sufficiently long time, to take care of any lost  
reports. The unit is seconds.  
V1 Host Timer  
This parameter specifies the maximum time (in seconds), for  
which the IgmpSnooping module can assume that there are  
Version 1 group members present, for the group for which this  
timer is running. The unit of this parameter is seconds.  
This parameter specifies the Last Member Query Interval that is  
the Max Response Time inserted into Group-Specific Queries  
Last Member Query  
Interval  
IDL series User Guide  
450  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
sent in response to Leave Group messages, and is also the  
amount of time between Group-Specific Query messages. The  
value of this parameter may be tuned to modify the leave latency  
of the network. A reduced value results in reduced time to  
detect the loss of the last member of a group. The unit of this  
parameter is one-tenth of second.  
Robustness Variable  
This parameter allows tuning for the expected packet loss on a  
subnet. The IgmpSnooping module is robust to [RobustnessVar]  
packet losses.  
Igmp Snoop Status  
Version Mask  
This parameter specifies whether Igmp Snooping needs to be  
enabled in the system.  
This parameter controls which versions of IGMP are currently  
supported at Columbia. Depending on the version mask, IGMP  
messages of unsupported version, will be dropped  
Report Suppression is enabled or not.  
Report Suppression  
Status  
Proxy Report Status  
This parameter controls whether proxy reporting will be  
supported at the global level.  
StartUp QryCount  
This parameter specifies the number of General Queries sent on  
receiving Port Up topology change trigger, separated by the  
StartupQryInterval  
Last Member QryCount This parameter specifies the number of Group-specific or  
Group-and-Source-specific Queries sent before assuming there  
are no listener for this Group or Group-Source pair.  
5.14.2 Igmpsnoop mvlan config Commands  
5.14.2.1 Get igmpsnoop mvlan config  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val>] [srcipaddr  
<srcipaddr-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val> | none]  
IP DSLAM  
451  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.14.2.2 Create igmpsnoop mvlan config  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val> srcipaddr srcipaddr  
vlanid <vlanid-val> | none [mcastvlanstag <mcastvlanstag-val> | none]  
[mcastvlanctag <mcastvlanctag-val> | invlan | none] [portlist <portlist-val> |  
none]  
5.14.2.3 Delete igmpsnoop mvlan config  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete igmpsnoop mvlan config [grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val>] [srcipaddr  
<srcipaddr-val>] [vlanid <vlanid-val> | none]  
5.14.2.4 Modify igmpsnoop mvlan config  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr <grpipaddr-val> srcipaddr  
<srcipaddr-val> vlanid <vlanid-val> | none [mcastvlanstag <mcastvlanstag-val> |  
none] [mcastvlanctag <mcastvlanctag-val> | invlan | none] [portlist <portlist-val>  
| none]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
grpipaddr  
This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address  
for a multicast stream. The source address and destination  
group address together define a multicast stream. In case of  
value 0, this parameter is ignored while determining  
Multicast Vlan  
<grpipaddr-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
452  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
srcipaddr  
This parameter specifies the source IP address of the  
Multicast Server. The source address and destination group  
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value  
0, this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast  
Vlan.  
<srcipaddr-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
vlanid <vlanid-val> |  
This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet  
received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP  
packet was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is  
ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
none  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
Additional Values: 0  
mcastvlanstag  
<mcastvlanstag-val> |  
none  
This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used  
in case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter  
is not applicable.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
Additional Values: 0  
mcastvlanctag  
<mcastvlanctag-val> |  
invlan | none  
This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used.  
Two special values of this parameter are supported in  
stacked mode: One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave  
shall be forwarded to querier with the C tag with which it was  
received from the subscriber port and the S tag specified in  
multicast Vlan's definition One value (0) to signify that  
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S tag  
specified in multicast Vlan's definition and no C tag. Other  
Value shall signify that, report/leave shall be forwarded to  
querier with S and C tag specified in multicast Vlan's  
definition.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 -4095  
Additional Values: 0, 4097  
IP DSLAM  
453  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
portlist <portlist-val> |  
This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given  
combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId)  
maps to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)  
Type: Create -- Optional  
none  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create igmpsnoop mvlan config grpipaddr 224.0.0.7 srcipaddr 12.23.34.45 vlanid  
6 mcastvlanstag 5 mcastvlanctag 5 portlist 5 6 10  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Grp IPAddress : 224.0.0.7  
Src IPAddres  
VLAN Index  
: 12.23.34.45  
: 6  
McastVlan STag : 5  
McastVlan CTag : 5  
PortList  
: 5 6 10  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Grp IPAddress  
This parameter specifies the Destination Group IP address for a  
multicast stream. The source address and destination group  
address together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0,  
this parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan  
This parameter specifies the source IP address of the Multicast  
Server. The source address and destination group address  
together define a multicast stream. In case of value 0, this  
parameter is ignored while determining Multicast Vlan.  
This parameter specifies the Dot1q tag of an IGMP packet  
received. This will be PVID in case an untagged IGMP packet  
was received. In case of value 0, this parameter is ignored while  
determining Multicast Vlan.  
Src IPAddres  
VLAN Index  
McastVlan STag  
This parameter specifies the Multicast SVlanId to be used in  
case of stacked mode. In the native mode, this parameter is not  
IDL series User Guide  
454  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
applicable.  
McastVlan CTag  
This parameter specifies the Multicast CVlanId to be used. Two  
special values of this parameter are supported in stacked mode:  
One value (4097) to signify that repot/leave shall be forwarded to  
querier with the C tag with which it was received from the  
subscriber port and the S tag specified in multicast Vlan's  
definition One value (0) to signify that report/leave shall be  
forwarded to querier with S tag specified in multicast Vlan's  
definition and no C tag. Other Value shall signify that,  
report/leave shall be forwarded to querier with S and C tag  
specified in multicast Vlan's definition.  
PortList  
This parameter specifies the list of ports on which a given  
combination of (Group Address, Source Address, VlanId) maps  
to a specified multicast vlan (STag, CTag)  
5.14.3 Igmpsnoop port info Commands  
5.14.3.1 Get igmpsnoop port info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get igmpsnoop port info [portid <portid-val >]  
5.14.3.2 Modify igmpsnoop port info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid portid [ status Enable | Disable ]  
[ leavemode Normal | Fast | FastNormal ] [ pktpriority <pktpriority-val> | none ]  
[ maxgrpallowed <maxgrpallowed-val> ] [ querierstatus Enable | Disable ]  
[ mcastvlanstatus Enable | Disable ] [ nomatchaction Drop |  
Transparentlyforward | Learn ]  
IP DSLAM  
455  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping  
needs to be enabled or disabled.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
status Enable | Disable  
This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be  
enabled on the port.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
leavemode Normal | Fast This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message  
| FastNormal  
processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the  
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the  
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered.  
If the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from  
that multicast group on Leave message reception and then the  
Leave message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast'  
for a port only if there is one host behind the port. This is  
because if there are multiple hosts behind the port then it will  
lead to traffic disruption for other hosts who might still be  
listening to that multicast group. If the mode is set to  
'FastNormal', the Leave message is forwarded and the Leave  
processing is triggered immediately without waiting for any  
trigger from the Querier. The 'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the  
delay (equal to the time taken for Leave message to reach router  
and Querier processing time for it and the time taken for Query  
to reach IGMP Snoop module) in Leave processing.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: op module) in Leave processing.  
pktpriority  
This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the  
Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need  
to be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came  
tagged, priority that came in the tagged frame will not be  
changed. The configured priority will also be used for choice of  
traffic class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is  
tagged . In case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC,  
this will also be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to  
be sent. There is an additional support of invalid value for egress  
priority in IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be  
forced on egress frame for this port.  
<pktpriority-val> | none  
IDL series User Guide  
456  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
maxgrpallowed  
This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that  
can be received by this port  
<maxgrpallowed-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 256  
querierstatus Enable |  
This parameter controls whether a port can become querier  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Disable  
mcastvlanstatus Enable | This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a  
Disable  
port  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
nomatchaction Drop |  
Transparentlyforward |  
Learn  
This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast  
vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option  
is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently  
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get igmpsnoop port info portid 6  
Output:  
Port Index  
: 6  
Port Igmp Snoop Status  
: Enable  
Leave Mode  
: Normal  
IGMP PacketsPrio:2MaxGroupAllowed:2'  
Querier Status : Enable  
McastVlan Status : Enable  
No McastVlan Match Action : Learn  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Port Index  
This parameter specifies a bridge port for which IGMP Snooping  
needs to be enabled or disabled.  
Port Igmp Snoop  
Status  
This parameter specifies whether IGMP Snooping is to be enabled  
on the port.  
Leave Mode  
This parameter specifies the Igmp Snooping Leave message  
processing mode for the port. If the mode is set to 'Normal', the  
Leave message is forwarded to the Querier. Then, based on the  
Query received from Querier, the Leave processing is triggered. If  
the mode is set to 'Fast', the port is immediately deleted from that  
multicast group on Leave message reception and then the Leave  
message is forwarded. The mode should be set to 'Fast' for a port  
IP DSLAM  
457  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
only if there is one host behind the port. This is because if there  
are multiple hosts behind the port then it will lead to traffic  
disruption for other hosts who might still be listening to that  
multicast group. If the mode is set to 'FastNormal', the Leave  
message is forwarded and the Leave processing is triggered  
immediately without waiting for any trigger from the Querier. The  
'FastNormal' mode, thus, saves the delay (equal to the time taken  
for Leave message to reach router and Querier processing time  
for it and the time taken for Query to reach IGMP Snoop module)  
in Leave processing.  
IGMP PacketsPrio'  
This parameter specifies the Egress Priority to be set in case the  
Ethernet frames carrying IGMP packets sent over this port need to  
be tagged by the control plane. In case the frame came tagged,  
priority that came in the tagged frame will not be changed. The  
configured priority will also be used for choice of traffic  
class/Queue on outgoing interface whether the frame is tagged . In  
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also  
be used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.  
There is an additional support of invalid value for egress priority in  
IGMP port info to indicate that the priority is not to be forced on  
egress frame for this port.  
MaxGroupAllowed  
This parameter controls the no. of simultaneous channels that can  
be received by this port  
Querier Status  
This parameter controls whether a port can become querier  
This parameter controls the status of Multicast Vlan option on a  
port  
McastVlan Status  
No McastVlan Match  
Action  
This parameter specifies the action to be taken when multicast  
vlan can not be determined for a port where multicast vlan option  
is enabled Possible action values will be :Drop, Transparently  
forward, and Learn based on ingress vlan  
Caution:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the  
PPPoE interface.  
IDL series User Guide  
458  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.14.4 Igmpsnoop port stats Commands  
5.14.4.1 Get igmpsnoop port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid <vlanid-val>] [mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val>]  
[portid <portid-val>]  
5.14.4.2 Reset igmpsnoop port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset igmpsnoop port stats [vlanid vlanid] mcastaddr <mcastaddr-val> portid  
<portid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan  
for multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC  
address is shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and  
can be passed as zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices  
supporting "Independent Vlan for multicast" capability, each vlan  
can have its own information for a multicast MAC address.  
Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter and a valid value of  
vlanid must be passed. For the case when the attribute  
"McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value  
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for  
VLAN with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in  
case of Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked  
Vlan Mode.  
vlanid <vlanid-val >  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1-4095  
IP DSLAM  
459  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mcastaddr  
A multicast MAC Address, learned through Igmp Snooping,  
within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the entry,  
for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of  
accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF  
Type: Reset － Optional  
<mcastaddr-val >  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 00:30:4F:00:00:00 - 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF  
A Bridge Port belonging to the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex) and Group  
(igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the IgmpSnooping  
statistics are desired.  
portid <portid>  
Type: Reset --Optional  
Get –Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 386  
Example:  
$ get igmpsnoop port stats vlanid 6 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:0a:00:01 portid 6  
Output:  
VLAN Index  
: 6  
Mcast Group Address : 00:30:4f:0a:00:01  
Port Index  
: 6  
: 100  
: Include  
Query Received  
Filter Mode  
Report Received : 200  
Include SrcList  
Exclude SrcList  
: 10.12.14.16 12.10.45.76  
: 10.12.34.56 34.54.76.87  
Output field  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Index  
This parameter specifies the VlanId to uniquely identify the VlanId of the  
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. In devices  
supporting "Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the information for a  
multicast MAC address is shared across vlans. Therefore, VlanId is an  
optional parameter. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan for  
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a  
multicast MAC address. Hence VlanId is a mandatory parameter in all  
the commands other than the get command. For no Vlan case, VlanId is  
not required.  
Mcast Group Address  
This parameter specifies a multicast MAC address, learnt through Igmp  
Snooping, within the Vlan (igmpVlanIndex), to uniquely identify the  
entry, for which the IgmpSnooping statistics are desired. The range of  
IDL series User Guide  
460  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
accepted values is 00:30:4F:00:00:00 to 00:30:4F:7F:FF:FF.  
This parameter specifies a bridge port belonging to the Vlan  
(igmpVlanIndex) and Group (igmpsnoopMcastAddress), for which the  
IgmpSnooping statistics are desired.  
Port Index  
Query Received  
Report Received  
Filter Mode  
This parameter specifies thenumber of Igmp queries received on the  
port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.  
This parameter specifies thenumber of Membership reports received on  
the port belonging to a particular multicast group and Vlan.  
This parameter specifies the current filter mode on a port for a given  
group.  
Include SrcList  
This parameter specifies the Include Source list, which is the list of  
sources to be included in case of Include filter mode and the list of  
conflicting sources in case of exclude mode of the port for a given group  
This parameter specifies the Exclude Source list, which is the list of  
sources to be excluded in case of exclude filter mode of the port for a  
given group  
Exclude SrcList  
Caution:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the  
PPPoE interface.  
5.14.5 Igmpsnoop querier info Commands  
5.14.5.1 Get igmpsnoop querier info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get igmpsnoop querier info [vlanid <vlanid-val >] [portid <portid-val>]  
5.14.5.2 Create igmpsnoop querier info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid <vlanid-val > portid <portid-val >  
IP DSLAM  
461  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.14.5.3 Delete igmpsnoop querier info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete igmpsnoop querier info vlanid <vlanid-val > portid <portid>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
vlanid <vlanid-val>  
The VLAN id for this VLAN. In devices supporting "Shared Vlan for  
multicast" capability, the information for a multicast MAC address is  
shared across VLANS. Hence, vlanid is optional and can be passed as  
zero or a valid vlanid value. In devices supporting "Independent Vlan  
for multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own information for a  
multicast MAC address. Hence, VLAN id is a mandatory parameter  
and a valid value of vlanid must be passed. For the case when the  
attribute "McastDeviceCapabilities" of MO "sysSizingTable" has value  
"none", VLAN id is not required. This feature is not supported for VLAN  
with vlanid as 4097.VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of  
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1-4095  
portid <portid-val>  
A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan (dot1qVlanIndex), on which the  
Querier exists.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 65535  
Example:  
$ create igmpsnoop querier info vlanid 6 portid 6  
IDL series User Guide  
462  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
VLAN Index  
: 6  
Port Index : 6  
Querier Port Status : Mgmt  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Index  
VlanId to uniquely identify the vlanid of the entry  
for which the IgmpSnooping Querier is  
configured/ learned. In devices supporting  
"Shared Vlan for multicast" capability, the  
information for a Querier port is shared across  
vlans. Hence vlan id is an optional parameter. In  
devices supporting "Independent Vlan for  
multicast" capability, each vlan can have its own  
information for a Querier port. Hence vlanid is a  
mandatory parameter in all the commands other  
than - get. For No Vlan case, vlan id is not  
required. This Feature is not supported for VLAN  
with vlanid as 4097.  
Port Index  
A Bridge Port, belonging to the Vlan  
(dot1qVlanIndex), on which the Querier exists.  
Specifies whether Querier Port has been learned  
dynamically or configured by the user.  
Querier Port Status  
Caution:  
z
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over the  
PPPoE interface.  
IP DSLAM  
463  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.15 Interface Commands  
5.15.1 Interface Commands  
5.15.1.1 Get interface stats  
Description:  
Use this command to view statistics for one interface or all the interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
get interface stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Index of the interface having one to one mapping with  
IfTable. Only Ethernet, EOA, Aggregator, HDLC,  
PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM, ATM VC Aggregation  
and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset  
operation.  
Ifname  
<interface-name>  
Type : Optional  
Valid values: aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1,atm-*, eoa-*, dsl-*,  
dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*, ehdlc-*, pppoe-*, pppr-*, vdsl-*,  
ipoe-*, abond-* , vcaggr-*  
Example:  
$ get interface stats ifname eth-0  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface  
: eth-0  
: ETHERNET  
Description  
Mtu  
: eth-0  
:
Type  
: 1500  
Bandwidth  
: 100000000  
Phy Adddr  
00:BB:CC:DD:EE:F1  
Last Change(sec)  
Admin Status  
In Octets  
: 219  
: Up  
Unknown Prot Pkts : 0  
Operational Status : Up  
: 396312  
: 0  
Out Octets  
Out Discards  
Out Errors  
: 168929  
: 0  
: 0  
: 2518  
In Discards  
In Errors  
: 0  
In Ucast Pkts  
: 2291  
Out Ucast Pkts  
IDL series User Guide  
464  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In Mcast Pkts  
In Bcast Pkts  
: 428  
Out Mcast Pkts  
Out Bcast Pkts  
Promiscous Mode  
: 0  
: 0  
: 1456  
LinkUpDnTrapEnable : Enable  
Connector Present : True  
: True  
CounterDiscontTime : 0  
HC In Octets  
HC OutOctets  
: 0x000060c18  
: 0x0000293e1  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
Index of the interface having one to one mapping with IfTable. Only Ethernet,  
EOA , Aggregator, HDLC, PPPOE, IPOE, ABOND, ATM , ATM VC  
Aggregation and ATM VC interface index are supported for reset operation.  
This is general information about the interface  
Description  
Type  
The type of interface, distinguished according the physical/link/network  
protocol, immediately below the IP layer. It may be: ATM, ETHERNET, AAL5,  
EOA, DSL, FAST, INTERLEAVED, AGGR. EHDLC, PPP, LOOPBACK,  
IPOA, PPPR, PPPOE, SHDSL, ABOND, IPOE, VCAGGR, VDSL, USB. .  
The size (in bytes) of the largest packet, which can be sent/received on this  
interface in octets.  
Mtu  
Bandwidth  
The current bandwidth of the interface, in bps.  
Phy Addr  
Interface's address, at its protocol sublayer.  
Admin Status  
Operational Status  
This is the desired state of the interface. It may be: Up, Down.  
The current operational state of the interface. If ifAdminStatus is disable (2),  
then ifOperStatus should be disable (2). If ifAdminStatus is changed to enable  
(1), then ifOperStatus should change to enable (1), if the interface is ready to  
transmit and receive network traffic. Interface will have the OperStatus value  
as dormant (5) if the 'configstatus' of the entry is 'config' and the interface is  
waiting for a packet to be sensed to get activated.  
Last Change  
Unknown Prot Pkts  
In Octets  
Value of System UpTime (in seconds) at the time the interface entered its  
current operational state.  
The number of packets received via the interface, which were discarded  
because of an unknown or unsupported protocol.  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including the framing  
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC in  
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing  
characters. For Ethernet interfaces, this will have the lower 32 bits of HC Out  
octets. Valid for atm-*, eoa-*, aal5-*, eth-0, eth-1, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*.  
The number of inbound packets, which were discarded, though no errors  
were detected.  
Out Octets  
In Discards  
IP DSLAM  
465  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Out Discards  
In Errors  
The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded even though there  
were no errors.  
The number of inbound packets, which were not delivered to upper layers  
because of errors.  
Out Errors  
The number of outbound packets chosen to be discarded because there were  
errors.  
In Ucast Pkts  
The number of unicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.  
The total number of packets requested to be sent to unicast addresses, by  
upper layer protocols.  
Out Ucast Pkts  
HC In Octets  
The total number of octets received on the interface, including framing  
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifInOctets. Discontinuities in the  
value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management system,  
and at other times, as indicated by the value of ifCounterDiscontinuityTime.  
Valid for eth-*.  
HC OutOctets  
The total number of octets transmitted out of the interface, including framing  
characters. This object is a 64-bit version of ifOutOctets. Discontinuities in  
the value of this counter can occur at re-initialization of the management  
system, and at other times, as indicated by the value of  
ifCounterDiscontinuityTime. Valid for eth-*.  
In Mcast Pkts  
The number of multicast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.  
Out Mcast Pkts  
The total number of packets requested to be sent to multicast addresses, by  
upper layer protocols.  
In Bcast Pkts  
The number of broadcast packets delivered to a higher layer protocol.  
Out Bcast Pkts  
The total number of packets requested to be sent to broadcast addresses, by  
upper layer protocols.  
LinkUpDnTrapEnable  
Promiscous Mode  
Indicates whether linkUp/ linkDown traps should be generated for this  
interface.  
This object has a value of false if this interface only accepts packets/frames  
that are addressed to this station. This object has a value of true when the  
station accepts all packets/frames transmitted on the media. The value true is  
legal only for Ethernet interfaces. The value of PromiscuousMode does not  
affect the reception of broadcast and multicast packets/frames by the  
interface.  
Connector Present  
CounterDiscontTime  
This indicates whether the interface sublayer has a physical connector or not.  
This is true only for physical Ethernet interfaces.  
The value of sysUpTime on the most recent occasion, at which any one or  
more of this interface's counters suffered a discontinuity.  
IDL series User Guide  
466  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.15.1.2 Reset interface stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset the statistics of Ethernet, EoA, ATM, AAL5, DSL, DSLF,  
DSLI, Aggr and EHDLC interfaces.  
Command Syntax:  
reset interface stats ifname<interface-name>  
5.15.1.3 Get interface config  
Description:  
Use this command to view Interface Configuration.  
Command Syntax:  
get interface config ifname <interface-name>  
5.15.1.4 Modify interface config  
Description:  
Use this command to modify interface configuration.  
Command Syntax:  
modify interface config ifname <interface-name> [trap enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Ifname  
Interface name, for which configuration is to be modified or viewed.  
<interface-name>  
Type: Get  
-Optional Modify - Mandatory  
Valid values: eth-*,atm-*,aal5-*, eoa-*, dsl-*, dslf-*, dsli-*, aggr-*,  
ehdlc-*.  
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps should be generated for  
this interface.  
trap enable|disable  
Type: Modify – Optional  
Valid values : enable or disable  
Example:  
$ get interface Config  
IP DSLAM  
467  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
IfName LinkUp/DnTrap  
---------------------  
aal5-0 Enable  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
IfName  
Interface name, for which configuration is to be viewed.  
Indicates whether linkUp/linkDown traps shall be  
generated for this interface.  
LinkUp/DnTrap  
Caution:  
z
Reset of ATM VC interface stats also result in atm vc stat reset for the  
interface and reset of Ethernet interface stats also result in dot3stats reset for the  
ethernet interface.  
References  
z
z
z
z
ATM Interface commands  
Ethernet commands  
EoA commands  
DSL commands  
IDL series User Guide  
468  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.16 IP Commands  
5.16.1 IP Net to Media Table Commands  
5.16.1.1 Get arp  
Description:  
Use this command to display either the full ARP table or a single entry.  
Command Syntax:  
get arp [rid <rid-val>] [ip <ip-address>]  
5.16.1.2 Create arp  
Description:  
Use this command to create a static entry in the ARP Table.  
Command Syntax:  
create arp [rid <rid-val>] ip <ip-address> macaddr <mac-address>  
5.16.1.3 Delete arp  
Description:  
Use this command to delete an entry from the ARP table.  
Command Syntax:  
delete arp [rid <rid-val>] ip <ip-address>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rid <rid-val>  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This  
database contains information about the routes in the  
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route  
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow  
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,  
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are  
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines  
separate routes in context of itself. . If VlanId <X> and  
RID <X> have been created and the routing database is  
configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define  
flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other  
mode for the database is SRD (Shared Routing  
IP DSLAM  
469  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and  
all flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly  
created and no more than one RID can be created in the  
system in this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall  
map to this RID for routing.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
ip <ip-address>  
IP address corresponding to the media-dependent  
physical address.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.255  
macaddr <mac-address> The media-dependent physical address  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 0:0:0:0:0:1 - ff:ff:ff:ff:ff:fe  
Example:  
$ create arp rid 1 ip 192.168.161.11 macaddr 00:11:22:33:44:55  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
RID  
: 1  
Ifname  
: -  
Type  
: static  
Mac Address : 00:11:22:33:44:55  
Ip Address. : 192.168.161.11  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
RID  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This  
database contains information about the routes in the  
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related  
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the  
VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent  
Routing Database) where there are more than one RIDs in  
IDL series User Guide  
470  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the system and each RID defines separate routes in context  
of itself. . If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and  
the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID  
<X> shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>.  
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing  
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all  
flows map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created  
and no more than one RID can be created in the system in  
this mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID  
for routing.  
Ifname  
This specifies the physical interface for the media. It  
indicates the interface over which the IP address for which  
the IP Net to media mapping has been created can be  
reached.  
Ip Address.  
Type  
IP address corresponding to the media-dependent physical  
address.  
This defines the type of mapping in use. The value Invalid  
has the effect that this entry is not used. It may be: Static,  
Dynamic, Other  
Mac Address  
The media-dependent physical address  
Cautions:  
z The specified interface should pre-exist. Please refer to the create ethernetintf  
command.  
References:  
z delete arp command  
z get arp command  
z create ethernet intf command  
z ip route related commands  
5.16.2 IP Route Commands  
5.16.2.1 Get ip route  
Description:Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask <net-mask>  
IP DSLAM  
471  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.16.2.2 Create up route  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask mask <net-mask>  
gwyip <gwy-ip-address> [ifname <interface-name> | anywan] [proxyarpstatus  
enable | disable]  
5.16.2.3 Delete ip route  
Description:  
Use this command to create a routing table entry.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ip route [rid <rid-val>] ip <dest-ip-address> mask mask <net-mask>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rid <rid-val>  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This  
database contains information about the routes in the system.  
Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related information  
for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The  
database can be of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing  
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system  
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If  
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and the routing  
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall  
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other  
mode for the database is SRD ( Shared Routing Database)  
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to  
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than  
one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for  
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Delete － Optional  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
ip <dest-ip-address>  
Destination IP address of this route.  
IDL series User Guide  
472  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0  
mask<net-mask>  
Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination  
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest  
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream  
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*).  
The mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The  
creation of default route in upstream (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as  
GS_CFG_ANY_WAN) can have the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 255.255.255.0  
gwyip  
The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute  
routes can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE  
interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such  
cases has to be same as the destination IP address  
(gsvIpRouteDest) specified.  
<gwy-ip-address>  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 0.0.0.0 - 223.255.255.0  
ifname  
The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface  
through which the next hop of this route should be reached. If  
IpRouteRid is not 0, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be  
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command.  
The ifname value can be either ANYWAN (0xffffffff) or ifindex of  
any of the ipoe interface (ipoe-*).  
<interface-name> |  
anywan  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
proxyarpstatus enable This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute  
|disable  
table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will  
not be specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute  
Table.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: disable  
IP DSLAM  
473  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ create ip route rid 0 ip 192.168.161.12 mask 255.255.0.0 gwyip 172.26.6.100  
ifname eth-0 routetype DIR ProxyArpStatus disable configstatus Auto  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Rid  
: 0  
Destination : 192.168.161.12  
Gateway : 172.26.6.100  
Route Type : DIR  
Age : 0  
Net Mask  
Ifname  
: 255.255.0.0  
: eth-0  
: LCL  
Route Orig  
ProxyArpStatus : disable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Rid  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database  
contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID  
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that flow.  
The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The database can be  
of 2 types, IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are  
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate  
routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been  
created and the routing database is configured for IRD, than routes  
in RID <X> shall define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>.  
The other mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing  
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and all flows  
map to this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more  
than one RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for  
all created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.  
Destination  
Net Mask  
Destination IP address of this route.  
Indicates the mask to be logical-ANDed with the destination  
address before being compared to the value in the ipRouteDest  
field. Only absolute routes can be added in the downstream  
direction for the IPOE interfaces (gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The  
mask for all such routes has to be 255.255.255.255. The creation of  
default route in upstreamcan has the mask as 0.0.0.0 only.  
The IP address of the next hop of this route. Only absolute routes  
Gateway  
IDL series User Guide  
474  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
can be added in the downstream direction for the IPOE interfaces  
(gsvIpRouteIfIndex as ipoe-*). The next hop in such cases has to be  
same as the destination IP address (gsvIpRouteDest) specified.  
The index value which uniquely identifies the local interface through  
which the next hop of this route should be reached. If IpRouteRid is  
not GS_CFG_MGMT_RID, than u32IpRouteIfIndex shall be  
mandatory to be specified in the "create ip route" command. The  
ifname value can be either ANYWAN or ifindex of any of the ipoe  
interface (ipoe-*).  
Ifname  
Route Type  
Route Orig  
The type of route. It may be: dir (for Direct) or ind (for Indirect).  
The routing mechanism, through which this route was learned. It  
may be: NET (for Network Management), LCL (for Local), RIP,  
ICMP,DYI (Dynamic through Interface creation).  
Age  
The number of seconds since this route was last updated or  
otherwise determined to be correct.  
ProxyArpStatus  
This specifies if the Proxy ARP has to be done for this iproute  
table entry.If IpRouteRid value is 0, then ProxyArpStatus will not be  
specified while creating/modifying an entry in IpRoute Table.  
References:  
z get ip route command  
z delete ip route command  
z arp related commands.  
5.16.3 Ipoa intf Commands  
5.16.3.1 Get ipoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ipoa intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.16.3.2 Create ipoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IP DSLAM  
475  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create ipoa intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> [configstatus  
Normal | Config] [enable|disable]  
5.16.3.3 Delete ipoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ipoa intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.16.3.4 Modify ipoa intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ipoa intf ifname <interface-name> [enable|disable]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The Ipoa Interface  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 -575  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This specifies the name of the lower AAL5 interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 0 - 574  
configstatus Normal  
|Config  
This mode describes the configuration status for this  
interface. If the "config" bit is set then this interface  
shall be created but will have a dormant status. Only  
after the receipt of an Ipoa packet from CPE side  
this interface shall become active. The "In-Use" and  
"Not-In-Use" bits are read only bits. The  
"Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is dormant and  
"In-Use" indicates that the entry is activated.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: NormalEntry  
IDL series User Guide  
476  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
enable|disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: enable or disable  
Example:  
$ create ipoa intf ifname Ipoa-0 lowif aal5-0 configstatus Normal enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ifname  
Config Status : Normal  
Oper Status : Up  
: Ipoa-0  
Low IfName : aal5-0  
Admin Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The Ipoa Interface  
Low IfName  
This specifies the name of the lower AAL5  
interface.  
Config Status  
This mode describes the configuration status for  
this interface. If the "config" bit is set then this  
interface shall be created but will have a dormant  
status. Only after the receipt of an Ipoa packet  
from CPE side this interface shall become active.  
The "In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read only  
bits. The "Not-In-Use" indicates that the entry is  
dormant and "In-Use" indicates that the entry is  
activated.  
Admin Status  
Oper Status  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Operational status of the interface.  
IP DSLAM  
477  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.16.4 Ipoe intf Commands  
5.16.4.1 Get ipoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ipoe intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.16.4.2 Create ipoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create ipoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> macaddrprof  
<macaddrprof-val> [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl  
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]  
5.16.4.3 Delete ipoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ipoe intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.16.4.4 Modify ipoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ipoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif-val> macaddrprof  
<macaddrprof-val> [ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3] [inactivitytmrintrvl  
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>] [routingstatus enable | disable] [enable | disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
478  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The IPOE Tunneling Interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0-575  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the ifindex  
of the IPoA interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 0 － 575  
macaddrprof  
Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to this  
IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the  
MacAddrProfileTable.  
macaddrprof  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -8  
ethpkttype Type2 |  
This specifies the type of the Packet.  
Type: Create － Optional  
802_3  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: Type2  
inactivitytmrintrvl  
This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which  
interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data activity  
on this interface during this interval. This is used only when  
the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for  
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer is  
not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive interface is  
a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is sensed on Atm  
Vc Interface on which this interface is created  
Type: Create － Optional  
inactivitytmrintrvl  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0- 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0  
routingstatus enable  
This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for this  
interface. By default, for the downstream traffic destined for  
IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on the downstream  
route configured for the IPOE interface.If iproutingstatus is  
disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used instead, for forwarding  
the downstream traffic for this IPOE interface.  
|disable  
IP DSLAM  
479  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value:enable  
enable|disable  
Administrative Status of the interface.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: enable or disable  
Example:  
$ create ipoe intf ifname Ipoe-0 lowif Ipoa-0 macaddrprof 1 ethpkttype Type2  
inactivitytmrintrvl 10 routingstatus disable cfgmode Auto enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ifname  
: Ipoe-0  
: 1  
Low If Name : Ipoa-0  
Eth Pkt Type : Type2  
Mac Addr Prof  
InActivity Tmr Interval : 10  
RoutingStatus  
Oper Status  
: disable  
: Up  
Admin Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The IPOE Tunneling Interface.  
Low If Name  
This specifies the lower interface index.It contains the  
ifindex of the IPoA interface.  
Mac Addr Prof  
Profile Id corresponding to the MAC address assigned to  
this IPOE interface. This Profile is created using the  
MacAddrProfileTable.  
Eth Pkt Type  
This specifies the type of the Packet.  
InActivity Tmr Interval  
This field specifies the time (in seconds) after which  
interfaces shall be marked inactive, if there is no data  
activity on this interface during this interval. This is used  
only when the bit corresponding to "ConfigEntry" is set for  
gsvIpoeConfigStatus field. A value of zero means the timer  
is not running. In autosensing scenario, an inactive  
interface is a candidate to deletion, if another protocol is  
sensed on Atm Vc Interface on which this interface is  
created  
IDL series User Guide  
480  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
RoutingStatus  
This specifies if the IP Routing Lookup has to be done for  
this interface. By default, for the downstream traffic  
destined for IPOE interface, IP lookup is done based on  
the downstream route configured for the IPOE interface.If  
iproutingstatus is disabled, layer 2 lookup shall be used  
instead, for forwarding the downstream traffic for this IPOE  
interface.  
Admin Status  
Oper Status  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Operational status of the interface.  
5.16.5 Rid static Commands  
5.16.5.1 Create rid static  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create rid static rid <rid-val>  
5.16.5.2 Delete rid static  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete rid static rid <rid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rid <rid-val>  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This  
database contains information about the routes in the  
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route  
related information for that flow. The RID defines a flow  
based on the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,  
IRD (Independent Routing Database) where there are  
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines  
separate routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID  
<X> have been created and the routing database is  
configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define  
IP DSLAM  
481  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other  
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing  
Database) where there is a single RID in the system and  
all flows map to this RID.  
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than  
one RID can be created in the system in this mode.  
Flows for all created VLANs shall map to this RID for  
routing. A value of RID as 0 has a special meaning. RID  
value 0 refers to management RID and all entries  
created in context of RID value 0 shall be for routes  
related to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan  
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual Vlan while  
in Native Vlan mode this is normal Vlan(C-VLAN).  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
Example:  
$ create rid static rid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
RID : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
RID  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database.  
This database contains information about the  
routes in the system. Each RID identifies a flow  
and defines route related information for that  
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN  
Id. The database can be of 2 types, IRD  
(Independent Routing Database) where there are  
more than one RIDs in the system and each RID  
IDL series User Guide  
482  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
defines separate routes in context of itself. . If  
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and  
the routing database is configured for IRD, than  
routes in RID <X> shall define flow for packets  
coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other mode for the  
database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)  
where there is a single RID in the system and all  
flows map to this RID.  
This RID has to be explicitly created and no more  
than one RID can be created in the system in this  
mode. Flows for all created VLANs shall map to  
this RID for routing. A value of RID as 0 has a  
special meaning. RID value 0 refers to  
management RID and all entries created in  
context of RID value 0 shall be for routes related  
to the management/control. In Stacked Vlan  
Mode the Vlan Corresponding to RID is Virtual  
Vlan while in Native Vlan mode this is normal  
Vlan(C-VLAN).  
IP DSLAM  
483  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.17 MacProfile Commands  
5.17.1 Macprofile globle Commands  
5.17.1.1 Get macprofile global  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get macprofile global [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.17.1.2 Create macprofile global  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create macprofile global profileid <profileid-val>macaddr <macaddr-val>  
5.17.1.3 Delete macprofile global  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get macprofile global profileid <profileid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val>  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
macaddr <macaddr-val> MAC Address for the profile.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create macprofile global profileid 3 macaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE  
IDL series User Guide  
484  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id MAC Address  
-----------------------------------------------------------  
3
00:30:4F:61:C1:BE  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
MAC Address for the profile.  
MAC Address  
5.17.2 Resvdmac profile info Commands  
5.17.2.1 Get resvdmac profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get resvdmac profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.17.2.2 Create resvdmac profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create resvdmac profile info profileid <profileid-val>  
5.17.2.3 Delete resvdmac profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
IP DSLAM  
485  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
delete resvdmac profile info profileid <profileid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val>  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
Example:  
$ create resvdmac profile info profileid 4  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile ID : 4  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
5.17.3 Resvdmac profile param Commands  
5.17.3.1 Get resvdmac profile param  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get resvdmac profile param [profileid <profileid-val>] [mcastaddr  
<mcastaddr-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
486  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.17.3.2 Create resvdmac profile param  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create resvdmac profile param profileid <profileid-val>mcastaddr  
<mcastaddr-val>action Drop | TransformedBcast | Participate  
5.17.3.3 Delete resvdmac profile param  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get resvdmac profile param profileid <profileid-val> mcastaddr  
<mcastaddr-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val>  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
mcastaddr  
This is Reserved Multicast address. This multicast address can  
only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx, where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
<mcastaddr-val>  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
action Drop |  
TransformedBcast |  
Participate  
This is the action corresponding to reserved multicast address.  
'Drop' action leads to dropping of corresponding frames.  
'TransformedBcast' leads to sending of the frames broadcasted  
over all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging restrictions,  
filtering, transformations shall apply). 'Participate' action leads to  
frame coming to Control Plane and it shall be given to the registered  
protocol module.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
IP DSLAM  
487  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create resvdmac profile param Profileid 4 mcastaddr 00:30:4f:00:00:00 action  
Drop  
Output  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile ID : 4  
Multicast address : 00:30:4f:00:00:00  
Action  
: Drop  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
Profile Id of the MAC Address configured.  
This is Reserved Multicast address. This  
multicast address can only be 00:30:4F:00:00:xx,  
where 'xx' lies between 00-0f and 20-2f.  
Multicast address  
Action  
This is the action corresponding to reserved  
multicast address. 'Drop' action leads to dropping  
of corresponding frames. 'TransformedBcast'  
leads to sending of the frames broadcasted over  
all the ports as if for a broadcast frame (bridging  
restrictions, filtering, transformations shall apply).  
'Participate' action leads to frame coming to  
Control Plane and it shall be given to the  
registered protocol module.  
IDL series User Guide  
488  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.18 Management Traffic Commands  
5.18.1 Ctlpkt group info Commands  
5.18.1.1 Get ctlpkt group info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ctlpkt group info [groupid <groupid-val>] [ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val>]  
5.18.1.2 Create ctlpkt group info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create ctlpkt group info groupid <groupid-val>ctlflowid  
<ctlflowid-val>instanceid <instanceid-val>]  
5.18.1.3 Delete ctlpkt group info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ctlpkt group info groupid <groupid-val>ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
groupid <groupid-val>  
The control packet group identifier  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 50  
ctlflowid <ctlflowid-val>  
The Control packet flow id.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0x4  
IP DSLAM  
489  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
instanceid  
The Control packet instance Id.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 26  
<instanceid-val>  
Example:  
$ create ctlpkt group info groupid 1 ctlflowid 1 instanceid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Group Id  
: 1  
Control Flow Id : 1  
Instance Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Group Id  
The control packet group identifier  
The Control packet flow id.  
Control Flow Id  
Instance Id  
The Control packet instance Id.  
References:  
z
See Control Packet Instance Group related commands  
5.18.2 Ctlpkt instance info Commands  
5.18.2.1 Get ctlpkt instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ctlpkt instance info [instanceid <instanceid-val>]  
5.18.2.2 Create ctlpkt instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IDL series User Guide  
490  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>profileid <profileid-val>  
classid <classid-val>  
5.18.2.3 Delete ctlpkt instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>  
5.18.2.4 Modify ctlpkt instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ctlpkt instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>profileid <profileid-val>  
classid <classid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
instanceid  
The control packets instance id.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<instanceid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 26  
profileid <profileid-val>  
This field identifies the control packet profile whose  
instance is being created.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
classid <classid-val>  
This field specifies the classid of the Instance. Class id  
shall be treated as the service priority of this instance.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0x4  
IP DSLAM  
491  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create ctlpkt instance info instanceid 1 profileid 1 classid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Instance Id : 1  
Profile Id : 1  
Class Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Instance Id  
Profile Id  
The control packets instance id.  
This field identifies the control packet profile  
whose instance is being created.  
This field specifies the classid of the Instance.  
Class id shall be treated as the service priority of  
this instance.  
Class Id  
References:  
z
see control packet profile instance related commands  
5.18.3 Ctlpkt profile info Commands  
5.18.3.1 Get ctlpkt profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ctlpkt profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.18.3.2 Create ctlpkt profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IDL series User Guide  
492  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create ctlpkt profile info profileid <profileid-val>maxctlpkts <maxctlpkts-val>  
thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>  
5.18.3.3 Delete ctlpkt profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ctlpkt profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.18.3.4 Modify ctlpkt profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ctlpkt profile info profileid <profileid-val> [maxctlpkts <maxctlpkts-val>]  
[thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val> The control packet's profile id.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
maxctlpkts  
This specifies the maximum control packets that can be  
<maxctlpkts-val>  
pending for an instance of this profile.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 63  
thrshld1 <thrshld1-val> This specifies the number of outstanding control packets for  
each instance, when control plane is congested.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 -63  
IP DSLAM  
493  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create ctlpkt profile info profileid 1 maxctlpkts 32 thrshld1 32  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id : 1  
Max Ctl Pkts : 32  
Threshold1 : 32  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
The control packet's profile id.  
Max Ctl Pkts  
This specifies the maximum control packets that  
can be pending for an instance of this profile.  
This specifies the number of outstanding control  
packets for each instance, when control plane is  
congested.  
Threshold1  
References:  
z
See control packet profiles related commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
494  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19 PPPoE Tunneling Commands  
5.19.1 PPPoE Global ACprofile Commands  
5.19.1.1 Get pppoe global acprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe global acprofile [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.19.1.2 Create pppoe global acprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create pppoe global acprofile profileid <profileid-val> acname <acname-val>  
5.19.1.3 Delete pppoe global acprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete pppoe global acprofile profileid <profileid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid profileid  
Profile Id of the AC Name configured.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
acname acname  
AC Name for the Session, based on which, the  
AC is selected.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create pppoe global acprofile profileid 2 acname ABCServer  
IP DSLAM  
495  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id AC Name  
------------------------------------------------------------  
2
ABCServer  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
AC Name  
Profile Id of the AC Name configured.  
AC Name for the Session, based on which, the  
AC is selected.  
References:  
z
PPPoE global ACprofile related commands.  
5.19.2 PPPoE Global Config Commands  
5.19.2.1 Get pppoe global config  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe global config  
5.19.2.2 Create pppoe global config  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify pppoe global config [ padimaxnumretries <padimaxnumretries-val> ]  
[padrmaxnumretries <padrmaxnumretries-val> ] [ paditxintrvl <paditxintrvl-val> ]  
[ padrtxintrvl<padrtxintrvl-val> ] [ wandntmrintrvl <wandntmrintrvl-val> ]  
[ inactivitytmrintrvl <inactivitytmrintrvl-val> ] [ discmaxnumretries  
<discmaxnumretries-val> ]  
IDL series User Guide  
496  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
padimaxnumretries  
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a  
<padimaxnumretries-val> PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.  
Type: Modify －Optional  
Valid values: 1 -10  
padrmaxnumretries  
<padrmaxnumretries  
val>  
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client sends a  
PADR for establishing a PPPoE Session.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -10  
paditxintrvl <paditxintrvl The time, n seconds, between PADI retries from the  
-val>  
PPPoE Client.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -60  
padrtxintrvl  
The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from the  
PPPoE Client.  
<padrtxintrvl-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -60  
wandntmrintrvl  
The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down  
Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes down,  
and if the timer times out, the session is teared down.  
A value of zero for this timer means it is not running.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<wandntmrintrvl-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
inactivitytmrintrvl  
The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity Timer.  
The session can remain inactive for atmost these n  
seconds after which it is teared down. A value of zero  
means the timer is not running.  
<inactivitytmrintrvl-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
discmaxnumretries  
The maximum number of times the PPPoE client does  
<discmaxnumretries-val> a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE session. A  
trap is given to GAG on reaching this number.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -5  
Example:  
$ get pppoe global Config  
IP DSLAM  
497  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Max Total Sessions  
PADR Max Num Retries  
PADR Tx Interval  
InActivity Tmr Interval : 20  
: 10  
: 10  
: 5  
PADI Max Num Retries : 10  
PADI Tx Interval : 5  
WAN Dn Tmr Interval : 10  
DISC Max Num Retries : 3  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Max Total Sessions  
PADI Max Num  
Retries  
Maximum number of PPPoE sessions supported.  
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client  
sends a PADI for establishing a PPPoE Session.  
Maximum number of times the PPPoE Client  
sends a PADR for establishing a PPPoE Session.  
The time, n seconds, between PADI retries from  
the PPPoE Client.  
PADR Max Num  
Retries  
PADI Tx Interval  
PADR Tx Interval  
The time, n seconds, between PADR retries from  
the PPPoE Client.  
WAN Dn Tmr Interval  
The time, n seconds, for timeout of the WAN Down  
Timer. The timer is started when the WAN goes  
down, and if the timer times out, the session is  
teared down. A value of zero for this timer means it  
is not running.  
InActivity Tmr Interval The time, n seconds, for timeout of the Inactivity  
Timer. The session can remain inactive for atmost  
these n seconds after which it is teared down. A  
value of zero means the timer is not running.  
DISC Max Num  
Retries  
The maximum number of times the PPPoE client  
does a discovery stage for establishing a PPPoE  
session. A trap is given to GAG on reaching this  
number.  
References:  
z
PPPoE global config related commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
498  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19.3 PPPoE Global Serviceprofile Commands  
5.19.3.1 Get pppoe global serviceprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe global serviceprofile [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.19.3.2 Create pppoe global serviceprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid <profileid-val> servicename  
<servicename-val>  
5.19.3.3 Delete pppoe global serviceprofile  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete pppoe global serviceprofile profileid <profileid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val> Profile Id of the Service Name configured.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -4  
servicename  
Service Name for the Session, based on which,  
the AC is selected.  
<servicename-val>  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create pppoe global serviceprofile profileid 1 servicename any  
IP DSLAM  
499  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id Service Name  
------------------------------------------------------------  
1
any  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Profile Id  
Profile Id of the Service Name configured.  
Service Name for the Session, based on which,  
the AC is selected.  
Service Name  
References:  
z
PPPoE global serviceprofile related commands.  
5.19.4 PPPoE Global Stats Commands  
5.19.4.1 Get pppoe global stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe global stats  
Parameters:  
none  
Example:  
$ get pppoe global stats  
Output:  
Active Sessions  
: 10  
: 12  
: 3  
Total Sessions  
: 12  
: 20  
: 15  
: 2  
Peak Active Sessions  
Num of PADI Timeouts  
Num of PADR Timeouts  
Num of PADT Rx  
Num of PADI Tx  
Num of PADR Tx  
Num of PADT Tx  
: 2  
: 3  
Num of PADT Rejected : 1  
IDL series User Guide  
500  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Num of PADO Rx  
Num of PADS Rx  
: 2  
Num of PADO Rejected : 1  
Num of PADS Rejected : 0  
: 12  
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx : 2  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
The number of active pppoe sessions in the  
Active Sessions  
system.  
Total Sessions  
The total number of PPPoE sessions.  
Peak number of active PPPoE sessions.  
The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.  
The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a  
response to a PADI.  
Peak Active Sessions  
Num of PADI Tx  
Num of PADI Timeouts  
Num of PADR Tx  
The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.  
Num of PADR Timeouts The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a  
response to a PADR.  
Num of PADT Tx  
The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.  
The number of PPPoE PADT received.  
The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.  
The number of PPPoE PADO received.  
The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.  
The number of PPPoE PADS received.  
The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.  
Num of PADT Rx  
Num of PADT Rejected  
Num of PADO Rx  
Num of PADO Rejected  
Num of PADS Rx  
Num of PADS Rejected  
Num of Malformed Pkts The number of PPPoE malformed packets  
Rx  
received.  
References:  
z
PPPoE global stats related commands.  
5.19.5 Pppoe intf Commands  
5.19.5.1 Get pppoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
IP DSLAM  
501  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.19.5.2 Create pppoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create pppoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif –val>[ wanbridgeport  
<wanbridgepor-val>t ] [sessionid <sessionid-val> ] [ acmacaddr  
<acmacaddr-val> ] macaddrprof <macaddrprof-val> [ servicenameprof  
<servicenameprof-val> | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof <acnameprof-val> |  
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]  
[ enable | disable ]  
5.19.5.3 Delete pppoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete pppoe intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.19.5.4 Modify pppoe intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify pppoe intf ifname <interface-name> lowif <lowif –val>[ wanbridgeport  
<wanbridgepor-val>t ] [sessionid <sessionid-val> ] [ acmacaddr  
<acmacaddr-val> ] macaddrprof <macaddrprof-val> [ servicenameprof  
<servicenameprof-val> | any | anyconfigured ] [ acnameprof <acnameprof-val> |  
any | anyconfigured ] [ ethpkttype Type2 | 802_3 ] [ nature dynamic | static ]  
[ enable | disable ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the ifindex of the  
PPP relay interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 0 - 254  
wanbridgeport  
WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN side port is  
acceptable. Currently, only value zero is supported.  
<wanbridgeport-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
502  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 0x0  
sessionid  
Session Id for the session given only in case a static session is being  
created.  
<sessionid-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 0xffff  
Default value: 0x0  
acmacaddr  
MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static session is  
being created.  
<acmacaddr-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: 00:00:00:00:00:00  
Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same is created  
using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Modify － Optional  
macaddrprof  
<macaddrprof-val>  
servicenameprof  
Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on which the  
AC is selected.The Profile for the same is created using the  
PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific  
service is needed to select an AC. A value of "anyconfigured"means  
any configured service name profile can be used for selecting an AC.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<servicenameprof-val>  
| any |anyconfigured  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: , 0-0xffffffff  
Default value: 0  
acnameprof  
Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on which the AC  
<acnameprof-val> |any is selected. The Profile for the same is created using the  
| anyconfigured  
PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any" means no specific AC is  
needed for establishing a session on the WAN side. A value of  
"anyconfigured"means any configured AC name profile can be used  
for selecting an AC.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0-0xffffffff  
Default value: 0  
ethpkttype Type2 |  
This specifies the type of the packet.  
Type: Create － Optional  
802_3  
Modify － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
503  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default value: Type2  
nature dynamic | static  
Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The session is  
assumed to be in established state when the interface is static in  
nature.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: dynamic  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create pppoe intf ifname pppoe-0 lowif ppp-0 wanbridgeport 1 sessionid 10  
acmacaddr 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE macaddrprof 1 servicenameprof 2 acnameprof 4  
ethpkttype Type2 nature dynamic 0x1 enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ifname  
: pppoe-0  
: 1  
Low If Name : ppp-0  
Session Id : 10  
WAN Bridge Port  
AC Mac Addr  
: 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE Mac Addr Prof : 1  
Service Name Profile : 2  
AC Name Prof  
: 4  
Eth Pkt Type  
: Type2  
: Up  
Nature  
: dynamic  
Oper Status  
Admin Status : Enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields  
FIELD  
Description  
The PPPoE Interface.  
Ifname  
Low If Name  
This specifies the lower interface index. It contains the  
ifindex of the PPP relay interface.  
WAN Bridge Port  
WAN side bridge port. A value of zero means any WAN  
side port is acceptable. Currently, only value zero is  
supported.  
IDL series User Guide  
504  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Session Id  
Session Id for the session given only in case a static  
session is being created.  
AC Mac Addr  
MAC address of the remote AC given only in case a static  
session is being created.  
Mac Addr Prof  
Service Name Profile  
Profile Id for self MAC addresses. The profile for the same  
is created using the PPPoEMacAddrProfileTable.  
Profile Id related to Service Name for the Session based on  
which the AC is selected.The Profile for the same is  
created using the PPPoESessionProfileTable. A value of  
"any" means no specific service is needed to select an AC.  
A value of "anyconfigured"means any configured service  
name profile can be used for selecting an AC.  
Profile Id related to AC Name for the Session based on  
which the AC is selected. The Profile for the same is  
created using the PPPoEAcProfileTable. A value of "any"  
means no specific AC is needed for establishing a session  
on the WAN side. A value of "anyconfigured"means any  
configured AC name profile can be used for selecting an  
AC.  
AC Name Prof  
Eth Pkt Type  
Nature  
This specifies the type of the packet.  
Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in nature. The  
session is assumed to be in established state when the  
interface is static in nature.  
Oper Status  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be either up  
or down.  
Admin Status  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either Up or  
Down.  
References:  
z
PPPoE session config related commands.  
IP DSLAM  
505  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19.6 PPPoE Session Stats Commands  
5.19.6.1 Get pppoe session stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppoe session stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> The PPPoE interface.  
Type: Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 254  
Example:  
$ get pppoe session stats ifname pppoe-0  
Output:  
Ifname  
: pppoe-0  
Session Id  
: 10  
Peer Mac Addr  
: 00:30:4F:61:C1:BE  
Num of PADI Tx  
Num of PADR Tx  
Num of PADT Tx  
: 4 Num of PADI Timeouts :  
2
: 1  
: 1  
Num of PADR Timeouts :  
0
1
Num of PADT Rx  
:
Num of PADT Rejected  
Num of PADO Rejected  
Num of PADS Rx  
: 1 Num of PADO Rx  
:
2
: 0 Num of Multi PADO Rx :  
: 1 Num of PADS Rejected :  
: 5 Num of Generic Err Rx :  
1
0
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx  
1
Version  
: 1 Type  
: Mon Apr 18 14:00:59 2004  
: 100 AC Cookie :  
:
1
Connect Time  
Duration (s)  
A1659E40766EDBD7214E18095A5E500C  
Host Unique  
: 0000003E  
State  
: sessionStage  
: REDBACK  
Service Name  
: dvt AC Name  
IDL series User Guide  
506  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The PPPoE interface.  
Session Id  
Session Id.  
Peer Mac Addr  
Num of PADI Tx  
Num of PADI Timeouts  
MAC address of the remote AC.  
The number of PPPoE PADI transmitted.  
The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to  
a PADI.  
Num of PADR Tx  
The number of PPPoE PADR transmitted.  
The number of PPPoE timeouts waiting for a response to  
a PADR.  
Num of PADR Timeouts  
Num of PADT Tx  
The number of PPPoE PADT transmitted.  
The number of PPPoE PADT received.  
The number of PPPoE PADT discarded.  
The number of PPPoE PADO received.  
The number of PPPoE PADO discarded.  
Number of times more than 1 PPPoE PADO was  
received.  
Num of PADT Rx  
Num of PADT Rejected  
Num of PADO Rx  
Num of PADO Rejected  
Num of Multi PADO Rx  
Num of PADS Rx  
Num of PADS Rejected  
Num of Generic Err Rx  
Version  
The number of PPPoE PADS received.  
The number of PPPoE PADS discarded.  
Number of generic errors received.  
Version as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.  
Type as given in the PPPoE rfc-2516.  
Time when the session was established.  
Number of seconds since the session was established.  
Binary sequence representing the AC cookie given in  
negotiations.  
Type  
Connect Time  
Duration (s)  
AC Cookie  
Host Unique  
State  
Binary sequence representing the host unique tag value.  
State that session is in.  
Service Name  
AC Name  
Service name with which the session came up.  
AC name with which the session came up.  
Num of Malformed Pkts Rx The number of PPPoE malformed packets received.  
References:  
z
PPPoE session stats related commands.  
IP DSLAM  
507  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.19.7 PPPPR Interface Commands  
5.19.7.1 Get pppr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pppr intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.19.7.2 Create pppr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create pppr intf ifname <interface-name>lowif <lowif-val> [ maxpdu  
<maxpdu-val> ] [ ppprackto <ppprackto-val>] [ lowiftoggletimerto  
<lowiftoggletimerto-val> ] [ nature dynamic | static ] [configstatus Normal |  
Config ] [ pktpriority <pktpriority-val> ] [enable | disable]  
5.19.7.3 Delete pppr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete pppr intf ifname <interface-name>  
5.19.7.4 Modify pppr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify pppr intf ifname <interface-name> [ppprackto <ppprackto-val>]  
lowiftoggletimerto <lowiftoggletimerto-val>] [nature dynamic | static] [pktpriority  
<pktpriority-val>] [enable | disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
508  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname  
The PPPR interface.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values: 0 － 254  
lowif <lowif-val>  
This specifies the name of the lower AAL5  
interface.  
Type: Create －Mandatory  
Valid values: 0 - 574  
maxpdu <maxpdu-val> This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR  
interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 1492  
Default value: 1492  
ppprackto  
Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,  
after sending a terminate request.  
Type: Create － Optional  
<ppprackto-val>  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 -10  
Default value: 5  
lowiftoggletimerto  
Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up  
<lowiftoggletimerto-val> without tearing down the pppr session.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 – 10  
Default value: 5  
nature dynamic |  
static  
Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in  
nature.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: Dynamic  
configstatus Normal  
|Config  
This mode describes the configuration status for  
the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface  
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.  
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the  
CPE side, this interface shall become active.  
Type: Create － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
509  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: Normal  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: enable or disable  
Default Value: enable  
pktpriority  
Priority to be set in tagged PPPOE frames or  
PPP packets sent over this port from Control  
Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of  
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether  
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is  
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be  
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to  
be sent.  
<pktpriority-val>  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 – 7  
Default value: 0  
Example:  
$ create pppr intf ifname pppr-0 lowif aal5-0 maxPdu 1484 ppprAckTO 10  
lowifToggleTimerTO 10 nature dynamic configstatus Normal  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ifname  
: pppr-0  
: 1484  
Low IfName  
: aal5-0  
Max PDU Size  
Ter Ack TimeOut : 10  
Lowif Toggle TimeOut : 10  
Nature  
: dynamic  
: up  
Config Status  
Admin Status  
: Normal  
: up  
Operational Status  
PPPOA PacketsPrio:2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
510  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
The PPPR interface.  
Low IfName  
This specifies the name of the lower AAL5  
interface.  
Max PDU Size  
This specifies the maximum PDU size on a PPPR  
interface.  
Ter Ack TimeOut  
Time in seconds to wait for LCP terminate Ack,  
after sending a terminate request.  
Lowif Toggle TimeOut Time in seconds to wait for lowif to come up  
without tearing down the pppr session.  
Nature  
Specifies if the interface is dynamic or static in  
nature.  
Config Status  
This mode describes the configuration status for  
the interface. If the "config" bit is set, this interface  
shall be created, but will have a dormant status.  
Only after the receipt of an pppoa packet from the  
CPE side, this interface shall become active. The  
"In-Use" and "Not-In-Use" bits are read-only bits.  
The "Not-In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is  
dormant and "In-Use" bit indicates that the entry is  
activated.  
Operational Status  
Admin Status  
The actual/current state of the interface. It may be  
either Up or Down.  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either  
Up or Down.  
PPPOA PacketsPrio  
Priority to be set in tagged PPPOE frames or PPP  
packets sent over this port from Control  
Plane .This priority shall also be used for choice of  
traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface whether  
the frame is tagged or not.In case the bridge port is  
over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be  
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to  
be sent.  
IP DSLAM  
511  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.20 IA (Intermeida Agent) Commands  
5.20.1 Dra global stats Commands  
5.20.1.1 Get dra global stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get t.  
Command Syntax:  
get dra global stats  
5.20.1.2 Reset dra global stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset dra global stats  
Parameter:  
None  
Example:  
$ get dra global stats  
Output:  
DRA Disc Count  
: 40  
DRA Req Count  
DRA Inform Count : 20  
DRA Ack Count : 10  
: 40  
DRA Decline Count : 30  
DRA Offer Count  
DRA Nack Count  
: 10  
: 50  
IDL series User Guide  
512  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
DRA Disc Count  
Number of DHCP discovery packets received  
Number of DHCP request packets received  
Number of DHCP decline packets received  
Number of DHCP inform packets received  
Number of DHCP offer packets received  
Number of DHCP Ack packets received  
Number of DHCP Nack packets received  
DRA Req Count  
DRA Decline Count  
DRA Inform Count  
DRA Offer Count  
DRA Ack Count  
DRA Nack Count  
References:  
DHCP Relay Agent commands  
5.20.2 Dra instance entry Commands  
5.20.2.1 Get dra instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dra instance entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]  
5.20.2.2 Create dra instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> profileid  
<profileid-val> [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |  
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None ] [ acival <acival-val> ]  
[ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |  
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |  
None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ] [ portno  
<portno-val> ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]  
IP DSLAM  
513  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.20.2.3 Delete dra instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to Delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>  
5.20.2.4 Modify dra instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify dra instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> [ profileid  
<profileid-val> ] [ status disable | client | server ] [ op82 disable | AddAlways |  
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboption aci | Portid | None | None ] [ acival  
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |  
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |  
None | None ] [ op82fromclientact drop | forward ] [ learning disable | enable ]  
[ portno <portno-val> ] [ draaddop82tounicast disable | enable ]  
Parameters  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Bridge Port Identifier  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
vlan <vlan-val>  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
IDL series User Guide  
514  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
profileid <profileid-val>  
DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
status disable | client |  
This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent  
per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or  
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option  
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as  
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we  
dont get portid from agent circuit id.  
server  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: disable  
op82 disable | AddAlways |  
This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on  
receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled  
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If  
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If  
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the  
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
AddIfNotExists  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: AddAlways  
configsuboption aci |  
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are  
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask  
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit Id  
and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Portid | None | None  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: None  
acival <acival-val>  
This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI  
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will  
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
raival <raival-val>  
This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This  
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated  
access loop logical port on the Columbia.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
IP DSLAM  
515  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
syncratefields  
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop  
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop  
characteristic suboption.  
ActualDataRateupstrm |  
ActualDataRatednstrm |  
MinDataRateupstrm |  
MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateupstrm |  
AttainableDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm |  
MinLpDataRateupstrm |  
MinLpDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDelayupstrm |  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
ActualDelayupstrm |  
MaxDelaydnstrm |  
ActualDelaydnstrm | None |  
None  
op82fromclientact drop |  
forward  
This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP  
message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message  
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then  
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded  
then forward should be set.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: drop  
learning disable | enable  
This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on this  
port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses assigned  
towards this port using upstream/downstream packets received  
on this port.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
portno <portno-val>  
This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered  
only when the bitmask for portid is set in  
ConfigSubOptionBitmask  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
IDL series User Guide  
516  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
draaddop82tounicast  
This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP  
Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to  
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
disable | enable  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create dra instance entry portid 1 vlan 5 profileid 1 status client op82 AddAlways  
configsuboption aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100,  
vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields ActualDelaydnstrm  
op82fromclientact drop learning enable portno 10 draaddop82tounicast enable  
Auto  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Port Id  
: 1  
: 1  
: AddAlways  
: aci  
VLAN  
: 5  
Profile Id  
DRA status : client  
Option82  
Config Sub-Option  
Agent Circuit Id  
100, vci = 33)"  
Remote Agent Id  
SyncRateInfoField  
: "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33" (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi =  
: "conexant noida"  
: ActualDelaydnstrm  
DRA Act For Op82 From Client : drop  
DRA learning  
: enable  
Port No  
VPI  
: 10  
: 100  
VCI  
: 33  
L2 type  
: Eth  
Encap Type : Llcmux  
DRA Add Op82 To Unicast  
: enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Bridge Port Identifier  
Port Id  
VLAN  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN  
DRA profile identifier. This shall be used for this DRA instance  
Profile Id  
IP DSLAM  
517  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRA status  
This field is used to configure the status of DHCP relay agent  
per instance. It can be disabled or configured as client port or  
server port. If it is configured as client port then it adds option  
82 and /or do learning as per configuration. If it is configured as  
server port then it removes option 82 and does learning if we  
dont get portid from agent circuit id.  
Option82  
This specifies the action to be performed on Option 82 on  
receiving DHCP discovery packets for this instance. If disabled  
DRA will not add Option82 tag to the DHCP packets. If  
AddAlways is set then Option 82 is always added. If  
AddIfNotExists is set then Option 82 is added only if the  
received DHCP packet does not contain Option 82.  
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are  
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this bitmask  
will overwrite the automatically derived values of agent circuit  
Id and/or port id by the values configured in this MO.  
This is use to configure agent circuit id for this instance. If ACI  
bit is set in gsvDRAConfigSubOptionthen this parameter will  
overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id  
Config Sub-Option  
Agent Circuit Id  
Remote Agent Id  
SyncRateInfoField  
This is use to configure remote agent id for this instance. This  
parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the associated  
access loop logical port on the Columbia.  
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop  
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop  
characteristic suboption.  
DRA Act For Op82  
From Client  
This specifies the action to be taken on receiving DHCP  
message from the client with option 82. If DHCP message  
contains option82 and we want the packet to be dropped then  
drop should be set and if we want the packet to be forwarded  
then forward should be set.  
DRA learning  
This field specifies whether DHCP learning is to be done on  
this port or not. If enabled DRA will learn the IP Addresses  
assigned towards this port using upstream/downstream  
packets received on this port.  
Port No  
This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered  
only when the bitmask for portid is set in  
ConfigSubOptionBitmask  
VCI  
VPI  
VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for  
this instance is created  
VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge port for  
IDL series User Guide  
518  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
this instance is created  
L2 type  
This Parameter represents the L2 type used  
Encap Type  
This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the aal5 VC  
corresponding the bridge port for which this instance is created  
This field specifies whether Option 82 is to be added to DHCP  
Unicast packets or not. If enabled Option 82 will be added to  
DHCP Unicast Packets and when disabled, it will not be added.  
DRA Add Op82 To  
Unicast  
References:  
DHCP Relay Agent commands  
5.20.3 Dra stats entry Commands  
5.20.3.1 Get dra stats entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dra stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]  
5.20.3.2 Reset dra stats entry  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
get dra stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Bridge port identifier  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
vlan <vlan-val>  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
IP DSLAM  
519  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get dra stats entry portid 1 vlan 1  
Output:  
Port Id  
: 1  
VLAN  
: 1  
Dhcp Pkt Received : 40  
Dhcp Pkt Discarded : 40  
Dhcp Pkt Sent : 90  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Bridge port identifier  
Port Id  
VLAN  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual VLAN  
Number of DHCP packets received for this instance  
Number of DHCP packets sent for this instance  
Dhcp Pkt Received  
Dhcp Pkt Sent  
Dhcp Pkt Discarded  
Number of DHCP packets discarded for this instance  
References:  
DHCP Relay Agent commands  
5.20.4 Dra global config Commands  
5.20.4.1 Get dra global config  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get dra global config  
5.20.4.2 Modify dra global config  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify dra global config [status Enable | Disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
520  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
status Enable | Disable Global status of DRA  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get dra global Config  
Output:  
DRA global Status  
------------------------------------------------------------  
Enable  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
DRA global Status  
Global status of DRA  
References:  
DHCP Relay Agent commands  
5.20.5 la profile entry Commands  
5.20.5.1 Get ia profile entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get ia profile entry [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.20.5.2 Create ia profile entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create ia profile entry profileid <profileid-val> [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival  
<anival-val> ] [ aciprefixstr <aciprefixstr-val> ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |  
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None ]  
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None ] [ chassisval  
IP DSLAM  
521  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
chassisval ] [ rackval <rackval-val> ] [ frameval <frameval-val> ] [ slotval  
<slotval-val> ] [ subslotval <subslotval-val> ]  
5.20.5.3 Delete ia profile entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete ia profile entry [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.20.5.4 Modify ia profile entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify ia profile entry profileid <profileid-val> [ anitype auto | config ] [ anival  
<anival-val> ] [ aciprefixstr <aciprefixstr-val> ] [ acifieldlist AniVal | Chassis |  
Rack | Frame | Slot | SubSlot | L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci | VlanTag | None | None ]  
[ suboption Aci | Rai | EncapType | AccessLoopChar | None | None ] [ chassisval  
<chassisval-val> ] [ rackval <rackval-val> ] [ frameval <frameval-val> ] [ slotval  
<slotval-val> ] [ subslotval <subslotval-val> ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid  
Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be applied on  
multiple PIA or DRA instances.  
<profileid-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
anitype auto | config  
This field specifies whether the Access node Identifier should be  
automatically derived or is configured by the user. If its value is  
auto, the ANI is derived from MAC address of access node.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: auto  
IDL series User Guide  
522  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
anival <anival-val>  
This is used to configure access node identifier. This field will be  
used only when value of gsvIaAniType is config.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
aciprefixstr  
This is used to configure user defined string to be concatenated as  
a part of flexible syntax in Agent Circuit Id. It is a string of  
characters with spaces and special characters.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<aciprefixstr-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
acifieldlist AniVal |  
This field represents list of parameters which will take part in auto  
Chassis | Rack | Frame generation of Agent Circuit Id.  
| Slot | SubSlot |  
L2Type | Port | Vpi | Vci  
| VlanTag | None |  
None  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
suboption Aci | Rai |  
EncapType |  
This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be added to VSA  
tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in case of DRA. The options  
which can be added include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,  
EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent Circuit id  
identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id specifies the subscriber  
information, EncapType and AccessLoopChar identify with the  
encapsulation type and access loop characterstics respectively.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
AccessLoopChar |  
None | None  
Modify -- Optional  
chassisval  
Chasis number of access node  
<chassisval-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
rackval <rackval-val>  
Rack no of access node  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
frameval  
Frame number of access node.  
<frameval-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
IP DSLAM  
523  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
slotval <slotval-val>  
Slot number of access node  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
subslotval  
Sub-slot number of access node.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
<subslotval-val>  
Default value: \0  
Example:  
$ create ia profile entry profileid 1 anitype auto anival 00aabbccddff aciprefixstr  
"Conexant Noida" acifieldlist port vpi vci suboption Aci chassisval 1 rackval 1  
frameval 1 slotval 3 subslotval 1Output  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id  
ANI value  
: 1  
: 00aabbccddff  
ANI Type : auto  
Aci Prefix Str : "Conexant Noida"  
ACI Field List : port vpi vci  
Sub Option  
Chassis  
Frame  
: Aci  
: 1  
Rack  
Slot  
: 1  
: 3  
: 1  
Sub Slot  
: 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Id  
Intermediate Agent Profile Identifier. This can be  
applied on multiple PIA or DRA instances.  
ANI Type  
ANI value  
This field specifies whether the Access node  
Identifier should be automatically derived or is  
configured by the user. If its value is auto, the ANI is  
derived from MAC address of access node.  
This is used to configure access node identifier. This  
field will be used only when value of gsvIaAniType is  
IDL series User Guide  
524  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
config.  
Aci Prefix Str  
This is used to configure user defined string to be  
concatenated as a part of flexible syntax in Agent  
Circuit Id. It is a string of characters with spaces and  
special characters.  
ACI Field List  
Sub Option  
This field represents list of parameters which will  
take part in auto generation of Agent Circuit Id.  
This field represents bitmask for suboptions to be  
added to VSA tag in case of PIA and Option82 tag in  
case of DRA. The options which can be added  
include Agent Circuit Id, Agent Remote Id,  
EncapType and AccessLoopCharacterstics. Agent  
Circuit id identifies the circuit, Agent Remote id  
specifies the subscriber information, EncapType and  
AccessLoopChar identify with the encapsulation  
type and access loop characterstics respectively.  
Chasis number of access node  
Chassis  
Rack  
Rack no of access node  
Frame  
Slot  
Frame number of access node.  
Slot number of access node  
Sub Slot  
Sub-slot number of access node.  
References:  
Intermediate Agent commands  
5.20.6 Pia instance entry Commands  
5.20.6.1 Get pia instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pia instance entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]  
5.20.6.2 Create pia instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IP DSLAM  
525  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> profileid  
<profileid-val> [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |  
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None ] [ acival  
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |  
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |  
None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable | disable ]  
[ portno <portno-val> ]  
5.20.6.3 Delete pia instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>  
5.20.6.4 Modify pia instance entry  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify pia instance entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val> [ profileid  
<profileid-val> ] [ status enable | disable ] [ vsatag disable | AddAlways |  
AddIfNotExists ] [ configsuboptionbitmask aci | PortId | None | None ] [ acival  
<acival-val> ] [ raival <raival-val> ] [ syncratefields ActualDataRateupstrm |  
ActualDataRatednstrm | MinDataRateupstrm | MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateupstrm | AttainableDataRatednstrm | MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm | MinLpDataRateupstrm | MinLpDataRatednstrm |  
MaxDelayupstrm | ActualDelayupstrm | MaxDelaydnstrm | ActualDelaydnstrm |  
None | None ] [ iwftagfromclientact drop | forward ] [ insertiwfsubop enable |  
disable ] [ portno <portno-val> ]  
IDL series User Guide  
526  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Bridge Port Identifier  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
vlan <vlan-val>  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual  
VLAN  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA  
Instance  
profileid  
<profileid-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
status enable | disable Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent for  
this instance  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: disable  
vsatag disable |  
AddAlways |  
This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on  
receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If  
disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets. If  
AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If  
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the  
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
AddIfNotExists  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: AddAlways  
configsuboptionbitm  
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are  
ask aci | PortId | None | configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this  
None  
bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of  
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in  
this MO.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
IP DSLAM  
527  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: None  
acival <acival-val>  
This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance. If  
ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then this  
parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit Id  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
raival <raival-val>  
This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this instance.  
This parameter uniquely identifies the subscriber on the  
associated access loop logical port on Columbia.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
syncratefields  
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop  
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop  
characteristic suboption.  
ActualDataRateupstrm  
|
ActualDataRatednstrm  
| MinDataRateupstrm |  
MinDataRatednstrm |  
AttainableDataRateups  
trm |  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
AttainableDataRatedns  
trm |  
MaxDataRateupstrm |  
MaxDataRatednstrm |  
MinLpDataRateupstrm  
|
MinLpDataRatednstrm  
| MaxDelayupstrm |  
ActualDelayupstrm |  
MaxDelaydnstrm |  
ActualDelaydnstrm |  
None | None  
iwftagfromclientact  
drop | forward  
This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving  
PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It  
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default action  
is to drop the packet silently.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: drop  
IDL series User Guide  
528  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
insertiwfsubop enable This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to  
| disable  
Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received for  
this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE interface.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
portno <portno-val>  
This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is considered  
only when the bitmask for portid is set in  
ConfigSubOptionBitmask  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: \0  
Example:  
$ create pia instance entry portid 1 vlan 1 profileid 1 status enable vsatag  
AddAlways configsuboptionbitmask aci acival "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3,  
port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)" raival "conexant noida" syncratefields  
ActualDelaydnstrm iwftagfromclientact drop insertiwfsubop enable portno 10  
Auto Output  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Port Id  
: 1  
: 1  
VLAN  
: 1  
Profile Id  
PIA status : enable  
PIAVsaOption  
: AddAlways  
Config Sub Options Bitmask : aci  
Agent Circuit Id  
Remote Agent Id  
: "[ANI] atm 3/10:100.33î (slot = 3, port = 10, vpi = 100, vci = 33)"  
: "conexant noida"  
SyncRateInfoField Bitmask : ActualDelaydnstrm  
Act for IWFTag From Client : drop  
Insert Iwf Subop  
Port No  
: enable  
: 10  
VCI  
: 33  
VPI  
: 100  
L2 type  
: Eth  
Encap Type  
: Llcmux  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
529  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
VLAN  
Bridge Port Identifier  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is virtual  
VLAN  
Profile Id  
PIA profile identifier. This shall be used for this PIA  
Instance  
PIA status  
Used to enable or disable PPPOE intermmediate agent  
for this instance  
PIAVsaOption  
This specifies the action to be performed on VSA Tag on  
receiving PPPoE discovery packets for this instance. If  
disabled PIA will not add VSA tag to the PPPoE packets.  
If AddAlways is set then VSA tag is always added. If  
AddIfNotExists is set then VSA tag is added only if the  
received packet does not contain the VSA tag.  
This bitmask is used to indicate which all parameters are  
configured for this instance. Parameter bit set in this  
bitmask will overwrite the automatically derived values of  
agent circuit Id and/or port id by the values configured in  
this MO.  
Config Sub Options  
Bitmask  
Agent Circuit Id  
Remote Agent Id  
This is use to configure Agent Circuit Id for this instance.  
If ACI bit is set in gsvPiaConfigSubOptionBitmask then  
this parameter will overwrite the generated Agent Circuit  
Id  
This is used to configure Remote Agent Id for this  
instance. This parameter uniquely identifies the  
subscriber on the associated access loop logical port on  
Columbia.  
SyncRateInfoField  
Bitmask  
This bitmask is used to indicate what all access loop  
characteristic parameters are to be added to access loop  
characteristic suboption.  
Act for IWFTag From  
Client  
This field specifies the Action to be taken on receiving  
PPPoE discovery msg with IWF suboption from client. It  
can be configured as either drop or forward. Default  
action is to drop the packet silently.  
Insert Iwf Subop  
This is used to indicate whether to add IWF suboption to  
Columbia originated PPPoE discovery packets received  
for this instance. This field is valid only for PPPOAE  
interface.  
Port No  
This field specifies Atm Port number.Its value is  
IDL series User Guide  
530  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
considered only when the bitmask for portid is set in  
ConfigSubOptionBitmask  
VCI  
VPI  
VCI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge  
port for this instance is created  
VPI Identifier of the AAL5 VC corresponding the bridge  
port for this instance is created  
L2 type  
This Parameter specifies the L2 type used  
This Parameter specifies the encapsulation type of the  
aal5 VC corresponding the bridge port for which this  
instance is created  
Encap Type  
References:  
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands  
5.20.7 Pia stats entry Commands  
5.20.7.1 Get pia stats entry  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pia stats entry [portid <portid-val>] [vlan <vlan-val>]  
5.20.7.2 Reset pia stats entry  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset pia stats entry portid <portid-val> vlan <vlan-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Bridge port Identifier  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
IP DSLAM  
531  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
vlan <vlan-val>  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is  
virtual VLAN  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
Additional Values: 4097  
Example:  
$ get pia stats entry portid 1 vlan 1  
Output:  
Port Id  
: 1  
VLAN  
: 1  
Padi Received : 10  
Padi Discarded : 4354  
Padr Discarded : 4354  
Padr Received : 4354  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
VLAN  
Bridge port Identifier  
VLAN identifier. In case of stacked mode this is  
virtual VLAN  
Padi Received  
Padi Discarded  
Padr Received  
Padr Discarded  
Number of PADI received for this instance  
Number of PADI discarded for this instance  
Number of PADR received for this instance  
Number of PADR packets discarded for this  
instance  
References:  
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands  
5.20.8 Pia global config Commands  
5.20.8.1 Get pia global config  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get pia global config  
IDL series User Guide  
532  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.20.8.2 Modify pia global config  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify pia global config [status Enable | Disable]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
status Enable | Disable Global status of PIA  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get pia global Config  
Output:  
PIA global Status : Enable  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
PIA global Status  
Global status of PIA  
References:  
PPPoE Intermediate Agent commands  
IP DSLAM  
533  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21 QoS Commands  
5.21.1 IRL Map Commands  
5.21.1.1 Get irl map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get irl map [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.21.1.2 Create irl map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create irl map ifname < interface-name > profilename <profile-name>  
5.21.1.3 Delete irl map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete irl map ifname < interface-name >  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname < interface-name Interface Name whose IRL mapping information is to be  
>
configured.  
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*  
Type : Create Mandatory  
Delete Mandatory  
Get --Optional  
Valid values: ND - ND  
profilename  
Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be associated with the  
interface. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_')  
and any combination of printable characters excluding ';'  
Type: Create Mandatory  
<profile-name>  
IDL series User Guide  
534  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create irl map ifname aal5-0 profilename gold  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Interface Profile Name  
------------------------------------------------------------  
aal5-0  
gold  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Interface  
Interface Name whose IRL mapping information  
is to be configured. Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*  
Specifies the name of the IRL profile to be  
Profile Name  
associated with the interface. String of up to 64  
characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any  
combination of printable characters excluding ';'  
5.21.2 IRL Profile Commands  
5.21.2.1 Get irl profile  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get irl profile [profilename <profile-name>]  
5.21.2.2 Create irl profile  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IP DSLAM  
535  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create irl profile profilename <profile-name> [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir  
<cir-val> ] [ cbs <cbs-val > ] [ pir <pir-val > ] [ pbs <pbs-val > ] [ conformaction  
<colorgreen-val> ] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |  
coloryellow ]  
5.21.2.3 Delete irl profile  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete irl profile profilename <profile-name>  
5.21.2.4 Modify irl profile  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify irl profile profilename <profile-name> [ irltype sr2cm | trtcm] [ cir  
<cir-val > ] [ cbs <cbs-val > ] [ pir <pir-val > ] [ pbs <pbs-val > ] [ conformaction  
<colorgreen-val>] [ exceedaction drop |coloryellow ] [violateaction drop |  
coloryellow ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profilename  
Profile name uniquely identify an IRL profile in the system. String of up  
to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of  
printable characters excluding ';'.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
<profile-name>  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: ND - ND  
irltype sr2cm | trtcm  
This field specifies the type of IRL. Two types of IRLs are supported.  
Single Rate Two Color Marker (sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color  
Marker (trtcm).  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: trtcm  
IDL series User Guide  
536  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
cir <cir-val >  
Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid for  
both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles. The value of this field cannot be  
more than PIR.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value:0-16000  
cbs <cbs-val >  
Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid in both  
sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles. The value of this field cannot be  
more than PBS in case of trTcm.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 96-10000  
Default value: 7500  
pir <pir-val >  
Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field is valid only for  
trtcm type of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CIR.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 96-16000  
Default value: 1000  
pbs <pbs-val >  
Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is valid only for trtcm type  
of profile. The value of this field cannot be less than CBS.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 96-15000  
Default value: 10000  
conformaction  
colorgreen  
Color type to be applied for conforming packets. This field is valid in  
both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: colorgreen  
exceedaction drop |  
Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only for trtcm type of  
profiles  
coloryellow  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
efault value: coloryellow  
violateaction drop |  
Color type to be applied for violating packets. This field is valid in both  
sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
coloryellow  
Default value: drop  
IP DSLAM  
537  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ create irl profile profilename gold irltype trtcm cir 1000 cbs 400 pir 2000 pbs  
12000 conformaction colorgreen exceedaction coloryellow violateaction drop  
Output:  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile name  
Profile name uniquely identifies an IRL profile in  
the system. String of up to 64 characters ( 'A'- 'Z',  
'a'-'z', '0'-'9','-','_') and any combination of printable  
characters excluding ';'.  
Profile Type  
CIR(kbps)  
This field specifies the type of IRL. Two type of  
IRLs are supported. Single Rate Two Color Marker  
(sr2cm) and Two Rate Three Color Marker (trtcm).  
Committed Information Rate of the IRL in kbps.  
This field is valid for both sr2cm and trtcm type of  
profiles. The value of this field cannot be more  
than PIR.  
CBS(bytes)  
Committed Burst Size of the IRL in bytes. This field  
is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles.  
The value of this field cannot be more than PBS in  
case of trTcm.  
PIR(kbps)  
Peak Information Rate of the IRL in kbps. This field  
is valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of  
this field cannot be less than CIR.  
PBS(bytes)  
Conform action  
Peak burst size of the IRL in bytes. This field is  
valid only for trtcm type of profile. The value of  
this field cannot be less than CBS.  
Color type to be applied for conforming packets.  
This field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of  
profiles.  
Exceed action  
Violate action  
Color for exceeding packets. This field is valid only  
for trtcm type of profiles.  
Color type to be applied for violating packets. This  
field is valid in both sr2cm and trtcm type of profiles  
References:  
IRL Commands  
z
IDL series User Guide  
538  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.21.3 IRL Stats Commands  
5.21.3.1 Get irl stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get irl stats [ifname <interface-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Interface Name whose IRL statistics are  
requested.  
ifname  
Valid Values: aal5-0 - aal5-*.  
Type : Get -- Optional  
<interface-name>  
Valid values : ND - ND  
Example:  
$ get irl stats  
ifname aal5-0  
Output:  
Interface  
: aal5-0  
Num packets violated : 100  
Num packets conformed : 1000  
Num packets exceeded : 300  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Name whose IRL statistics are  
requested.  
Interface  
Num packets violated Number of packets that violated PIR in case of  
trTcm. In case of crTcm it is the number of packets  
violating CIR.  
Num packets  
exceeded  
Number of packets that exceeded CIR. This field is  
valid only for trtcm type of profiles.  
Num packets  
conformed  
Number of packets that conformed to CIR.  
References:  
IRL Commands  
z
IP DSLAM  
539  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.4 Bridge rlin stance map Commands  
5.21.4.1 Get bridge rlinstance map  
Description: Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax: get bridge rlinstance map [portid <portid-val>]  
[flowtype <flowtype-val> | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast]  
5.21.4.2 Create bridge rlinstance map  
Description: Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax: create bridge rlinstance map portid  
<portid-val>flowtype <flowtype-val>| bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast |  
instanceid <instanceid-val>  
5.21.4.3 Delete bridge rlinstance map  
Description: Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax: delete bridge rlinstance map portid <portid-val>  
flowtype <flowtype-val> | bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast  
5.21.4.4 Modify bridge rlinstance map  
Description: Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax: modify bridge rlinstance map portid  
<portid-val>flowtype <flowtype-val>| bcast | unregmcast | unknownucast  
[instanceid <instanceid-val>]  
Parameters  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is  
associated. If the value of this field is 'All', it  
indicates all bridge ports. For a particular flow,  
instance map cannot be created both for a specific  
port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 194  
IDL series User Guide  
540  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
flowtype  
This field identifies the flow for which this instance  
<flowtype-val>| bcast | is applied. Three flow types are reserved for  
unregmcast |  
broadcast, unregistered multicast and unknown  
unicast traffic. The other user defined flows are  
identified by filtering rules by associating flow type  
with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
unknownucast  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 16 - 32  
instanceid  
This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Optional  
<instanceid-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 250  
Example:  
$ create bridge rlinstance map portid 6 flowtype bcast instanceid 1 configstatus  
Auto  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Port Id  
: 6  
: bcast  
Flow Type  
Instance Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
Bridge Port Identifier with which an instance is associated.  
If the value of this field is 'All', it indicates all bridge ports.  
For a particular flow, instance map cannot be created both  
for a specific port as well as for 'all' the bridge ports.  
This field identifies the flow for which this instance is  
applied. Three flow types are reserved for broadcast,  
unregistered multicast and unknown unicast traffic. The  
Flow Type  
IP DSLAM  
541  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
other user defined flows are identified by filtering rules by  
associating flow type with a rule action of type 'ratelimiter'.  
This field identifies the Rate limiting instance.  
Instance Id  
Cautions:  
An entry in this table shall not be applicable for a bridge port created over  
z
PPPOE and IPOE interface.  
5.21.5 Rl actionprofile info Commands  
5.21.5.1 Get rl actionprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rl actionprofile info [profileid <profileid-val>] [result conform | exceed |  
violate] [action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos |  
setbaclevel]  
5.21.5.2 Create rl actionprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val> result conform | exceed |  
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel  
[actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask <actionmask-val>] [description  
<description-val>]  
5.21.5.3 Delete rl actionprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val>result conform | exceed | violate  
action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel  
IDL series User Guide  
542  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.5.4 Modify rl actionprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify rl actionprofile info profileid <profileid-val> result conform | exceed |  
violate action drop | allow | sendtocontrol | copytocontrol | modifytos | setbaclevel  
[actionval <actionval-val>] [actionmask <actionmask-val>] [description  
<description-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid  
Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which uniquely identifies  
the action profile.  
<profileid-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 32  
result conform |  
The result type for which action is configured to be taken.  
Multiple actions can be configured for a result type.There shall  
be multiple entries with same profile identifier and a result type if  
multiple actions are configured for the result type. If there is no  
entry configured for a result type, the action is assumed to be  
'allow' for that result.  
exceed | violate  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
action drop | allow |  
sendtocontrol |  
Action to be taken on the packet.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
copytocontrol |  
modifytos | setbaclevel  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
IP DSLAM  
543  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
actionval  
The parameter should contain valid value for some actions that  
require an additional input.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol  
actions this parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).  
Other values are invalid for this action. For modifytos action this  
parameter should contain value to be set in tos field in the  
packet in the range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this  
action. The application of this value is dependent on the mask  
field. For setbaclevel action this parameter should contain Buffer  
Admission Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for this  
action. This parameter is ignored for other actions.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<actionval-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0  
actionmask  
This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol and modifytos  
actions only.For sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this  
parameter should contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled  
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this action.Only lower  
8-bits are taken into consideration for modifytos action and other  
bits are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1, then the  
corresponding bit in the TOS field is overwritten with the  
corresponding bit in action value. In the mask if a bit location  
contains 0, then the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains  
unchanged.  
<actionmask-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 0xffffffff  
Default value: 0xffffffff  
description  
Description of the application that receives packets matching  
this RL. This field is mandatory if Action is 'sendtocontrol' or  
'copytocontrol'.The description string should not begin with  
underscore '_' as it is reserved for special usage e.g.  
_PPPOE_CONTROL.  
<description-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\0"  
Example:  
$ create rl actionprofile info profileid 1 result conform action copytocontrol actionval  
0x00000000 actionmask 0xffffffff description lacp  
IDL series User Guide  
544  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Action Profile Id : 1  
Action Result  
: conform  
Profile Action  
Action Mask  
: copytocontrolActionVal  
: 0x00000000  
: 0xffffffff Application Description : lacp  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Action Profile Id  
Rate limiter's action profile identifier, which  
uniquely identifies the action profile.  
Action Result  
The result type for which action is configured to be  
taken. Multiple actions can be configured for a  
result type.There shall be multiple entries with  
same profile identifier and a result type if multiple  
actions are configured for the result type. If there is  
no entry configured for a result type, the action is  
assumed to be 'allow' for that result.  
Profile Action  
ActionVal  
Action to be taken on the packet.  
The parameter should contain valid value for some  
actions that require an additional input.For  
sendtocontrol and copytocontrol actions this  
parameter should contain control flow id (0 - 3).  
Other values are invalid for this action. For  
modifytos action this parameter should contain  
value to be set in tos field in the packet in the  
range 0 to 255. Other values are invalid for this  
action. The application of this value is dependent  
on the mask field. For setbaclevel action this  
parameter should contain Buffer Admission  
Control level 0 or 1. Other values are invalid for  
this action. This parameter is ignored for other  
actions.  
Action Mask  
This field is valid for sendtocontrol, copytocontrol  
and modifytos actions only.For sendtocontrol and  
copytocontrol actions this parameter should  
IP DSLAM  
545  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contain trap disabled (0xffffffff) or trap enabled  
(0x00000000). Other values are invalid for this  
action.Only lower 8-bits are taken into  
consideration for modifytos action and other bits  
are ignored. In the mask if a bit location contains 1,  
then the corresponding bit in the TOS field is  
overwritten with the corresponding bit in action  
value. In the mask if a bit location contains 0, then  
the corresponding bit in the TOS field remains  
unchanged.  
Application  
Description  
Description of the application that receives packets  
matching this RL. This field is mandatory if Action  
is 'sendtocontrol' or 'copytocontrol'.The description  
string should not begin with underscore '_' as it is  
reserved for special usage e.g.  
_PPPOE_CONTROL.  
5.21.6 Rl instance info Commands  
5.21.6.1 Get rl instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rl instance info [instanceid <instanceid-val>]  
5.21.6.2 Create rl instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create rl instance info instanceid <instanceid-val> profileid <profileid-val>  
actionprofileid <actionprofileid-val>  
5.21.6.3 Delete rl instance info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
IDL series User Guide  
546  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
delete rl instance info instanceid <instanceid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
instanceid  
Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely  
identifies a rate limiter instance.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<instanceid-val>  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 250  
profileid  
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's  
configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm  
and associated parameters are based on the  
configuration profile.  
<profileid-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 16  
actionprofileid  
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action  
profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet  
depending on the result are based on the action  
profile.  
<actionprofileid-val>  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 32  
Example:  
$ create rl instance info instanceid 3 profileid 2 actionprofileid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Instance Id : 3  
Profile Id : 2  
Action Profile Id : 1  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
547  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Instance Id  
Rate limiter instance identifier, which uniquely identifies  
a rate limiter instance.  
Profile Id  
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's  
configuration profile. The rate limiter's algorithm and  
associated parameters are based on the configuration  
profile.  
Action Profile Id  
This field identifies the rate limiter instance's action  
profile. The rate limiter's actions on a packet depending  
on the result are based on the action profile.  
5.21.7 Rl profile info Commands  
5.21.7.1 Get rl profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rl profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.21.7.2 Create rl profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create  
Command Syntax:  
create rl profile info profileid <profileid-val> [ rate <rate-val> ] [ mbs <mbs-val> ]  
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate <peakrate-val> ] [ pbs  
<pbs-val> ]  
5.21.7.3 Delete rl profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get rl profile info profileid <profileid-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
548  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.7.4 Modify rl profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify  
Command Syntax:  
modify rl profile info profileid <profileid-val> [ rate <rate-val> ] [ mbs <mbs-val> ]  
[ level packet | byte ] [ type sr2cm | trtcm ] [ peakrate <peakrate-val> ] [ pbs  
<pbs-val> ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid  
Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,  
whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile. The  
configuration profile contains all parameters required  
for rate limiting algorithm to operate.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
<profileid-val>  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 16  
rate <rate-val>  
This field defines the committed information rate. If  
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If  
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 100000000  
Default value: 100000000  
mbs <mbs-val>  
This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level' is  
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level' is  
'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 4 - 65535  
Default value: 65535  
IP DSLAM  
549  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
level packet | byte  
Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the algorithm  
executes in terms of number of packets or number of  
bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is configured in  
terms of packets per second and burst size is  
configured in terms of number of packets.If the 'level' is  
'byte'(2), rate is configured in terms of bits per second  
and burst size is configured in terms of number of  
bytes.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: packet  
type sr2cm | trtcm  
Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The sr2cm  
(single rate two color marker) is a single-rate algorithm.  
It takes rate and burst size as input parameters.The  
trtcm (two rate three color marker) is a dual-rate  
algorithm. It takes two sets of rate and burstsize as  
inputs, one each for peak and committed information.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: sr2cm  
peakrate  
This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field  
defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is 'packet'(1),  
the unit is packets per second. If level is byte, the unit is  
bits per second.  
peakrate-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 100000000  
Default value: 100000000  
pbs <pbs-val>  
This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This field  
defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is 'packet'(1), the  
unit is number of packets. If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is  
number of bytes.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 4 - 65535  
Default value: 65535  
Example:  
$ create rl profile info profileid 1 rate 24 mbs 24 level packet type trtcm peakrate 30  
pbs 30  
IDL series User Guide  
550  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id : 1  
Level  
Rate  
: packet  
: 24  
Type  
: trtcm  
: 24  
Max Burst Size  
Peak Rate : 30  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Peak Max Burst Size : 30  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Id  
Rate limiter's configuration profile identifier,  
whichuniquely identifies the configuration profile.  
The configuration profile contains all parameters  
required for rate limiting algorithm to operate.  
Level of the rate limiter identifies whether the  
algorithm executes in terms of number of packets  
or number of bytes.If the 'level' is 'packet'(1), rate is  
configured in terms of packets per second and  
burst size is configured in terms of number of  
packets.If the 'level' is 'byte'(2), rate is configured  
in terms of bits per second and burst size is  
configured in terms of number of bytes.  
Level  
Type  
Type identifies the algorithm for rate limiting.The  
sr2cm (single rate two color marker) is a  
single-rate algorithm. It takes rate and burst size  
as input parameters.The trtcm (two rate three color  
marker) is a dual-rate algorithm. It takes two sets  
of rate and burstsize as inputs, one each for peak  
and committed information.  
Rate  
This field defines the committed information rate. If  
'level' is 'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second.  
If 'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is bits per second.  
This field defines the committed burst size. If 'level'  
is 'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If  
'level' is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.  
This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This  
field defines the peak information rate. If 'level' is  
'packet'(1), the unit is packets per second. If level  
Max Burst Size  
Peak Rate  
IP DSLAM  
551  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
is byte, the unit is bits per second.  
Peak Max Burst Size  
This field is relevant only if 'type' is 'trtcm'(2). This  
field defines the peak burst size. If 'level' is  
'packet'(1), the unit is number of packets. If 'level'  
is 'byte'(2), the unit is number of bytes.  
5.21.8 Scheduling profile class Commands  
5.21.8.1 Get sched profile class  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get sched profile class [name <name-val>] [classid <classid-val>]  
5.21.8.2 Modify sched profile class  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify sched profile class name <name-val> classid <classid-val> [param1  
<param1-val>] [param2 <param2-val>] [param3 <param3-val>] [param4  
<param4-val>] [param5 <param5-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Name of the scheduling profile.  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
name <name-val>  
Scheduling profile class identifier  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
classid <classid-val>  
Valid values: 1－ 8  
This specifies the first parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the weight of the class  
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means  
param1 <param1-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
552  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight  
will be normalized with the sum of all classId  
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth  
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.  
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the  
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,  
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default  
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *  
10). The default value listed is only an indicative  
value.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
param2 <param2-val>  
This specifies the second parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is  
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the Minimum bandwidth in  
Kbps. Value zero means no minimum bandwidth  
guarantee for the class.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
param3 <param3-val>  
This specifies the third parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is  
ignored. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the Maximum bandwidth  
limit in Kbps for the class. Value zero means no  
maximum bandwidth limit for the class.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
param4 <param4-val>  
This specifies the fourth parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling  
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed  
is only an indicative value.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
param5 <param5-val>  
This specifies the fifth parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling  
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed  
is only an indicative value.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
553  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ get sched profile class name gold classid 1  
Output:  
Profile Name  
Class Id  
: gold  
: 1  
Profile Class Param1 : 20  
Profile Class Param3 : 25  
Profile Class Param5 : 25  
Profile Class Param2 : 25  
Profile Class Param4 : 0  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Name  
Class Id  
Name of the scheduling profile  
Scheduling profile class identifier  
This specifies the first parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the weight of the class  
queue on the scale of 1-100. Value 100 means  
Strict Priority in PP scheduling profile.This weight  
will be normalized with the sum of all classId  
weights. For Custom scheduling algorithm, this  
parameter specifies the excess bandwidth  
sharing weight of the class on the scale of 1-100.  
If for a class, both Minimum bandwidth and the  
Excess sharing weight are configured as zero,  
then the queue shall never be scheduled. Default  
value of this parameter is calculated as (classid *  
10). The default value listed is only an indicative  
value.  
Profile Class Param1  
This specifies the second parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is  
ignored.  
Profile Class Param2  
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter  
specifies the Minimum bandwidth in Kbps. Value  
zero means no minimum bandwidth guarantee  
for the class.  
Profile Class Param3  
This specifies the third parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
IDL series User Guide  
554  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
the profile. For PP scheduling algorithm, it is  
ignored.  
For Custom scheduling algorithm, this parameter  
specifies the Maximum bandwidth limit in Kbps  
for the class. Value zero means no maximum  
bandwidth limit for the class.  
This specifies the fourth parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling  
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed  
is only an indicative value.  
Profile Class Param4  
This specifies the fifth parameter for the class  
queue that is used in the scheduling algorithm of  
the profile. For PP and Custom scheduling  
algorithms, it is ignored. The default value listed  
is only an indicative value.  
Profile Class Param5  
References:  
Scheduling profile related commands  
z
5.21.9 Scheduling profile info Commands  
5.21.9.1 Get sched profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get sched profile info [name <name-val>]  
5.21.9.2 Create sched profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create sched profile info name <name-val> [algo pp | custom] iftype eth| atm  
IP DSLAM  
555  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.9.3 Delete sched profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete sched profile info name <name-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Name of the scheduling profile  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
name <name-val>  
Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only  
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and custom is  
supported over ATM. In Proabalistic Priority algorithm, the  
traffic class parameter determines the probablity with which  
its corresponding queue is served when it is polled by the  
server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have flexibility to  
assign minimum rate, maximum rate, and excess bandwidth  
sharing weight for classes and the scheduling shall be done  
based on these parameters among classes.  
algo pp | custom  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Default value: pp  
The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for which the  
scheduling profile is applicable.  
iftype eth | atm  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create sched profile info name gold algo pp iftype atm  
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Name  
: gold  
: pp  
Scheduling Algorithm  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Interface Type : eth  
IDL series User Guide  
556  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Name  
Name of the scheduling profile  
Scheduling algorithm of the profile. Currently only  
Proabalistic Priority is supported over ethernet and  
custom is supported over ATM. In Proabalistic  
Priority algorithm, the traffic class parameter  
determines the probablity with which its  
Scheduling  
Algorithm  
corresponding queue is served when it is polled by  
the server. In Custom algorithm, user shall have  
flexibility to assign minimum rate, maximum rate,  
and excess bandwidth sharing weight for classes  
and the scheduling shall be done based on these  
parameters among classes.  
The type of the interface Ethernet/ATM port for  
which the scheduling profile is applicable.  
Interface Type  
Caution:  
For a scheduling profile that has iftype as atm, upto 8 classes can be  
z
configured, while for a scheduling profile that has iftype as eth, 8 classes can be  
configured.  
References:  
z
Scheduling profile related commands.  
5.21.10 Trfclass profile class Commands  
5.21.10.1 Get trfclass profile class  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get trfclass profile class [profileid <profileid-val>] [classid <classid-val>]  
IP DSLAM  
557  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.10.2 Modify trfclass profile class  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:modify trfclass profile class profileid <profileid-val>classid  
<classid-val> [size <size-val>] [thrshld1 <thrshld1-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val> Traffic class profile identifier.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 10  
classid <classid-val>  
Traffic class profile class identifier.  
Type: Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
size <size-val>  
This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic  
class.  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
thrshld1  
This parameter specifies the low threshold of the  
queue, as a percentage of the queue size. When  
the queue is full beyond this threshold, only  
conforming frames are passed and  
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance  
of frames is determined as per IRL configured on  
input the ATM port.  
<thrshld1-val>  
Type: Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 100  
Example:  
$ get trfclass profile class profileid 1 classid 1  
Output:  
Profile Identifier  
: 1  
Class Id  
: 1  
Traffic Class Param Size : 32  
Traffic Class Param Thresh : 50  
IDL series User Guide  
558  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Identifier  
Traffic class profile identifier.  
Class Id  
Traffic class profile class identifier.  
Traffic Class Param Size  
Traffic Class Param Thresh  
This parameter specifies the size of the Traffic class.  
This parameter specifies the low threshold of the queue, as a  
percentage of the queue size. When the queue is full beyond  
this threshold, only conforming frames are passed and  
non-conforming frames are dropped. Conformance of frames is  
determined as per IRL configured on input the ATM port.  
References:  
z
See traffic class profile related commands.  
5.21.11 Trfclass profile info Commands  
5.21.11.1 Get trfclass profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get trfclass profile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.21.11.2 Create trfclass profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
create trfclass profile info profileid <profileid-val> iftype eth | atm  
5.21.11.3 Delete trfclass profile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
get trfclass profile info profileid <profileid-val>  
IP DSLAM  
559  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
profileid <profileid-val> Traffic class profile identifier.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 10  
iftype eth | atm  
Interface type.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create trfclass profile info profileid 3 iftype eth  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile identifier : 3  
Interface Type : eth  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile identifier  
Interface Type  
Traffic class profile identifier.  
Interface type.  
5.21.12 Trfclass stats Commands  
5.21.12.1 Get trfclass stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get trfclass stats [ifname <ifname-val>] [classid <classid-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
560  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.21.12.2 Reset trfclass stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
reset trfclass stats [ifname <ifname-val>] [classid <classid-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <ifname-val>  
Interface name  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
classid <classid-val>  
Traffic class identifier  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get trfclass stats ifname 149 classid 1  
Output:  
Interface Name : 149  
NumDiscardPkts : 10  
Class Id : 1  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Interface Name  
Class Id  
Interface name  
Traffic class identifier  
Number of packets discarded  
NumDiscardPkts  
IP DSLAM  
561  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.22 RMON Commands  
5.22.1 RMON Statistics Group Commands  
5.22.1.1 Create srmon probe  
Description:  
Use this command to create RMON probe.  
Command Syntax:  
create srmon probe rindex <rindex-val> ifname <interface-name> owner  
<owner-string>  
5.22.1.2 Delete srmon probe  
Description:  
Use this command to delete the RMON probe.  
Command Syntax:  
delete srmon probe rindex <rindex-val>  
5.22.1.3 Get srmon probe  
Description:  
Use this command to get RMON probe information and statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get srmon probe [rindex <rindex-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rindex <rindex-val>  
Unique identifier of the probe.  
Type: Create – Mandatory  
Delete – Mandatory  
Get - Optional  
Valid values : 0 －20  
Ifname  
This specifies the Interface name.  
Type: Create – Mandatory  
<interface-name>  
Valid values : eoa-0 - *, eth-0-*  
owner <owner-string>  
The entity that configured this probe, and is  
therefore using the resources assigned to it.  
IDL series User Guide  
562  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Type : Create – Mandatory  
Valid values: Strings of up to 64 ASCII  
characters.  
Example:  
$ get srmon probe rindex 1  
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
RMON Probe Index  
If-Name  
: 1  
: eth-0  
: 800  
Total Broadcast Packets : 138  
Stats Owner  
: Conexant  
: 200  
Total Octets  
Total Packets  
Total Multicast Packets : 200  
Total 64 Octets  
: 100  
: 200  
Total 65-127 Octets  
Total 256-511 Octets  
: 200  
: 300  
Total 128-255 Octets  
Total 512-1023 Octets : 50  
Total 1024-1518 Octets : 100  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Unique identifier of RMON probe.  
RMON Probe Index  
If-Name  
This specifies the Interface name. It can be :  
eoa-0 - *, eth-*  
Stats Owner  
Total Octets  
The entity that configured this entry and is  
therefore using the resources assigned to it.  
The total number of octets of data (including  
those in bad packets) received on the network  
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets, broadcast packets, and multicast  
packets) received.  
Total Packets  
Total Broadcast  
Packets  
The total number of good packets received, that  
were directed to the broadcast address.  
Total Multicast Packets The total number of good packets received, that  
were directed to a multicast address.  
Total 64 Octets  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received, that were 64 octets in length  
(excluding framing bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received, that were between 65 and  
127 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing  
Total 65-127 Octets  
IP DSLAM  
563  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
bits but including FCS octets).  
Total 128-255 Octets  
Total 256-511 Octets  
Total 512-1023 Octets  
Total 1024-1518 Octets  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received that were between 128 and  
255 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received that were between 256 and  
511 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received that were between 512 and  
1023 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
The total number of packets (including bad  
packets) received that were between 1024 and  
1518 octets in length inclusive (excluding framing  
bits but including FCS octets).  
Caution:  
This command is not supported on an EoA interface for which ConfigStatus is  
z
set to Config.  
5.22.2 RMON Task Info Commands  
5.22.2.1 Get rmon task  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon task [rname <task-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Rname< taskname>  
This parameter specifies the name of a particular  
task.  
Valid values: Any task name present in the  
system.  
IDL series User Guide  
564  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get rmon task taskname tsk1  
Output:  
Name  
: TSK1  
: 1  
Status  
: EVENT SUSPEND  
: 10  
Sched Count  
Preempt  
Priority  
: Yes  
Time Slice  
Stack Size  
: 0  
Stack Base  
: 0x520cc18  
: 2048  
CleanStackSize : 14080  
LastSchedTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:08 1970-  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
This parameter specifies the name of the task.  
This parameters specifies the status of the task. The task  
can in ready state, terminated state, suspended state or  
finished state.  
Status  
Sched Count  
This parameter specifies the Schedule count of the task i.e.  
number of times the task has been scheduled.  
This parameter tells the priority of the task.  
Priority  
Preempt  
This parameter tells whether the task preemption is allowed  
or not. If the value is yes then task can be preempted .If the  
value is No , then task can not be preempted.  
This parameters tell the time slice of the task. If this value is  
zero, it means that time slicing is disabled for this task.  
This parameter specifies the base address (starting  
address) of the stack associated with this task. The stack of  
the task would span from the address as given by Stack  
Base till the address as given by (Stack Base + Stack Size).  
Note that the stack grows from the address as given by  
(Stack Base + Stack Size) towards Stack Base.  
This parameters tells the total number of bytes in the task's  
stack.  
Time Slice  
Stack Base  
Stack Size  
CleanStackSize  
This Parameter tells the free stack size i.e. the number of  
bytes that have never been accessed in the stack of task.  
Basically this gives an idea of the stack watermark.  
This parameter tells the system time at which the task was  
lastly scheduled.  
LastSchedTime  
IP DSLAM  
565  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.22.3 RMON Memory Pool Info Commands  
5.22.3.1 Get rmon mpool  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon mpool [rname <mpool-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rname mpool  
This parameter specifies the name of a particular memory pool.  
Valid values : Any memory pool name present in the system.  
A user can also give first few characeters of a memory pool  
name. In that case all the memory pools whose name start with  
those characters shall be displayed.  
Example 1:  
For variable size memory pool  
$ get rmon mpool DCLFR113  
Output:  
Name  
: DCLFR113  
: 16  
: 0  
: 0x147b7d28  
: CLFR  
: CLFR  
Size  
Free  
: 5392  
: 5360  
Min  
Tasks Waiting  
StartAddr  
FirstAllocator  
LastDellocater  
Suspend Type  
FirstTaskName  
LastAllocator  
LastFailUser  
: FIFO  
: -  
: CLFR  
: -  
LastFailDellocater : -  
TotalMemAlloc  
WaterMark  
: 84  
: 52  
TotalMemFree  
: 52  
: 0  
MemAllocFailCount : 0  
MemFreeFailCount  
Threshold  
MPoolType  
: DYNAMIC  
: 0  
: Thu Jan 01 00:01:08 1970  
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:18 1970  
: 5392  
Threhold Count  
LastMemAllocTime  
LastMemFreeTime  
LastMemAllocFailTime: -  
LastMemFreeFailTime : -  
ThresholdHitTime  
: -  
IDL series User Guide  
566  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,  
the name starts with 'D'.  
Size  
Min  
Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes in the  
pool.  
Minimum number of bytes for each allocation  
from this pool.  
Free  
Number of free bytes in the pool i.e. Number of  
bytes that are available in the pool for allocation  
and has not been yet allocated.  
Task Waiting  
Number of tasks waiting on this pool.  
The task suspended type. Task suspend type on  
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First  
Out) or Priority.  
Suspend Type  
Start Addr  
The Starting Address of the memory pool.  
Name of the first suspended task on this memory  
pool.  
FirstTaskName  
FirstAllocator  
LastAllocator  
Name of the module which has firstly allocated  
memory from the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most  
recently) allocted memory from the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most  
recently)deallocated memory to the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to  
allocate the memory from the pool.  
LastDellocater  
LastFailAllocator  
LastFailDeallocator  
WaterMark  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to  
deallocate the memory to the pool.  
WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum  
amount of memory that has been allocated from  
the memory pool at some point in time.  
Total amount of memory allocated from the  
memory pool (since its creation ). This field is a  
running counter and it only increments. When the  
memory is freed this field is not decremented  
rather the TotalMemFree field is incremented.  
Total amount of memory that has been  
deallocted from the memory pool (since its  
creation). This is also a running counter.  
The number of times memory allocation from this  
TotalMemAlloc  
TotalMemFree  
MemAllocFailCount  
IP DSLAM  
567  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
pool has been failed.  
MemFreeFailCount  
MPoolType  
The number of times the memory deallocation to  
the pool has been failed.  
Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the  
memory pool is of variable size . If it is  
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.  
Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in  
number of bytes.  
Threshold  
ThresholdCOunt  
LastMemAllocTime  
LastMemFreeTime  
Number of times the threshold value has been hit  
for this memory pool.  
The system time when memory was lastly  
allocated from the pool.  
The system time when memory was lastly freed  
into the pool.  
LastMemAllocFailTime The system time when the last memory  
allocation from the pool has failed.  
LastMemFreeFailTime  
ThresholdHitTime  
The system time when the last memory  
deallocation has failed.  
The system time when threshold of the pool has  
hit most recently.  
Example 2:  
For fixed size memory pool  
$ get rmon mpool FTSK142  
Output:  
Name  
: FTSK142  
Size  
: 280  
Partion Size  
Free  
: 20  
Allocated  
: 1  
: 9  
Tasks Waiting  
StartAddr  
: 0  
Suspend Type  
FirstTaskName  
LastAllocator  
LastFailUser  
: FIFO  
: -  
: 0x5307e40  
: TSK1  
: TSK1  
FirstAllocator  
LastDellocater  
: TSK1  
: -  
LastFailDellocater : -  
TotalMemAlloc  
WaterMark  
: 84  
: 2  
: 3  
TotalMemFree  
MemAllocFailCount : 0  
MemFreeFailCount  
Threshold  
: 0  
: 280  
MPoolType  
: PARTTION  
: 0  
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:34 1970  
: Thu Jan 01 00:02:49 1970  
Threhold Count  
LastMemAllocTime  
LastMemFreeTime  
IDL series User Guide  
568  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
LastMemAllocFailTime: -  
LastMemFreeFailTime : -  
ThresholdHitTime  
: -  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Name of the memory pool. For fixed size pool,  
the name starts with 'F'.  
Size  
Size of memory pool i.e.number of bytes in the  
pool.  
Partition Size  
Partition size specifies the size of each partition  
in bytes.  
Allocated  
Free  
Number of partitions allocated.  
Number of free partitions in the pool i.e.  
Number of partitions that are available in the pool  
for allocation and has not been yet allocated.  
Number of tasks waiting on this pool.  
The task suspended type. Task suspend type on  
a memory pool can be either FIFO (First In First  
Out) or Priority.  
Task Waiting  
Suspend Type  
StartAddr  
The Starting Address of the memory pool.  
Name of the first suspended task on this memory  
pool.  
FirstTaskName  
FirstAllocator  
LastAllocator  
LastDellocater  
LastFailUser  
Name of the module which has firstly allocated  
partition from the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most  
recently) allocted partition from the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most  
recently) freed the partition to the pool.  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to  
allocate the partition from the pool.  
LastFailDellocater  
WaterMark  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to  
free the partition in to the pool.  
WaterMark of the memorypool i.e. the maximum  
amount of memory that has been allocated from  
the memory pool at some point in time. This  
figure (displayed in bytes) includes the memory  
allocated as well as the overhead that nucleus  
keeps while allocating partitions.  
TotalmemAlloc  
Total number of partitions allocated from the  
IP DSLAM  
569  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
memory pool (since its creation ). This is a  
running counter, it always increments never  
decrements.  
TotalMemFree  
Total number of partitions that has been freed  
into the memory pool (since its creation). This is  
a running counter, it always increments never  
decrements.  
MemAllocFailCount  
MemFreeFailCount  
MPoolType  
The number of times partition allocation from this  
pool has failed.  
The number of times the partition deallocation to  
the pool has failed.  
Type of the pool. If the value is DYNAMIC , the  
memory pool is of variable size . If it is  
PARTITION, it is fixed type memory pool.  
Threshold Value set for the memory pool, in  
number of bytes.  
Threshold  
Threshold Count  
LastMemAllocTime  
LastMemFreeTime  
Number of times the threshold value has been hit  
for this memory pool.  
The last system time when a partition has been  
allocated from the pool.  
The last system time when a partition has been  
freed into the pool.  
LastMemAllocFailTime The last system time when the partition  
allocation from the pool has failed.  
LastMemFreeFailTime  
ThresholdHitTime  
The last system time when the partition  
deallocation has failed.  
The last system time when threshold of the pool  
has hit.  
5.22.3.2 Get rmon mpool threshold  
Description:  
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the memory pool. This  
command will display 20 entries (maximum) .Events are logged for the memory  
pool for the following 3 cases:  
z
z
z
Mem Pool Allocation Fail.  
Mem Pool Deallocation Fail.  
Threshold Hit.  
IDL series User Guide  
570  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
get rmon mpool threshold  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get rmon mpool threshold  
Output:  
Task Name : TSK1  
Mpool Name : FTSK143  
Pool Type : PARTITION  
ThresholdHitTimeStamp :Thu Jan 01 00:20:53 1970  
Event Type :  
Allocation Fail  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Task Name  
Name of the module which tries to allocate or  
deallocate from memory pool during a critical  
event.  
MPool Name  
Pool Type  
The name of memory pool.  
Type of memory pool. DYNAMIC for variable  
size of memory pool and PARTITION for fixed  
size memory pool.  
ThresholdHitTimeStamp The system time at which event logging is done.  
Event Type  
Cause of event logging.  
Its value can be:  
Allocation Fail - If allocation from pool has  
failed.  
Deallocation Fail - If deallocation from pool has  
failed.  
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of pool has  
been hit while allocation.  
IP DSLAM  
571  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.22.3.3 Reset rmon mpool  
Description:  
Use this command to reset some parameters of memory pool. This command will  
reset the following parameters of memory pool.  
z
z
z
Set MemAllocFailCount value to zero.  
Set MemFreeFailCount value to zero.  
Set watermark value to the value of the currently allocated memory from that  
pool.  
z
Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.  
Command Syntax:  
reset rmon mpool  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ reset rmon mpool  
Output Field:  
None  
5.22.4 RMON Queue Info Commands  
5.22.4.1 Get rmon queue  
Description:  
Use this command to get the information about a particular queue or about all the  
queues present in the system.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon queue [rname <queue-name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
rname <queue-name>  
This parameter specifies the name of a particular  
queue.  
Valid values: Any queue name present in the  
system.  
IDL series User Guide  
572  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get rmon queue rname tsk173  
Output:  
Name  
: TSK173  
: 10  
Start Addr  
Available Size : 9  
Msg Type  
: 0x520c700  
Size  
Pending Msgs  
Msg Size  
Tasks Waiting  
TotalMsgIn  
DropCount  
: 1  
: 1  
: FIXED  
Suspend Type  
: PRIORITY  
: 0  
: 3  
: 0  
FirstTaskName  
TotalMsgOut  
WaterMark  
: -  
: 2  
: 3  
LastMsgInFailPtr: 0x0  
LastSender  
: TSK2  
LastRecvr  
: TSK1  
: -  
LastSenderFail : -  
LastRecvFail  
ThreshHold  
: 10  
ThresholdHitCount: 0  
LastMsgOutTime  
LastMsgInTime  
: Thu Jan 01 00:04:17 1970  
: Thu Jan 01 00:03:50 1970  
LastMsgOutFailTime : -  
LastMsgInFailTime : -  
ThresholdHitTime  
: -  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Name of the Queue.  
Start Addr  
Size  
The Starting Address of the queue.  
Size of the queue i.e the total number of unsigned  
words (4 bytes) in the queue.  
Available Size  
Available size of the queue i.e. number of unsigned  
words (4 bytes) free in the queue.  
Pending Msgs  
Msg Type  
Number of messages present in the queue.  
Type of the messages in the queue. If it is FIXED,  
then all the messages in the queue are of a fixed size.  
If it is VARIABLE , then the messages present in the  
queue can be of varying size.  
Msg Size  
Size of the message in number of unsigned words (4  
bytes). If the msg type is fixed, then it tells the exact  
size of each message , else if the msg type is variable  
then it tells the maximum message size.  
Suspend Type  
The task suspended type. Task suspend type on the  
queue can be either FIFO (First In First Out) or  
IP DSLAM  
573  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Priority.  
Tasks Waiting  
FirstTaskName  
TotalMsgIn  
Number of tasks waiting on this queue.  
Name of the first suspended task on this queue.  
Total number of messages enqueued i.e. the number  
of messages send to this queue (since its creation ).  
This is a running counter and never decrements.  
Total number of messages dequed i.e. the number of  
messages received from this queue(since creation).  
This is a running counter and never decrements.  
Number of messages dropped i.e. total number of  
times message send to this queue failed. This is a  
running counter and never decrements.  
WaterMark of the queue i.e the maximum number of  
unsigned words (4 bytes) that has been present in this  
queue at some point in time.  
TotalMsgOut  
DropCount  
WaterMark  
LastMsgInFailPtr  
LastSender  
Address of the message buffer that failed to enqueue  
in the queue lastly.  
Name of the module which has lastly (i.e. most  
recently) send the message to the queue.  
Name of the module which has lastly (ie. most  
recently)recieved the message from the queue.  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to send  
the message to the queue.  
LastRecvr  
LastSenderFail  
LastRecvFail  
Threshold  
Name of the module which has lastly failed to receive  
the message from the queue.  
Threshold Value set for the queue, in number of  
unsigned words (4 bytes).  
ThresholdHitCount  
LastMsgOutTime  
Number of times threshold has been hit for the queue.  
The system time when the message was lastly  
received from the queue.  
LastMsgInTime  
The system time when the message was lastly send  
to the queue.  
LastMsgOutFailTime  
LastMsgInFailTime  
ThresholdHitTime  
The system time when the message receiving from  
the queue has lastly failed.  
The system time when the message send to the  
queue has lastly failed.  
The system time when threshold of the queue has  
lastly hit.  
IDL series User Guide  
574  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.22.4.2 Get rmon queue threshold  
Description:  
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the queue. This command  
will display 20 entries (maximum) . Events are logged for the queue for the  
following 3 cases:  
z
z
z
Message Receiving From Queue Fail.  
Message Send To Queue Fail.  
Threshold Hit.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon queue threshold  
Parameters  
None  
Example  
$ get rmon queue threshold  
Output  
Queue Name  
: TSK173  
Task Name: TSK1  
ThreshHitTime : Thu Jan 01 00:00:14 1970  
Event Type  
: Msg Recv From Q Fail  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Queue Name  
Name of the queue.  
Task Name  
Name of the module which has tried to send or  
receive the message from the queue when the  
event has happened.  
ThresholdHitTime  
Event Type  
The system time at which event logging is done.  
Cause of event logging.  
Its value can be:  
Msg Send To Q Fail - If failure occurred while  
sending message to queue.  
Msg Recv From Q Fail - If failure occurred while  
receiving a message from the queue.  
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of queue has  
been hit while sending the message to queue.  
IP DSLAM  
575  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.22.4.3 Reset rmon queue  
Description:  
Use this command to reset some parameters of queue. This command will reset  
the following parameters of queue.  
z
z
z
Set DropCount value to zero.  
Set watermark value to the value of the currently used size of queue .  
Set ThresholdCount value to the zero.  
Command Syntax:  
Reset rmon queue  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ reset rmon queue  
Output Field:  
None  
5.22.5 RMON Net buffers Info Commands  
5.22.5.1 Get rmon netbuf  
Description:  
Use this command to get the information about all the net buffers present in the  
system.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon netbuf  
Parameters  
None  
Example:  
$ get rmon netbuf  
IDL series User Guide  
576  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output  
TotalNetBuf  
TotalFree  
Threshold  
: 116  
: 7  
TotalUsed  
WaterMark  
: 8  
: 3  
: 116  
ThresholdHitCount: 0  
AllocFailCount : 0  
FreeFailCount  
LastFreeTask  
: 0  
LastUserTask  
: PKEV  
: PKEV  
LastUserFailTask :  
ThresholdHitTask :  
LastUsedTime  
LastFreeFailTask :  
: Thu Jan 01 00:04:45 1970  
: Thu Jan 01 00:05:01 1970  
LastFreeTime  
LastUseFailTime : -  
ThresholdHitTime : -  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Total number of net buffers present in the system.  
TotalNetBuf  
TotalUsed  
Total number of net buffers allocated by the system since the system has  
come up. This is a running counter and never decrements.  
Total number of net buffers freed by the system since the system has come  
up. This is a running counter and never decrements.  
WaterMark of the net buffer i.e. maximum number of net buffers used by the  
system at some point in time.  
TotalFree  
WaterMark  
Threshold  
Threshold value set for net buffer in the system in terms of number of net  
buffers.  
ThresholdHitCount  
AllocFailCount  
FreeFailCount  
Number of times threshold has been hit for the net buffer.  
Number of times net buffer allocation has failed.  
Number of times net buffer freeing has failed.  
LastUserTask  
Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used)the net buffer.  
Name of the task which has lastly deallocated (freed) the net buffer.  
Name of the task which has lastly failed to allocate (used) the net buffer.  
Name of the task which has lastly failed to deallocate (freed) the net buffer.  
Name of the task which has lastly allocated (used) the net buffer, causing  
threshold hit.  
LastFreeTask  
LastUserFailTask  
LastFreeFailTask  
ThresholdHitTask  
LastUsedTime  
LastFreeTime  
The last system time when net buffer was lastly used.  
The last system time when net buffer was lastly freed.  
The last system time when the net buffer allocation has lastly failed.  
The last system time when the threshold has hit while allocating the net  
buffer.  
LastUseFailTime  
ThresholdHitTime  
IP DSLAM  
577  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.22.5.2 Get rmon netbuf threshold  
Description:  
Use this command to get the critical events logged for the netbuffer. This  
command will display 20 entries(maximum). Events are logged for netbuffer in the  
following 3 cases:  
z
z
Allcation of net buffer failed.  
Threshold Hit.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon netbuf threshold  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get rmon netbuf threshold  
Output:  
Task Name : TSK1  
ThresholdHitTimeStamp : Thu Jan 01 00:00:39 1970  
Event Type :  
Allocation Fail  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Task Name  
The name of Task which tries to allocate the  
netbuffer during a critical event.  
ThresholdHitTimeStamp The system time when event logging is done.  
Event Type  
Cause of event logging.  
Its value can be:  
Allocation Fail - If allocation of net buffer has  
failed.  
Threshold Hit - If threshold value of net buffer  
has been hit while allocation.  
IDL series User Guide  
578  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.22.5.3 Reset rmon netbuf  
Description:  
Use this command to reset some parameters of netbuf. This command will reset  
the following parameters of netbuf.  
z
z
z
z
Set ThresholdCount value to zero.  
Set AllocFailCount value to zero  
Set WaterMark to the number of net buffers currently used by system.  
Set FreeFailCount value to the zero.  
Command Syntax:  
reset rmon netbuf  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ reset rmon netbuf  
Output Field:  
None  
5.22.6 RMON Semaphore Info Commands  
5.22.6.1 Get rmon semaphore  
Description:  
Use this command to get the information about all the semaphores present in the  
system.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon semaphore  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get rmon semaphore  
IP DSLAM  
579  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Name  
Task  
Count  
Suspend Type  
Tasks Waiting  
0
First  
-
--------------------------------------------------------------  
SACL4  
1
FIFO  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Count  
This specifies the name of the semaphore.  
This specifies the current instance count of the  
semaphore.  
Suspend Type  
This specifies the task suspended type on this  
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority type.  
This specifies the number of tasks waiting on this  
semaphore.  
Task Waiting  
First Task  
This specifies the name of the first task suspended on  
the semaphore.  
5.22.7 RMON Event Group Info Commands  
5.22.7.1 Get rmon eventgrp  
Description:  
Use this command to get the information about all the event groups present in the  
system.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon eventgrp  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get rmon eventgrp  
IDL series User Guide  
580  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Name  
Task  
Event Flags  
Tasks Waiting  
1
First  
-------------------------------------------------------------  
EDSLM11  
DSLM  
0
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Name  
Count  
This specifies the name of the event flag group.  
This specifies the current event flags.  
This specifies the task suspended type on this  
semaphore. It can be either FIFO type or priority  
type.  
Suspend Type  
Task Waiting  
First Task  
This specifies the number of tasks waiting on  
the event flag group.  
This specifies the name of the first task  
suspended on the event flag group.  
IP DSLAM  
581  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.23 SNMP Commands  
5.23.1 SNMP Comm Commands  
5.23.1.1 Get snmp comm  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get snmp comm [community <community-val >]  
5.23.1.2 Create snmp comm  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create snmp comm community <community-val > [access ro | rw]  
5.23.1.3 Delete snmp comm  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete snmp comm community <community-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the Community name.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
community  
<community-val >  
Get － Optional  
This specifies the access permissions given to  
man-agers with this community name. ro implies  
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write  
per-missions.  
access ro | rw  
Type: Create － Optional  
Default value: ro  
IDL series User Guide  
582  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create snmp comm community public  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Access community  
------------------------------------------------------------  
ro  
public  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
community  
This specifies the Community name.  
This specifies the access permissions given to  
man-agers with this community name.ro implies  
Read Only permissions and rw implies Read-Write  
per-missions.  
Access  
References:  
z
SNMP commands  
5.23.2 SNMP Host Commands  
5.23.2.1 Get snmp host  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get snmp host  
5.23.2.2 Create snmp host  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
IP DSLAM  
583  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
create snmp host ip <ip-address > community <community-val >  
5.23.2.3 Delete snmp host  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete snmp host ip <ip-address > community <community-val >  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the IP address of the manager that  
has access permissions.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
ip <ip-address >  
Get － Optional  
This specifies the Community name. This must  
be a valid community in the snmp community  
table.  
community  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
<community-val >  
Get － Optional  
Example:  
$ create snmp host ip 172.25.34.34 community public  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Host Address  
Community  
--------------------------------------------------------------  
172.25.34.34  
public  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
584  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
This specifies the IP address of the manager that  
has access permissions.  
Ip Address  
This specifies the Community name. This must  
be a valid community in the snmp community  
table.  
Community  
References:  
SNMP commands  
z
5.23.3 SNMP Stats Commands  
5.23.3.1 Snmp stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get snmp stats  
5.23.3.2 Modify snmp stats  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify snmp stats [authentraps enable | disable]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is  
permitted to generate authentication-failure  
traps. The value of this object overrides any  
configuration information; as such, it provides a  
means whereby all authentication-failure traps  
may be disabled.  
authentraps enable  
|disable  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Default value: disable  
IP DSLAM  
585  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get snmp stats  
Output:  
InPkts  
: 100  
: 0  
OutPkts  
: 100  
InBadVersions  
InBadCommunityNames : 0  
InBadCommunityUses : 0  
InASNParseErrs  
InNoSuchNames  
InReadOnlys  
: 0  
: 0  
InTooBigs  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
InBadValues  
InGenErrs  
: 0  
InTotalReqVars  
InGetRequests  
InSetRequests  
InTraps  
: 200  
: 100  
: 0  
InTotalSetVars  
InGetNexts  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
InGetResponses  
OutTooBigs  
OutBadValues  
OutGetRequests  
OutSetRequests  
OutTraps  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
OutNoSuchNames  
OutGenErrs  
: 0  
: 0  
: 0  
OutGetNexts  
OutGetResponses  
AuthenTraps  
: 100  
: disable  
: 0  
SilentDrops  
: 0  
ProxyDrops  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
The total number of Messages delivered to the SNMP entity from the transport  
service.  
InPkts  
The total number of SNMP Messages which were passed from the SNMP  
protocol entity to the transport service.  
OutPkts  
The total number of SNMP Messages which were delivered to the SNMP  
protocol entity and were for an unsupported SNMP version.  
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity  
which used a SNMP com-munity name not known to say entity.  
The total number of SNMP Messages delivered to the SNMP protocol entity  
which represented an SNMP operation which was not allowed by the SNMP  
community named in the Message.  
InBadVersions  
InBadCommunityNames  
InBadCommunityUses  
The total number of ASN.1 or BER errors encountered by the SNMP protocol  
entity when decoding received SNMP Messages.  
InASNParseErrs  
InTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'noSuchName'.  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  
InNoSuchNames  
InBadValues  
IDL series User Guide  
586  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.  
The total number valid SNMP PDUs which were de-livered to the SNMP  
protocol entity and for which the value of the error-status field is `readOnly'. It  
should be noted that it is a protocol error to generate an SNMP PDU which  
contains the value 'readOnly' in the error-status field, as this object is provided  
as a means of detecting incorrect implementations of the SNMP.  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were delivered to the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.  
The total number of MIB objects which have been retrieved successfully by the  
SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Get-Request and  
Get-Next PDUs.  
InReadOnlys  
InGenErrs  
InTotalReqVars  
The total number of MIB objects which have been altered successfully by the  
SNMP protocol entity as the result of receiving valid SNMP Set-Request PDUs.  
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been accepted and  
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
InTotalSetVars  
InGetRequests  
InGetNexts  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been accepted and  
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been accepted and  
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
InSetRequests  
InGetResponses  
InTraps  
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been accepted  
and processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been accepted and  
processed by the SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'tooBig'.  
OutTooBigs  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status is 'noSuchName'.  
OutNoSuchNames  
OutBadValues  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'badValue'.  
The total number of SNMP PDUs which were generated by the SNMP protocol  
entity and for which the value of the error-status field is 'genErr'.  
The total number of SNMP Get-Request PDUs which have been generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity.  
OutGenErrs  
OutGetRequests  
OutGetNexts  
The total number of SNMP Get-Next PDUs which have been generated by the  
SNMP protocol entity.  
The total number of SNMP Set-Request PDUs which have been generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity.  
OutSetRequests  
OutGetResponses  
The total number of SNMP Get-Response PDUs which have been generated by  
the SNMP protocol entity.  
IP DSLAM  
587  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
The total number of SNMP Trap PDUs which have been generated by the  
SNMP protocol entity.  
OutTraps  
Indicates whether the SNMP agent process is permitted to generate  
authentication-failure traps. The value of this object overrides any configuration  
infor-mation; as such, it provides a means whereby all au-thentication-failure  
traps may be disabled.  
AuthenTraps  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNextRequest-PDUs,  
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRe-quest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs  
delivered to the SNMP entity which were silently dropped be-cause the size of a  
reply containing an alternate Re-sponse-PDU with an empty variable-bindings  
field, was greater than, either a local constraint, or the maximum message size  
associated with the origi-nator of the request.  
SilentDrops  
The total number of GetRequest-PDUs, GetNex-tRequest-PDUs,  
GetBulkRequest-PDUs, SetRequest-PDUs, and InformRequest-PDUs  
delivered to the SNMP entity, which were silently dropped, be-cause the  
transmission of the (possibly translated) message to a proxy target failed in a  
manner (other than a time-out) such that no Response-PDU could be returned.  
ProxyDrops  
References:  
SNMP commands.  
z
5.23.4 SNMP Traphost Commands  
5.23.4.1 Get snmp traphost  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get snmp traphost [ip <ip-address>] [port <port-val >]  
5.23.4.2 Create snmp traphost  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create snmp traphost ip <ip-address > community <community-val > [port  
<port-val >] [version v1 | v2c]  
IDL series User Guide  
588  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.23.4.3 Delete snmp traphost  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete snmp traphost ip < ip-address > [port <port-val >]  
5.23.4.4 Modify snmp traphost  
Description:  
Use this command to modify  
Command Syntax:  
modify snmp traphost ip <ip> [port <port>] [version v1 | v2c] [severity critical |  
major | minor | info]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
ip<ip-address >  
This specifies the IP address of the manager where trap is to be sent.  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be sent.  
Type: Create －Optional  
Get － Optional  
port <port-val >  
Modify － Optional  
Delete － Optional  
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the Manager.  
Type: Create－Optional  
Get － Optional  
version v1 | v2c  
Modify － Optional  
Default value: v2c  
This specifies the Trap severity which is used for trap classification.The  
given trap severity will be used for filtering of traps on per manager basis  
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of configured severity  
Type: Create － Optional  
severity critical | major  
| minor | info  
Modify － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
589  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ create snmp traphost ip 172.25.34.34 port 162 community public version v2c  
severity minor  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ip Address : 172.25.34.34  
Community : public  
Port  
: 162  
Version : v2c  
Severity : minor  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Ip Address  
This specifies the IP address of the manager  
where trap is to be sent.  
Port  
This specifies the Port at which the trap is to be  
sent.  
Community  
Version  
Severity  
This specifies the Community name used in the  
trap.  
This specifies the Trap version to be sent to the  
Manager  
This specifies the Trap severity which is used for  
trap classification.The given trap severity will be  
used for filtering of traps on per manager basis  
i.e. manager will receive traps on the basis of  
configured severity  
IDL series User Guide  
590  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.24 SNTP Commands  
5.24.1 SNTP Cfg Commands  
5.24.1.1 Get sntp cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get sntp cfg  
5.24.1.2 Modify sntp cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify sntp cfg [enable | disable]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies whether the SNTP service is  
enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is  
enabled and False means that SNTP is disabled.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
enable|disable  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Example:  
$ modify sntp cfg enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On/Off  
Status : Enable  
Output field:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies whether the SNTP service is  
enabled or disabled. True means that SNTP is  
enabled and False means that SNTP is disab  
Status  
IP DSLAM  
591  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.24.2 SNTP servaddr Commands  
5.24.2.1 Get sntp servaddr  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get sntp servaddr  
5.24.2.2 Create sntp servaddr  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create sntp servaddr <ip-address>  
Example:  
$ create sntp servaddr 172.23.3.45  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Server Addr : 172.23.3.45  
Verbose Mode Off  
Entry Created  
Status : Standby  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
This specifies the IP Address of the SNTP  
Server.  
Server Addr  
Status  
Server is in Use. OR Server is in standby mode  
i.e. not in use.  
IDL series User Guide  
592  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.24.3 SNTP Stats Commands  
5.24.3.1 Get sntp stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get sntp stats  
5.24.3.2 Reset sntp stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset sntp stats  
Example:  
$ get sntp stats  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On/Off  
Requests count  
: 0  
Response count  
: 0  
Invalid Response count : 0  
Lost Response count : 0  
Last Time Stamp [MM/DD/YYYY::HH:MM:SS] : Thu Jan 01 00:00:00 1970  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
This specifies the number of requests sent to SNTP  
Requests count  
Server.  
Responses count  
Invalid Responses  
count  
This specifies the Number of responses received from SNTP Server.  
This specifies the Number of invalid responses received from SNTP  
Server.  
This specifies the number of responses which do not come within  
time limit.  
Lost Responses count  
Last Time Stamp  
[MM/DD/  
This specifies time at which the local clock was last set or corrected.  
The display format shall be mm/dd/ yyyy:hr:min:sec.  
YYYY::HH:MM:SS]  
IP DSLAM  
593  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.25 System Commands  
5.25.1 Cbuftrace cfg Commands  
5.25.1.1 Get cbuftrace cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get cbuftrace cfg [module <module-val>]  
5.25.1.2 Reset cbuftrace cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to reset.  
Command Syntax:  
reset cbuftrace cfg module <module-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
module <module-val> This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified  
Type: Reset -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Example:  
$ get cbuftrace cfg module GAG  
Output:  
module : GAG  
flow : 3  
level : 0xff  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
module  
flow  
This specifies the module, for which c-buftrace configuration is to be modified  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace flow.  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter for c-buftrace level.  
level  
IDL series User Guide  
594  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.25.2 System Configuration Save and Restore Commands  
5.25.2.1 Commit  
Description:  
Use this command to commit the active configuration to the flash. This command is  
not supported  
Command Syntax:  
commit [nbsize]  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ commit  
Output:  
Set Done  
Caution:  
This command will take some time to execute.  
References:  
reboot command  
Download command.  
5.25.2.2 Reboot  
Description:  
Use this command to reboot the system and to set the boot configuration.  
Command Syntax:  
reboot [control <nvram|network>] [dataplane <nvram|network>] [config  
<network | default | last | backup | clean | minimum | safe >]  
IP DSLAM  
595  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies whether the control plane binaries are to be  
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in  
NVRAM are to be used.  
control  
<nvram|network>  
Type : Optional  
Default value: Binary present in NVRAM.  
This specifies whether the data plane binaries are to be  
fetched from the network or the binaries already present in  
NVRAM are to be used.  
dataplane  
<nvram|network>  
Type: Optional  
Default value: Binaries present in NVRAM.  
This specifies the boot configuration – the  
<last|backup|clean|minimum> source, from which to boot up.  
The boot configuration is set to last automatically, whenever  
a commit command is given. The boot configuration being an  
optional parameter, if it is not specified, it retains the previous  
value. So giving reboot after a commit will result in a reboot  
from the committed configuration.  
Default: Use Default factory configuration while booting up.  
Backup: Use the Backup configuration to boot the system.  
Last: Use last committed configuration to boot the system.  
config <network|default| Minimum: Use a configuration in which:  
last|backup|clean|minimu • the size command is executed.  
m>  
• the user (login name and password as root) is created.  
• an Ethernet interface with IP address 192.168.1.1 mask  
255.255.0.0 is created.  
Clean: The system comes up with nothing configured.  
Network: The system fetches the default configuration file  
from the remote host and system comes up with this default  
configuration, fd.cfg.  
Type : Optional  
Default value: If a reboot is being given for the first time,  
then the default value is default. Otherwise, the default value  
is the same as what was given the last time.  
IDL series User Guide  
596  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Mode:  
Super-User.  
Example:  
$ reboot  
Output:  
None  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
Commit command.  
5.25.3 System Control Table Commands  
5.25.3.1 Create user  
Description:  
Use this command to create a user account. A maximum two accounts can exist.  
Command Syntax:  
create user name <user-name> passwd <password> [root|user]  
5.25.3.2 Delete user  
Description:  
Use this command to delete a user login.  
Command Syntax:  
delete user name <user-name>  
5.25.3.3 Get user  
Description:  
Use this command to display information of all the users. Password information  
isnot displayed.  
Command Syntax:  
get user  
IP DSLAM  
597  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the User Name to be created.  
Type: Mandatory  
Name <user-name>  
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and  
any combination of printable  
characters excluding “;”  
This specifies the password required by this user to  
login to the unit.  
passwd <password>  
Type : Mandatory  
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters ( ‘A’- ‘Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’,’-‘,’_’) and  
any combination of printable characters excluding “;”.  
This indicates the privilege level of the user.  
Type : Optional  
Root|user  
Default value: user  
Example:  
$ create user name user1 passwd temp1 user  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Privilege  
UserName  
----------------------  
user  
user1  
Verbose Mode Off  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
UserName  
This shows the new user login, which has been cre-ated.  
This represents the privilege level associated with the user  
name shown. It may be: user, root  
Privilege  
References:  
Delete user command.  
get user command  
passwd related commands.  
IDL series User Guide  
598  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.25.3.4 Passwd  
Description:  
Use this command to change the password associated with a user login. An  
ordinary user may change the password for another user if he knows the old  
password. However, the root does not need to know a user’s existing password  
before changing it. The passwords are not echoed on to the screen.  
Command Syntax:  
passwd [name]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
The id of the user whose password is to be  
changed. If not specified then the current user is  
as-sumed.  
Type: Mandatory, if user is logged in through  
serial port and user authentication is disabled  
through se-rial port. Otherwise, Optional.  
Valid values: String of up to 64 characters (All  
print-able characters except ‘;‘)  
name  
Mode:  
Super-User, User.  
Example:  
Normal Usage  
$passwd  
Old Password:  
New Password:  
Confirm New Password:  
Set Done.  
Super User (for ordinary user)  
$passwd User1  
Enter New Password:  
Confirm New Password:  
Set Done.  
IP DSLAM  
599  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output::  
None  
Caution:  
None.  
References:  
user command  
5.25.4 System crash info Commands  
5.25.4.1 Get system crash info  
Description:  
T This command is used to display a list of crashes that were encountered by the  
system. This command is not supported on the Flashless system.  
Command Syntax:  
get system crash info [numentries <numentries-val>] [showview [general |  
ctrlandstatusregs | stackregs | stackinfo | altwinregs | stdwinregs |  
stdwinregsdetailed | coprocessorregs] +]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Numentries  
<numentries-val>  
This specifies the last <numentries> number of crashes  
encountered in the system.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: 1 to 128  
Default : 1  
showview general |  
ctrlandstatusregs |  
The optional showview parameter shall help the user to view  
selective details of the crash dump. The information on any one  
stackregs | stackinfo |  
altwinregs | stdwinregs  
| stdwinregsdetailed |  
coprocessorregs]+  
or combination of crash dump sections can be retrieved by  
ORing the following parameters:  
•general  
•ctrlandstatusregs  
•stackregs  
•stackinfo  
•altwinregs  
•stdwinregs  
•stdwinregsdetailed  
IDL series User Guide  
600  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
•coprocessorregs  
Note: You cannot use the stdwinregs and stdwinregsdetailed  
parameters simultaneously.  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$ get system crash info numentries 1 showview general ctrlandstatusregs  
stackregs stackinfo altwinregs stdwinregs coprocessorregs  
Output:  
General crash info  
Crash Id  
: 1  
Crash IU  
: 0  
Time of Crash  
DP Version  
CP Version  
Crash Cause  
SystemUpTime  
: Thu Jan 01 00:00:43 1970  
: DP_B02_10_15_09_ip1000a  
: COL2.10.3.0.060317  
: CP crashed after DP Init  
Days  
Hours  
Mins  
Secs  
--------------------------------------------------------  
0
0
0
43  
User Crash Info :  
Control And Status Registers  
PSR Reg  
: 0x940060c7  
Wim Reg  
: 0x1  
Single Fault PC  
Double Fault PC  
Y Reg MSW  
: 0x4d3cdb8  
: 0x0  
Single Fault nPC  
Double Fault nPC  
Y Reg LSW  
: 0x4d3cdbc  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x12345678  
Single Fault Trap Num : 0x7  
Double Fault Trap Num : 0xffffffff  
Fault Status Reg  
IER  
: 0x14  
: 0x2000  
Double Fault Reg  
Trap Base Reg  
: 0xcf70  
: 0x4f7a070  
Alternate Window # 0x1f  
Reg#:Local  
0 : 0x0  
2 : 0x0  
4 : 0x0  
6 : 0x0  
:
In  
|Reg#:Local  
:
In  
|
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
| 1 : 0x0  
| 3 : 0x0  
| 5 : 0x0  
| 7 : 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
Alternate Window # 0x1e  
Reg#:Local In  
:
|Reg#:Local  
:
In  
|
IP DSLAM  
601  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0 : 0x0  
2 : 0x0  
4 : 0x0  
6 : 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
| 1 : 0x0  
| 3 : 0x0  
| 5 : 0x0  
| 7 : 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
Alternate Window # 0x1d  
Reg#:Local  
0 : 0x0  
2 : 0x0  
4 : 0x0  
6 : 0x0  
:
In  
|Reg#:Local  
| 1 : 0x0  
| 3 : 0x0  
| 5 : 0x0  
| 7 : 0x0  
:
In  
|
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
....  
....  
....  
Alternate Window # 0x18  
Reg#:Local  
0 : 0x0  
2 : 0x0  
4 : 0x0  
6 : 0x0  
:
In  
|Reg#:Local  
| 1 : 0x0  
| 3 : 0x0  
| 5 : 0x0  
| 7 : 0x0  
:
In  
|
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
Current Standard Window Dump # 0x8  
Registers :  
Global  
:
Out  
:
Local  
:
In  
New Func Called  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x1  
: 0x30800005  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x52a7164  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x7  
: 0x0  
: 0x2800005  
: 0x2  
: 0x18  
: 0x5  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x1  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bdce0  
: 0x0  
: 0xffff  
: 0x59ec  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bdbb0  
: 0x4f6e040  
: 0x52bdc18  
: 0x4ce765c  
Standard Window Dump # 0x9  
IDL series User Guide  
602  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registers :  
Global  
: 0x0  
:
Out  
:
Local  
: 0x1  
:
In  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x30800005  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bde30  
: 0x2  
: 0xf  
: 0x7  
: 0x2800005  
: 0x2  
: 0x4fcbf38  
: 0xf  
: 0x18  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bdce0  
: 0x0  
: 0x567  
: 0x5c67000  
: 0x0  
: 0x51eb851f  
: 0x52bdc98  
: 0x4ce591c  
: 0x52bdc18  
: 0x4ce765c  
: 0x0  
Standard Window Dump # 0xa  
Registers :  
Global  
: 0x0  
:
Out  
: 0x0  
:
Local  
:
In  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x5b70ed0  
: 0x542a810  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0xf  
: 0x52bde18  
: 0x20000000  
: 0x0  
: 0x7  
: 0x4fcbf38  
: 0xf  
: 0x5abc6f8  
: 0x18  
: 0x542a810  
: 0x5c36448  
: 0x5b69300  
: 0x52bdd18  
: 0x4ce52f0  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x567  
: 0x4f6cbb8  
: 0xffffffff  
: 0x51eb851f  
: 0x52bdc98  
: 0x4ce591c  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bdcd9  
....  
....  
....  
Wim Window # 0x0  
Registers :  
Global  
: 0x0  
:
Out  
: 0x0  
:
Local  
: 0x0  
:
In  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x0  
: 0xb  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x7  
: 0x0  
: 0x18  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0xffffffff  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bdff8  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x5c67410  
: 0x4f62f7c  
Standard Window Dump # 0x1  
IP DSLAM  
603  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Registers :  
Global  
: 0x0  
:
Out  
: 0x0  
:
Local  
: 0x0  
:
In  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x57e2688  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x52bd8e5  
: 0x1  
: 0x7  
: 0x0  
: 0xf7  
: 0x18  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0xe7  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x54758a4  
: 0x40  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x5c67410  
: 0x4f62f7c  
: 0x8000  
: 0x5c67410  
: 0x4d501fc  
: 0x52a69a8  
Standard Window Dump # 0x2  
Registers :  
Global  
: 0x0  
:
Out  
:
Local  
:
In  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
: 0x57e2688  
: 0x0  
: 0x944060c2  
: 0x4d4bbec  
: 0xedd  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x7  
: 0xf7  
: 0x4d4bbf0  
: 0x2000708  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x18  
: 0xe7  
: 0x4f6cca8  
: 0x144805cc  
: 0x5c67400  
: 0x0  
: 0x54758a4  
: 0x40  
: 0x0  
: 0x5c67000  
: 0x0  
: 0x0  
: 0x5c67410  
: 0x4d501fc  
: 0x5c67410  
: 0x4a58968  
: 0x1  
Coprocessor Register Dump  
CCSR Register  
: 0x2f7f72a7  
: 0xfe5bf8b7  
CCCRC Register  
: 0x7fffffff  
CCPR Register  
CCIR Register  
: 0xffffffff  
: 0xfffffffe  
CCIBR Register  
CCOR Register  
: 0xffffffff  
: 0xdfffffff  
CCOBR Register  
Call Stack at the time of Crash :  
StackDepth :  
CallAddress :  
Return Address:  
: 0x4ce765c  
: 0x4ce591c  
: 0x4ce52f0  
Frame Ptr : StackPtr  
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
: 0x4f6e040  
:0x52bdc18 0x52bdbb0  
:
: 0x4ce765c  
: 0x4ce591c  
: 0x4ce52f0  
: 0x4ce3140  
: 0x4ce333c  
: 0x4ce44dc  
:0x52bdc98  
:0x52bdd18  
:0x52bdd90  
:0x52bde30  
:0x52bdec8  
:0x52bdf90  
:
0x52bdc18  
0x52bdc98  
0x52bdd18  
0x52bdd90  
0x52bde30  
0x52bdec8  
:
:
: 0x4ce3140  
: 0x4ce333c  
: 0x4ce44dc  
: 0x4f62830  
:
:
:
Stack dump at the time of Crash:  
0x052bb528: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
IDL series User Guide  
604  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
0x052bb538: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb548: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb558: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb568: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 27 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb578: 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 04 00 00 00 23 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb588: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 04 05 a4 d9 50 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb598: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 12 34 05 a5 14 68  
0x052bb5a8: 01 23 45 67 00 00 21 44 00 00 00 00 05 a4 d9 50  
0x052bb5b8: 05 2b b5 f0 05 bf c4 00 00 00 00 00 80 00 00 02  
0x052bb5c8: 05 2b bb d8 04 a4 0a 40 00 00 00 17 ff ff ff ff  
0x052bb5d8: 05 2b b5 f0 00 00 00 24 00 00 00 15 05 a4 d9 7c  
0x052bb5e8: 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 0d 0a 00 40 04 b8 24 78  
0x052bb5f8: 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 50 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb608: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb618: 00 00 00 21 00 00 21 47 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb628: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a5 14 68 00 00 00 00  
0x052bb638: 05 a5 f2 3c 05 2b b0 08 00 00 00 1d 00 00 00 17  
0x052bb648: cc cc cc cd 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01  
0x052bb658: 00 01 38 00 05 a4 d9 50 ff ff ff bc 00 00 3a d4  
0x052bb668: 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 01 00 00 00 02 05 26 47 f0  
0x052bb678: 00 00 00 00 05 2b b7 28 05 2b bd 88 05 a5 14 50  
0x052bb688: 05 2b bd 88 05 2b b7 28 05 a5 14 68 04 a4 43 8c  
0x052bb698: 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 05 a6 13 2c  
0x052bb6a8: 00 00 00 77 00 00 3a d4 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00  
Task for which stack over flow occur  
_______________________________________  
NO Stack Overflow  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Crash Id  
The crash number.  
Crash IU  
The internal processor number.  
This specifies the time of the crash.  
Version of Crashed DP  
Time of Crash  
DP Version  
CP Version  
Crash Cause  
Version of Crashed CP  
This specifies the crash cause. Following are the possible  
causes:  
- Ctrl Transfer To CP Failed  
IP DSLAM  
605  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- Crash in CP self processing  
- DP Init Failure  
- CP crashed after DP Init  
- DP crashed after DP Init  
- DP internal Failure  
- System in Loop  
- Crash in DP Processing  
SystemUpTime  
PSR Reg  
This specifies the system up time in:  
Days : Hours : Minutes : Seconds  
This specifies the value of the processor state register at the  
time of the crash.  
Wim Reg  
PC  
The window invalid mask register.  
This specifies the value of the program counter at the time of  
the crash.  
nPC  
This specifies the value of the next program counter at the  
time of the crash.  
Y Reg MSW  
Y Reg LSW  
This specifies the value of MSW of the Y Register at the time  
of the crash.  
This specifies the value of LSW of the Y Register at the time of  
the crash.  
Trap Num  
This specifies the number of traps that caused the crash.  
This specifies the value of the Trap Base register at the time of  
the crash.  
Trap Base Reg  
Fault Status Reg  
Double Fault Reg  
IER  
This specifies the value of the Fault Status Register at the time  
of the crash.  
This specifies the value of the Double Fault Register at the  
time of the crash.  
This specifies the value of the Implementation Extension  
Register at the time of the crash.  
Alternate Window - Reg# For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture  
Local  
specifies all local register for Alternate Windows # 24 to 31  
(0x1f to 0x18).  
Alternate Window - Reg# For crashes involving Alternate Windows, this capture  
In  
specifies all input register for Alternate Windows # 24 to  
31(0x1f to 0x18).  
Standard Window Dump  
- Registers - Global  
The Sparclet Global register.  
Standard Window Dump  
- Registers - Out  
The output registers of the specified Sparclet Window.  
The local registers of the specified Sparclet Window.  
Standard Window Dump  
IDL series User Guide  
606  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
- Registers - Local  
Standard Window Dump  
- Registers - In  
The input registers of the specified Sparclet Window.  
CCSR Register  
The CCP Status register.  
The CCP CRC register.  
CCCRC Register  
CCPR Register  
The CCP Polynomial register.  
The CCP InReg register.  
The CCP InBuf register.  
The CCP OutBuf register.  
The CCP OutReg register.  
The callee function address.  
CCIR Register  
CCIBR Register  
CCOBR Register  
CCOR Register  
Stack at the time of the  
Crash - StackDepth -  
CallAddress  
Stack at the time of the  
Crash - StackDepth -  
Return Address  
The return address back to the caller function.  
The frame pointer at the time of the call.  
The stack pointer at the time of the call.  
Stack at the time of the  
Crash - StackDepth -  
Frame Ptr  
Stack at the time of the  
Crash - StackDepth -  
StackPtr  
Stack dump at the time of The stack dump at the time of crash. The total size of the  
Crash  
dump would be the minimum between the hash define 400 and  
the total number of bytes actually in the stack.  
Tasks for which Stack  
Overflow Occurred  
In case the crash is due to stack overflow, the task for which  
stack overflow has occurred will be displayed here. Otherwise,  
it would specify that stack overflow hasn't occurred - meaning  
that the crash is due to some other reason.  
Note:  
The Current Standard Window dump displays the current dump corresponding to  
Global, Out, Local, and In.  
IP DSLAM  
607  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.25.4.2 Get system crash configinfo  
Description:  
This command gets system crash configuration parameters..  
Command Syntax:  
get system crash configinfo  
5.25.4.3 Modify system crash configinfo  
Description:  
This command modifies system crash configuration parameters  
Command Syntax:  
modify system crash configinfo [action reboot | debug]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description:  
Action reboot|debug  
This parameter defines the state of the system after  
a DP IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the  
system shall reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to  
debug, the system shall not reboot and a CLI prompt  
shall be given to the user for further debugging.  
Type  
:Modify - Optional  
Valid values : reboot - debug  
Example:  
$ modify system crash configinfo action reboot  
Output:  
Crash Config Info  
: reboot  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Crash Config Info  
This parameter defines the state of the system after a DP  
IU crashes. If the action is set to reboot, the system shall  
reboot after DP IU crash. If it is set to debug, the system  
shall not reboot and a CLI prompt shall be given to the  
user for further debugging.  
IDL series User Guide  
608  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.25.5 System info Commands  
5.25.5.1 Get system info  
Description:  
This command to get system parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
get system info  
5.25.5.2 Modify system info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify the system parameters.  
Command Syntax:  
modify system info [contact <sys-contact>] [name <sys-name>] [location  
<sys-location>] [vendor <sys-vendor-info>] [logthresh <sys-log-threshold>]  
[systime <systime>] [dst <on |off>] [timezone <timezone>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description:  
contact <sys-contact>  
This contains the textual identification of the contact person  
for this modem, together with information on how to contact  
this person  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters  
This specifies the name of the modem  
Type: Optional  
name <sys-name>  
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters  
This specifies the physical location of this modem Type:  
Optional  
Location <sys-location>  
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters  
This contains the vendor-specific information  
Type: Optional  
vendor  
<sys-vendor-info>  
Valid values: String of up to 63 ASCII Characters  
This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or lower  
than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and represents  
critical traps. Changing the parameter’s value in a flashless  
system shall have no effect as there is no NVRAM support  
present to log traps. Type: Optional  
logthresh  
<sys-logthreshold>  
IP DSLAM  
609  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1-4  
Systime <system-time>  
This specifies the current system time.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: System Time String in format. The total string  
length must be 20 characters. Single digits should be  
prepended with a `0', e.g. `1' should be given as `01' mon dd  
hh:mm:ss year e.g. "Feb 01 21:20:10 2001"  
This specifies if the Daylight Savings Time has been  
enabled or not.  
dst <on | off>  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: on|off  
timezone <timezone>  
Time zone  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: Given below, are the valid values withinì ì,  
followed by their descriptions.  
"IDLW" - International Date Line West  
"NT" - Nome  
"HST" - Hawaii Standard  
ìCAT" - Central Alaska  
"AHST"- Alaska-Hawaii Standard  
"YST" - Yukon Standard  
"PST"- US Pacific Standard  
"MST"- US Mountain Standard  
"CST"- US Central Standard  
"EST"- US Eastern Standard  
"AST"- Atlantic Standard  
"NFST"- Newfoundland Standard  
"NFT"- Newfoundland  
"BRST"-Brazil Standard  
"AT"- Azores  
ìWAT" - West Africa  
"GMT" - Greenwich Mean  
"UTC" - Universal (Coordinated)  
"WET" - Western European  
"CET" - Central European  
"FWT" - French Winter  
"MET" - Middle European  
"MEWT" - Middle European Winter  
"SWT" - Swedish Winter  
"EET" - Eastern Europe, Russia Zone 1  
IDL series User Guide  
610  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
"IST" - Israeli Standard  
"BT" - Baghdad, Russia Zone 2  
"IT" - Iran  
"ZP4" - "Russia Zone 3"  
"ZP5" - "Russia Zone 4"  
"INST" - "Indian Standard"  
"ZP6" - "Russia Zone 5"  
"NST" - "North Sumatra"  
"WAST" - West Australian Standard  
"SSMT" - South Sumatra, Russia Zone 6  
"JT" - Java  
"CCT" - China Coast, Russia Zone 7  
"ROK" - Korean Standard  
"KST" - Korean Standard  
"JST" - Japan Standard, Russia Zone 8  
"CAST" - Central Australian Standard  
"EAST" - Eastern Australian Standard  
"GST" - Guam Standard, Russia Zone 9  
"IDLE" - International Date Line East  
"NZST" - New Zealand Standard  
"NZT" - New Zealand  
Example: ìIDLWî , that stands for International Date  
Line West  
Example:  
$ get system info  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Description  
Name  
: Columbia  
: conexant.com  
Location  
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,  
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A  
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,  
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A  
: Conexant Systems, Inc.,100 Schulz Drive,  
RedBank,NJ 07701,U.S.A  
: 0  
Contact  
Vendor  
LogThreshold  
Object-id  
: 1.3.6.1.4.1.200  
Up Time(HH:MM:SS) : 5:2:0  
HwVersion : c023b6d3  
IP DSLAM  
611  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
CPSwVersion  
DPSwVersion  
System Time  
Time Zone  
DST  
: COL2.6.3.0.040707  
:
: Thu Jan 01 05:02:00 1970  
: GMT  
: off  
Services  
: physical datalink internet end-to-end applications  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Description  
Name  
This is a textual description of the entity.  
This specifies the name of the system.  
This specifies the physical location of this node.  
This shows the textual identification of the contact person  
for this managed node, together with the information on  
how to contact this person.  
Location  
Contact  
Vendor  
This shows the vendor-specific information.  
This specifies the severity level of the trap equal to or  
lower than that shall be logged. 1 is the lowest and  
represents critical traps.  
LogThreshold  
Object-id  
This shows the vendor's authoritative identification of the  
network management subsystem contained in the entity.  
This specifies the time in seconds since the system is up.  
This specifies the hardware and firmware version of the  
system.  
Up Time  
HwVersion  
CPSwVersion  
DPSwVersion  
System Time  
Time Zone  
This specifies the software version of the CP.  
This specifies the software version of the DP.  
This shows the current system time.  
This specifies the time zone that has been set on the  
modem.  
DST  
This specifies whether Daylight Saving Time has been  
enabled or not.  
Services  
This specifies the functionality provided by this node.  
These may be: physical, datalink, internet, end-to-end, or  
applications.  
References:  
Get/modify nbsize  
Get system stats  
IDL series User Guide  
612  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.25.5.3 Get rmon idletime  
Description:  
Use this command to display a list of idle time records.  
Command Syntax:  
get rmon idletime [numentries <numentries-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description:  
Numentries  
This specifies last numentries idle time records  
to be displayed  
<numentries-val>  
Type: Optional  
Valid values : 1 to 6  
Default : 10  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$ get rmon idletime numentries 1  
Output:  
$get rmon idletime numentries 1  
Start Time  
End Time  
Total  
Time  
Idle  
Util %  
Time  
---------------------------------------------------------------------------  
Thu Jan 1 12:34:51 1970 Thu Jan 1 12:35:00 1970 10s 7s  
30  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Start Time  
This specifies the starting time of the period for  
which the idle time was recorded  
End Time  
Total Time  
Idle Time  
This specifies the end time of the period for  
which the idle time was recorded  
This specifies the total time (in seconds) elapsed  
in this period.  
This specifies the time (in seconds) for which the  
IP DSLAM  
613  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
system was idle during this period.  
This specifies the Utilization (in percentage) of  
the system during this period  
Util %  
5.25.6 System manuf info Commands  
5.25.6.1 Get system manuf info  
Description:  
This command is used to display manufacturing text information in the system.  
Command Syntax:  
get system manuf info  
Example:  
$ get system manuf info  
Output:  
CpeUtopiaMode  
NetUtopiaMode  
CpeUtopiaMaster  
MaxEthMacPhy  
CpeUtopiaFreq  
Eth Speed  
: Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit  
: Tx 16 Bit Rx 8 Bit  
: True  
NetUtopiaMaster  
ColumbiaIdSel  
: False  
: 18  
: 2  
: 40 MHz  
: 100 Mbps  
S.No | SelfMacAddr  
| EthPortIdSel |  
EthType  
---------------------------------------------------  
1
2
| 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF | 16  
| 00:BB:CC:DD:EE:FE | 17  
|
|
Data  
Data  
Mgmt  
Mgmt  
Dsl manuf Text Info  
---------------------  
Num of LBRams  
Num of Ports  
Chip Type  
: 2  
: 24  
: G24  
Num of Chips  
Interface Type  
: 2  
: Host Bus  
Serial Number  
Vendor Id  
: <co-0123456>  
: FFBSGSPN  
: Z3219  
Version Number  
Chip No  
Base Addr  
LBRam  
-------------------------------  
IDL series User Guide  
614  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
1
2
0x84a00000  
0x84a00c00  
0
1
Logical To Physical Port Mapping  
--------------------------------  
[ 0 - 7 ]  
[ 8 - 15 ]  
[ 16 - 23 ]  
[ 24 - 31 ]  
[ 32 - 39 ]  
[ 40 - 47 ]  
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10  
11  
12  
13  
14  
15  
16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23  
24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31  
32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39  
40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47  
UART manuf Text Info  
---------------------  
Num of UARTs  
: 1  
: 1  
HSSL Port Id  
Data Bits  
Parity  
Baud Rate  
Stop Bit  
: 9600  
: 8  
: 2  
: Even  
: Console  
UART Mode  
: Polling  
Application Type  
$
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
CpeUtopiaMode  
NetUtopiaMode  
CpeUtopiaMaster  
Mode of operation of CPE side Utopia interface  
Mode of operation of NET side Utopia interface  
This specifies whether CPE side Utopia interface is master  
This specifies whether NET side Utopia interface is  
master  
NetUtopiaMaster  
MaxEthMacPhy  
This specifies the maximum number of MACs that can be  
configured  
Specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which is connected  
to IDSEL pin of the Columbia  
ColumbiaIdSel  
CpeUtopiaFreq  
Eth Speed  
CPE Frequency for Utopia Interface  
This specifies the speed of operation. Supported speeds  
are – 10 Mbps, 100 Mbps, and 1000 Mbps. It is a bitmask.  
This specifies the self MAC address  
SelfMacAddr  
EthPortIdSel  
This specifies the address bit in the PCI bus, which  
is connected to IDSEL pin of the Ethernet device  
IP DSLAM  
615  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
This specifies the Defines the ethernet types – data  
, mgmt, or both. It is a bitmask.  
EthType  
Num of LBRams  
Num of Chips  
Num of Ports  
This specifies the number of LBRams in the system.  
This specifies the number of Chips in the system.  
This specifies the number of Ports per Chip in the system.  
This specifies the InterfaceType. Following are the values it  
can take – Host Bus, PCI, Utopia  
Interface Type  
Chip Type  
This specifies the Type of Chip – G24, G16, and octane.  
This specifies the vendor specific string that identifies the  
vendor equipment.  
Serial Number  
Vendor Id  
This specifies the binary vendor identification field.  
This specifies the vendor specific version number  
sent by this ATU as part of the initialization message  
This specifies the base address of the chip.  
This specifies the LBRam associated with the chip  
Version Number  
Base Addr  
LBRam  
Logical To Physical  
Port Mapping  
No of UARTs  
HSSL Port Id  
Baud Rate  
This specifies the Logical To Physical Port Mapping.  
This specifies the number of UARTs configured.  
This specifies the HSSL port to be used for UART.  
This specifies the Baud Rate of the port  
Data Bits  
This specifies the number of data bits to be used  
This specifies the stop bits used on HSSL – 1, 2, 1.5  
This specifies the parity used on HSSL – even, odd, none  
This specifies the UART Mode – polling, interrupt based  
This specifies the application name using this UART.  
Stop Bit  
Parity  
UART Mode  
Application Type  
5.25.7 System reboot info Commands  
5.25.7.1 Get system reboot info  
Description:  
This command is used for displaying a list of reboot failures that were encountered  
when the system was trying to come up.  
Command Syntax:  
get system reboot info [numentries]  
IDL series User Guide  
616  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description:  
numentries  
<numentries-val>  
This specifies the last <numentries> number of  
reboot failures recorded in the system.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values : 1 to 100  
Default : 1  
Example:  
$ get system reboot info numentries 1  
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
CP Bin Version  
DP Bin Version  
Time of Reboot  
: 1.6  
: 1.8  
: Thu Jan 2 12:34:56 1970  
Reboot Failure Cause : DP Init Failure  
Reboot Type  
: Secondary CFG  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
The control Plane Version with which the system  
Control Plane Version  
could not come up.  
The data Plane Version with which the system  
could not come up.  
Data Plane Version  
Time of Reboot  
Time at which the reboot failure occured.  
This tells the type of reboot with which the  
system is trying to come up. The various possible  
values are :-  
Type of Reboot  
Last, Back Up, Default, Minimum, Clean.  
This tells the various causes of failure that  
system encountered while rebooting. It can be :-  
Sdram CP Decompress failed  
Nvram CP Decompress failed  
Sdram DP Decompress failed  
Failure Cause  
Nvram DP Decompress failed  
DP Init Failure  
Nvm CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch  
Nvm CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch  
Sdram CP Nvm DP CI Mismatch ＃  
IP DSLAM  
617  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Sdram CP Sdram DP CI Mismatch  
Sdram CP All DP CI Mismatch  
Nvm CP All DP CI Mismatch  
Applying Last cfg failed  
Applying BackUp cfg failed  
Applying Min cfg failed  
Applying Nvm FD failed  
Applying Sdram FD failed  
Nvm CP Last CFG CI Mismatch  
Nvm CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch  
Sdram CP Last CFG CI Mismatch  
Sdram CP Backup CFG CI Mismatch  
NVRAM CP had invalid sign  
SDRAM CP had invalid sign  
Control Plane wrongly linked  
CP mem req exceeds limit  
Applying Clean cfg Failed  
5.25.8 Nbize Commands  
5.25.8.1 Get nbsize  
Description:  
Use this command to view System Sizing parameters available on next boot.  
Command Syntax:  
get nbsize  
5.25.8.2 Modify nbsize  
Description:  
Use this command to modify System Sizing parameters available on next boot.  
Command Syntax:  
modify nbsize [ maxatmport <maxatmport-val> ] [ maxvcperport  
<maxvcperport-val> ] [ maxvc <maxvc-val> ] [ maxatmoam <maxatmoam-val> ]  
[ maxrmon <maxrmon-val> ] [ maxnumethprioqs <maxnumethprioqs-val> ]  
[ maxnumeoaprioqs <maxnumeoaprioqs-val> ] [ maxmulticast  
<maxmulticast-val> ] [ maxmac <maxmac-val> ] [ maxhashbuck  
<maxhashbuck-val> ] [ maxnumvlan <maxnumvlan-val> ] [ maxvlanidval  
<maxvlanidval-val> ] [ maxnumacentry <maxnumacentry-val> ] [ devcap IVL |  
IDL series User Guide  
618  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
SVL | none ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted | Residential ]  
[ maxhpriotreenodes <maxhpriotreenodes-val> ] [ maxlpriotreenodes  
<maxlpriotreenodes-val> ] [ maxclfrtrees <maxclfrtrees-val> ] [ maxclfrprofiles  
<maxclfrprofiles-val> ] [ maxinrules <maxinrules-val> ] [ maxoutrules  
<maxoutrules-val> ] [ maxinhpriosubrules <maxinhpriosubrules-val> ]  
[ maxinlpriosubrules <maxinlpriosubrules-val> ] [ maxouthpriosubrules  
<maxouthpriosubrules-val> ] [ maxoutlpriosubrules <maxoutlpriosubrules-val> ]  
[ mcastcap ivmcapable | svmcapable | none ] [ ridcap irdcapable | srdcapable ]  
[ maxnumac <maxnumac-val> ] [ maxnumsrcmac <maxnumsrcmac-val> ]  
[ vlanmode nativemode | stackedmode ] [ svlanprotocolid  
<svlanprotocolid-val> ] [ tvlanprotocolid <tvlanprotocolid-val> ] [ tvlanid  
<tvlanid-val> ] [ abondglbctrlvpi <abondglbctrlvpi-val> ] [ abondglbctrlvci  
<abondglbctrlvci-val> ] [ abondglbsidfmt EightBitSid | TwelveBitSid ]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
maxatmport  
Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxatmport-val>  
Valid values: 1 -144  
maxvcperport  
Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port. Type:  
Modify － Optional  
<maxvcperport-val>  
Valid values: 1 -8  
maxvc <maxvc-val>  
Maximum number of VCs possible in the system. Type:  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - (144 * 8)  
maxatmoam  
Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a  
time.  
<maxatmoam-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 10  
maxrmon <maxrmon-val>  
Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied  
simultaneously in the system  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 20  
maxnumethprioqs  
This specifies the max number of priority queues that can  
be configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet  
interface.  
<maxnumethprioqs-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
maxnumeoaprioqs  
This specifies the max number of priority queues that can  
be configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface  
<maxnumeoaprioqs-val>  
IP DSLAM  
619  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -8  
maxmulticast  
Maximum number of multicast groups that can be  
configured in the system  
<maxmulticast-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
maxmac <maxmac-val>  
Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by  
the system. This should be a multiple of 32  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4000  
maxhashbuck  
Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.  
This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxhashbuck-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 8192  
maxnumvlan  
Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the  
Bridge either statically or dynamically  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxnumvlan-val>  
Valid values: 0 - 512  
maxvlanidval  
Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxvlanidval-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
maxnumacentry  
Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be  
configured on the Bridge  
<maxnumacentry-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 512  
devcap IVL | SVL | none  
Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked  
Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans. Type: Modify －  
Optional  
bridgingmode Restricted This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value  
|Unrestricted |  
Residential  
residential species that packets coming from CPE side  
would be forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In  
case of restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a  
lookup and if the destination is another CPE port, the packet  
would be dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed.  
Unrestricted bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all  
cases.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
maxhpriotreenodes  
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access  
priority that can be created.  
<maxhpriotreenodes-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
620  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: 1 -32  
maxlpriotreenodes  
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access  
priority that can be created.  
<maxlpriotreenodes-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -256  
maxclfrtrees  
Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxclfrtrees-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 63  
maxclfrprofiles  
Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<maxclfrprofiles-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 61  
maxinrules  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be  
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is  
ignored.  
<maxinrules-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -275  
maxoutrules  
Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be  
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is  
ignored.  
<maxoutrules-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 -25  
maxinhpriosubrules  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －  
Optional  
<maxinhpriosubrules-val>  
Valid values: 1 -75  
maxinlpriosubrules  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －  
Optional  
<maxinlpriosubrules-val>  
Valid values: 1 -425  
maxouthpriosubrules  
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high  
<maxouthpriosubrules-val> access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －  
Optional  
Valid values: 1 -25  
maxoutlpriosubrules  
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored. Type: Modify －  
Optional  
<maxoutlpriosubrules-val>  
IP DSLAM  
621  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: 1 -175  
mcastcap ivmcapable  
|svmcapable | none  
It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device  
capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value.  
If the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable  
then the only valid value for this field is none. If the device  
capability is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't  
have value none. ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set  
together.In case of Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to  
Virtual Vlans.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
ridcap irdcapable  
|srdcapable  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This  
database contains information about the routes in the  
system. Each RID identifies a flow and defines route related  
information for that flow. The RID defines a flow based on  
the VLAN Id. The database can be of 2 types,  
IRD( Independent Routing Database) where there are more  
than one RIDs in the system and each RID defines separate  
routes in context of itself. If VlanId <X> and RID <X> have  
been created and the routing database is configured for  
IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall define flow for packets  
coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other mode for the database  
is SRD( Shared Routing Database) where there is a single  
RID in the system and all flows map to this RID. This RID  
has to be explicitly created and no more than 1 RID can be  
created in the system in this mode. Flows for all created  
VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
maxnumac  
It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators  
supported.  
<maxnumac-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
maxnumsrcmac  
It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses  
that can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE  
interfaces.  
<maxnumsrcmac-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 8  
vlanmode nativemode  
|stackedmode  
Vlan Mode Type: Modify Optional  
svlanprotocolid  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
<svlanprotocolid-val>  
IDL series User Guide  
622  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This  
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0x8100 - 0xFFFF  
tvlanprotocolid  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan (0x8100). This  
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<tvlanprotocolid-val>  
Valid values: 0x8100 － 0xFFFF  
tvlanid <tvlanid-val>  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This  
attribute is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
abondglbctrlvpi  
This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will  
be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding  
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all  
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the  
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot  
only.  
<abondglbctrlvpi-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
abondglbctrlvci  
This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will  
be created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding  
protocol. This is a system wide parameter and applies to all  
the abond group interfaces which can be created in the  
system. Change in this value will be applied at next boot  
only.  
<abondglbctrlvci-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
abondglbsidfmt  
EightBitSid |  
This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group  
Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in  
this value will be applied at next boot only.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
TwelveBitSid  
Example:  
$ get nbsize  
IP DSLAM  
623  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Max ATM Ports  
Max VCs  
: 48  
Max VC per Port  
Max OAM activities  
Bridging Mode  
: 8  
: 10  
:
: 384  
: 20  
Max RMON probes  
Residential  
Max Multicast groups  
Max Hash buckets  
Max VlanId Value  
Dev Capabilities  
Max Num EOA Prio Qs  
: 256  
Max MAC addresses  
Max Vlans  
: 4000  
: 512  
: 8192  
: 4095  
Max num Static Mac Entries : 512  
: IVL  
: 3  
Max Num Eth Prio Qs  
Max Low Prio Tree Nodes  
Max Clfr Profiles  
: 8  
: 200  
: 63  
Max High Prio Tree Nodes : 100  
Max Clfr Trees  
Max In Rules  
: 63  
: 250  
Max Out Rules  
: 50  
Max In HighPrio SubRules : 100  
Max Out HighPrio SubRules : 50  
Max In LowPrio SubRules  
Max Out LowPrio SubRules  
: 300  
: 150  
Mcast Capabilities  
: ivmcapable  
Max Access Concentrators : 2  
Max Src MAC Addresses  
Vlan Mode  
: 4  
: 1  
: 0x9100  
: 1  
S Vlan Protocol Id  
T Vlan Id  
T Vlan Protocol Id  
AbondGlbCtrlVci  
: 0x9200  
: 20  
AbondGlbCtrlVpi  
AbondGlbSidFmt  
Ridcap  
: 0  
: TwelveBitSID  
: srdcapable  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Max ATM Ports  
Max VC per Port  
Max VCs  
Maximum number of ATM ports that can be configured  
Maximum number of VCs possible per ATM port.  
Maximum number of VCs possible in the system.  
Max OAM activities  
Max RMON probes  
Maximum number of OAM activities that can be active at a time.  
Maximum number RMON probes that can be applied  
simultaneously in the system  
Bridging Mode  
This specifies the state of full bridging on the bridge. Value  
residential species that packets coming from CPE side would be  
forwarded to the net side port without a lookup. In case of  
restricted bridging, the packets would undergo a lookup and if  
the destination is another CPE port, the packet would be  
dropped, i.e. CPE to CPE traffic is not allowed. Unrestricted  
bridging is forwarding based on lookup in all cases.  
IDL series User Guide  
624  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Max Multicast groups  
Max MAC addresses  
Max Hash buckets  
Max Vlans  
Maximum number of multicast groups that can be configured in  
the system  
Maximum number of MAC addresses that can be learned by the  
system. This should be a multiple of 32  
Maximum number of hash buckets for the Forwarding table.  
This value should be a power of 2. (1, 2, 4, 8 ,...)  
Maximum number of VLANs that can be configured on the  
Bridge either statically or dynamically  
Max VlanId Value  
Max num Static Mac  
Entries  
Maximum value of VLAN ID that this Bridge can support  
Maximum number of Static UCast Entries that can be  
configured on the Bridge  
Dev Capabilities  
Device Capabilities of Q-Bridge MIB. In case of Stacked Vlan  
Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.  
Max Num EOA Prio Qs This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be  
configured on a bridge port created on EOA interface  
Max Num Eth Prio Qs  
This specifies the max number of priority queues that can be  
configured on a bridge port created over an ethernet interface.  
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of high access priority  
that can be created.  
Max High Prio Tree  
Nodes  
Max Low Prio Tree  
Nodes  
Maximum number of classifier tree nodes of low access priority  
that can be created.  
Max Clfr Trees  
Max Clfr Profiles  
3Max In Rules  
Maximum number of classifier trees that can be created.  
Maximum number of classifier profiles that can be created.  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress rules that can be  
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.  
Maximum number of generic filter egress rules that can be  
created.This parameter is deprecated and the value is ignored.  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of high  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored.  
Max Out Rules  
Max In HighPrio  
SubRules  
Max In LowPrio  
SubRules  
Maximum number of generic filter ingress subrules of low  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored.  
Max Out HighPrio  
SubRules  
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of high  
access priority that can be created.This parameter is  
deprecated and the value is ignored.  
Max Out LowPrio  
SubRules  
Maximum number of generic filter egress subrules of low access  
priority that can be created.This parameter is deprecated and  
the value is ignored.  
Mcast Capabilities  
It denotes the Multicast Device Capability. If the device  
IP DSLAM  
625  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
capability is ivlcapable then svmcapable is not a valid value. If  
the device capability is neither ivlcapable nor svmcapable then  
the only valid value for this field is none. If the device capability  
is ivlcapable or svlcapable then this field can't have value none.  
ivmcapable and svmcapable can't be set together.In case of  
Stacked Vlan Mode this shall apply to Virtual Vlans.  
It denotes the maximum number of Access Concentrators  
supported.  
Max Access  
Concentrators  
Max Src MAC  
Addresses  
It denotes the maximum number of Source MAC addresses that  
can be used across the different PPPOE and IPOE interfaces.  
Vlan Mode  
Vlan Mode  
S Vlan Protocol Id  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute  
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
T Vlan Protocol Id  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute  
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
T Vlan Id  
This specifies the ProtocolId value to be used for Stacked  
Vlan/Service Vlan/Provider Vlan/Second Vlan tag. It is  
recommended to keep the value for this different from  
ProtocolId value defined for 802.1q Vlan(0x8100). This attribute  
is applicable only in 'VLAN Stacking mode'.  
AbondGlbCtrlVpi  
This VPI value will be used for the control channel which will be  
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This  
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group  
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this  
value will be applied at next boot only.  
AbondGlbCtrlVci  
This VCI value will be used for the control channel which will be  
created to run the ATM based multi pair bonding protocol. This  
is a system wide parameter and applies to all the abond group  
interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this  
value will be applied at next boot only.  
AbondGlbSidFmt  
Ridcap  
This SID Format value will be used for all the Abond Group  
Interfaces which can be created in the system. Change in this  
value will be applied at next boot only.  
RID refers to the Routing Information Database. This database  
IDL series User Guide  
626  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
contains information about the routes in the system. Each RID  
identifies a flow and defines route related information for that  
flow. The RID defines a flow based on the VLAN Id. The  
database can be of 2 types, IRD( Independent Routing  
Database) where there are more than one RIDs in the system  
and each RID defines separate routes in context of itself. If  
VlanId <X> and RID <X> have been created and the routing  
database is configured for IRD, than routes in RID <X> shall  
define flow for packets coming on VLAN Id <X>. The other  
mode for the database is SRD( Shared Routing Database)  
where there is a single RID in the system and all flows map to  
this RID. This RID has to be explicitly created and no more than  
1 RID can be created in the system in this mode. Flows for all  
created VLANs shall map to this RID for routing.  
5.25.9 System Stats Commands  
5.25.9.1 Get system stats  
Description:  
Use this command to view System Statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get system stats  
5.25.9.2 Reset system stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset System Statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
reset system stats  
Example:  
$ get system stats  
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
Verbose Mode On  
CPE Ucast Addr Count  
NET Ucast Addr Count  
: 10  
: 20  
DnLink Ucast Addr Count : 80  
CPE Learn Entry Discards : 90  
IP DSLAM  
627  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
DnLink Learn Entry Discards : 30  
NET Learn Entry Discards : 100  
Moved Dyn Addrs Count : 110  
Mcast Lookup Fail Count : 120  
Rx Ctl Pkts Count : 130  
Dyn Addr Conflicts Static  
Ucast Lookup Fail Count  
Tx Ctl Pkts Count  
: 40  
: 50  
: 60  
: 70  
Ctl Pkts Discards Count  
PPPOE Session Look Up Failures: 5  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
CPE  
Ucast  
Addr Number of unicast addresses, which were learned from the  
Count  
CPE ports.  
DnLink Ucast Addr Number of unicast addresse,s which were learned from the  
Count  
Downlink port.  
Number of addresses which, were not learned from the  
CPE ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.  
Number of addresses which, were not learned from the  
Downlink port, due to lack of space in the for-warding  
table.  
Learn Entry Discards  
DnLink Learn Entry  
Discards  
Dyn Addr Conflicts Number of times a learned address conflicted with a static  
Static  
address.  
Moved Dyn Addrs Number of times a learned address moved from one port  
Count  
to another.  
Ucast Lookup Fail  
Count  
Number of times Unicast address lookup failed.  
Mcast Lookup Fail  
Count  
Number of times Multicast address lookup failed.  
Tx Ctl Pkts Count  
Rx Ctl Pkts Count  
Ctl Pkts Discards  
Count  
Number of packets sent to the Control module.  
Number of packets received from Control module.  
Number Control module packets discarded.  
NumNetUcastAddrCo  
unt  
Number of unicast addresses which were learned from the  
Net ports.  
NumNetLearnEntryDi  
scards  
Number of addresses, which were not learned from the  
Net ports, due to lack of space in the forwarding table.  
References:  
get/modify system info  
get/modify nbsize  
IDL series User Guide  
628  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.25.10 System Traps Commands  
5.25.10.1 Reset traps  
Description:  
Use this command to delete all trap logs.  
Command Syntax:  
reset traps  
Mode :  
super-user  
Example:  
$ reset traps  
Output:  
Set Done  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
get traps command.  
5.25.11 System Traps Log Table Commands  
5.25.11.1 Get traps  
Description:  
Use this command to get the listing of all Trap Log Table entries (tTraps) or the last  
few tentries (Traps). This command is not supported on a flashless system.  
Command Syntax:  
get traps [num-of-traps]  
IP DSLAM  
629  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Num-of-traps  
This specifies the maximum number of (entries)  
traps to be displayed from trap log table; if not  
specified then all entries are displayed.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values : 0 to 4294967295  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$ get traps  
Output  
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : ATM VC Up :Interface Name–  
aal5-0  
Thu Jan 01 00:00:13 1970 : STATUS ALARM : System Up  
Output Fields  
FIELD  
Description  
Trap time  
This specifies the time at which the trap was logged.  
This specifies the severity level of the trap. It can be –  
CRITICAL ALARM  
Trap severity  
MAJOR ALARM  
WARNING  
STATUS ALARM  
Trap name  
This specifies the name of the trap. It can be –  
System Init Failed - This trap is originated at the time of system initialization  
failures. The failure could be due to an internal error or due to a  
wrong/corrupted configuration file. Trap parameters are Module and Cause.  
System Up - This trap is originated after the unit boots up successfully.  
ADSL ATUC Up - This trap indicates that the DSL port is in data mode.  
ADSL ATUC Down - This trap indicates that the DSL port is no longer in data  
mode.  
ATM Interface Up - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally up.  
Trap parameter is Interface No.  
ATM Interface Down - This trap indicates that the ATM port is operationally  
down. Trap parameter is Interface No.  
ETHER Interface Up - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is  
IDL series User Guide  
630  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface No.  
ETHER Interface Down - This trap indicates that the Ethernet port is  
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface No.  
ATM VC Up - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally up. Trap  
parameter is Interface Name.  
ATM VC Down - This trap indicates that the ATM VC is operationally down.  
Trap parameter is Interface Name.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.  
EoA Interface Up – This trap indicates that the EOA interface is  
operationally up. Trap parameter is Interface name  
EOA Interface Down - This trap indicates that the EOA Interface is  
operationally down. Trap parameter is Interface Name.  
ADSL Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Framing  
15-minute interval threshold has reached.  
ADSL Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Signal  
15-minute interval threshold has reached  
ADSL Loss of Power Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of Power  
15-minute interval threshold has reached.  
ADSL Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Errored  
Second 15-minute interval threshold has reached  
ADSL ADUC Tx Rate changed - This trap indicates that the ATUCs transmit  
rate has changed (RADSL mode only).  
ADSL Loss of Link Threshold hit- This trap indicates that Loss of Link  
15-minute interval threshold has reached  
ADSL ATUC Init failed - This trap indicates that ATUC initialization failed. See  
adslAtucCurrStatus for potential reasons  
ADSL Failed Fast Retrains Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Failed  
Fast Retrains 15-minute threshold has reached  
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This  
trap indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored  
Seconds has reached.  
IP DSLAM  
631  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has  
reached.  
ADSL Unavailable Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
unavailable seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached  
ADSL Severely Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
severely errored seconds-line 15-minute threshold has reached.  
Aggregator Interface Up - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface is  
operationally up.  
Aggregator Interface Down - This trap indicates that the aggregator interface  
is operationally down.  
The OP state of ADSL line <interface name> has changed from <previous  
status> to <current status>- This trap indicates the change in the operational  
status of the port.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame Threshold hit - This  
trap indicates that Loss of Framing 15-minute interval threshold has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached  
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 15-minute interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal Threshold hit - This trap indicates that Loss of  
Signal 15-minute interval threshold has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power Threshold hit - This rap indicates that Loss of  
Power 15-minute interval threshold has  
reached.  
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
Errored Second 15-minute interval threshold has  
reached.  
ADSL ATUR Rate Changed -This trap indicates that the ATUR rate has  
changed (RADSL mode only).  
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the  
mac address has been learned has changed.  
Port binding status changed - This trap indicates that the port on which the  
tracked MAC address is being received has changed.  
Port binding status learnt - This trap indicates that the particular mac  
address has been received for the first time. This trap will also be received if  
the tracked MAC address is received from an existing port and the port from  
IDL series User Guide  
632  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
which it was earlier received has been deleted by now.  
Failed To Get IP Address - This trap indicates that DHCP client could not  
get an ip address from DHCP server.  
Chip Lockup Detected - This trap indicates that a chip lockup has occurred.  
Chip Recovery from Lockup OK - This trap indicates that Chip Recovery  
from Lockup has occurred.  
Chip Recovery from Lockup Failed - This trap indicates that Chip  
Recovery from Lockup has Failed.  
Chip Preinit CheckSum Failed - This trap indicates that Preinit Checksum  
for Chip has Failed  
Xcvr Lockup Detected - This trap indicates that a transceiver lockup has  
occurred.  
Xcvr Recovery from Lockup OK - This trap indicates that a transceiver  
Recovery from Lockup has occurred.  
Xcvr Recovery from Lockup Failed - This trap indicates that a transceiver  
Recovery from Lockup has Failed  
EHDLC Interface Up - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is  
operationally up. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.  
EHDLC Interface Down - This trap indicates that HDLC Interface over EOC is  
operationally down. Trap Parameter is Interface Index.  
Control packet Q congestion start - This trap indicates that Congestion  
has occurred on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.  
Control packet Q congestion stop - This trap indicates that Congestion has  
stopped on data plane to Control plane Packet Queue for the Interface.  
Statistics Reset - This trap indicates that Interface Stats has been reset .  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Frame has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Signal has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Link 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that 1-Day  
interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Link has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Loss of Power has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Errored Seconds has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored Seconds  
has reached.  
ADSL ATUC Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates  
that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUC Unavailable Seconds has reached.  
IP DSLAM  
633  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds  
has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 15-Minute interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has  
reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Frame 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Frame has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Signal 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Signal has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Loss of Power 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Loss of Power has reached  
ADSL ATUR Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap indicates that  
1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Errored Seconds has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Severely Errored Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Severely Errored Seconds  
has reached.  
ADSL ATUR Unavailable Seconds 1-Day Threshold hit - This trap  
indicates that 1-Day interval threshold for ATUR Unavailable Seconds has  
reached.  
PPPOE Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is  
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
PPPOE Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPoE interface is  
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
PPPOE Max Tries in Discovery Stage have exceeded for a PPPoE - This  
trap indicates that the maximum tries for initiation of discovery stage for the  
PPPoE session establishment has exceeded for the PPPoE interface. The  
Trap parameter is the interface name.  
PPPR Interface Up - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is  
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
PPPR Interface Down - This trap indicates that the PPPR interface is  
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
Lock on GAG acquired: This trap specifies that an agent has acquired an  
exclusive lock on GAG. Requests from other agents will not be serviced by  
GAG.  
IDL series User Guide  
634  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Lock on GAG released: This trap specifies that an agent has released lock on  
GAG. Requests from other agents will now be serviced by GAG.  
Bridge port status transitioned to dormant : This trap specifies that bridge  
port status has changed to dormant.  
ATM interface out of deficit : This trap specifies that ATM interface is out of  
deficit.  
ATM VC AAL5 EncapType Changed : This trap specifies that encapsulation  
type of ATM VC AAL5 has changed.  
AutoSensing Config Change Based Stack Tear DownFailed, RETRY:  
Change of Power Management State of ADSL Line: This trap specifies that  
power management state of ADSL line has changed.Chip Local Bus Access  
Failed: This trap specifies that power management state of ADSL line has  
changed.  
IPOA Interface Up: This trap indicates that theIPOA interface is operationally  
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.I  
POA Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOA interface is  
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
IPOE Interface Up: This trap indicates that thePPPR interface is operationally  
up. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
IPOE Interface Down: This trap indicates that the IPOE interface is  
operationally down. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
ABOND Interface Up: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is  
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
ABOND Interface Down: This trap indicates that the ABOND interface is  
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
VCAGGR Interface Up: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is  
operationally up. The trapparameter is the interface name.  
VCAGGR Interface Down: This trap indicates that the VCAGGR interface is  
operationally up. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
SHDSL Loop Attenuation crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop  
attenuation is crossing.  
SHDSL SNR crossing: This trap indicates that the SHDSL loop attenuation is  
crossing.  
SHDSL Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap indicates that  
15-Minute interval threshold for SHDSL Errored Seconds has reached.  
SHDSL Severely Errored Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit : This trap  
indicates that 15- minute interval threshold for ATUC Severely Errored  
Seconds has reached.  
SHDSL CRC Anomalies 15-Minute Threshold hit: This notification indicates  
that the CRC anomalies threshold (as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile  
IP DSLAM  
635  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
table) has been reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint.  
Reached/exceeded is determined by comparing the endpoint's CRC  
anomalies in the current 15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr  
Table) with the specified threshold.  
SHDSL Loss of Sync Word Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This  
notification indicates that the Loss of Sync Word (LOSW) seconds threshold  
(as set in SHDL End point alarm conf profile table) has been  
reached/exceeded for the SHDSL segment endpoint. Reached/exceeded is  
determined by comparing the endpoint's LOSW seconds in the current  
15-minute interval (as set in SHDSL End Point Curr Table) with the specified  
threshold.  
SHDSL Unavailable Seconds 15-Minute Threshold hit: This trap indicates  
that 15-minuteinterval threshold for SHDSL Unavailable Secondshas reached.  
SHDSL Invalid number of Repeaters detected: This trap indicates the  
number of Invalid repeaters detected.  
SHDSL Loopback Failure detected:This trap indicates that loop back failure  
has been detected.  
SHDSL Power Backoff Setting changed: This trap specifies that Operational  
state of VDSL line has changed.  
SHDSL STU-C Init Fail: This notification indicates that STUC failure during  
initialization due to peer STU not able to support requested configuration  
SHDSL Local Power Loss: This trap specifies that local power loss of SHDSL  
Change of OP state of SHDSL line: This trap specifies change of Operational  
state of VDSL line.  
SHDSL Framer OH and Defects Trap: This notification indicates a change in  
values of overhead/defect data transmitted from the remote unit. LOSD,  
SEGA, PS, and SEGD values are reported.  
SHDSL STU-C Up: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is operationally  
up. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
SHDSL STU-C Down: This trap indicates that the SHDSL STU-C is  
operationally down. The trap parameter is the interface name.  
SHDSL Remote ATM Cell Status Response: This trap indicates that remote  
ATM Cell status response has been received.  
SHDSL UTC received in response of STU-R Config Request: This  
notification indicates the remote unit was unable to comply (UTC) with an  
STU-R Configuration Request -Management (EOC Message Id 18).  
SHDSL UTC received in response of Remote EOC request: This  
notification provides a generic unable to comply(UTC) indication. If the remote  
unit is unable to comply with a remote EOC request, this trap indicates the  
noncompliance of the remote unit.  
SHDSL Generic Failure Trap: This notification reports any failure that has  
IDL series User Guide  
636  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
occurred while processing any command issued by the customer.  
This specifies additional parameters describing the trap. Different traps have  
different combinations of trap parameters. There are also some traps with no  
additional parameters. The parameters can be -  
Module - <module name>  
Trap parameters  
Cause - <failure cause>  
Interface - <interface name>  
<user name>  
IP - <IP address>  
Port - <port number>  
VPI - <vpi>  
VCI - <vci>  
Current - <current value>  
Threshold - <threshold value>  
Previous - <previous value>  
References:  
z
z
reset traps command  
logthresh parameter in modify system and get system commands.  
5.25.12 System Version Commands  
5.25.12.1 Get system version  
Description:  
This command is used to get the information of the versions with which the system  
has come up.  
Command Syntax:  
get system version  
Parameters:  
None  
Example:  
$ get system version  
IP DSLAM  
637  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Control Plane Binary : COL 2.6.0.0.040217  
Data Plane Binary  
: DP_B02_06_19  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Control Plane Binary  
This tells about the version of the control plane  
binary with which the system has come up.  
This tells about the version of the data plane binary  
with which the system has come up.  
Data Plane Binary  
5.25.13 Trace Log Configuration Commands  
5.25.13.1 Get trace cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to display the trace configuration for a specific module, or for all  
modules.  
Command Syntax:  
get trace cfg [module <module-name>]  
5.25.13.2 Modify trace cfg  
Description:  
Use this command to modify the trace and log configuration for a specific module  
Command Syntax:  
modify trace cfg module <module-name> [flow <trace-flow>] [level <trace-level>]  
[syslog|net|stdout] [dest <ip-address>] [port <port-number>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
module  
This specifies the module, for which trace/log configuration  
is to be modified.  
<module-name>|all  
Type  
:
Modify – Mandatory  
Get – Optional  
Valid values: GCOS,OAM, CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM,  
EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM, FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP,  
IDL series User Guide  
638  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
GVRP, LACP  
flow<trace-flow>  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter  
for trace flow.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff  
level <trace-level>  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the filter  
for trace level.  
Type  
: Optional  
Valid values: 0x0 to 0xffffffff  
syslog|net|stdout  
This specifies the type of logging to be done. Incase net or  
syslog is specified then dest and port must be specified.  
Type: Optional  
dest<ip-address>  
This specifies the IP address for host for logging for trace  
type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace type stdout  
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;  
else it is invalid  
Valid values: Any valid class A/B/C IP address  
Port number on which, host is listening for trace info to be  
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid  
incase of trace type stdout  
port <port-number>  
Type: Mandatory when type is modified to net or syslog;  
else it is invalid  
Valid values: 0-4294967295  
Mode:  
Super-User  
Example:  
$ modify trace cfg module GAG flow 0x1 level 0x1  
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
Module  
Flow  
Level  
Type  
Destn  
Port  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
GAG  
0x0  
0x0  
Stdout  
0.0.0.0  
0
Set Done  
Module  
Flow  
Level  
Type  
Destn  
Port  
------------------------------------------------------------------------  
GAG 0x1 0x1 Stdout  
0.0.0.0  
0
IP DSLAM  
639  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Verbose Mode Off  
Set Done  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Module  
This specifies the module for trace/log config whose  
information is being displayed: It can be : GCOS,OAM,  
CIN, GAG, CDB, CLI, ATM, EOA, TBG, DSLME, NVM,  
FFC, DNCD, DATAME, GARP, GVRP, LACP  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the  
filter for trace flow.  
Flow  
Level  
Type  
Destn  
This indicates a Hexadecimal bitmask, which sets the  
filter for trace level.  
This specifies the type of logging to be done. It may be:  
Syslog, Net, Stdout  
This specifies the IP address for host for logging for  
trace type syslog and net. It is invalid incase of trace  
type stdout  
Port  
Port number on which host is listening for trace info to be  
logged incase of trace type syslog and net. It is invalid  
incase of trace type stdout  
References:  
z
z
get trace cfg command  
get trace stats command.  
5.25.14 Trace Log Statistics Commands  
5.25.14.1 Get trace stats  
Description:  
Use this command to display trace statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get trace stats  
Parameters:  
None  
IDL series User Guide  
640  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Mode:  
Super-User, User.  
Example:  
$ get trace stats  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On/Off  
Bytes Logged: 2744  
Msgs Logged : 19  
Bytes Discarded : 40595  
Msgs Discarded : 1045  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Bytes Logged  
This specifies the number of bytes logged by the  
tracing/logging module.  
Bytes Discarded  
Msgs Logged  
This specifies the number of bytes discarded by  
the tracing/ logging module due to filtering.  
This specifies the number of message logged by  
the tracing/ logging module.  
Msgs Discarded  
This specifies the number of messages discarded  
by the tracing/logging module due to filtering.  
References:  
z
z
get trace cfg command  
Modify trace cfg command.  
IP DSLAM  
641  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.26 VC Aggregation Commands  
5.26.1 Atm vcaggr intf Commands  
5.26.1.1 Get atm vcaggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get atm vcaggr intf [ifname <interface-name>]  
5.26.1.2 Create atm vcaggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create atm vcaggr intf ifname <interface-name> mapid <mapid-val>  
defaultdnstrmvc <defaultdnstrmvc-val> [enable | disable]  
5.26.1.3 Delete atm vcaggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete atm vcaggr intf ifname<interface-name>  
5.26.1.4 Modify atm vcaggr intf  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify atm vcaggr intf ifname <interface-name> [defaultdnstrmvc  
<defaultdnstrmvc-val>] [enable | disable]  
IDL series User Guide  
642  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
ifname <interface-name> Name of the VC aggregation interface  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Delete － Mandatory  
Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
Valid values: 0 － 142  
mapid <mapid-val>  
It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap table. The  
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being aggregated and the  
priority assignment information. Once the aggregation interface is  
created with the specified MapId, no more entries canbe created in  
the VcAggrMap table for that MapId, however the priority  
assignment can be modified any time  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 144  
defaultdnstrmvc  
Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All the downstream  
priorities that are left unassigned in the VcAggrMap table with the  
associated MapId, will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC  
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in the VcAggrMap  
table.  
<defaultdnstrmvc-val>  
Type: Create － Mandatory  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 － 574  
enable | disable  
Administrative status of the interface.  
Type: Create － Optional  
Modify － Optional  
Valid values: enable, disable  
Default value: enable  
Example:  
$ create atm vcaggr intf ifname VcAggr-0 mapid 1 defaultdnstrmvc aal5-0 enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Ifname  
: VcAggr-0 VC MapId  
: 1  
default downstream VC : aal5-0  
IP DSLAM  
643  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Oper Status  
: Up  
Admin Status : Down  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Ifname  
Name of the VC aggregation interface  
It contains the Id of VcAggrMap in VcAggrMap  
table. The VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs  
being aggregated and the priority assignment  
information. Once the aggregation interface is  
created with the specified MapId, no more entries  
canbe created in the VcAggrMap table for that  
MapId, however the priority assignment can be  
modified any time  
VC MapId  
default downstream  
Default VC for the VC Aggregation interface. All  
the downstream priorities that are left unassigned  
in the VcAggrMap table with the associated MapId,  
will be mapped to the default VC. Default VC  
should be one of the VCs associated with MapId in  
the VcAggrMap table.  
VC  
Oper Status  
The actual/current state of the interface. It can be  
either up or down.  
Admin Status  
The desired state of the interface. It may be either  
Up or Down.  
5.26.2 Atm vcaggr map Commands  
5.26.2.1 Get atm vcaggr map  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get atm vcaggr map [mapid <mapid-val>] [vc <vc-val>]  
IDL series User Guide  
644  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.26.2.2 Create atm vcaggr map  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val> vc <vc-val> [dnstrmpriolist  
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio <upstrmdefprio-val> |none]  
[upstrmregenprio <upstrmregenprio-val> |none]  
5.26.2.3 Delete atm vcaggr map  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val>vc <vc-val>  
5.26.2.4 Modify atm vcaggr map  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify atm vcaggr map mapid <mapid-val> vc <vc-val> [dnstrmpriolist  
{0|1|2|3|4|5|6|7} +|none] [upstrmdefprio <upstrmdefprio-val> |none]  
[upstrmregenprio <upstrmregenprio-val> |none]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
mapid <mapid-val>  
It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The  
VcAggrMap contains the list of VCs being  
aggregated and the associated priorities in  
downstream and upstream directions. Once the  
VC aggregation interface is created with the a  
MapId, no more entries can be created in the  
VcAggrMap table for that MapId  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 24  
IP DSLAM  
645  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
vc <vc-val>  
Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 101 -206  
dnstrmpriolist 0 | 1 | 2 |  
This field specifies the downstream priorities with  
which the specified VC interface shall be  
associated under a VC Aggregation interface.  
This field is used for demultiplexing downstream  
traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities.  
But not two VCs can be mapped to same priority.  
Value None has special significance. It specifies  
that this VC is part of VC Aggregation interface  
but no priority is mapped to it.  
3 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 7 | none  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 8  
upstrmdefprio  
Priority parameter to be used for tagging the  
untagged upstream traffic coming on a VC.  
Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be  
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is  
specified, then bridge port's defprio will be used  
for tagging the untagged packets  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<upstrmdefprio-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 -8  
Default value: 8  
upstrmregenprio  
Priority parameter to be used for retagging the  
tagged upstream traffic coming on a  
VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will be  
done on the basis of this priority.If value None is  
specified, then bridge port's priority regeneration  
map will be used.  
<upstrmregenprio-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 - 8  
Default value: 8  
IDL series User Guide  
646  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Example:  
$ create atm vcaggr map mapid 1 vc aal5-0 dnstrmpriolist 1 3 7 upstrmdefprio 2  
upstrmregenprio 2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
VC map Id  
: 1  
VC Intf  
: aal5-0  
Up Stream Default Priority : 2  
Downstream priority Map  
Up Stream Regen Priority : 2  
: 1 3 7  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VC map Id  
It contains the Id of VcAggregation Map. The VcAggrMap contains  
the list of VCs being aggregated and the associated priorities in  
downstream and upstream directions. Once the VC aggregation  
interface is created with the a MapId, no more entries can be  
created in the VcAggrMap table for that MapId  
VC Intf  
Name of the VC to be part of aggregation.  
Up Stream Default  
Priority  
Priority parameter to be used for tagging the untagged upstream  
traffic coming on a VC. Regeneration of priority at bridge level will  
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then  
bridge port's defprio will be used for tagging the untagged packets  
Priority parameter to be used for retagging the tagged upstream  
traffic coming on a VC.Regeneration of priority at bridge level will  
be done on the basis of this priority.If value None is specified, then  
bridge port's priority regeneration map will be used.  
Up Stream Regen  
Priority  
Downstream priority  
Map  
This field specifies the downstream priorities with which the  
specified VC interface shall be associated under a VC  
Aggregation interface. This field is used for demultiplexing  
downstream traffic. A VC can be mapped to multiple priorities. But  
not two VCs can be mapped to same priority. Value None has  
special significance. It specifies that this VC is part of VC  
Aggregation interface but no priority is mapped to it.  
IP DSLAM  
647  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.27 VLAN Commands  
5.27.1 GVRP Info Commands  
5.27.1.1 Get gvrp info  
Description:  
Use this command to get GVRP information.  
Command Syntax:  
get gvrp info  
5.27.1.2 Modify gvrp info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify GVRP information.  
Command Syntax:  
modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable | disable  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
gvrpstatus enable | disable  
The administrative status requested by management for GVRP  
Type: Optional  
Example:  
$ modify gvrp info gvrpstatus enable  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On:  
VLAN Version Number : 1  
Current VLANS : 1000  
Current VLANS : 1000  
GVRP Status  
: enable  
Set Done  
VLAN Version Number : 1  
GVRP Status  
: enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Set Done  
IDL series User Guide  
648  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Version  
Version Number of IEEE802.1Q, that device  
supports.  
Number  
Current VLANS  
The current number of IEEE 802.1Q VLANs that  
are configured on this device.  
The administrative status requested by  
management for GVRP.  
GVRP Status  
References:  
gvrp port info commands  
gvrp port stats commands  
5.27.2 GVRP Port Info Commands  
5.27.2.1 Get gvrp port info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get gvrp port info [portid <portid-val >]  
5.27.2.2 Modify gvrp port info  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify gvrp port info portid <portid-val > [ portvlanid <portvlanid-val > ]  
[ acceptframetypes all | tagged ] [ ingressfiltering true|false ] [ gvrpstatus  
enable | disable ] [ restrictedvlanreg true|false ][pktpriority <pktpriority-val> ]  
[psvlanid <psvlanid-val> | none] [ppstatus enable | disable] [ctosprofileid  
<ctosprofileid-val> | none]  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
portid <portid-val>  
The bridge port id.  
Type: Modify － Mandatory  
Get － Optional  
IP DSLAM  
649  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1 - 578  
portvlanid  
The VLAN Identifier.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<portvlanid-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
acceptframetypes all  
When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged  
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When  
All, untagged frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on  
this port will be accepted and assigned to the PVID for this  
port.  
|tagged  
Type: Modify － Optional  
ingressfiltering False  
When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames  
for VLANs, which do not include this Port in its Member set.  
When false, the port will accept all incoming frames.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
|True  
Valid values: False, True  
gvrpstatus enable  
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable',  
indicates that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as  
'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is also enabled for this  
device. When this is 'disable', even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP  
INFO' command is 'enable' for the device, GVRP will be  
'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP packets  
received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations  
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all  
GVRP Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port.  
This configuration shall not be effective for a bridge port  
created over PPPOE/IPOE interface.  
|disable  
Type: Modify － Optional  
restrictedvlanreg  
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the  
value of this control is true(1), then creation of a new  
dynamic VLAN entry is permitted only if there is a Static  
VLAN Registration Entry for the VLAN concerned, in which,  
the Registrar Administrative Control value for this port is,  
Normal Registration. Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: False, True  
False |True  
pktpriority  
For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this  
priority shall be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on  
outgoing interface. In case the bridge port is over an  
Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be used to identify the VC,  
on which the packet is to be sent.  
<pktpriority-val>  
Type: Modify － Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
650  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Valid values: 0 - 7  
psvlanid  
Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to  
frames received on this port. This is applicable only to  
Non-Provider ports. The value zero here means that this field  
is not applicable. psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be  
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge  
port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be  
non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other  
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid  
and ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the  
ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored  
Type: Modify － Optional  
<psvlanid-val> | none  
Valid values: 0 - 4095  
ppstatus enable |  
This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider  
port as per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only  
in Vlan stacking scenario. The modification of this parameter  
is allowed only when the bridge port is disabled. If the value  
of this field is enable i.e the port is a provider port, then  
Priority of the incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved  
irrespective of gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the  
Svlan to which the packet belongs to.  
disable  
Type: Modify － Optional  
ctosprofileid  
<ctosprofileid-val> |  
none  
This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile  
associated† with this interface. Value zero for this means no  
CtoS profile associated with this port.† psvlanid and  
ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be  
zero. In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces  
psvlanid value must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for  
such a port. For other bridge ports† psvlanid value can be  
zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have non-zero value  
for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and psvlanid  
shall be ignored.  
Type: Modify － Optional  
Valid values: 0 -4  
Example:  
$ get gvrp port info portid 10  
IP DSLAM  
651  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On:  
VLAN Version Number : 1  
Current VLANS : 1000  
Current VLANS : 1000  
GVRP Status  
: enable  
Set Done  
VLAN Version Number : 1  
GVRP Status  
: enable  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Set Done  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
Port Id  
The bridge port id.  
Port VLAN Index  
Accept Frame Types  
The VLAN Identifier.  
When this is Tagged, the device will discard untagged frames or  
Priority-Tagged frames received on this port. When All, untagged  
frames or Priority-Tagged frames received on this port will be  
accepted and assigned to the PVID for this port.  
Ingress Filtering  
Gvrp Status  
When this is true, the device will discard incoming frames for VLANs,  
which do not include this Port in its Member set. When false, the port  
will accept all incoming frames.  
The state of GVRP operation on this port. The value 'enable', indicates  
that GVRP is enabled on this port, as long as 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP  
INFO' command is also enabled for this device. When this is 'disable',  
even if 'gvrpstatus' in 'GVRP INFO' command is 'enable' for the  
device, GVRP will be 'disable' on this port. In such a case, any GVRP  
packets received will be silently discarded and no GVRP registrations  
will be propagated from other ports. This object affects all GVRP  
Applicant and Registrar state machines on this port. This configuration  
shall not be effective for a bridge port created over PPPOE/IPOE  
interface.  
Failed Registrations  
Last Pdu Origin  
The total number of failed GVRP registrations, for any reason, on this  
port.  
The Source MAC Address of the last GVRP message received on  
this port.  
Restricted Vlan  
Registration  
The state of Restricted VLAN Registration on this port. If the value of  
this control is true(1), then creation of a new dynamic VLAN entry is  
IDL series User Guide  
652  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
permitted only if there is a Static VLAN Registration Entry for the  
VLAN concerned, in which, the Registrar Administrative Control value  
for this port is, Normal Registration.  
GVRP PacketsPrio'  
PS VLAN Index  
For the GVRP PDUs generated by the Control Plane, this priority shall  
be used for choice of traffic class/ Queue on outgoing interface. In  
case the bridge port is over an Aggregated ATM VC, this will also be  
used to identify the VC, on which the packet is to be sent.  
Port service Vlan Index, the Service VLAN ID assigned to frames  
received on this port. This is applicable only to Non-Provider ports.  
The value zero here means that this field is not applicable. psvlanid  
and ctosprofileid both can be non-zero. But they both can not be zero.  
In case of bridge port on PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value  
must be non-zero, ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other  
bridge ports† psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and  
ctosprofileid have non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall  
be applied and psvlanid shall be ignored  
Port Provider Status  
This specifies if the port is a provider port or a Non-Provider port as  
per Vlan stacking model. This field is applicable only in Vlan stacking  
scenario. The modification of this parameter is allowed only when the  
bridge port is disabled. If the value of this field is  
GS_STATE_ENABLE i.e the port is a provider port, then Priority of the  
incoming C-Vlan tag is kept preserved irrespective of  
gsvSVlanCvlanQosPreserveMode of the Svlan to which the packet  
belongs to.  
CtoS Profile Id  
This specifies the CtoS profileId for the Vlan Map profile associated†  
with this interface. Value zero for this means no CtoS profile  
associated with this port.† psvlanid and ctosprofileid both can be  
non-zero. But they both can not be zero. In case of bridge port on  
PPPoE and IPoE interfaces psvlanid value must be non-zero,  
ctosprofileid is ignored for such a port. For other bridge ports†  
psvlanid value can be zero. If both psvlanid and ctosprofileid have  
non-zero value for such ports, the ctosprofileid shall be applied and  
psvlanid shall be ignored.  
References:  
gvrp commands  
IP DSLAM  
653  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.27.3 GVRP Port Stats Commands  
5.27.3.1 Get gvrp port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to get GVRP port statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
get gvrp port stats [portid <portid-val >]  
5.27.3.2 Reset gvrp port stats  
Description:  
Use this command to reset GVRP port statistics.  
Command Syntax:  
reset gvrp port stats portid <portid-val>  
Parameter:  
Name  
Description  
The bridge port id.  
portid <portid-val >  
Type :Optional for all commands  
Valid values: 1-578  
Example:  
$ get gvrp port stats  
Output:  
ortId  
: 6  
Recv Join Empty : 100  
Send Join Empty : 100  
Recv Join In  
Recv Empty  
Recv Leave  
: 200  
: 200  
: 300  
Send Join In  
Send Empty  
Send Leave  
: 200  
: 200  
: 300  
Recv Leave All : 300  
Leave Empty Rx : 300  
Send Leave All : 300  
Leave Empty Tx : 300  
Output Fields:  
Field  
Description  
PortId  
Index of the Bridge Port.  
Recv Join Empty  
Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages  
received.  
IDL series User Guide  
654  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Send Join Empty  
Recv Join In  
Counter for the number of Join Empty Messages  
sent.  
Counter for the number of Join In Messages  
received.  
Send Join In  
Recv Empty  
Counter for the number of Join In Messages sent.  
Counter for the number of Empty Messages  
received.  
Send Empty  
Recv Leave  
Counter for the number of Empty Messages sent.  
Counter for the number of Leave Messages  
received.  
Send Leave  
Counter for the number of Leave Messages sent.  
Recv Leave All  
Counter for the number of Leave All Messages  
received.  
Counter for the number of Leave All Messages  
Send Leave All  
Leave Empty Rx  
sent.  
Counter for the number of Leave Empty Rx  
received.  
Leave Empty Tx  
Counter for the number of Leave Empty Tx sent.  
References:  
gvrp commands  
5.27.4 Vlan curr info Commands  
5.27.4.1 Get vlan curr info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get vlan curr info [vlanid <vlanid-val >]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
The VLAN Identifier.  
Type: Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
vlanid <vlanid-val >  
IP DSLAM  
655  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ get vlan curr info vlanid 45  
Output:  
VLAN Index  
: 45  
: 1  
VLAN Status  
Egress Ports  
: 24  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
: 24  
: Residential  
: enable  
: enable  
: 1  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
Reserved Mac Profile Id  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Index  
VLAN Status  
The VLAN identifier  
This value indicates the status of the VLAN Port  
corresponding to this entry. Other (1) - the entry is  
for the default VLAN created for the system.  
Permanent (2) - this entry, corresponding to an  
entry in dot1qVlanStaticTable, is currently in use  
and will remain so after the next reset of the  
device. The port lists for this entry include ports  
from the equivalent dot1qVlanStaticTable entry  
and ports learnt dynamically. Dynamic (3) - this  
entry is currently in use and will remain so until  
removed by GVRP. There is no static entry for  
this VLAN and it will be removed when the last port  
leaves the VLAN.  
Egress Ports  
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for  
this VLAN, as either tagged or untagged frames.  
The set of ports, which are transmitting traffic for  
this VLAN as untagged frames. In Stacked Vlan  
mode this applies tagging/untagging for C-VLAN.  
This specifies the state of full bridging for the Vlan.  
There can be 3 values associated with this based  
on global fullBridgingStatus. These values can  
be restricted bridging, unrestricted full bridging and  
residential bridging. The user can specify the  
bridging mode for the vlan in the  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
Dot1qVlanStaticTable table as one of these  
IDL series User Guide  
656  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
values; otherwise the vlan inherits the globally set  
bridging mode. Unrestricted bridging is not  
applicable for bridge ports created over pppoe  
interface even though the vlan may be  
unrestricted.For a Vlan with bridging mode as  
CrossConnect there is no learning and lookup and  
there are at most two member ports for it. In band  
Management traffic cannot run for such a vlan.  
VLAN here means the 802.1q vlan in case of  
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of  
Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Flood support Status  
This tells if the flooding shall be done for unknown  
unicast packets for this vlan or not. The unknown  
unicast packets shall be flooded to all ports for a  
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) is  
enabled or throttle and the value per vlan is also  
enabled else dropped. This field is not applicable if  
dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is CrossConnect  
This tells if the broadcast shall be done for this vlan  
or not. The broadcast packets shall be  
Broadcast support  
Status  
broadcasted on all ports for a vlan if global value  
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan  
are both enabled else dropped. This field is not  
applicable if dot1qGsVlanFullBridgingStatus is  
CrossConnect.  
Reserved Mac Profile  
Id  
The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to  
determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined  
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast  
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q  
and IEEE 802.1ad.  
5.27.5 VLAN mapprofile info Commands  
5.27.5.1 Get vlan mapprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
IP DSLAM  
657  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Command Syntax:  
get vlan mapprofile info [profileid <profileid-val>]  
5.27.5.2 Create vlan mapprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create vlan mapprofile info profileid <profileid-val>profiletype CtoS  
5.27.5.3 Delete vlan mapprofile info  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete vlan mapprofile info profileid <profileid-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Vlan Map profile identifier  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
profileid <profileid-val>  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
profiletype CToS  
Profile type  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Example:  
$ create vlan mapprofile info profileid 3 profiletype CtoS  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id : 3  
Profile Type : CtoS  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IDL series User Guide  
658  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Vlan Map profile identifier  
Profile type  
Profile Id  
Profile Type  
References:  
VLAN commands  
5.27.6 Vlan mapprofile param Commands  
5.27.6.1 Get vlan mapprofile param  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get vlan mapprofile param [profileid <profileid-val>] [vlan1 <vlan1-val>]  
5.27.6.2 Create vlan mapprofile param  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create vlan mapprofile param profileid <profileid-val> vlan1 <vlan1-val>vlan2  
<vlan2-val>  
5.27.6.3 Delete vlan mapprofile param  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete vlan mapprofile param profileid <profileid-val>vlan1 <vlan1-val>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Vlan Map profile identifier.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
profileid <profileid-val>  
IP DSLAM  
659  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1 - 4  
This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS  
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single  
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
vlan1 <vlan1-val>  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of  
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.  
vlan2 <vlan2-val>  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan  
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those  
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range  
for this field also includes  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range  
1-GS_CFG_MAX_VLAN_ID. There can only be single  
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given profile.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
Example:  
$ create vlan mapprofile param profileid 1 vlan1 1 vlan2 2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
Profile Id : 1  
Vlan 2  
Vlan 1 : 1  
: 2  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
Profile Id  
Vlan Map profile identifier.  
Vlan 1  
This is the first Vlan for the Map entry. In case of CtoS  
type of profile this is C-VLAN. There can only be single  
entry for this parameter corresponding to a given  
profile.  
IDL series User Guide  
660  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Vlan 2  
This is the second Vlan for the Map entry. In case of  
CtoS type of profile this is S-VLAN.  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special Virtual Vlan  
Id used for keeping configuration of the traffic for those  
VLANs that are unknown in the system. The valid range  
for this field also includes  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range  
1-4097. There can only be single entry for this  
parameter corresponding to a given profile.  
References:  
VLAN commands  
5.27.7 VLAN Static Commands  
5.27.7.1 Get vlan static  
Description:  
Use this command to get.  
Command Syntax:  
get vlan static [vlanname <vlan-name>] [vlanid <vlanid-val>]  
5.27.7.2 Create vlan static  
Description:  
Use this command to create.  
Command Syntax:  
create vlan static vlanname <vlan-name>vlanid <vlanid-val> [ egressports  
<egressports-val> ] [ forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> ]  
[ untaggedports <untaggedports-val> ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted |  
Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport  
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ] [ igmpsnoopaction  
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |  
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio <igmpsnoopingressprio-val> | none ]  
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward  
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac  
<bngmac-val> ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]  
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]  
IP DSLAM  
661  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.27.7.3 Modify vlan static  
Description:  
Use this command to modify.  
Command Syntax:  
modify vlan static vlanname <vlan-name>vlanid <vlanid-val> [ egressports  
<egressports-val> ] [ forbidegressports <forbidegressports-val> ]  
[ untaggedports <untaggedports-val> ] [ bridgingmode Restricted | Unrestricted  
| Residential | CrossConnect ] [ floodsupport enable | disable ] [ bcastsupport  
enable | disable ] [ resvmacprofileid <resvmacprofileid-val> ] [ igmpsnoopaction  
Drop | TransparentlyForward | Learn ] [ igmpsnoopproxyreporting Enable |  
Disable ] [ igmpsnoopingressprio <igmpsnoopingressprio-val> | none ]  
[ darpstatus Enable | Disable ] [ darpfailedhandling Drop | TransparentForward  
| FloodTrustedPorts ] [ drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable ] [ bngmac  
<bngmac-val> ] [ drastatus Enable | Disable ] [ piastatus Enable | Disable ]  
[ findoneportfailact drop | floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward ]  
5.27.7.4 Delete vlan static  
Description:  
Use this command to delete.  
Command Syntax:  
delete vlan static vlanname <vlanname-val > | vlanid <vlanid-val >  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
An administratively assigned string, which may be used to identify  
the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of create cmnd. In case of  
get/modify/delete - either vlan name or vlan id can be given.  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
vlanname <vlanname-val >  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
The VLAN Identifier. GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is a special  
Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those VLANs that are  
neither created nor learned in the system. The valid range for this  
field also includes GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the  
range 1-4095  
vlanid <vlanid-val  
Type: Create -- Mandatory  
Delete -- Mandatory  
Modify -- Mandatory  
Get -- Optional  
IDL series User Guide  
662  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Valid values: 1 - 4095  
egressports  
The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the egress list  
for this VLAN by management  
<egressports-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
forbidegressports  
The set of ports which are prohibited by management from being  
included in the egress list for this VLAN.  
<forbidegressports-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
untaggedports  
The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets for this  
VLAN, as untagged.  
<untaggedports-val>  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: 0  
bridgingmode Restricted |  
Unrestricted | Residential |  
CrossConnect  
This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN. There can be  
three values associated with this, based on global  
fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted bridging,  
unrestricted full bridging and residential bridging. If the user does  
not specify the bridging mode at the time of VLAN creation, the  
VLAN inherits the globally set bridging mode. The user can modify  
bridging mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the  
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only specify  
globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The bridging modes are  
defined as Restricted Full Bridging, Unrestricted full bridging and  
Resedential bridging. The default residential VLAN, like any other  
residential VLAN allows only one net side bridge port as its  
member. This port shall be added automatically to the default  
VLAN if it is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.  
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to the  
egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after removing the  
previously added net side bridge port. Unrestricted bridging is not  
applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE interface even  
though the VLAN may be unrestricted.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: usly added net side bridge port. Unrestricted  
bridging is not applicable for bridge ports created over the PPPoE  
interface even though the VLAN may be unrestricted.  
IP DSLAM  
663  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default value: Resedential bridging  
floodsupport enable | disable  
This specifies if the flooding has to be done for unknown unicast  
packets for this vlan or not.The default value for this shall be taken  
from enable when vlan is created. The unknown unicast packets  
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value (present  
inDot1dTpInfo) is enabled or throttle, and the value pervlan is also  
enabled else dropped.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: enable  
bcastsupport enable | disable  
This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this vlan or not.  
The default value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is  
created. The broadcast packets shall be flooded on all ports for a  
vlan if global value (present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan  
are both enabled else dropped.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value:enable  
resvmacprofileid  
The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to determine the  
behavior for Reserved Mac destined frames. Reserved Mac  
addresses are the multicast addresses defined as reserved in  
IEEE 802.1Q and IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified  
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN static entry  
creation to succeed. Further, even if the specified  
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the corresponding  
entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param Table" is missing the packets  
will be dropped. VLAN here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of  
Native Vlan mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
<resvmacprofileid-val>  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 1 - 4  
Default value: 1  
igmpsnoopaction Drop |  
This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then  
igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry will be  
learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction with global  
igmpsnoopStatus and port level igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is  
IGMP functionality will be executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled  
globally and on the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual  
vlan on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop  
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP frames shall  
TransparentlyForward | Learn  
IDL series User Guide  
664  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
be dropped. If action is "transparently forward", then IGMP frames  
received for this Vlan shall be forwarded transparently and learning  
will not be done  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Learn  
igmpsnoopproxyreporting  
This parameter provides a configuration option to choose between  
transparent snooping or Proxy reporting behavior per Vlan.  
Depending on the type of mode, IGMP module will perform either  
transparent snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,  
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being referred is the  
one on which learning will happen. It will be multicast vlan, if  
"Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.  
Enable | Disable  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Disable  
igmpsnoopingressprio  
This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced on the  
incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has valid value, then  
that value will be used for traffic class determination and packet  
priority. If valid egress priority is configured for a port, then egress  
priority shall override the ingress priority. In addition, there is  
support of invalid value for ingress priority to indicate that the  
priority is not to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the  
Vlan which is being referred is the one on which learning shall  
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is  
enabled.  
igmpsnoopingressprio | none  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Valid values: 0 -7  
Additional Values: 8  
Default value: 8  
darpstatus Enable | Disable  
This specifies whether ARP packets received on this VLAN are to  
be directed to a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge  
port mapping learnt using DRA. This attribute is effective in  
conjunction with the attribute 'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of  
'Dot1dBasePortExtTable' MO. ARP packets are to be directed as  
mentioned above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the  
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as per the  
normal bridging flow.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
IP DSLAM  
665  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Default value: enable  
darpfailedhandling Drop |  
TransparentForward |  
FloodTrustedPorts  
This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet received on  
this VLAN for which it is not possible to determine a single port  
using (VLANId, IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using  
DRA. If the value is drop, the ARP packet will be dropped. If the  
value is Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be forwarded  
as per the normal bridging. If the value is FloodTrustedPorts, the  
ARP packet will be forwarded as per the normal bridging, but only  
on ports that are trusted.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: FloodTrustedPorts  
drabcasttoucast Enable | Disable  
This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP broadcast  
packet received for this vlan will be converted to unicast packet or  
not.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Disable  
bngmac <bngmac-val>  
This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this VLAN. If VLAN  
is configured to convert DHCP broadcast packets to Unicast  
packets,then this MAC address is used as destination MAC  
address.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: "\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff\xff"  
drastatus Enable | Disable  
This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is enabled  
for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as per the port  
configuration on which DHCP packet is received. If disabled DRA  
will not perform any action on the DHCP packets received over this  
vlan.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Enable  
piastatus Enable | Disable  
This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is enabled for  
this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per the port configuration  
on which PPPoE packet is received. If disabled PIA will not  
perform any action on the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: Enable  
IDL series User Guide  
666  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
findoneportfailact drop |  
This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails to  
floodtrusted | TransparentlyForward determine the destined port for downstream DHCP packets. If this  
field is set to drop then the packets are dropped. If it is specified as  
floodtrusted then packets are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is  
set as TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to all  
the ports as per normal bridging functionality.  
Type: Create -- Optional  
Modify -- Optional  
Default value: TransparentlyForward  
Example :  
$ create vlan static vlanname gsvlan vlanid 1 egressports 1 2 20 forbidegressports  
34 5 untaggedports 2 bridgingmode Residential bcastsupport enable floodsupport  
enable resvmacprofileid 1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Entry Created  
VLAN Name  
: gsvlan  
: 1  
VLAN Index  
Egress ports  
: 1 2 20  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
: 34 5  
: 2  
Bridging Mode  
: Residential  
Flood support Status  
Broadcast support Status  
Reserved Mac Profile Id  
Igmp Snoop Action  
: enable  
: enable  
: GS_CFG_DEF_RSVD_MAC_PROFILE_ID  
: Learn  
Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status : Normal  
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority  
DARPFailedHandling  
DRA Bcast To Ucast  
BNG MAC address  
DRA Status  
: 4  
Directed ARP status  
: enable  
: enable  
: Enable  
: 00:01:03:04:05:11  
: Enable  
PIA Status  
: Enable  
Find One Port Fail Act : Drop  
Verbose Mode Off:  
Entry Created  
IP DSLAM  
667  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Output field:  
Field  
Description  
VLAN Name  
An administratively assigned string, which may be used  
to identify the VLAN. This is mandatory in the case of  
create cmnd. In case of get/modify/delete - either vlan  
name or vlan id can be given.  
VLAN Index  
The VLAN Identifier. GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID is  
a special Vlan Id used for managing the traffic for those  
VLANs that are neither created nor learned in the  
system. The valid range for this field also includes  
GS_UNREGISTERED_VLANID besides the range  
1-4095.  
Egress ports  
The set of ports, which are permanently assigned to the  
egress list for this VLAN by management  
Forbidden Egress Ports  
Untagged Ports  
Bridging Mode  
The set of ports which are prohibited by management  
from being included in the egress list for this VLAN.  
The set of ports, which should transmit egress packets  
for this VLAN, as untagged.  
This specifies the state of full bridging for the VLAN.  
There can be three values associated with this, based on  
global fullBridgingStatus. These values can be restricted  
bridging, unrestricted full bridging and residential  
bridging. If the user does not specify the bridging mode  
at the time of VLAN creation, the VLAN inherits the  
globally set bridging mode. The user can modify bridging  
mode for a created VLAN. If the dynamic entry for the  
VLAN to be created already exists, the user can only  
specify globally set bridging mode for this VLAN. The  
bridging modes are defined as Restricted Full Bridging,  
Unrestricted full bridging and Resedential bridging. The  
default residential VLAN, like any other residential VLAN  
allows only one net side bridge port as its member. This  
port shall be added automatically to the default VLAN if it  
is the only net side bridge port being added to the VLAN.  
Subsequently, the user can add another net side port to  
the egressportslist and untaggedportslist only after  
removing the previously added net side bridge port.  
Unrestricted bridging is not applicable for bridge ports  
created over the PPPoE interface even though the VLAN  
may be unrestricted.  
IDL series User Guide  
668  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Flood support Status  
This specifies if the flooding has to be done for  
unknown unicast packets for this vlan or not.The default  
value for this shall be taken from enable when vlan is  
created. The unknown unicast packets shall be flooded  
on all ports for a vlan if global value (present  
inDot1dTpInfo)is enabled or throttle, and the value  
pervlan is also enabled else dropped.  
Broadcast support Status  
This specifies if the broadcast has to be done for this  
vlan or not. The default value for this shall be taken from  
enable when vlan is created. The broadcast packets  
shall be flooded on all ports for a vlan if global value  
(present in Dot1dTpInfo) and the value per vlan are both  
enabled else dropped.  
Reserved Mac Profile Id  
The Profile associated with this Vlan to be used to  
determine the behavior for Reserved Mac destined  
frames. Reserved Mac addresses are the multicast  
addresses defined as reserved in IEEE 802.1Q and  
IEEE 802.1ad. The existence of the specified  
"ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry is a must for VLAN  
static entry creation to succeed. Further, even if the  
specified "ResvdCtlPktProfile Table" entry exists, but the  
corresponding entry in "ResvdCtlPktProfile Param  
Table" is missing the packets will be dropped. VLAN  
here means the 802.1q Vlan in case of Native Vlan  
mode and Virtual Vlan in case of Stacked Vlan Mode.  
This parameter specifies that if an action is "Learn" then  
igmpsnoop will be supported for this Vlan and an entry  
will be learnt. Here action will be applied in conjunction  
with global igmpsnoopStatus and port level  
Igmp Snoop Action  
igmpsnoopStatus flags, that is IGMP functionality will be  
executed for a frame if IGMP is enabled globally and on  
the port it has been received and for the vlan/virtual vlan  
on which it has come.If action is "drop" then igmpsnoop  
functionality is not supported for this vlan and IGMP  
frames shall be dropped. If action is "transparently  
forward", then IGMP frames received for this Vlan shall  
be forwarded transparently and learning will not be done  
This parameter provides a configuration option to  
choose between transparent snooping or Proxy  
reporting behavior per Vlan. Depending on the type of  
mode, IGMP module will perform either transparent  
Igmpsnoop ProxyReporting Status  
IP DSLAM  
669  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
snooping or proxy reporting for the IGMP messages,  
received on a Vlan. Here the Vlan which is being  
referred is the one on which learning will happen. It will  
be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option" is enabled.  
This parameter specifies the ingress priority to be forced  
on the incoming frame. If the ingress priority field has  
valid value, then that value will be used for traffic class  
determination and packet priority. If valid egress priority  
is configured for a port, then egress priority shall override  
the ingress priority. In addition, there is support of invalid  
value for ingress priority to indicate that the priority is not  
to be forced on ingress frame for this port.Here the Vlan  
which is being referred is the one on which learning shall  
happen. It will be multicast vlan, if "Multicast Vlan option"  
is enabled.  
Igmpsnoop ingress Priority  
Directed ARP status  
This specifies whether ARP packets received on this  
VLAN are to be directed to a single port using (VLANId,  
IP address) to bridge port mapping learnt using DRA.  
This attribute is effective in conjunction with the attribute  
'gsvDot1dPortDirectedARP' of 'Dot1dBasePortExtTable'  
MO. ARP packets are to be directed as mentioned  
above, only if both the flags are enabled. If any of the  
two is disabled, the ARP packets will be forwarded as  
per the normal bridging flow.  
DARPFailedHandling  
This specifies the action to be taken on an ARP packet  
received on this VLAN for which it is not possible to  
determine a single port using (VLANId, IP address) to  
bridge port mapping learnt using DRA. If the value is  
drop, the ARP packet will be dropped. If the value is  
Transparent Forwarding, the ARP packet will be  
forwarded as per the normal bridging. If the value is  
FloodTrustedPorts, the ARP packet will be forwarded as  
per the normal bridging, but only on ports that are  
trusted.  
DRA Bcast To Ucast  
BNG MAC address  
This Parameter is used to configure whether DHCP  
broadcast packet received for this vlan will be converted  
to unicast packet or not.  
This is used to configure BNG Mac address of this  
VLAN. If VLAN is configured to convert DHCP broadcast  
packets to Unicast packets,then this MAC address is  
used as destination MAC address.  
IDL series User Guide  
670  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
DRA Status  
This Parameter specifies the status of DRA whether it is  
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled DRA will Act as  
per the port configuration on which DHCP packet is  
received. If disabled DRA will not perform any action on  
the DHCP packets received over this vlan.  
PIA Status  
This Parameter specifies the status of PIA whether it is  
enabled for this Vlan or not. If enabled PIA will Act as per  
the port configuration on which PPPoE packet is  
received. If disabled PIA will not perform any action on  
the PPPoE packets received over this vlan.  
Find One Port Fail Act  
This field specifies the action to be taken when DRA fails  
to determine the destined port for downstream DHCP  
packets. If this field is set to drop then the packets are  
dropped. If it is specified as floodtrusted then packets  
are forwarded to trusted ports only. If it is set as  
TransparentlyForward then the packets are forwarded to  
all the ports as per normal bridging functionality.  
References:  
VLAN commands  
IP DSLAM  
671  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.28 Miscelleneous Commands  
5.28.1 File Commands  
5.28.1.1 Apply  
Description:  
Use this command to apply a configuration file stored on the system  
Command Syntax:  
Apply fname <file-name> [version <version>] [besteffort true|false]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the name of the configuration file (the  
extension of the file shall be .cfg) to be applied. The  
file shall contain valid CLI commands. The user shall  
specify the filename for files present in the system as  
directories. The directories are /nvram/cfg/  
factorydef/, /nvram/user/, /sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.  
Type: mandatory  
fname <file-name>  
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: (‘A’-’Z’,  
‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘,’_’)  
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be  
applied.  
Type: Optional  
version <version>  
Default Value: Incase of multiple version files the  
active copy gets applied. Not valid for single version  
file.  
If the besteffort flag is false, command execution (as  
specified in "file-name"file) stops immediately after a  
command returns an error. If the besteffort flag is  
true, command execution (as specified in  
"file-name"file) continues even if a command returns  
an error.  
besteffort true|false  
Type : Optional  
Default value : false  
Mode:  
Super-User  
IDL series User Guide  
672  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ apply fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 2  
Output:  
The output of the command is dependent on the list of CLI commands in  
commands.cfg file.  
Example 1:  
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:  
Verbose on  
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0  
Entry Created  
If-Name  
: atm-0  
: 2  
LowIfName  
MaxConfVccs  
MaxVciBits : 10  
: dsl-0  
MaxVccs  
MaxVpiBits  
OAMSrc  
: 4  
: 3  
: 0xffffffffffffffffffffffffffffffff  
: Up Admin Status : Up  
Oper Status  
Example 2:  
The file commands.cfg has the following commands:  
create atm port ifname atm-0 lowif dsl-0  
The output would be:  
Entry Created  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
Upgrade command  
Remove command  
List command  
Download command  
IP DSLAM  
673  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.28.1.2 Download  
Description:  
Use this command to download a binary, configuration or user specific file from the  
remote host.  
Command Syntax:  
download src <src-filename> dest <dest-filename> ip <ip-address> [mode  
tftp|ftp] [savemode comapact]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file to be  
downloaded from a remote host.  
The filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension  
can be .cfg or .bin or any other user specified extension. A cfg file can contain  
only valid CLI commands. A .bin file must bea valid image file.  
Type: Mandatory  
src <src-filename>  
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)  
This specifies the name of the binary, configuration or user specific file on the  
system. The user shall specify the filename for files present in the system, as  
directories.  
The directories are /nvram/bin/control/ - This directory contains control plane  
zipped image. There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the  
image file shall be as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool.  
The files are stored in NVRAM.  
/nvram/bin/dataplane/ - This directory contains data plane zipped image.  
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be  
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in  
NVRAM.  
dest <dest-filename>  
/nvram/bin/decompressor/ - This directory contains decompressor image.  
There can be multiple versions of images. The name of the image file shall be  
as specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in  
NVRAM.  
/nvram/bin/dslphy/ - This directory contains DSL physical layer image. Only  
one version of image is possible. The name of the image file shall be as  
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in  
NVRAM.  
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/ - This directory contains factory default configuration  
files. There can be multiple versions of files. The name of the file shall be as  
specified in the configuration file of createfi tool. The files are stored in  
IDL series User Guide  
674  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
NVRAM.  
/nvram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. There can be multiple  
versions of files. The files are stored in NVRAM.  
/sdram/cfg/ - This directory contains user specific Configuration files with .cfg  
extension. The files are stored in SDRAM  
/sdram/user/ - This directory contains user specific files. The files are stored in  
SDRAM.  
Type: Mandatory  
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all Characters except ‘;’, ‘‘, ‘?’)  
This specifies the IP address of the remote host from which the file is to be  
downloaded.  
ip <ip-address>  
Type: Mandatory  
Valid values: Any valid IP address.  
This specifies the protocol to be used for downloading the file. Currently only  
TFTP is supported.  
mode tftp | ftp  
Type: Optional  
Default Value : TFTP  
savemode compact  
It allows saving of files in the compact mode. This option is applicable for  
downloading user files only.  
Note: This option is enabled only when  
GS_CFG_USER_COMPACT_FILE_SYSTEM is TRUE.  
Type: Optional  
Valid Values: compact  
Example:  
$ download src myconfig.cfg dest /nvram/user/myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Downloading The Code File. . .  
Download Completed  
Verbose Mode Off  
Downloading The Code File. . .  
Download Completed  
Output Fields:  
None  
IP DSLAM  
675  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Caution:  
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host. After downloading the  
image in safe mode, the system should be rebooted and no other nvram  
operations should be tried on the system.  
References:  
upgrade command  
remove command  
list command  
apply command  
5.28.1.3 List  
Description:  
This command is used to list the Configuration or binary files stored on the unit  
Command Syntax:  
list fname [/nvram | /sdram]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
fname [/nvram | /sdram]  
This specifies whether the files of NVRAM or SDRAM  
are to be listed.  
/nvram – This lists all directories and files stored in  
NVRAM.  
/sdram - This lists all directories and files stored in  
SDRAM.  
Type: Optional.  
Default Value: All the files present in the NVRAM or  
SDRAM will be displayed.  
Mode:  
Super-User.  
Example :  
$ list fname /nvram  
IDL series User Guide  
676  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output :  
Verbose Mode On  
Flash size  
: 4194304  
: 131072  
Flash Block size  
Free Blocks in Flash : 3  
/nvram/bin/control/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: CP.bin.gz  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 1424656  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 11  
State  
: active  
/nvram/bin/dataplane/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: DP.bin.gz  
: 1  
: Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970  
Size(bytes) : 293092  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 3  
State  
: active  
/nvram/bin/dslphy/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz  
: 1 Size(bytes) : 91632  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz  
: 1 Size(bytes) : 159408  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: FD.cfg  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 45  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/cfg/manuf/  
Name  
: Manuf.txt  
IP DSLAM  
677  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Version  
Time  
: 1  
Size(bytes) : 5768  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/system/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: CFG1  
: 1  
:
Size(bytes) : 262056  
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: CFG2  
: 1  
:
Size(bytes) : 262056  
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: LOGS  
: 1  
:
Size(bytes) : 130988  
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/user  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: user.txt  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 5768  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
Verbose Mode Off  
Flash size  
: 4194304  
: 131072  
Flash Block size  
Free Blocks in Flash : 4  
/nvram/bin/control/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: CP.bin.gz  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 1424656  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 11  
State  
: active  
IDL series User Guide  
678  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
/nvram/bin/dataplane/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: DP.bin.gz  
: 1  
: Thu Jan 01 00:01:54 1970  
Size(bytes) : 293092  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 3  
State  
: active  
/nvram/bin/dslphy/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0000000C.bin.gz  
: 1 Size(bytes) : 91632  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: gsv_dsl_AD_DM_0004200C.bin.gz  
: 1 Size(bytes) : 159408  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
/nvram/cfg/factorydef/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: FD.cfg  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 45  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/cfg/manuf/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: Manuf.txt  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 5768  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/system/  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: CFG1  
: 1  
:
Size(bytes) : 262056  
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
Name  
: CFG2  
: 1  
Version  
Size(bytes) : 262056  
IP DSLAM  
679  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Time  
:
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 2  
State  
: active  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: LOGS  
: 1  
:
Size(bytes) : 130988  
Permission : SYS  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
/nvram/user  
Name  
Version  
Time  
: user.txt  
: 1  
: Thu Dec 23 15:42:26 2004  
Size(bytes) : 5768  
Permission : RW  
Used Blocks : 1  
State  
: active  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Flash Size  
Total flash size in bytes. This field is relevant for NVRAM files  
Flash Block Size  
Flash Block Size in bytes.This field is relevant for NVRAM files.  
Free Blocks in Flash  
Number of free blocks in flash. This field is relevant for NVRAM  
files.  
Name  
The name of the file present in the directory. Name starting with ì/î  
indicates directory name.  
Version  
Time  
This specifies the version of the file.  
Time at which the file got created. This is displayed in Day Mon DD  
HH:MM:SS YEAR format.  
Size  
The size of the file in bytes.  
Permissions  
Permission of the file. It can be read only, read write or protected.  
State  
The state of the file. It can be active, inactive, tried, latest.  
Number of blocks used in the flash by the file.  
Used Blocks  
References:  
upgrade command  
remove command  
apply command  
download command  
IDL series User Guide  
680  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.28.1.4 Permission  
Description:  
Use this command to change the permission of the files stored on flash.  
Command Syntax:  
permission fname <fname-val> type ro|rw|pr [version <version-val>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
fname fname  
Name of the file whose permission is to be changed.  
Type: mandatory  
Valid values: string of up to 128 characters: ('A'-  
'Z','a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-','_')  
version version  
type ro|rw|pr  
This specifies the version of the file that need to be  
applied.  
Type: Optional for single version file.  
Mandatory for multiple version file.  
This specifies that to what type, ro (read-only), rw  
(read-write), or pr (protected), permission of the file is to  
be changed.  
Type: mandatory  
Valid Values : ro | rw | pr  
Mode:  
Super-User  
Example:  
$ permission fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg version 1 type ro  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Set Done  
Verbose Mode Off  
Set Done  
Output Fields:  
None  
IP DSLAM  
681  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
References:  
upgrade command  
remove command  
list command  
download command  
5.28.1.5 Ping  
Description:  
Use to send one or more ICMP messages to another host for a reply.  
Command Syntax:  
ping {ip-address | domain-name} [-t | -n <number>] [-i <time-to-live>] [-w  
<seconds>] [-s <size>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.  
Type  
: Mandatory  
ip-address |  
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or  
Domain Name - String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’,  
’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)  
domain-name  
This indicates continuous ping to host, until the user interrupts.  
Type: Optional  
-t  
This specifies the number of pings to send to host.  
Type  
: Optional  
-n <number>  
Valid values : 1-65535  
Default Value: 4  
This specifies the time interval between successive ping requests  
Type  
: Optional  
-w <seconds>  
Valid values : 0-65535  
Default Value : 2  
This specifies the time-to-live, to be filled in the ping request  
Type  
: Optional  
: 0 – 255  
-I <time-to-live>  
Valid values  
Default Value : 64  
This specifies the size of payload for ping. Type  
Valid values : 4-1500  
: Optional  
-s <size>  
Default Value : 64  
IDL series User Guide  
682  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Example:  
$ ping 192.168.1.13  
Output:  
$ ping 192.168.1.13  
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=0 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec  
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=1 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec  
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=2 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec  
64 bytes of data from 192.168.1.13, seq=3 ttl=64 rtt=0.000 msec  
-------------------- Ping Statistics --------------------  
4 packets transmitted, 4 packets received, 0 percent packet loss  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
64 bytes of...  
This denotes the number of bytes in the ping packet and the source IP Address.  
Seq  
Ttl  
This denotes the ping attempt counter value.  
This is the Time to live for the packet.  
This denotes the Round trip Time for the packet. A value less than 10ms is shown as  
0.  
Rtt  
5.28.1.6 Remove  
Description:  
Use this command to remove a configuration or binary file stored on the unit  
Command Syntax:  
remove fname <file-name> [version <version>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the file name, which needs to be removed. The user shall  
specify the filename for files present in the system, as directories. The  
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/control/,  
/nvram/bin/dataplane/, /nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,  
/nvram/user/,/sdram/cfg, /sdram/user.  
fname <file-name>  
Type : Mandatory  
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters ('A'-'Z', 'a'-'z', '0'-'9', '-', '_')  
IP DSLAM  
683  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This specifies the version of the file that need to be removed.  
Type: Optional for single version file. Mandatory for multiple version  
file. Default Value:  
version <version>  
Example:  
$ remove fname /nvram/user/commands.cfg  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
File removed  
Verbose Mode Off  
File removed  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
apply command  
list command  
download command  
5.28.1.7 Upgrade  
Description:  
Use this command to upgrade a configuration or binary file stored on the system.  
Command Syntax:  
upgrade fname <file-name> version <version>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
fname <file-name>  
This specifies the file name, which needs to be upgraded. The specified  
file becomes Active and the present active file is made inactive.The user  
shall specify the filename for files present in Columbia, as directories. The  
directories are /nvram/bin/control/, /nvram/bin/dataplane/,  
/nvram/bin/decompressor, /nvram/bin/dslphy, /nvram/cfg/factorydef/,  
/nvram/ user/,  
Type : Mandatory  
Valid values: string of upto 128 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)  
IDL series User Guide  
684  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
This specifies the version of the file that needs to be  
upgraded  
version <version>  
Type : Mandatory  
Valid values: Decimal number  
Mode:  
Super-User  
Example:  
$ upgrade fname /nvram/cfg/factorydef/commands.cfg version 2  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
File upgraded  
Verbose Mode Off  
File upgraded  
Output Fields:  
None  
References:  
apply command  
list command  
download command  
5.28.1.8 Upload  
Description:  
Use this command to upload the primary/secondary configuration file saved in  
flash on the Columbia system to the remote host.  
Command Syntax:  
Upload src <src-filename> dest <dest-filename> ip <ip-address> [mode tftp | ftp]  
IP DSLAM  
685  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
src <src-filename>  
This specifies the name of the configuration file on the system. The files that can be  
uploaded are: /nvram/system/primcfg - The primary configuration file created on the  
system after commit operation has been performed once.  
/nvram/system/seccfg - The secondary configuration file created on the system after  
commit operation has been performed twice.  
Type: Mandatory  
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')  
This specifies the name of the configuration file to be uploaded to a remote host. The  
filename contains the complete path on the host. The filename extension can be .cfg  
or .bin or any other user specified extension. Type: Mandatory  
Valid values: String of up to 128 characters (all characters except ';', ' ', '?')  
This specifies the IP address of the remote host to which the file is to be uploaded.  
Type: Mandatory  
dest <dest-filename>  
ip <ip-address>  
Valid values: Any valid IP address  
mode tftp | ftp  
This specifies the protocol to be used for uploading the file. Currently, only TFTP is  
supported.  
Type: Optional  
Valid values: TFTP  
Example:  
$ upload src /nvram/system/primcfg dest myconfig.cfg ip 198.168.1.1  
Output:  
Verbose Mode On  
Uploading The Code File. . .  
Upload Completed  
Verbose Mode Off  
Uploading The Code File. . .  
Upload Completed  
Output Fields:  
None  
Caution:  
Ensure that the TFTP server is running on the remote host.  
References:  
Commit command  
IDL series User Guide  
686  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
5.28.2 Other Commands  
Description:  
Use this command to create an alias for any CLI command. You can later call this  
command by using the alias-string along with any additional parameters, which  
you need to specify. It will display a list of all the aliases currently defined if no  
parameter is given.  
Command Syntax:  
alias [alias-string = aliased-command]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
The string, which you will use to refer to the aliased command,  
henceforth. It should not match any CLI keyword.  
Type: Optional  
alias-string  
Valid values: string of up to 14 characters (‘A’-’Z’, ‘a’-‘z’, ‘0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’)  
This is the total CLI command length (512 characters).  
Type: Mandatory  
aliased-command  
Valid values: Any string (all printable characters except ‘;’) as long as  
the total CLI Command length is not exceeded.  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Output:  
With Parameters  
$alias abc = modify nbsize  
Set Done  
$abc maxatmport 48  
Set Done  
Without Parameters  
$alias  
Alias  
Command  
---------------------------  
abc  
modify nbsize  
IP DSLAM  
687  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
Alias  
This is the new abbreviated command, which you may use  
in place of the string specified in Command.  
Command  
The command string which has been aliased.  
References:  
Unalias command  
5.28.2.1 Unalias  
Description:  
Use this command to delete an alias. Either a particular alias or all aliases can be  
removed using this command.  
Command Syntax:  
unalias [all | <name>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Using this option all the aliases defined in the system will be removed.  
Type: Optional  
all  
Valid values: String ìALL.î  
Name of the alias defined for a command.  
Type: Optional.  
Name  
Valid values: Any valid alias defined in the system.  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example :  
Unalias abc  
Output:  
Entry Deleted  
Output Fields:  
None  
IDL series User Guide  
688  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
5.28.2.2 Help  
Description:  
Use this command for a listing of all the user inputs permissible at the point. In  
case Help is asked for, as a parameter of any incomplete command, then it  
displays a list of all the pending/Extra parameters input by the user. In all other  
cases, the next set of permissible keywords required in order to shortlist a  
command, is displayed. The Incomplete Command keyed in by the user is made  
available again, after help is dispalyed.  
Command Syntax:  
help |? or <Any Incomplete Command>?  
Mode:  
Super-User, User  
Example:  
$help  
Command  
-------  
alias  
Description  
-----------  
To Alias a command  
commit  
create  
delete  
.
Commit the active config to the flash  
Create a new entry of specified type  
Delete the specified entry  
.
$delete ?  
Command  
-------  
arp  
Description  
-----------  
IP Net To Media Table  
ATM Commands  
Bridge Commands  
DHCP Commands  
atm  
bridge  
dhcp  
.
.
$delete atm ?  
Command  
-------  
port  
Description  
-----------  
ATM port commands  
ATM VC Interface commands  
vc intf  
IP DSLAM  
689  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output Fields:  
None  
Caution:  
Currently help is not available between a parameter name and its value.  
5.28.2.3 Logout  
Description:  
Use this command to exit from the CLI shell.  
Command Syntax:  
logout | quit | exit  
5.28.2.4 Prompt  
Description:  
Use this command to set the new CLI prompt.  
Command Syntax:  
prompt <new-prompt>  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
The new prompt string.  
prompt <new-prompt>  
Type: Mandatory  
Valid values: String of up to 19 characters ( All characters except ‘;’, ‘ ‘, ‘?’)  
Mode :  
Super-User, User  
Example :  
$ prompt $$$  
Output:  
Set Done  
$$$  
Output Fields:  
None  
IDL series User Guide  
690  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Caution:  
None. The modified prompt is not saved across a reboot.  
5.28.2.5 Traceroute  
Description:  
This command is used to trace the route to the specified destination.  
Command Syntax:  
traceroute {ip <ip-address> | dname <domain-name>} {ping | udp} [-m  
<num-of-hops>] [-w <wait-time>] [-p <udp-port-number>] [-q <numof-probes>]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
This specifies the Destination address to be pinged.  
Type: Mandatory  
ip-address | dname  
Valid values : Any Valid IP Address (0.0.0.0 – 255.255.255.255) or  
Domain Name (String of Max 63 characters (‘a’-‘z’, ’A’-  
‘Z’, ’0’-‘9’, ’-‘, ’_’and ‘.‘)  
<domain-name>  
Traceroute probe message type  
Type: Mandatory  
Ping | udp  
Maximum number of hops to search for ip-address Type: Optional  
Valid Values: 0-255  
-m <num-of-hops>  
Default Value : 30  
This specifies the timeout in seconds  
Type: Optional  
-w <wait-time>  
Valid values : 0-65535  
Default Value : 5  
Destination UDP port to be used, only when Probe is Udp  
Type: Optional.  
-p <udp-port-number>  
Valid Values: 0-65535  
Default Value : 32768  
Number of probes to be sent for each TTL value Type: Optional  
Valid Values: 0-255  
-q <num-of-probes>  
Default Value : 3  
Example:  
$ traceroute 192.168.1.13 ping  
IP DSLAM  
691  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Output:  
Tracing route to [192.168.1.13]  
Over a maximum of 30 hops  
1
0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms 0.000000 ms  
192.168.1.13  
Trace complete.  
Output Fields:  
FIELD  
Description  
1
This denotes the hop counter value.  
These are the Round trip timings of the 3 probe packets sent. A * denotes that  
this probe was missed.  
2-4  
5
This is the ip address of the intermediate/destination node.  
References:  
ping command.  
5.28.2.6 Verbose  
Description:  
Using this command, a user can view the status of entries before and after the  
execution of a command (create, delete, modify,get). However if this mode is  
turned off, then display only shows the final result of execution of command, i.e.  
whether it was successful or failure.  
Command Syntax:  
Verbose [on | off]  
Parameters:  
Name  
Description  
Used for switching on the verbose mode.  
Type: Optional  
On  
Valid values: On.  
Used for switching off the verbose mode.  
Type: Optional.  
Off  
Valid values: Off  
Mode:  
Super-User  
IDL series User Guide  
692  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix A --- FD.cfg in detail  
verbose off  
create user name admin passwd admin root  
create dsl system  
create ethernet intf ifname eth-1 ip 192.168.100.111 mask 255.255.255.0  
create bridge port intf portid 385 ifname eth-1 status enable  
create ethernet intf ifname eth-3 ip 192.168.1.1 mask 255.255.255.0  
modify bridge mode enable  
create atm port ifname atm-1 lowif dsl-1  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-1 lowif atm-1 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-1 lowif aal5-1  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-1 portid 1 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-2 lowif dsl-2  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-2 lowif atm-2 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-2 lowif aal5-2  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-2 portid 2 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-3 lowif dsl-3  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-3 lowif atm-3 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-3 lowif aal5-3  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-3 portid 3 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-4 lowif dsl-4  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-4 lowif atm-4 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-4 lowif aal5-4  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-4 portid 4 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-5 lowif dsl-5  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-5 lowif atm-5 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-5 lowif aal5-5  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-5 portid 5 learning enable status enable  
IP DSLAM  
693  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
create atm port ifname atm-6 lowif dsl-6  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-6 lowif atm-6 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-6 lowif aal5-6  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-6 portid 6 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-7 lowif dsl-7  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-7 lowif atm-7 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-7 lowif aal5-7  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-7 portid 7 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-8 lowif dsl-8  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-8 lowif atm-8 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-8 lowif aal5-8  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-8 portid 8 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-9 lowif dsl-9  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-9 lowif atm-9 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-9 lowif aal5-9  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-9 portid 9 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-10 lowif dsl-10  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-10 lowif atm-10 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-10 lowif aal5-10  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-10 portid 10 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-11 lowif dsl-11  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-11 lowif atm-11 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-11 lowif aal5-11  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-11 portid 11 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-12 lowif dsl-12  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-12 lowif atm-12 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-12 lowif aal5-12  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-12 portid 12 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-13 lowif dsl-13  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-13 lowif atm-13 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-13 lowif aal5-13  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-13 portid 13 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-14 lowif dsl-14  
IDL series User Guide  
694  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-14 lowif atm-14 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-14 lowif aal5-14  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-14 portid 14 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-15 lowif dsl-15  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-15 lowif atm-15 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-15 lowif aal5-15  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-15 portid 15 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-16 lowif dsl-16  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-16 lowif atm-16 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-16 lowif aal5-16  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-16 portid 16 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-17 lowif dsl-17  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-17 lowif atm-17 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-17 lowif aal5-17  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-17 portid 17 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-18 lowif dsl-18  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-18 lowif atm-18 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-18 lowif aal5-18  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-18 portid 18 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-19 lowif dsl-19  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-19 lowif atm-19 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-19 lowif aal5-19  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-19 portid 19 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-20 lowif dsl-20  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-20 lowif atm-20 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-20 lowif aal5-20  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-20 portid 20 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-21 lowif dsl-21  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-21 lowif atm-21 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-21 lowif aal5-21  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-21 portid 21 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-22 lowif dsl-22  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-22 lowif atm-22 vpi 8 vci 81  
IP DSLAM  
695  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-22 lowif aal5-22  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-22 portid 22 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-23 lowif dsl-23  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-23 lowif atm-23 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-23 lowif aal5-23  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-23 portid 23 learning enable status enable  
create atm port ifname atm-24 lowif dsl-24  
create atm vc intf ifname aal5-24 lowif atm-24 vpi 8 vci 81  
create eoa intf ifname eoa-24 lowif aal5-24  
create bridge port intf ifname eoa-24 portid 24 learning enable status enable  
create filter rule entry ruleid 1 action sendtocontrol description IGMP  
create filter subrule ip ruleid 1 subruleid 1 prototypefrom 2 prototypecmp eq  
modify filter rule entry ruleid 1 status enable  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eth-1 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-1 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-2 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-3 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-4 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-5 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-6 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-7 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-8 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-9 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-10 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-11 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-12 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-13 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-14 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-15 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-16 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-17 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-18 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-19 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-20 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-21 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-22 stageid 1  
IDL series User Guide  
696  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-23 stageid 1  
create filter rule map ruleid 1 ifname eoa-24 stageid 1  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 385 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 1 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 2 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 3 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 4 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 5 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 6 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 7 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 8 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 9 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 10 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 11 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 12 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 13 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 14 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 15 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 16 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 17 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 18 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 19 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 20 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 21 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 22 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 23 status enable  
modify igmpsnoop port info portid 24 status enable  
verbose on  
end  
IP DSLAM  
697  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
Appendix B --- Supported mibs  
PropMib (Conexant)  
z GSV-ABOND-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ACL-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ACT-STDBY-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ADMIN-MIB.mib  
z GSV-AGGR-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ATM-MIB.mib  
z GSV-BRIDGE-MIB.mib  
z GSV-CLFR-MIB.mib  
z GSV-CTLPKT-MIB.mib  
z GSV-EHDLC-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ENTERPRISE-INFO-MIB.mib  
z GSV-ETHER-MIB.mib  
z GSV-GENFLTR-MIB.mib  
z GSV-IA-MIB.mib  
z GSV-IGMP-MIB.mib  
z GSV-IPOA-IPOE-MIB.mib  
z GSV-IRL-MIB.mib  
z GSV-LACP-MIB.mib  
z GSV-PPPoE-MIB.mib  
z GSV-PPPR-MIB.mib  
z GSV-RDNCY-AGG-MIB.mib  
z GSV-RL-MIB.mib  
z GSV-SCHD-PRFL-MIB.mib  
z GSV-SNTP-MIB.mib  
z GSV-SYS-MIB.mib  
z GSV-TC-MIB.mib  
z GSV-TRAP-MIB.mib  
z GSV-TRFCLASS-MIB.mib  
z GSV-TRFCLASS-STATS-MIB.mib  
z GSV-VC-AGGR-MIB.mib  
z GSV-VMAC-MIB.mib  
IDL series User Guide  
698  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
StdMib (Standard)  
z ADSL-DMT-LINE-MIB.mib  
z ADSL-TC-MIB  
z ATM-TC-MIB  
z draft-ietf-atommib-atm2-17  
z draft-ietf-bridge-bridgemib-smiv2-02  
z draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-00  
z draft-ietf-bridge-ext-v2-01  
z EtherLike-MIB  
z HCNUM-TC  
z HC-PerfHist-TC-MIB  
z IANAifType-MIB.mib  
z IEEE8023-LAG-MIB  
z IF-MIB  
z IP-MIB  
z PerfHist-TC-MIB  
z Q-BRIDGE-MIB  
z RFC1213-MIB  
z rfc2515  
z rfc2662  
z rfc2665  
z rfc3440  
z RMON2-MIB.mib  
z RMON-MIB  
z SNMP-FRAMEWORK-MIB  
z SNMPv2-MIB  
z SNMPv2-SMI  
z SNMPv2-TC  
z TOKEN-RING-RMON-MIB.mib  
z VDSL-LINE-EXT-MCM-MIB  
z VDSL-LINE-MIB.txt  
IP DSLAM  
699  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix C --- IEEE 802.1x protocol over IP DSLAM  
Understanding How 802.1X Authentication Works  
IEEE 802.1X is a client-server-based access control and authentication protocol that  
restricts unauthorized devices from connecting to a local area network (LAN) through  
publicly accessible ports. 802.1X authenticates each user device that is connected to a  
switch port before making available any services that are offered by the switch or the LAN.  
Until the device is authenticated, 802.1X access control allows only Extensible  
Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) traffic through the port to which the device is  
connected. After authentication is successful, normal traffic can pass through the port.  
802.1X controls network access by creating two distinct virtual access points at each port  
(See Above Figure). One access point is an uncontrolled port; the other is a controlled port.  
All traffic through the single port is available to both access points. Only EAPOL traffic is  
allowed to pass through the uncontrolled port, which is always open. The controlled port is  
open only when the device that is connected to the port has been authorized by 802.1X.  
After this authorization takes place, the controlled port opens, allowing normal traffic to  
pass.  
IDL series User Guide  
700  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Device Roles  
With 802.1X port-based authentication, the devices in the network have specific roles. (See  
below figure).  
z
z
Supplicant—Requests access to the LAN and switch services and responds to requests from the  
switch. The workstation must be running 802.1X-compliant software.  
Authentication server—performs the actual authentication of the host. The authentication server  
validates the identity of the host and notifies the DSLAM whether or not the host is authorized to  
access the LAN and DSLAM services. Because the DSLAM acts as the proxy, the authentication  
service is transparent to the host. In this release, the Remote Authentication Dial-In User Service  
(RADIUS) security system with Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) extensions is the only  
supported authentication server; it is available in Cisco Secure Access Control Server version 3.0.  
RADIUS operates in a client/server model in which secure authentication information is exchanged  
between the RADIUS server and one or more RADIUS clients.  
z
z
DSLAM (Authenticator)—Controls the physical access to the network that is based on the  
authentication status of the host. The DSLAM acts as an intermediary (proxy) between the host and  
the authentication server, requesting identity information from the host, verifying information with the  
authentication server, and relaying a response to the host. The DSLAM interacts with the RADIUS  
client. The RADIUS client encapsulates and decapsulates the EAP frames and interacts with the  
authentication server.  
When the DSLAM receives Extensible Authentication Protocol over LAN (EAPOL) frames and  
relays them to the authentication server, the Ethernet header is stripped and the remaining EAP  
frame is reencapsulated in the RADIUS format. The EAP frames are not modified or examined  
during encapsulation, and the authentication server must support EAP within the native frame  
format. When the DSLAM receives the frames from the authentication server, the server's frame  
header is removed, leaving the EAP frame, which is then encapsulated for Ethernet and sent to the  
host.  
IP DSLAM  
701  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Authenticcation Initiation and Message Exchange  
The host initiate authentication by sending an EAPOL-start frame, which prompts the  
DSLAM to request the host's identity.  
When the host supplies its identity, the DSLAM acts as the intermediary, pass EAP frames  
between the host and the authentication server until authentication succeeds or fails. If the  
authentication succeeds, the DSLAM port becomes authorized.  
The specific exchange of EAP frames depends on the authentication method that is being  
used. The below fiugre shows a message exchange that is initiated by the host using the  
One-Time-Password (OTP) authentication method with a RADIUS server.  
IDL series User Guide  
702  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
802.1X CLI commands  
Specifying RADIUS Servers  
To specify one or more RADIUS servers, perform this task in privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Step 1 Specify the IP address of up to three RADIUS  
servers. Specify the primary server using the  
create radius server  
ip_addr [acct-port  
primary keyword. Optionally, specify the destination port_number] [primary]  
UDP port to use on the server.  
Step 2 Verify the RADIUS server configuration.  
get radius  
Specifying the RADIUS Key  
Use the RADIUS key to encrypt and authenticate all communication between the  
RADIUS client and server. You must configure the same key on the client and the  
RADIUS server.  
The length of the key is limited to 65 characters. It can include any printable ASCII  
characters except tabs.  
To specify the RADIUS key, perform this task in privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Step 1 Specify the RADIUS key that is used to encrypt  
packets that are sent to the RADIUS server.  
create radius key key  
Step 2 Verify the RADIUS configuration.  
get radius  
Configuring 802.1X Authentication  
The following sections describe how to configure 802.1X authentication on the switch.  
IP DSLAM  
703  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enabling 802.1X globally  
You must enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system.  
To globally enable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Globally enable 802.1X.  
create dot1x system-auth-control enable  
Disabling 802.1X globally  
When you enable 802.1X authentication for the entire system, you can disable it  
globally.  
To globally disable 802.1X authentication, perform this task in privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Globally disable 802.1X.  
Create dot1x system-auth-control disable  
Enabling and Initializing 802.1X Authentication Individual Ports  
After you enable 802.1X authentication globally, you can enable and initialize  
802.1X authentication from the console only for individual ports.  
To enable and initialize 802.1X authentication for access to the switch, perform this  
task in privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Step 1 Enable 802.1X control on a specific port. create port dot1x mod/port  
port-control auto  
Step 2 Initialize 802.1X on the same port.  
Step 3 Verify the 802.1X configuration.  
Create port dot1x mod/port initialize  
get port dot1x mod/port  
IDL series User Guide  
704  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Enabling Multiple Hosts  
You can enable a specific port to allow multiple users. When a port is enabled for  
multiple users, and a host that is connected to that port is authorized successfully,  
any host (with any MAC address) is allowed to send and receive traffic on that port.  
If you connect multiple hosts to that port through a hub, you can reduce the  
security level on that port.  
To enable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in  
privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Enable multiple hosts on a specific port.  
create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host enable  
Disabling Multiple Hosts  
You must disable access for multiple users on any port where it is enabled.  
To disable access for multiple users on a specific port, perform this task in  
privileged mode:  
Task  
Command  
Disable multiple hosts on a specific port. create port dot1x mod/port multiple-host disable  
802.1X Protocol over IP DSLAM  
In 802.1x application, the IP DSLAM acts as the pure Ethernet packets transport  
system. The 802.1x packets pass through the IP DSLAM without further operation  
(see below figure)  
IP DSLAM  
705  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
Appendix D --- What’s IP DSLAM  
DSLAM and IP DSLAM in PPPoE application sample.  
As above Figure displays, in traditional ATM-based ADSL network, the user application  
information is encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC (Virtual  
Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link. (In this example,  
the user information (PPPoE encapsulated) is encapsulated by ATU-R using RFC-1483  
Bridge-mode encapsulation format.).  
All the ATM cells belong to the specified VC is concentrated by the DSLAM, and switched in  
the ATM network clouds, to the defined destination (ISPs or Offices), at there the ATM cells  
and PPPoE frames is resolved by the Broadband Access Server, and the user application  
information is serviced.  
IDL series User Guide  
706  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  
 
In addition to traditional ATM-based ADSL network. As above Figure displays, the user  
application information is still encapsulated by ADSL CPE into ATM cells in pre-defined VC  
(Virtual Channel, PVC), and then upstream the ATM cells to DSLAM via ADSL link.  
In the IP DSLAM, all the ATM cells belong to the specified VC are decapsulated back to the  
original PPPoE encapsulated Ethernet packet (if VLAN-mode of the specified ADSL port is  
disabled), or mapped to the pre-defined Ethernet-VLAN packets (if VLAN-mode of the  
specified ADSL port is enabled). IP DSLAM concentrates all Ethernet-with/without  
VLAN-tag packets from 24/48 ports’ ADSL and uplinks to ISP’s Ethernet-All-The-Way  
network. The PPPoE frames will be resolved at Broadband Access Server (BAS), and the  
user application information was serviced.  
The IP DSLAM supports ADSL CPE Bridge-mode. For future FW upgrade, the IP DSLAM  
can act as BRAS to process user application information directly.  
IP DSLAM provides Ethernet-with/without VLAN tag to ATM-PVC mapping feature for the  
ISP to isolate user’s data with security and to provide lots of service enhancement  
capabilities. IP DSLAM supports 8 ATM PVC links for each CPE.  
IP DSLAM  
707  
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.  

Pentax Digital Camera QD2V2214BE DN User Manual
Philips CD Player AZ8051 User Manual
Philips CRT Television 14PT1686V User Manual
Philips DVD Player BDP5406 User Manual
Philips Indoor Furnishings 41620 48 16 User Manual
Philips Speaker System DS3800W 10 User Manual
Pioneer Car Stereo System DEH 2150UB User Manual
Pioneer CD Player DRM 1004 User Manual
Pioneer Computer Drive DVR 108 User Manual
Praktica Digital Camera D00394 User Manual